GOVERNMENT OF THE PUNJAB

COMMUNICATION & WORKS DEPARTMENT

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
EXECUTION OF BUILDING WORKS
Updated: March 2006

DRAFT

PUNJAB BUILDINGS DEPARTMENT,

LAHORE
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

SPECIFICATION FOR
EXECUTION OF BUILDING WORKS

PAGE
SECTION DESCRIPTION
NO.
25 CARRIAGE OF MATERIAL 223
26 STEEL WINDOWS/DOORS 225
27 EARTH WORK 258
27-1 GENERAL 258
27-2 EXCAVATION 261
27-3 EARTH FILLING 268
28 TERMITE TREATMENT 270
28-1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TREATMENT 270
28-2 ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT OF 272
EXISTING BUILDINGS
29 DISMANTLING 274
29-1 SCREENS 274
29-2 UNDER-PINNING 277
29-3 SHORING 279
30 CEMENT CONCRETE 280
30-1 GENERAL 280
30-2 CLASSES OF CONCRETE 338
30-3 MATERIALS 340
30-4 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE 342
30-5 MANUFACTURE OF CONCRETE 345
30-6 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM 349
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
30-7 FORM WORK 352
30-8 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE 354
30-9 COVER OVER REINFORCEMENT 359
30-10 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 360
30-11 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 362
30-12 FINISHING PLASTIC CONCRETE 366
30-13 CURING CONCRETE 370
30-14 FINISHING FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES 373
30-15 PRE-CAST CONCRETE MEMBERS 376
30-16 MOULDED CEMENT CONCRETE ARTICLES 379
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

PAGE
SECTION DESCRIPTION
NO.
30-17 MORTAR AND GROUT 382
30-18 APPLICATION OF LOADS 384
30-19 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 385
31 REINFORCING STEEL 386
32 BRICK WORK 390
32-1 GENERAL 390
32-2 BRICK WORK 1ST CLASS 398
32-3 BRICK WORK 2ND CLASS 399
32-4 BRICK WORK IN ARCHES 400
32-5 CORBELLING 403
32-6 COPING 404
32-7 WINDOW SILLS 405
32-8 CORNICES 406
32-9 STRING COURSES 407
32-10 EAVE BRICK WORK 408
32-11 DRIP COURSE 409
32-12 BRICK WORK IN REIMBURSEMENT TO DRAIN 410
32-13 BRICK WORK IN TEGA TO DRAIN 412
33 STONE 413
33-1 STONE MASONRY (GENERAL) 413
33-2 DIMENSION STONE (DRESSING AND CUTTING) 426
33-3 ASHLAR MASONRY 428
33-3(A) ASHLAR FINE 428
33-3(B) ROUGH TOOLED OR BASTARD ASHLAR 430
33-3(C) ROCK RUSTIC OR QUARRY FACED 431
ASHLAR MASONRY
33-4 ASHLAR FACING 432
33-5 ASHLAR BLOCK IN COURSE MASONRY 434
33-6 ASHLAR BLOCK IN COURSE FACING 436
33-7 COPING, CORNICES AND COLUMNS 438
33-8 COURSE RUBBLE MASONRY (1ST CLASS) 440
33-9 COURSE RUBBLE MASONRY (2ND CLASS) 442
33-10 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY 444
33-11 DRY RUBBLE MASONRY 446
33-12 STONE MASONRY IN ARCHES 448
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

PAGE
SECTION DESCRIPTION
NO.
34 ROOFING 451
34-1 FIRST CLASS TILES ROOFING 455
34-2 SECOND CLASS TILES ROOFING 459
34-3 JACK ARCH ROOFING 460
34-4 JACK ARCH ROOFING 464
(SPRUNG FROM TOP OF BEAMS)
34-5 JACK ARCH ROOFING 465
(FOR CARING FLOORING OF THE ROOM)
34-6 GALVANIZED CORRUGATED STEEL 466
SHEET ROOFING
34-7 CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT 469
SHEET ROOFING
34-8 “KHURRAS” “PERNALAS” AND SPOUTS 472
34-9 GUTTERS AND FLASHINGS 474
34-10 TREATMENT OF ROOF SLAB 476
34-11 THERMAL INSULATION OF R.C.C. ROOF 478
35 FLOORING 488
35-1 MUD FLOORING 491
35-2 BASE FOR FLOORING 492
35-3 BRICK OR TILE FLOORING 494
35-4 FLAGSTONE FLOORING 497
35-5 MARBLE FLOORING 500
35-6 GLAZED TILE FLOORING 503
35-7 MOSAIC TILE FLOORING 506
35-8 CONGLOMERATE FLOORING 509
(CEMENT CONCRETE SINGLE COAT)
35-9 CONGLOMERATE FLOORING (TWO COAT) 511
35-10 TERRAZO FLOORING 513
35-11 DRY BRICK PAVING 516
35-12 WOODEN FLOORING 517
36 SURFACE RENDERING 526
36-1 GENERAL DEFECTS IN PLASTER AND 526
THEIR REMEDIES
36-2 CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING 529
36-3 LIME-CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING 532
36-4 COLOURED CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING 534
36-5 COLOURED LIME PLASTERING 536
36-6 MUD PLASTER 538
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

PAGE
SECTION DESCRIPTION
NO.
36-7 GYPSUM PLASTER 540
36-8 POINTING 551
36-9 WHITEWASHING 555
36-10 CEMENT WASH 557
36-11 COLOUR WASHING 559
36-12 VINYL EMULSION 561
36-13 PLASTIC EMULSION 563
37 WOOD WORK 567
37-1 GENERAL 567
37-2 DOORS AND WINDOWS (GENERAL) 581
37-3 PANELLED AND GLAZED DOORS AND WINDOWS 586
37-4 FRAMED AND BRACED DOORS AND WINDOWS 589
37-5 LEDGED AND BRACED DOORS AND WINDOWS 591
37-6 LEDGED DOORS AND WINDOWS 593
37-7 CLERESTORY WINDOWS 595
37-8 WIRE GAUZED DOORS 597
37-9 WIRE GAUZED WINDOWS 599
37-10 WIRE GAUZED CLERESTORY WINDOWS 600
37-11 FIXED WIRE GAUZED 601
37-12 GLAZING 602
38 PAINTING AND VARNISHING 623
38-1 GENERAL 623
38-2 PAINTING NEW WOOD WORK 633
38-3 REPAINTING WOOD WORK 636
38-4 VARNISHING 639
38-5 WAX POLISHING 641
38-6 FRENCH POLISHING 644
38-7 PAINTING WOOD WORK WITH SOLIGNUM 646
OR CREOSOTE ON COAL TAR
38-8 PAINTING IRON WORK ABOVE WATER 648
38-9 PAINTING IRON WORK WHICH REMAINS 650
UNDER WATER
39 CLADDING 652
39-1 BRICK CLADDING 652
39-2 WASH TERRAZZO 654
39-3 PORCELAIN/CERAMIC TILE CLADDING 656
39-4 CAST STONE CLADDING 658
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

PAGE
SECTION DESCRIPTION
NO.
40 FALSE CEILING 659
40-1 GENERAL 659
40-2 FALSE CEILING WITH THERMOPORE SHEET 661
40-3 FALSE CEILING WITH GYPSUM BOARD 663
40-4 FALSE CEILING WITH PLASTER OF PARIS 664
40-5 FALSE CEILING WITH M.D.F. BOARD 665
41 DAMP PROOF COURSE (D.P.C.) 666
41-1 CEMENT CONCRETE DPC 666
41-2 DPC OF CEMENT SAND PLASTER 668
41-3 MARBLE DPC 670
41-4 JUTOID (JUTE BASED) DPC 672
42 ALUMINUM ALLOY WINDOWS 673
43 WALLCOVERING/ARCHITECTURE COATING 678
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–25

CARRIAGE OF MATERIALS

25-1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified or directed in writing by the Engineer In-
charge, carriage of all materials between stations connected by rail
shall be done only by the railway goods train and all rules and
regulations in force in the Railway Department in this regard, shall
hold good. Other means of transport shall be allowed only when:
(i) The goods train is not available within the stipulated period. In
this case a certificate shall have to be recorded by the Engineer
in-charge.
(ii) The railway track is not in order for a certain reason and is
expected to take a considerable time before it is put in order.
(iii) The material to be transported is perishable, and the goods train
takes a considerably longer time than the road transport, and
thus does not ensure a safe transportation.
(iv) Any other unforeseen calamity, which in the opinion of the
Engineer in-charge is so pressing as to make carriage by road
essential.

25-2 SAFE DELIVERY

Whatsoever may be the mode of transport (except goods train) the
agency undertaking the carriage of material shall be responsible for its
safe loading, unloading, delivery to the specified site within the
specified time and stacking, unless it is damaged as a result of a
calamity beyond the control of that agency.

25-3 STOCKING
The material carted shall be properly stacked at the specified site to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in-charge or his authorized subordinate.

25-4 CART, ANIMAL DRIVEN AND BOAT OR

STEAMER TRANSPORT
When carts, animal driven or mechanical means of transports are
engaged for carriage on a daily wage basis, the quantity of material to
be conveyed, the distance to be travelled and the number of trips to be
made, shall be fixed by the Engineer in-charge or his authorized
subordinate.

223
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

25-5 MEASUREMENT
Carriage shall be contracted for by weight or by volume at a mileage,
kilometre or chainage rate or a fixed rate between specified places. In
the former case the distance shall be measured by the nearest
practicable route, and the miles kilometres and chains measured shall
be statute miles kilometres/chains.

25-6 RATE
(i) The unit rate shall include loading of material within one chain,
carriage to a specified site, unloading and stacking, as per
above specifications, within a distance of one chain from the
site of unloading.
(ii) If the lead for loading, unloading and stacking exceeds one
chain the payment for additional carriage shall be made whole
of the distance and not starting from the second chain.
(iii) In case of works where item rates include the handling of
material up to three chains distance, any extra carriage involved
beyond this distance of three chains shall be payable for whole
of the distance and not for the 4th and subsequent chains only.
This does not alter the procedure of carriage at the carriage
rates for subsequent miles beyond prescribed limits.

224
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–26

STEEL WINDOWS/DOORS

26-1 DESCRIPTION
This section of specifications covers materials, construction, sizes,
finishes and hardware for steel windows and doors for buildings.

26-2 GLOSSARY
Accessory An essential fixing or glazing component or material or
weather bar, not attached at the factory.
Casement A window, or that part of a window, which open on
hinges or pivots. A casement door is hinged at the side.
Composite An assembly two or more units coupled together by
one or more mullions or transoms.
Coordinating A plane by reference to which a building component or
plan assembly is coordinated with another.
Coordinating A space bounded by coordinating plans allocated to a
space building component or assembly, including allowance
for joints and tolerances.
Coordinating 1. A dimension of a coordinating space.
dimension 2. A dimension which is common to two or more
building components to permit their assembly.
Coordinating The size of a coordinating dimension (length or height
size of a coordinating space).
Basic space A space bounded by reference plans assigned to
received a building component or assembly, including
allowance for joints and tolerances.
Work size The size of a building component specified for its
manufacture, to which its actual size should conform
within specified permissible deviations.
Manufacturing A size within the specified permissible deviations from
size a work size.
Tolerance The difference between the limits within which a size
or position should lie.
Deviation The difference between a size or position (actual, limit,
etc) and a specified size or position.
Margin The distance between the joints face of a building
component and the joint reference plane.
Mullion A vertical bar for coupling units side by side.
Transom A horizontal bar for coupling units one above the other.
Unit A four-sided frame which may be a fixed light or a
casement or a combination of both. Each unit in this
standard has an individual code reference.

225
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

26-3 GENERAL
26-3.1 Windows and doors shall comply with the elevations and sizes shown
in Figs.3 to 6 (page 235 to 238). All shall have glazing rebates 12.7mm
deep for outside glazing. Lungs and/or screws necessary for fixing
shall be provided.
26-3.2 Casements and doors shall open outwards except for bottom-hung
casements and the upper halves of reversible casements which shall
open inwards.
26-3.3 Casements shall be supplied complete with the hinges and fittings
attached as specified in 26-9, 26-10 and 26-11. Casements shall be
fitted to their frame so as to provide face contact all round allowing for
the thickness of normal site painting. The fittings shall be properly
checked and adjusted by the manufacturer so that the casements can be
operated correctly. Casements and doors shall be secured in the closed
position before dispatch.

26-4 ROLLED STEEL SECTIONS

Windows and doors shall be manufactured from uniform rolled steel
sections from ‘test guaranteed’ quality steel which, when tested as
described in British Standard BS:18, has a tensile strength of 355-400
N/mm2. The steel shall be rolled in bars of the cross sections, sizes and
weights shown in Fig:16 (page 256, 257), the sizes being subject to the
tolerances given. The bars shall be cold straightened, free from rolling
defects and suitable for punching and welding.

26-5 CONSTRUCTION
26-5.1 Windows and doors (and their constituent parts) covered by this British
Standard shall be made solely of steel except where other materials are
stated in this specification. Typical elevations and details of windows
and doors, both single and composite, are shown in Fig. 7 to 11 (page
239 to 248).
26-5.2 Windows and doors shall be constructed of bars which have been cut
to length and mitred. All corners shall be welded solid to form right
angles and all frames shall be square and flat. Subject to manufacturing
tolerances.
26-5.3 Internal bars shall be tenoned and riveted to the outer frames and to
each other.
26-5.4 Windows and doors may have holes in the webs of the bars other than
those required in manufacture and for fixing.
26-5.5 Handle plates, stay pegs, brackets and stay rests shall be of steel.
26-5.6 Windows and doors shall have glazing rebates 12.7mm deep for
outside glazing. Lugs and/or screws necessary for fixing shall be
provided.
26-5.7 Casements and doors shall open outwards except for bottom-hung
casements and the upper halves of reversible casements which shall
open inwards.

226
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

26-5.8 Casements shall be supplied complete with the hinges and fittings
attached as specified in 7,8 and 9. Casements shall be fitted to their
frame so as to provide face contact all round allowing for the thickness
of normal site painting. The fittings shall be properly checked and
adjusted by the manufacturer so that the casements can be operated
correctly. Casements and doors shall be secured in the closed position
before dispatch.

26-6 SIZE AND TOLERANCES

26-6.1 Where both sizes are quoted, length is given before height.

26-6.2 COORDINATING SIZES

The coordinating sizes of windows and doors, shall be as shown in Fig.
3 to 6 (page 235 to 238).

26-6.3 WORK SIZES

Each work size shall be 6 mm less than the corresponding coordinating
size.

26-6.4 TOLERANCES
The tolerance upon a work size shall be 3 mm.

26-6.5 DEVIATIONS
The maximum permissible manufacturing deviation shall be + 1.5mm.

26-6.6 MANUFACTURING SIZES

The maximum manufacturing size shall be work size plus 1.5mm and
the minimum manufacturing size shall be work size minus 1.5mm.

26-7 COMPOSITES
26-7.1 GENERAL
26-7.1.1 Coupling
Coupling to form composites shall be by screws and nuts through the
fixing holes of the units and corresponding holes in the mullions and
transoms see Fig. 15 (page 254, 255). Minimum fixings shall be in
accordance with the positions. Mastic, screws and nuts sufficient for
these purposes shall be supplied by the window manufacturer.
26-7.1.2 Transport
At the discretion of the manufacturer, composites or parts of
composites may be assembled in the works before dispatch. In any
such assembly there shall be:
(a) No single item assembled with a coordinating size greater than
2400 mm x 1800 mm or 2700 mm x 1200 mm.
(b) Not more than two mullions spanning the full height nor more
than two transoms spanning the full length.

227
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) Not more than one reversible casement.

J filler panels shall be dispatched loose.
26-7.1.3 Site Work
The contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) Completing the assembly of composites using mastic and
screws and nuts.
(b) Pointing with mastic any joints in the composites which have
been assembled in the manufacturer’s works, where the original
mastic has been displaced during transit.

26-7.2 MULLIONS AND FILLER PANELS

Mullions shall be of the following types:
(a) K11 or K11X sections as shown in Fig: 16 (page 256, 257)
(b) J filler panels as shown in Fig: 12 (page 249).
(c) JB filler panels as shown in Fig: 12 (page 249).
The overall thickness of JB filler panels may be increased if the height
of the assembly exceeds 1500 mm, or to meet any horizontal loading,
particularly that due to wind. These mullions and filler panels are not
designed to carry vertical loads.

26-7.3 TRANSOMS
26-7.3.1 Transom section are shown in Fig: 16 (page 256, 257). Generally the
transom bar shall be of section K12. The mullion section K11 may be
supplied as a transom above a fixed light not exceeding 1200 mm long.
26-7.3.2 In composite up to a maximum coordinating size of 2400 mm long
where both mullions K11 and transoms K12 occur, the transom section
K12 shall be continuous across the full length of the assembly.

26-7.4 COORDINATING SIZES

Composites fit coordinating spaces, which are usually basic space, and
provide similar margins within the spaces as if they were individual
units.

26-7.5 WORK SIZES

26-7.5.1 Length
The work size of the length of a composite shall be the sum of the
work sizes of the units plus 6mm for each mullion plus 106mm for
each J or JB filler panel when used.
26-7.5.2 Height
The work size of the height of a composite shall be the sum of the
work sizes of the units plus 6 mm for each transom.
Note. There are limits to the sizes to which composite windows may be made using J
or K coupling members, the stresses in which are related to wind loads. For all
composites these stresses should be fully investigated and established in teach case; if
necessary, advice should be obtained from the window manufacturer.

228
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

26-8 J AND JB FILLER PANELS

26-8.1 J filler panels and the internal covers used to form JB filler panels shall
be made from pre-galvanized steel sheet complying with BS 2989, not
thinner than 1.5 mm, to designs shown in Fig: 12 (page 249).
26-8.2 J and JB filler panels shall have fixing holes in the positions shown for
Mullions in Fig: 15 (page 254, 255).
26-8.3 The internal covers of JB filler panels shall be riveted or screwed to the
J filler panel by the manufacturer, or sent separately for fitting by the
fixing contractor. The top and bottom of the internal covers shall be
formed to provide stop ends.

26-9 HINGES AND PIVOTS

26-9.1 GENERAL
Hinges for side-hung and top-hung casements and doors shall be made
of steel and welded or riveted to the frames. Hinge pins shall be either
rust-proofed steel or aluminium alloy conforming to British Standard
BS:1475.

26-9.2 HINGES FOR SIDE-HUNG CASEMENTS

Side-hung casements shall be fitted with projecting friction hinges,
adjusted by the window manufacturer at his works to require a force of
25 N on the handle to move the casement. The hinges shall be capable
of being adjust in situ, and the ends of the pins shall be riveted over to
inhibit removal of the adjusting nut.
When the casement is open to 90o the distance between the casement
and frame shall be not less than 95mm measured.

26-9.3 HINGES FOR DOORS

Each leaf shall be hung on friction or non-friction, self-aligning, non-
projecting hinges as shown in Fig: 11 (page 245 to 248).

26-9.4 PIVOTS FOR REVERSIBLE CASEMENTS

The pivots shall be steel friction pivots and shall hold the casement in
any position up to the length of the safety arm and thereafter restrain it
while being reversed.

26-10 HARDWARE FOR CASEMENTS

26-10.1 GENERAL
Alternative materials and finishes for the manufacture of handles and
stays are.
(a) Hot pressed brass complying with BS 2872, CZ 122, barreled
finish.

229
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(b) Hot pressed brass complying with BS 2872, CZ 122, nickel

chromium plated complying withBS 1224, Service Condition
No. 3.
(c) Zinc alloy complying with BS 1004 A, nickel chromium plated
complying with BS 1224, Service Condition No. 3.
(d) Aluminium alloy complying with BS 1472, (NF4 or HF9); BS
1474, (NE4 or HE9); BS 1490, (LM4 or LM5); anodized to BS
1615, Grade AA10..
Stays and handles shall be detachable and replaceable without
disturbing the glass.

26-10.2 SIDE-HUNG CASEMENTS

Side-hung casements shall have a lever handle providing limited or
‘crack’ ventilation by engaging with a beveled striking plate or keep on
the fixed frame. The striking plate shall be fixed in such a position in
relation to the handle that, with the latter bearing against its stop, it
shall hold the casement tight to its frame when closed.

26-10.3 TOP-HUNG CASEMENTS

Top-hung casements shall be provided with and operated by a stay
which shall hold the casement tight to its frame when closed.

26-10.4 REVERSIBLE HORIZONTALLY PIVOTED CASEMENTS

Reversible casements shall be provided with a safety device to limit
the initial opening of the casement, which shall be capable of being
released by hand to reverse the window. There shall be another
automatic device to hold the casement safely in the reversed position.
There shall be a lever handle at the sill and a storm catch (for hand or
pole operation) at the head.

26-11 HARDWARE FOR DOORS

26-11.1 GENERAL
Alternative materials and finishes for the manufacture of handles, bolts
and turn buckles are:
(a) Hot pressed brass complying with BS 2872, CZ 122, barreled
finish.
(b) Hot pressed brass complying with BS 2872, CZ 122, nickel
chromium plated complying withBS 1224, Service Condition
No. 3.
(c) Zinc alloy complying with BS 1004 A, nickel chromium plated
complying with BS 1224, Service Condition No. 3.
(d) Aluminium alloy complying with BS 1472, (NF4 or HF9); BS
1474, (NE4 or HE9); BS 1490, (LM4 or LM5); anodized to BS
1615, Grade AA10.
(e) Cast leaded gunmetal complying with BS 1400-LG2-C,
barreled and satin finish, nickel chromium plated complying
with BS 1224, Service Condition No. 3.

230
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Each door shall be provided with one lock, one pair of lever handles
and two face-operated bolts or turn buckles. Double doors shall also
have two concealed bolts. Each leaf shall be provided with a concealed
head stay to limit opening to 90o, except where friction hinges are
fitted.

26-11.2 LOCKS
26-11.2.1 Each single door and the first opening leaf (the left hand leaf looking
from the outside) of each double door, shall be fitted with a mortice
lock which can be locked by a loose key from both the inside and
outside. The lock shall be housed inside the steel panel.\
26-11.2.2 Each lock shall have nylon bushes, brass bolts and at least four brass
levers and phosphor bronze springs. The lock bolts shall have a
minimum throw of 12 mm. Key holes shall be covered by escutcheons.
The forend and the striking plate shall be of zinc alloy complying with
BS 1004-A. The locks shall be made with 150 differs arranged on the
levers without the use of wards, so that skeleton keys cannot be
produced to operate more than one differ. Lock spindles shall be of
steel, zinc plated complying with BS 1706 Classification No. Zn10 and
passivated.
26-11.2.3 Two steel keys, nickel-plated complying with BS:1224 Classification
No. Fe/Ni 10b (or p or d) shall be supplied for each lock.

26-11.3 DOOR BOLTS

26-11.3.1 Single doors shall have face-operated bolts or turn buckles at top and
bottom.
26-11.3.2 Double doors shall have the first opening leaf (the left hand leaf
looking from the outside) fitted with face-operated bolts or turn
buckles at top and bottom and the other leaf fitted with concealed bolts
at top and bottom.
26-11.3.3 Bolts or turn buckles shall be of solid pressed brass complying with the
requirements of BS 2872 or other equally suitable non-ferrous metal or
non-corrodible material.

26-12 LOCK PANELS AND KICKING PANELS

Doors and side-lights shall be provided with lock panels and kicking
panels. Lock panels shall be fabricated from pre-galvanized steel sheet
(minimum thickness 1.00 mm) complying with BS 2989. kicking
panels shall be fabricated from pre-galvanized steel sheet (minimum
thickness 0.80 mm) complying with BS 2989 or extruded aluminium
alloy complying with BS 2989or extruded aluminium alloy complying
with BS 1474, HE9TE mill finish. Lock panels and kicking panels
shall be welded, riveted or screwed to the frames. Typical details are
shown in Fig:11 (page 245 to 248).

231
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

26-13 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

26-13.1 GENERAL
All windows and doors and, where specified in steel, their handle
plates, hinges, stay pags, brackets, stay rests and keeps, and rolled steel
coupling members shall be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, to
comply with BS 729, Part 1.

26-13.2 KICKING PANELS, LOCK PANELS, J AND JB FILLER

PANELS AND WEATHER BARS
Kicking panels, lock panels, J and JB filler panels and weather bars
made from pregalvanized steel sheet shall, on any areas where the
galvanized finish has been disturbed during the manufacturing process,
be protected by one full coat of calcium plumbate priming paint
complying with BS 3698, Type B, zinc-rich priming paint, or other
suitable anti-corrosion priming paint.

26-13.3 SMALL FERROUSCOMPONENT

Small ferrous components including lugs, hinge pins, washers, handle
pins, lock spindles, coupling screws and nuts, fixing screws and side
arms shall be finished by one of the following methods.
(a) Hot-dip galvanizing comply with BS 729, Part 1.
(b) Sherardizing complying with BS 729, Part 2.
(c) Zinc plating complying with BS 1706, Classification No. Zn3.

26-13.4 PRE-TREATMENT
Manufacturers shall indicate if windows and doors are prepared for site
painting by any treatment at works after galvanizing.

26-14 FIXINGS FOR WINDOWS AND DOORS

26-14.1 Outer frames shall have countersunk holes situated centrally in the
webs of the sections in the positions shown in Fig.15 (page 254, 255).
Theses are the only holes to be used for fixing or coupling.
26-14.2 Fixing lugs and fixing screws for windows and doors shall be supplied
for the positions shown in Fig. 14 (page 252, 253). Typical fixing
details are shown in Fig.13 (page 250, 251).
26-14.3 Clips for securing the opening leaves of doors in transit should only be
removed temporarily for site fixing and should then be replaced until
the doors are glazed.

26-15 WEATHER BARS

26-15.1 Weather bars shall be made from pre-galvanized steel sheet or
extruded aluminium alloy complying with BS 1474, (HE9M) mill
finish or rigid PVC.

232
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

26-15.2 Where a top-hung casement occurs over a side-hung casement within a

units, a weather bar shall be fixed to the bottom bar of the top-hung
casement. This weather bar may be fitted at the factory or supplied
separately and fitted by the contractor on site. A typical detail is shon
in Fig.7 (page 239 to 241).

26-16 GLAZING
All frames to receive glass shall have holes for spring wire glazing
clips or glazing cleats in accordance with the requirements of CP 152.
Cleats shall be supplied by the window manufacturer if specified, but
spring wire glazing clips, setting blocks and distance pieces shall be
supplied by the glazing contractor. To obviate the use of excessive
putty in certain bar sections, the manufacturer shall securely fix a
blocking piece of inert of insert material in these section as shon at (6)
in Fig.7 (page 239 to 241). Glass sizes are listed in British Standard BS
990:Part-2:1972 Appendix B.

26-17 WEATHER-STRIPPING
26-17.1 Reversible horizontally pivoted casements shall be weatherstripped
with chloroprene rubber (CR) to comply with BS 4255, Part 1, class C.
26-17.2 Side-hung, top-hung and bottom-hung casements shall be supplied
weatherstripped if so ordered. For this weatherstripping the
manufacturer may use either CR, or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) to
comply with BS 2571.
26-17.3 Weatherstripping shall be securely fixed by the manufacturer to
provide a continuous contact between the opening casement and the
fixed frame.
Note. It is recommended that weatherstripping should not be painted.

26-18 MEASUREMENT
Payment for doors and windows will be made by measuring clear
opening area in brickwork or concrete in square feet/meters.

26-19 RATE
Rates for all the items under this Section shall cover the cost of
furnishing all the materials, labour, scaffoldings and performing all
operations in connection with their installation in accordance with
instructions. It is particularly mentioned that the rates for fixing doors
and windows etc. shall include fixing of all finished hardware iron
mongery fittings such as locks, peg stays, handles, push plates, kicking
plates, door-closers, glazing, flexible compounds, rubber lining and
appliances at site and performing all operations in accordance with the
drawings and specifications.

233
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

234
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

235
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

236
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

237
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

238
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

239
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

240
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

241
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

242
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

243
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

244
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

245
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

246
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

247
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

248
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

249
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

250
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

251
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

252
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

253
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

254
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

255
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

256
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

257
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–27

EARTHWORK

27-1 GENERAL

27-1.1 DESCRIPTION
All excavations and earthwork shall be performed and executed in
accordance with stipulations (specifications) and requirements set forth
here which shall apply except when they are specifically modified in
writing by the Engineer-in-charge for any particular item. The method
of carrying out earthwork shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer in-charge in writing.

27-1.2 GLOSSARY
Borrow-pits A wall provided at the downstream and/or up stream
extremity of a sluice or regulator to prevent the
undermining of the sub-soil by scour, piping, or
floatation.
Cover The minimum thickness or height of earth required
anywhere over a specified level or line measured
vertically or horizontally, as the case may be. The
cover over hydraulic gradient line or saturation line
is measured vertically.
Embankment The earth work above natural ground by deposition
of specified materials.
Lead The shortest possible horizontal route between the
Horizontal centre of gravity of the material excavated and the
centre of gravity of the material finally placed in the
building.
Lead-Total The horizontal lead as defined above plus the lift
converted into horizontal lead, if any.
Lead-Vertical The vertical difference between the centre of gravity
of the earth excavated and the centre of gravity of the
earth placed in the building.
Soil Sediments, or other unconsolidated accumulation of
solid particles produced by the physical and chemical
disintegration of rocks, and which may or may not
contain organic matter.

27-1.3 AUTHORIZED OUTLINES

Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge in
writing all earthwork viz excavations, holes, trenches for foundations,
filling etc, shall be executed to the widths, length, depths, alignments,

258
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

grades and levels shown on the approved drawings. If they are not
indicated on the drawing, they shall be carried out to the profile agreed
to by the Engineer in-charge in writing before the commencement of
work.

27-1.4 SITE CLEARANCE

The surface area of the ground to be occupied by the proposed
buildings shall be cleared off roots, grass, shrubs, brush, trees, fences,
walls, buildings, roads, ruins and such other structures as may either
cause hindrance in the execution of work or may decay and form
dangerous pockets. Such works can be classified beforehand into
following categories by the Engineer in-charge for the purpose of
making payment.
(a) Stripping of grass, uprooting bush stumps having girth and
roots less than 3 feet and diameter less than six inches and their
number not exceeding 200 per acre. The cost of this item is
included in the unit rate of earthwork.
(b) Jungle clearance – Removal of roots, bush stumps, shrubs, trees
and jungle. The Engineer in-charge shall decide, on the basis of
the actual sizes and concentration of such material, whether rate
for ordinary jungle clearance or heavy jungle clearance is to be
paid. His decision shall be final.
(c) Demolition of fences, walls, buildings, roads and other
structures shall be paid according to the relevant item under the
chapter “Dismantling”. The rates for these works shall clearly
state:
i) The disposal of materials obtained during the operation
of site clearance.
ii) Whether or not, it shall be a “set off” against the cost of
site clearance. In the absence of such clarifications the
materials shall be the property of government.
iii) That any damage to the works and public or private
property caused by the contractor’s operation in
clearing shall be repaired or replaced at his expense.

27-1.5 DATUM
Any bench mark, which is to be used for the work, shall be correctly
related to the datum specified on the approved drawing or fixed by the
Engineer in-charge and the contractor shall make and maintain at his
own cost all such permanent bench marks required for the proper
execution of works in the vicinity thereof, in perfect order to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge.

27-1.6 SETTING OUT

Before commencing actual execution the central line of the excavation
shall be distinctly marked with a deep furrow (dagbel) at least 9 inch

259
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

wide and 6 inches deep and pegs shall be fixed at every centre line. In
the case of the excavation of foundation, the centre, longitudinal or
face line and at least one main cross line, shall be marked by means of
masonry pillars built clear of the point to which the slopes of the
excavation shall extend. On each pillar, there shall be an accurate mark
to enable a surveying instrument to be set up over it for setting out
purposes.

260
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

27-2 EXCAVATION

27-2.1 DESCRIPTION
All excavations shall be done in accordance with the provisions of this
section and to the lines and grades shown on the approved drawings or
as directed in writing by the Engineer in-charge. During the progress of
work, if it is considered necessary or desirable by the Engineer in-
charge to vary the dimensions of the excavation from those shown on
the drawings or specified, he shall get the dimensions revised by the
competent authority and communicate the change in writing to the
contractor. The contractor shall perform the work and make
excavations according to the revised dimensions as communicated by
the Engineer in-charge.

27-2.2 EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION

(a) The bottom and side slopes of excavation, upon or against
which structures or other required constructions are to be
placed, shall be finished accurately to the required grades and
dimensions, and if required by the Engineer in-charge, shall be
moistened with water and tamped or rolled with suitable tools
or equipment for the purpose of forming a firm foundation.
Whenever the natural foundation material is disturbed or
loosened or excavated beyond the approved lines and grades,
the loose material shall be removed and the extra excavation
made good at contractor’s expense with selected material which
shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping or rolling in layers
not exceeding 6 inches. If at any point in the excavation,
material unsuitable for foundation is encountered, as
determined by the Engineer in-charge, he shall direct in writing
its removal and excavation shall be filled with selected
materials thoroughly compacted by tamping or rolling in layers
not exceeding 6 inches. The cost of this replacement with
selected materials shall be paid under the rate for earthwork
compacted.
(b) When a safe and solid foundation cannot be obtained at the
depth shown on the approved drawings, special measures (to be
determined in all cases by the Engineer in-charge) may be
taken under a special agreement reached beforehand.
(c) No excavated earth shall be heaped within 20 feet of the top
edge of any foundation.
(d) Foundation trenches shall be inspected and approved by the
engineer-in-charge before foundation is laid.
(e) All excavations shall be kept free from water from whatever
source it may come at all times to the entire satisfaction of the
engineer-in-charge except where otherwise specified or

261
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

permitted in writing by him. The surface water if and when

accumulated shall be dried by the contractor at his own cost. As
for the subsoil flow water, separate item of
dewatering/lowering of water table should be provided and paid
for. All swamps, drainage channels, etc., when no longer
required, shall be filled in with concrete or other suitable
material to the satisfaction of the engineer in-charge.

27-2.3 SHORING FOR FOUNDATION

(a) The contractor shall provide all timbering, steel sheet piles, or
other approved supports, and shore the side of excavation,
trenches, pits and walls, in such a manner as will be sufficient
to secure them from falling and prevent any movement.
(b) Shoring shall consist of frames of vertical and walling pieces
supported by struts. These shall hold the laggings in position
against the sides of the excavation. Laggings shall be further
secured by wedges driven firmly down between the frame and
the laggings. Scantling shall vary according to the foundation
and their sizes shall be fixed by the engineer-in-charge. Struts
and frames shall be secured together by iron dogs and bolts,
where necessary. In the case of deep foundation, additional
vertical uprights shall be attached to the walling by iron dogs.
(c) Excavation shall proceed as follows:
When the sides of excavation show signs of caving in, the first
frame and the first set of short-laggings shall be put in. The
laggings shall be long enough to stand about 4 feet out of the
ground. Wedges shall be driven in and excavation proceeded
with. As excavation proceeds, two men on the top and two men
below shall drive down each lagging separately, after drawing
the wedges. When each lagging has been driven down as for as
it can go, the wedge shall be replaced and the next lagging
driven down in the same way …… and so on. If the soil is dug
away from under each lagging, the latter shall drop down in
most cases without the aid of a mallet. Laggings shall be kept
plumb and touching each other, otherwise it would be difficult
to get the next frame in. When excavation has reached the full
length of laggings, they shall be drawn out cautiously one by
one, and the longer ones shall be put in or a fresh row driven
inside the others. Excavation may then go down to the depth
required, the frames being put in at least every 5 feet vertically.
When concrete or masonry work is in progress, the process
shall be reversed; the laggings shall be prized up one by one
and the frames withdrawn as masonry is raised up.
(d) Any cheap wood, cut in 6 inches or 7 inches planks, 1½ inch to
2 inch thick, shall be used for lagging. The frame shall,
however, be of sound wood that does not warp.

262
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

27-2.4 EXCAVATED MATERIAL

(a) All suitable materials obtained from excavation shall be used in
filling. Wherever practicable, all materials shall be placed in
the designated final locations direct from excavation, except
that the backfill material, when so directed by the engineer-in-
charge, shall be placed in temporary stock piles and later placed
in the designated locations. As far as practicable, as determined
by the engineer-in-charge, all materials designated for use in
compacted embankments and plinth shall have the proper water
content either by sprinkling or other suitable means before and
during excavation or after placing.
(b) All fill or refill around structures i.e. within the slops and limits
of the established lines for excavation for the structures and
below the natural surface level, shall be placed as backfill or
compacted backfill; and all fill or refill about structures i.e.
above the natural surface level shall be placed as embankments
or compacted embankments, except as otherwise specifically
shown on the drawings or provided in these specifications.
(c) If sufficient suitable materials are not available from the
required excavations to construct the embankment, backfill and
other earthwork construction shown on the approved drawings
or directed in writing by the Engineer-in-charge, suitable
materials shall be transported from the nearest location.
(d) Excavated materials containing stumps, roots, vegetable matter
and other objectionable material that are otherwise unsuitable
or not required for backfill, roads or in any other permanent
construction required under these specifications, shall be
disposed of as directed in writing by the Engineer-in-charge.
(e) Materials of any kind such as shingle or hard good quality
stone, obtained from excavation, as also any find made on the
site such as antique, relics, coins, fossiles, etc shall remain the
property of the government. The rate includes the separation of
the aforementioned materials and finds from each other and
their depositing, as directed by the engineer-in-charge. Any of
these materials, if ordered by the engineer-in-charge to be used
by the contractor on the works, shall be charged to him at the
rates to be agreed upon between engineer-in-charge and the
contractor before the materials are used.

27-2.5 FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS, FOOTING,

PIPES UNDER FLOORS ETC.
After the foundation structural works within excavations have been
inspected and approved by the engineer-in-charge excavations shall be
refilled with selected material, taken from excavation, if so authorized
by the engineer-in-charge duly compacted in layers not exceeding 6" in
thickness to the density 90% of max dry density as per AASHTO T-
180(D). Material shall be placed with care around pipes to avoid
damage. When the superstructure of a building is higher than the plinth

263
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

level, the plinth area shall be filled in with excavated material if

approved by the engineer-in-charge. 6" layers duly compacted as
mentioned above or with any other selected material as may be
specified, for which extra payment shall be made.

27-2.6 DEALING WITH BAD SOIL ETC

A soil that the engineer-in-charge may deem unsuitable shall be
removed from the surface to be covered by the backfill. This earth
shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and shall be
measured up and paid for separately. If the Engineer-in-charge directs
the removal of any unsuitable material its measurement shall be taken
first and recorded in the measurement book.

27-2.7 CLASSIFICATION OF
EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Excavation shall be classified under the following heads for recording
measurement and making payment:
(a) Soft soil. It includes all cutting in sand, silt and those soils,
which offer no resistance to excavation and sometimes require
shoring when foundation (of buildings etc) of exact dimensions
is required to be excavated since they have small angle of
repose.
(b) Ordinary soil. It includes all cutting in earth which can be
ploughed, irrespective of the fact whether picks or “phawarahs”
have been used in the actual excavation. Usually it includes:-
i) Spoil or rubbish of every description.
ii) Earth and sandy loam.
iii) Any other formation into which a spade can be entered
and can be easily excavated by the application of kassi,
pick or shovel.
(c) Hard soil. There are the following two types of hard soil:
i) It includes stiff and heavy clay soil having specific
gravity of 1.5 and above, which can be dug with
repeated blows of kassi or pick axe.
ii) Soil having small percentage, say up to 15% of
kankar or boulders which can be easily dug and
removed along with the soil.
(d) Very hard soil. The following types of soil fall under this
definition:
i) It includes hard moorum with high percentage of kankar
(more than 15%) or boulder (less than 20%), which can
be individually lifted by hand.
ii) Mud concrete.
iii) Conglomerate formation, shale lime concrete,
brickwork in lime and stone masonry in lime.
iv) Metalled surface of the road (tarred or untarred).
v) Hard core under floor and road bottoming.

264
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

vi) Any other formation into which a spade cannot enter

and the excavation of which requires the forcible
application of a pick.
(e) Gravel work and rock not requiring blasting this includes:
i) Gravel formation, cement concrete, brickwork in
cement mortar.
ii) Large boulders above 20 per cent which can be
individually lifted by hand.
iii) Soft varieties of limestone, sandstone or fissured stone
or any other formation which can be excavated by use
of picks, jumpers, shovels, wedges, hammers, etc, and
do not require blasting.
(f) Rock requiring blasting. This includes hard stratified rock, like
compact, hard limestone, hard sandstone or un-fissured and un-
stratified masses like granite and basalt (trap), etc or similar
formation for the excavation of which blasting is required since
they cannot be excavated by jumpers, wedges, hammers, picks
etc.
Rocks falling under this class can be further sub-classified into 6
grades. These grades shall be determined as follows:
Grade I A party of two men working with a jumper bar 1¼"
diameter and hammer miner 7 lbs shall be able to make
a trial bore hole 3 feet deep in 4 hours or less.
Grade II to VI For every hour taken in making this trial bore over 4
hours a higher rate shall be payable up to 9 hours form
which grade VI shall be paid irrespective of the type of
explosive used.
Note I. The engineer-in-charge shall make the above classifications
of soil and rock. In case of dispute between the engineer-in-charge and
the contractor, the classification shall be finally decided by the
Superintending Engineer. The decision shall be binding on both the
parties. The engineer-in-charge shall also be responsible for deciding
on the percentage of each classification to be applied in the case of
mixed up soils or rocks. The engineer-in-charge shall certify in writing
that he has decided on the classification of rock on the basis of
experimental bore holes made in his presence.
Note II Blasting shall not be performed without the prior written
permission of the engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall check all
necessary precautions for the safety of person and property etc as
required by the engineer-in-charge and shall obey all instructions as
may be issued by the Engineer in-charge.
(g) Rock requiring blasting but blasting prohibited.
This includes all as No. (vi) above, where blasting is prohibited
by the engineer-in-charge. Blasting is prohibited when it is
apprehended that it may cause harm to important buildings or
other works located nearby. In that case other methods such as
cutting out by means of chisel or wedges, pneumatic concrete
breakers, sledge hammers and heavy points are normally
adopted.

265
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(h) Wet. A soil shall be classified as wet when on being taken in a

piece of cloth and pressed by hand, wets the cloth.
(i) Wet (slush). Wet soil when so composed that it cannot support
the weight of labourer working into the pit and excavated
material sticks to the implements used for digging, shall be
classed as slush and paid accordingly.

27-2.8 MEASUREMENT
27-2.8.1 QUANTITY OF WORK
Excavation shall be done as per authorized outlines mentioned in
Section 27-1.3 of these specifications. The exact quantum of earthwork
shall be ascertained by taking measurements of excavation from which
the material has been taken out and not of the resultant spoil and
converted to solid measurement by multiplying it with factors
mentioned below for soil and rocks. The unit of measurement shall be
100 cubic feet.

27-2.8.2 LEAD AND LIFT

Unless otherwise specified lead and lift shall have the following
meanings:
(a) Lift (horizontal). It shall mean the shortest possible horizontal
route between the centre of the material excavated and the
centre of the material finally placed in the building.
(b) Lead (vertical). It shall mean the vertical difference between
the centre of gravity of the earth excavated and the centre of
gravity of the earth placed in the building.
(c) Conversion lift in horizontal lead. The lift shall be converted
into horizontal lead with the aid of table-1 (page 267).
(d) Total lead. Total lead or lead shall mean the horizontal lead as
defined above plus the lift converted into horizontal lead, if
any.

27-2.9 RATE
The unit rate shall be full compensation for all costs to comply the
provision of above specifications. A special rate shall be settled and
paid for the following items of works:
(a) For cutting down, removing and digging out roots of all trees
(not shrubs, grass etc) of 2 feet girth. Measurement of girth
shall be taken 5 feet above ground level. Rate shall be fixed for
each tree. Trees shall be counted and marked before removal.
This work may be done departmentally if thought necessary by
the engineer-in-charge.
(b) Special material such as sand, or selected earth, brought from
the other source than retrieved from the excavation.

266
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Table No. 1
Conversion
In the case of earthwork measurement where extra lead is to be paid
for lift the method will be as follows: The lift will be measured from
the centre of gravity of the excavated earth to that of placed earth. This
will constitute the mean lift. The equivalent leads for various mean lifts
are given below:
Equivalent Horizontal
Lift in feet Conversion factor
lead in feet
1 1' lift 8' lead 8
2 1' lift 8' lead 16
3 1' lift 8' lead 24
4 1' lift 8' lead 32
5 1' lift 10' lead 50
6 1' lift 10' lead 60
7 1' lift 10' lead 70
8 1' lift 10' lead 80
9 1' lift 11' lead 99
10 1' lift 12' lead 120
11 1' lift 13' lead 143
12 1' lift 14' lead 168
13 1' lift 15' lead 195
14 1' lift 16' lead 224
15 1' lift 17' lead 255
16 1' lift 18' lead 288
17 1' lift 19' lead 323
18 1' lift 20' lead 360
19 1' lift 21' lead 399
20 1' lift 22' lead 440
21 1' lift 23' lead 483
22 1' lift 24' lead 528
23 1' lift 25' lead 575
24 1' lift 26' lead 624
25 1' lift 27' lead 675
26 1' lift 27' lead 702
27 1' lift 27' lead 729
28 1’ lift 27’ lead 756
29 1' lift 27' lead 783
30 1' lift 27' lead 810
These conversion factors also incorporate allowance for extra lead due
to cross lead with a view to ensuring a uniform system. The equivalent
lead will be added to the horizontal lead to get the total lead to be paid
for. The exact site or R.Ds between which extra lead is to be given
must be recorded in the first column of detailed measurements in the
measurement book.

267
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

27-3 EARTH FILLING

27-3.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of filling earth in accordance with these
specifications and in conformity with the level and dimensions shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer Incharge.

27-3.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Material for filling such as common soil, gravel, soft or hard rock shall
consist of suitable material obtained from structural excavation, or
borrow excavation as approved by the Engineer Incharge. Borrow
material however, shall only be used when there is no suitable material
available from structural excavation.

27-3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

27-3.3.1 COMMON MATERIAL
27-3.3.1.1 Material for filling obtained and approved as provided above, shall be
placed in horizontal layers of uniform thickness and in conformity with
the level and dimensions shown on the drawings or as required by the
Engineer Incharge. The layers of loose material other than rock shall
be not more than 20 cm (8 inch) thick. The material placed in filling to
the designated depth shall be compacted to 90% of maximum dry
density as determined by AASHTO T-180*.
Note. *Method “B” or “D” of AASHTO-T-180 whichever is applicable may be
adopted.
27-3.3.1.2 In place density determinations of the compacted layers shall be made
in accordance with AASHTO T191 (Sand Cone Method) or other
approved methods. For all soils with the exception of rock fill
materials, containing more than 10% oversize particles (retained on
19mm (3/4 inch sieve), the in-l-7*+place density thus obtained shall be
adjusted to account for such oversize particles as directed by the
Engineer Incharge. Subsequent layers shall not be placed and
compacted unless the previous layer has been properly compacted to
desired standards and accepted by the Engineer Incharge.
27-3.3.1.3 Material for filling at points inaccessible to normal compaction
equipment shall be placed in horizontal layers of loose material not
more than 18 centimeters (7") thick and compacted to the densities
specified above by the use of mechanical tampers, or other appropriate
equipment.
27-3.3.1.4 The compaction of the filling shall be carried out at the optimum
moisture content consistent with the available compacting equipment.
The contractor shall take steps to ensure that the work can be drained
free of rain water, and he shall make due allowance in the height and
width of the work for swelling or shrinkage.

268
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

27-3.3.1.5 Filling material that does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain the
required compaction shall be given additional moisture by means of
approved sprinklers and mixing. Material containing more than the
amount of moisture necessary to obtain the required compaction may
not, without written approval of the Engineer Incharge be incorporated
in the filling until it has been sufficiently dried out.
27-3.3.1.6 When materials of widely divergent characteristics, such as clay and
chalk or sand, drawn from different source are to be used in the filling,
these shall be deposited in different layers (with individual layer of the
same material) and sequence of material to be laid as approved by the
Engineer Incharge. Lumps of clay or other similar material shall be
broken down, and no accumulation of lumps or boulders in the filling
with be permitted.

27-3.4 MEASUREMENT
The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters or
thousands of cubic feet in the volume of filling compacted to desired
densities in place, accepted by the engineer incharge made with
material resulting from:
1. Borrow Area
2. Structural Excavation.
Material from Structural Excavation, as defined in section 27-2 which
is placed in the Filling and accepted by the Engineer Incharge will be
paid for under pay item No. 27-3.6.3 or 27-3.6.4 as the case may be,
and such payments will be deemed to include all costs in connection
with this material in constructing the embankment.

27-3.5 RATE
The unit rate shall be full compensation for all costs of complying with
the provisions of this section regarding filling, in accordance with
Drawings and as directed in writing by the Engineer-in-charge.

269
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–28

TERMITE CONTROL

28-1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TREATMENT

28-1.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of pre-construction termite treatment through
treatment of soil beneath the building and around the foundation with
termicides in accordance to these specifications.

28-1.2 MATERIALS
28-1.2.1 TERMICIDES
Termicides shall conform to specifications as approved by the
Departmental Committee for already working for enlistment and pre-
qualification of manufacturer for building components, fixtures,
fittings and other allied services.

28-1.2.2 WATER
It shall conform to Section 1 of these specifications.

28-1.3 TREATMENT
28-1.3.1 TREATMENT OF FOUNDATION
Bottom surface and sides of the excavation shall be treated with the
termicide solution through uniform spray with power sprayer at the
rate of 4-litre per m2/10.76 ft2. The preparation of solution i.e. ratio of
termicide and water shall as recommended by the manufacturers of
termicide.

28-1.3.2 TREATMENT OF TOP SURFACE

The top surface of the sub-grade prepared for laying flooring shall be
treated by spraying termicide solution with power sprayer at the rate of
4 liter per sq.m/10.76 Sft surface.

28-1.3.3 OUTSIDE BARRIER

When the construction of the building is complete out parameter of the
building shall be treated at the rate of 4 liters solution in a hole made
with iron rod a foot apart.

270
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

28-1.3.4 PRECAUTIONS
28-1.3.4.1 Laying of lean concrete should start when the termicide solution is
absorbed by the soil and surface is quite dry.
28-1.3.4.2 Treatment shall not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is
wet with rain or sub-soil water.
28-1.3.4.3 Once formed, treated soil barrier should not be disturbed.

28-1.4 MEASUREMENT
The work shall be measured as surface area treated separately in the
following stages.
a) Foundation stage.
Treated surface area shall be worked out by multiplying the
sectional perimeter of excavation made for foundation with the
length of excavation.
b) Floor area of the building.
c) Out side barrier.
External perimeter of the building multiplied by 5 ft.

28-1.5 RATE
28-1.5.1 LABOUR RATE
This shall include.
a) Preparation of solution of termicide and water.
b) Application of solution with power spray machine which also
includes, operation charges of spray machine i.e. Hire charges
POL lubricant and crew.
c) Drilling of hole for outside barrier.
d) Injection of termicide solution in the holes.
e) Tempting of earth after creation of outside barrier.

28-1.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It shall include the cost of termicide solution prepared from the
termicide emulsions as mentioned in section 28-1.5.2 and labour rate
as detailed in section 28-1.5.1.

271
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

28-2 ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT OF EXISTING

BUILDINGS

28-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consist of treatment of buildings to control subterranean
termite attack in accordance to these specifications.

28-2.2 MATERIALS
28-2.2.1 TERMICIDES
It shall conform to Section 28-1.2.1 of these specifications.
28-2.2.2 WATER
It shall conform to Section 1 of these specifications.

28-2.3 TREATMENT REQUIREMENT

28-2.3.1 Prior to the treatment a thorough inspection should be made of the
infestation in the building. This would help to assess the extent to
which termite is spread and its entry routs into the building. After
studying the infestation of termites in the building, it is work to
exterminate the termites located in the buildings. It should be done in
thorough manner. Termite hid out such as, ceiling, behind wooden
paneling, electric wooden battens, conducts, switch board and similar
locations should be thoroughly searched.
28-2.3.2 To create a barrier between the termite in soil and building, the soil
adjacent to building should be treated with termicide solution. The soil
in contact with external wall of the building should be treated with
termicide at the rate 7.5 liter per sq. meter of the vertical surface of the
sub-structure to the depth of not less than 300 mm. To facilitate this
treatment a shallow channel should be excavated along and close to the
wall face. Termicide solution should be directed towards the wall at
1.75 liter per running meter of the channel. Rodding with 12 mm
diameter mild steel rod at 150 mm apart should be done int eh channel
for uniform dispersion of termicide solution to 300 mm depth from the
ground level. Termicide solution 0.5 liter per running mater should be
used to back fill earth as it is refilled into the trench directing the spray
towards the wall surface. In case there is a plinth protection around the
building 12 mm holes should be drilled as close as possible to the
plinth toe wall at intervals of 300 mm deep enough to reach the soil
below and termicide solution pumped in to these holes to soak the soil
below at the rate of 2.25 liter/linear meter.
28-2.3.3 The above mode of treatment is applied to masonry foundations. For
RCC foundations, the soil (backfill earth) in contact with the column
sides and plinth beams along the external perimeter of the building
should be treated with Termicide solution at the rate of 7.5
liter/sq.metre of the vertical surface of the structure. To facilitate this
treatment, trenches should be excavated equal to the width of a shovel,

272
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

exposing the sides of the column and plinth beams up to a depth of 300
mm, or up to the bottom of the plinth beams, if this level is less than
300 mm. The Termicide solution should be sprayed on the backfill
earth, as it is refilled into the trench, directing the spray against the
concrete surface of the beam or column as the case may be. If there is a
concrete or masonry apron around the building, approximately 12 mm
diameter holes are drilled to the plinth wall about 300 mm apart, deep
enough to reach the soil below and the chemical emulsion pumped into
these holes to soak the soil below and the chemical emulsion pumped
into theses holes to soak the soil below at a rate of 2.25 liter/linear
meter. 12 to 15 mm diameter hole shall be drilled at the junctions of
floors and walls at 300 mm interval to depth of 375 mm to reach the
soil underneath the floor.
28-2.3.4 Termicide solution should be injected in to the holes using power
operated pressure pump at the rate 4 liter/hole. Holes should then be
sealed with matching coloured cement. The movement of termite
through masonry walls should be restricted by drilling holes in the
masonry walls at the plinth level. The holes should be drilled at a
downward angle of 45 degree preferably on both side of plinth wall
approximately at 300 mm intervals. The Termicide solution should be
injected, holes to holes in the masonry using a pressure pump. The
holes should also be drilled at critical points such as wall corners and
the points where door and windows are erected. The Termicide
solution should be injected to the holes till refusal or to maximum of 1
liter/hole. The treated holes then be sealed.
28-2.3.5 All existing woodwork in the building in contact with the floor and
walls and which is invested by termite should be treated at the points
of contact with adjoining masonry, with the Termicide solution. The
holes of 6 mm diameter should be drilled downward angle 45 degree at
the junction of woodwork and masonry. Termicide solution should be
ejected into these holes upto a ½ liter per hole. The treated hole should
then be sealed. If the wood work is not already painted/varnished two
coats of temicide should be given on all surface and crevices adjoining
the masonry. Cover of the electrical switch boxes should be removed
and inside of such boxes should be treated with termicides dist.
Refixing of switch boxes covers should be done after termide treatment
of switch boxes.

28-2.4 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured as plinth area of the building treated. Its unit shall
be Sft.

28-2.5 RATE
The rate shall include for full compensation for the cost of the
termicide dirlling, pumping/injection of termicides sealing the treated
holes with cement sand slurry of matching colour, cleaning the floor to
the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charges.

273
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–29

DISMANTLING
29-1 SCREENS

29-1.1 SCREENS
If specified or directed by the Engineer-in charge, the contractor shall
provide, erect and remove screens of canvas or other suitable material
to minimize the nuisance from dust and shall provide for watering as
the work of demolition proceeds.

29-1.2 DIVISION OF SERVICE

The existing services such as electric supply, telephone connection,
water supply, drainage, etc. shall be diverted according to the
directions and to the satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge.

29-1.3 INVENTORY OF SERVICEABLE

MATERIALS
Before taking the work of demolition in hand, an inventory of all
serviceable materials for which special care is to be exercised in
demolition, handling or lowering down shall be made and the list shall
be checked and duly approved by the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative.

29-1.4 DAMAGE
(i) The contractor shall be responsible for carrying out dismantling
operations strictly in accordance with the specifications or
directions of the Engineer-in-charge, with appropriate tools and
in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary damage or injury to
other adjoining work, and those parts of work which are to be
retained, and to render unserviceable as little of the material as
possible.
(ii) The contractor shall, if specified or directed by the Engineer-in-
charge, make good any damage to work caused during
demolition and shall protect as far as possible all trees, shrubs,
etc., near the work.

274
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

29-1.5 SEWERS AND DRAINS

The contractor shall at once remove all foul matter, if sewers or drains
are to be removed or disturbed. The rate for removing pipes does not
include excavation or the demolition of any masonry or brickwork; all
the works shall be paid for separately, according to their respective
rate.

29-1.6 SHORING OR UNDER–PINNING

Unless otherwise stipulated or specified, no allowance shall be made
for shoring or under-pinning.

29-1.7 LOWERING
Trusses, R. S. beams, battens, purlins, sheets, tiles, boards, wooden
frames, water supply and electric fittings and all material liable to be
damaged by dropping from a height, shall be lowered down to the
ground by means of rope or another approved appliance. If any
serviceable article is damaged or broken on account of the negligence
of the contractor he shall have to pay to the department the current
market rates for the acticle.

29-1.8 DOORS & WINDOWS

Doors and windows shall be removed from the chowkats along with
their hinges before dismantling the later and shall be carefully carried
and stacked where directed by the engineer-in-charge.

29-1.9 SHORTING STACKING & DISPOSAL

(i) Unless otherwise specified, all demolished materials shall be
considered the property of Government and shall be disposed
of as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The rate of an item
shall always include the sorting out of any demolished material,
its stacking any where within 300 feet of the place of
demolition and its safe custody till it is handed over to the
department in accordance with the directions of the engineer-
in-charge.
(ii) When so specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge, the
contractor shall completely remove the whole or part of the
dismantled material from the site of work and realize such
profits as he can by disposing it of by a method approved in
writing by the Engineer-in-charge. In such cases no payment
shall be made to the contractor for dismantling this material.

275
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

29-1.10 MEASUREMENT
Dismantling (Demolition) shall be measured by bulk, surface area or
linear dimensions depending upon the article to be dismantled. The
units of measurement shall be 100 cu.ft/cu.m, 100 sq.ft./sq.m or 1 Rft.

29-1.11 RATE
(i) The unit rate for demolition shall include dismantling of
material, its careful lowering to the ground, sorting out and
stacking within 300 feet of the site of demolition, in accordance
with the above specifications.
(ii) The rates for dismantling roofs or upper storey floors include
the dismantling of all materials, except roof supports such as
beams and trusses.

276
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

29-2 UNDER-PINNING

29-2.1 LENGTHS
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge, the
underpinning shall be executed in lengths not exceeding 5 feet at a
time and all operations shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge. No under-pinning shall be done simultaneously at
a distance less than 6 feet apart.

29-2.2 UNDERPINNING OF ADJOINING

FOUNDATIONS
Where the foundations of new walls are below the level of the
foundations of existing walls of adjoining premises, necessary
excavation shall be made and underpinning done from the level of the
bottom of new foundations up to the underside of foundations of old
walls, to the full thickness of the wall. Unless otherwise specified or
directed by the Engineer-in-charge, under-pinning shall be done in
cement concrete 1:3:6 or brickwork first class in 1:3 cement sand
mortar.

29-2.3 PLANKING AND STRUTTING

Planking and strutting shall be provided to side of excavation in
underpinning and across trenches if directed by the engineer-in-charge
with out any additional charge.

29-2.4 CUTTING OF PROJECTING FOUNDATION

IN OLD WALLS ETC
The projecting footings and concrete foundations on outside of the old
walls to be underpinned shall be cut away back to the face of wall.

29-2.5 WEDGING
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the engineer-in-charge, the
top of new underpinning shall be wedged and pinned up to the under
side of old concrete foundations, when required, with cement sand
mortar 1:3 mixed fairly dry and well-rammed.

277
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

29-2.6 TEMPORARY SHUTTERING TO CONCRETE

Temporary shuttering shall be provided to vertical face of concrete
foundation to the depth of under-pinning and the same shall be
removed when no longer required.

29-2.7 TIMBERING, SHORING ETC.

Timbering, needling, shoring etc., shall be provided and fixed to ensure
the safety of adjoining walls while under-pinning, where specified or
directed by the Engineer-in-charge, and, on completion, all disturbed
areas shall be cleared and made good.

29-2.8 MEASUREMENTS
Measurement shall be made of each operation involved in under-
pinning according to the relevant items of work. The unit of
measurement shall be the same as of the relevant items.

29-2.9 RATE
The unit rate shall include underpinning as per above specifications
and carriage of materials to the site of work as in case of relevant items
of work.

278
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

29-3 SHORING

29-3.1 USE
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the engineer-in-charge, all
walls, floors, roofs, partitions of building on the site or adjoining the
works shall be secured by means of shoring to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-charge, and on completion of the work or when
directed by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative the
shoring shall be removed and the area left in good order.

29-3.2 REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise specified, the shoring shall generally consist of dogs
hoop iron, hooks, shores or rakers, sloe pieces, wall pieces or plates,
braces, struts, needles, cleat, wedges and posts. The wooden
components when used shall be of properly seasoned Shisham, except
for rakers and struts which shall be of Sal, free from defects, unless
otherwise specified.

29-3.3 RAKING SHORES

The raking shores shall be provided at an angle of 400 to 700 to the
building and each set of shores shall be 10 to 15 feet apart or as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge, the
number of shores provided in each set and the size of rakers shall be as
followings:

279
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–30

CEMENT CONCRETE
30-1 GENERAL

30-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing placing, finishing and curing
concrete in structures in accordance with these specifications and
conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the plans.
The work includes elements of structures constructed by cast-in-place
and precast methods using either plain (unreinforced), reinforced, or
prestressed concrete or any combination thereof.

30-1.2 GLOSSARY
The following definitions apply to cement & concrete:
Abrasion Wearing away of a surface by rubbing and friction.
damage
Abrasion Ability of a surface to resist being worn away by
resistance rubbing and friction.
Absolute Ratio of the mass of a given volume of a solid or liquid
specific gravity at a stated temperature to the mass of an equal volume
of gas-free distilled water at a stated temperature.
Absolute In the case of solids, the displacement volume of
volume particles themselves, including their permeable and
impermeable voids, but excluding space between
particles; in the case of fluids, their volume.
Absorbed Moisture that has entered a solid by absorption and has
moisture physical properties not substantially different from
ordinary water at the same temperature and pressure.
Absorption The process by which a liquid is drawn into and tends
to fill permeable pores in a porous solid; also the
increase in mass of a porous solid resulting from the
penetration of a liquid into its permeable pores.
Accelerator A substance which, when added to concrete, mortar, or
grout, increases the rate of hydration of the hydraulic
cement, shortens the time of setting, or increases the
rate of hardening, strength development, or both.
Adhesion The state in which two surfaces are held together by
interfacial effects which may consist of molecular
forces, interlock action, or both.
Adhesives The group of materials used to join or bond similar or
dissimilar materials; for example, in concrete work, the
epoxy resins.

280
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Adjustment A levelling device or jack composed of a threaded

screw screw and an adjusting handle; used for the vertical
adjustment of shoring and formwork.
Admixture A material other than water, aggregates, hydraulic
cement, and fiber reinforcement, used as an ingredient
of concrete or mortar, and added to the batch
immediately before or during its mixing.
Admixture, An admixture that causes an increase in the rate of
accelerating hydration of the hydraulic cement, and thus shortens
the time of setting, or increases the rate of strength
development, or both.
Admixture, An admixture that causes the development of a system
air-entraining of microscopic air bubbles in concrete, mortar, or
cement paste during mixing.
Admixture, Admixture that causes a decrease in the rate of
retarding hydration of the hydraulic cement, and lengthens the
time of setting.
Admixture, An admixture that either increases slump of freshly
water-reducing mixed mortar or concrete without increasing water
content or maintains slump within a reduced amount of
water, the effect being due the factors other than air
entrainment.
Admixture, A water reducing admixture capable of producing large
water-reducing water reduction or great flowability without causing
(high range) undue set retardation or entrainment of air in mortar or
concrete.
Absorbed Water held on surfaces of a material by electrochemical
water forces and having physical properties substantially
different from those of absorbed water or chemically
combined water at the same temperature and pressure.
Adsorption Development (at the surface of either a liquid or solid)
of a higher concentration of a substance than exists in
the bulk of the medium; especially formation of one or
more layers of moleculeds of gases, of dissolved
substances, or of liquids at the surface of a solid (such
as cement, cement paste, or aggregates), or of air-
entraining agents at the air-water interfaces; also the
process by which a substance is adsorbed.
Agent A general term for a material that may be used either as
an addition to cement or an admixture in concrete, e.g.,
an air-entraining agent.
Aggregate Granular material, such as sand, gravel, crushed stone,
crushed hydraulic-cement concrete, or iron blast-
furnace slag, used with a hydraulic-cementing medium
to produce either concrete or mortar.
Aggregate, Aggregate predominantly retained on the 4.75mm
coarse (No.4) sieve or that portion retained on the 4.75mm
(No.4) sieve.
Aggregate, Aggregate that has been mechanically broken and has
crusher-run not been subjected to subsequent screening.

281
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Aggregate, Aggregates graded to produce low void content and

dense-graded maximum weight when compacted.
Aggregate, fine Aggregate passing the 9.5mm (3/8") sieve and almost
entirely passing the 4.75mm (No.4) sieve and
predominantly retained on the 75-µm (No.200) sieve;
or that portion passing the 4.75mm (No.4) sieve and
predominantly retained on the 75-µm (No.200) sieve.
Aggregate, Aggregate so graded that certain intermediate sizes are
gap-graded substantially absent.
Aggregate, Aggregate of high density, such as barite, magnetite,
heavyweight hematite, limonite, iron, or steel, used in heavy weight
concrete.
Aggregate, Aggregate of low density, such as (a) expanded or
lightweight sintered clay, shale, slate, diatomaceous shale, perlite,
vermiculite, or slag (b) natural pumice, scoria, volcanic
cinders, tuff, and diatomite, (c) sintered fly ash or
industrial cinders, used in lightweight concrete.
Aggregate, Aggregate that is neither heavyweight nor lightweight.
normal weight
Aggregate, Aggregate in which the voids are relatively large when
open-graded the aggregate is compacted.
Aggregate, Aggregate containing substances capable of reacting
reactive chemically with the products of solution or hydration
of the Portland cement in concrete or mortar under
ordinary conditions of exposure, resulting in some
cases in harmful expansion, cracking, or staining.
Aggregate, Aggregate having refractory properties which, when
refractory bound together into a conglomerate mass by a matrix,
forms a refractory body.
Aggregate, Aggregate in which a major portion of the particles are
single-sized in a narrow size range.
Aggregate, Aggregate having a particle size distribution that
well-graded produces maximum density, i.e., minimum void space.
Aggregate The process of intermixing two or more aggregates to
blending produce a different set of properties; generally, but not
exclusively, to improve grading.
Aggregate The effect of portions of aggregate particles from one
interlock side of a joint or crack in concrete protruding into
recesses in the other side of the joint or crack so as to
transfer load in shear, and maintain alignment.
Agitator A device for maintaining plasticity and preventing
segregation of mixed concrete by agitation.
Aids, grinding Materials used to expedite the process of grinding by
eliminating ball coating or by dispersing the finely
ground product, or both.
Air, accidental Air voids in concrete which are not purposely entrained
and which are significantly larger and less useful than
those of entrained air, 1mm or larger in size.
Air content The volume of air voids in cement paste, mortar, or
concrete, exclusive of pore space in aggregate particles,

282
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

usually expressed as a percentage of total volume of

the paste, mortar, or concrete.
Air entraining The capability of a material or process to develop a
system of minute bubbles of air in cement paste,
mortar, or concrete during mixing.
Air-entraining An addition for hydraulic cement; also an admixture
agent for concrete or mortar which causes entrained air to be
incorporated in the concrete or mortar during mixing,
usually to increase its workability and frost resistance.
Air- A procedure for measuring the fineness of powder
permeability materials usch as Portland cement.
test
Air void A space in cement paste, mortar, or concrete filled with
air; an entrapped air void is characteristically 1mm or
more in size and irregular in shape; an entrained air
void is typically between 10 µm and 1mm in diameter
and spherical or nearly so.
Alkali Salts of alkali metals, principally sodium and
potassium; specially sodium and potassium occurring
in constituents of concrete and mortar, usually
expressed in chemical analyses as the oxides Na 2 O and
K 2 O.
Alkali- Chemical reaction in either mortar or concrete between
aggregate alkalies (sodium and potassium) from Portland cement
reaction or other sources and certain constituents of some
aggregates; under certain conditions, deleterious
expansion of concrete or mortar may result.
Alkali- The reaction between the alkalies (sodium and
carbonate rock potassium) in Portland cement and certain carbonate
reaction rocks, particularly calcitic dolomite and dolomitic
limestones, present in some aggregates; the products of
the reaction may cause abnormal expansion and
cracking of concrete in service.
Alkali Susceptibility of aggregate to alkali-aggregate reaction.
reactivity (of
aggregate)
Alkali-silica The reaction between the alkalies (sodium and
reaction potassium) in Portland cement and certain siliceous
rocks or minerals, such as opaline chert, strained
quartz, and acidic volcanic glass, present in some
aggregates; the products of the reaction may cause
abnormal expansion and cracking of concrete in
service.
Allowable load The ultimate load divided by factor of safety.
Allowable Maximum permissible stress used in design of
stress members of a structure and based on a factor of safety
against rupture or yielding of any type.
Alumina Aluminium oxide (Al 2 O 3 ).
Amount of The designation of extent of mixer action employed in
mixing combining the ingredients for either concrete or mortar;

283
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

in the case of stationary mixers, the mixing time; in the

case of truck mixers, the number of revolutions of the
drum at mixing speed after the intermingling of the
cement with water and aggregate.
Anchor In prestressed concrete, to lock the stressed tendon in
position so that it will retain stressed condition in
precast concrete construction, to attach the precast units
to the building frame; in slabs on grade or walls, to
fasten to rock or adjacent structures to prevent
movement of the slab or wall with respect to the
foundation, adjacent structure, or rock.
Anchor bolt A metal bolt or stud, headed or threaded, either cast in
place, grouted in place, or drilled into finished
concrete, used to hold various structural members or
embedments in the concrete, and to resist shear,
tension, and vibration loading from various sources
such as wind, machine vibration etc; known also as a
hold-down bolt or a foundation bolt.
Anchorage In post-tensioning, a device used to anchor the tendon
to the concrete member; in pretensioning, a device used
to maintain the elongation of a tendon during the time
interval between stressing and release; in precast
concrete construction, the devices for attaching precast
units to the building frame; in slab or wall construction,
the device used to anchor the slab or wall to the
foundation, rock, or adjacent structure.
Anchorage The bar forces divided by the product of the bar
bond stress perimeter or perimeters and the embedment length.
Anchorage The loss of elongation or stress in the tendons of
deformation or prestressed concrete due to the deformation or seating
seating of the anchorage when the prestressing force is
transferred from the jack to the anchorage; known also
as anchorage loss.
Anchorage In post-tensioning, the region adjacent to the anchorage
zone subjected to secondary stresses resulting from the
distribution of the prestressing force; in pretensioning,
the region in which the transfer bond stresses are
developed.
Angular Aggregate particle which posses well-defined edges
aggregate formed at the intersection of roughly planar faces.
Area of steel The cross-sectional area of the reinforcement.
Asbestos- Products manufactured from rigid material composed
cement essentially of asbestos fibre and Portland cement.
products
Average bond The force in a bar divided by the product of the
stress perimeter and the development length of the bar.
Back Plaster applied to one face of a lath system following
plastering application and subsequent hardening of plaster applied
to the opposite face.
Bacterial The destruction of a material by chemical processes

284
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

corrosion brought about by the activity of certain bacteria which

produce substances such as hydrogen sulfide,
ammonia, and sulphuric acid.
Bag Quantity of Portland cement that is indicated on the
bag.
Bar An element, normally composed of steel, with a
nominally uniform cross sectional area used to
reinforce concrete.
Bar bender A tradesman who cuts and bends steel reinforcement;
or a machine for bending steel reinforcement.
Bar mat An assembly of steel reinforcement composed of two
or more layers of bars placed at angles to each other
and secured together eith by welding or tying.
Bar schedule A list of the reinforcement, showing the shape, number,
size, and dimensions of every different element
required for a structure or a portion of a structure.
Bar spacing The distance between parallel reinforcing bars,
measured center to center of the bars perpendicular to
their longitudinal axes.
Bar support Hardware used to support or hold reinforcing bars in
proper position to prevent displacement before and
during concreting.
Barrel-vault A thin concrete roof in the form of a part of a cylinder.
roof
Base course A layer of specified select material of planned
thickness constructed on the subgrade or subbase of a
pavement to serve one or more functions such as
distributing loads, providing drainage, or minimizing
frost action; also the lowest course of masonry in a wall
or pier.
Batch Quantity of either concrete or mortar mixed at one
time.
Batch box Container of known volume used for measuring
constituents of a batch of either concrete or mortar in
proper proportions.
Batch mixer A machine that mixes batches of either concrete or
mortar.
Batch plant An installation for batching or for batching and mixing
concrete materials.
Batch weights The weight of the various materials (cement, water, the
several sizes of aggregate, and admixtures if used),
which compose a batch of concrete.
Batched water The mixing water added by a batcher to a cementitious
mixture either before or during the initial stages of
mixing.
Manual A batcher equipped with gates or valves that are
batcher operated manually, with or without supplementary
power (pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical), the
accuracy of the weighing operation being depended on
the operator’s observation of the scale.

285
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Semiautomatic A batcher equipped with gates or valves that are

batcher separately opened manually to allow the material to be
weighed but which are closed automatically when the
designated weight of each material has been reached.
Automatic A batcher equipped with gates or valves which, when
batcher actuated by a single starter switch, will open
automatically at the start of the weighing operation of
each material and closed automatically when the
designated weight of each material has been reached,
interlocked in such a manner that: (a) the charging
mechanism cannot be opened until the scale has
returned to zero; (b) the charging mechanism cannot be
opened if the discharge mechanism is open; (c) the
discharge mechanism cannot be opened if the charging
mechanism is open; (d) the discharge mechanism
cannot be opened until the designated weight has been
reached within the allowable tolerance; and (e) if
different kinds of aggregates or different kinds of
cements are weighed cumulatively in a single batcher,
interlocked sequential controls are provided.
Batching Weighing or volumetrically measuring and introducing
into the mixer the ingredients for a batch or either
concrete or mortar.
Batten A narrow strip of wood placed over the vertical joint of
sheating or panelling; also used to hold several boards
together.
Bay The space, in plan, between the centrelines of adjacent
piers, mullions, or columns; a small, well-defined area
of concrete laid at one time in the course of placing
large areas such as floor; pavements, or runways.
Beam A structural member subjected to axial load and flexure
but primarily to flexure; also the graduated horizontal
bar of a weighing scale on which the balancing poises
ride.
Beam bottom Soffit or bottom form for a beam.
Beam-column A structural member subjected to axial load and flexure
forces but primarily axial load.
Beam form A retainer or mold so erected as to give the necessary
shape, support, and finish to a concrete beam.
Beam from- Any of various types of tying or fastening units used to
clamp hold the sides of beam forms.
Beam hanger A wire, strap, or other hardware device that supports
formwork from structural members.
Beam pocket Opening left in a vertical member in which a beam is to
rest; also an opening in the column or girder from
where forms for an intersecting beam will be framed.
Beam side Vertical or sloping side of a beam.
Beam test A method of measuring the flexural strength (modulus
of rupture) of concrete by testing a standard un-
reinforced beam.

286
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Bearing The soil or rock stratum on which a concrete footing,

stratum or mat bears or which carries the load transferred to it
by a concrete pile, caisson, or similar deep foundation
unit.
Bending The bending effect at any section of a structural
moment element; it is equal to the algebraic sum of the
moments of the vertical and horizontal forces, with
respect to the centroidal axis of a member, acting on a
freebody of the member.
Bending- A graphical representation of the variation of bending
moment moment along the length of the member for a given
diagram stationary system of load.
Bent bar A reinforcing bar bent to a prescribed shape.
Binders Cementing materials, either hydrated cements or
products of cement or lime and reactive siliceous
materials; the kinds of cement and curing conditions
govern the general kind of binder formed; also
materials such as asphalt, resins, and other materials
forming the matrix of concrete, mortars, and sanded
grouts.
Blast-furnace The non-metallic product, consisting essentially of
slag silicates and aluminosilicates of calcium and other
bases, that is developed in a molten condition
simultaneously with iron in a blast furnace.
Bleeding The ratio of volume of water released by bleeding to
capacity the volume of paste or mortar.
Bleeding rate The rate at which water is released from a paste or
mortar by bleeding.
Blemish Any superficial defect that causes visible variation
from a consistently smooth and uniformly coloured
surface of hardened concrete.
Blinding The application of a layer of weak concrete or other
suitable material to reduce surface voids, or to provide
a clean, dry working surface; also the filling or
plugging of the openings in a screen or sieve by the
material being separated.
Blistering The irregular raising of a thin layer at the surface of
placed mortar or concrete during or soon after
completion of the finishing operation, or in the case of
pipe after spinning; also bulging of the finish plaster
coat as it separates and draws away from the base coat.
Block, concrete A concrete masonry unit, usually containing hollow
cores.
Block beam A flexural member composed of individual blocks
which are joined together by prestressing.
Bond Adhesion and grip of concrete or mortar to
reinforcement or to other surfaces against which it is
placed, including friction due to shrinkage and
longitudinal shear in the concrete engaged by the bar
deformations; the adhesion of cement paste to

287
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

aggregate; adherence between plaster coats or between

plaster and a substrata produced by adhesive or
cohesive properties of plaster or supplemental
materials.
Bond area The nominal area of interface between two elements
across which adhesion develops or may develop, as
between concrete and reinforcing steel.
Bond breaker A material used to prevent adhesion of newly placed
concrete and the substrate.
Bond Measures taken to prevent adhesion of concrete or
prevention mortar to surfaces against which it is placed.
Bond strength Resistance to separation of mortar and concrete from
reinforcing and other materials with which it is in
contact; a collective expression for all forces such as
adhesion, friction due to shrinkage, and longitudinal
shear in the concrete engaged by the bar deformations
that resist separation.
Bond stress The force of adhesion per unit area of contact between
two bonded surfaces such as concrete and reinforcing
steel or any other material such as foundation rock;
shear stress at the surface of a reinforcing bar,
preventing relative movement between the bar and the
surrounding concrete.
Bonding layer A layer of mortar, usually 1/8 to ½ inch (3 to 13 mm)
thick, which is spread on a moist and prepared,
hardened concrete surface prior to placing fresh
concrete.
Brace A structural member used to provide lateral support for
another member, generally for the purpose of assuring
stability or of resisting lateral loads.
Bracket An overhanging member projecting from a wall or
other body to support weight acting outside the wall, or
similar piece to strengthen an angle.
Briquette A molded specimen of mortar with enlarged
extremities and reduced center having a cross section
of definite area, used for measurement of tensile
strength.
Broom finish The surface texture obtained by striking a broom over
freshly placed concrete.
Brushed A sandy texture obtained by brushing the surface of
surface freshly placed or slightly hardened concrete with a stiff
brush for architectural effect or, in pavement, to
increase skid resistance.
Buckling Failure by lateral or torsional instability of a structural
member, occurring with stresses below the yield or
ultimate value.
Bulk density The mass of a material (including solid particles and
any contained water) per unit volume including voids.
Bulking Increase in the bulk volume of a quantity of sand in a
moist condition over the volume of the same quantity

288
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

dry or completely inundated.

Bulking factor Ratio of the volume of moist sand to the volume of the
sand when dry.
Bundled bars A group of not more than four parallel reinforcing bars
in contact with each other, usually tied together.
Butt joint A plain square joint between two members.
Calcareous Containing calcium carbonate or, less generally,
containing the element calcium.
Calcite A mineral having the composition calcium carbonate
(CaCO 3 ) and a specific crystal structure; the principal
constituent of limestone, chalk, and marble; used as a
major constituent in the manufacture of Portland
cement.
Calcium A crystalline solid, CaCl 2 ; in various technical grades,
chloride used as a drying agent, as an accelerator of concrete, a
deicing chemical, and for other purposes.
Camber A deflection that is intentionally built into a structural
element or form to improve appearance or to nullify the
deflection of the element under the effects of loads,
shrinkage, and creep.
Cap A smooth, plane surface of suitable material bonded to
the bearing surfaces of test specimens to insure uniform
distribution of load during strength testing.
Cap cables Short cables (tendons) introduced to prestress the zone
of negative bending only.
Capacity A measure of the rated volume of a particular concrete
mixer or agitator, usually limited by specifications to a
maximum percentage of total gross volume; also the
output of concrete, aggregate, or other product per unit
of time (as plant capacity or screen capacity); also load
carrying limit of a structure.
Capillarity The movement of a liquid in the interstices of soil or
other porous material due to surface tension.
Carbonation Reaction between carbon dioxide and a hydroxide or
oxide to form a carbonate, especially in cement paste,
mortar, or concrete; the reaction with calcium
compounds to produce calcium carbonate.
Cast-in-place Mortar or concrete which is deposited in the place
where it is required to harden as part of the structure, as
opposed to precast concrete.
Cast-in-situ See cast-in-place.
Catalyst A substance that initiates a chemical reaction and
enables it to proceed under milder conditions than
otherwise required and which does not, itself, alter or
enter into the reaction.
Catwalk A narrow elevated walkway.
Cellular A method of constructing concrete elements in which
construction part of the interior concrete is replaced by voids.
Cement, bulk Cement that is transported and delivered in bulk
(usually in specially constructed vehicles) instead of in

289
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

bags.
Cement, low- A Portland cement that produces limited generation of
heat heat during setting.
Cement, A hydraulic cement produced by pulverizing Portland-
Portland cement clinker and usually containing calcium sulfate.
Cement, A hydraulic cement consisting of an intimately
Portland blast- interground mixture of Portland-cement clinker and
furnace slag granulated blast-furnace slag or an intimate and
uniform blend of Portland cement and fine granulated
blast-furnace slag in which the amount of the slag
constituent is within specified limits.
Cement, A hydraulic cement consisting of an intimate and
Portland- uniform blend of Portland cement or Portland blast-
pozzolan furnace slag cement and fine pozzolan produced by
intergrinding Portland-cement clinker and pozzolan, by
blending Portland cement or Portland blast-furnace slag
cement and finely divided pozzolan, or a combination
of intergrinding and blending, in which the pozzolan
constituent is within specified limit.
Cement, slag A hydraulic cement consisting mostly of an intimate
and uniform blend of granulated blast-furnace slag and
hydrated lime in which the slag constituent is more
than a specified minimum percentage.
Cement, Portland cement, low in tricalcium aluminate, to reduce
sulfate- susceptibility of concrete to attack by dissolved sulfates
resistant in water or soils.
Cement, Super A hydraulic cement made by intimately grinding a
sulphated mixture of granulated blast-furnace slag, calcium
sulfate and a small amount of lime, cement, or cement
clinker, so named because the equivalent content of
sulfate exceeds that for Portland blast-furnace slag
cement.
Cement, white Portland cement which hydrates to a white paste; made
from raw materials of low iron content the clinker for
which is fired by a reducing flame.
Cement- The ratio of cement to total aggregate, either by mass
aggregate ratio or volume.
Cement Quantity of cement contained in a unit volume of
content concrete or mortar, preferably expressed as weight.
Cement gel The colloidal material that makes up the major portion
of the porous mass of which mature hydrated cement
paste is composed.
Cement gun A machine for pneumatic placement of mortar or small
aggregate concrete; in the “Dry Gun”, water from a
separate hose meets the dry material at the nozzle of
the gun; with the “Wet Gun”, the delivery hose
conveys the premixed mortar or concrete.
Cement paint A paint consisting generally of white Portland cement
and water, pigments, hydrated lime, water repellents, or
hygroscopic salts.

290
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Cement paste Constituent of concrete consisting of cement and water.

Centering Falsework used in the construction of arches, shells,
space structures, or any continuous structure where the
entire falsework is lowered (struck or decentered) as a
unit.
Chalking Formation of a loose powder resulting from the
disintegration of the surface of concrete or of applied
coating, such as cement paint.
Chamfer Either a bevelled edge or corner formed in concrete
work by means of a chamfer strip.
Chipping Treatment of a hardened concrete surface by chiselling.
Chute A sloping trough or tube for conducting concrete,
cement, aggregate, or other free flowing materials from
a higher to a lower point.
Clay content Percentage of clay by dry weight of a heterogeneous
material, such as a soil or a natural concrete aggregate.
Cleanout An opening in the forms for removal of refuse, to be
closed before the concrete is placed; a port in tanks,
bins, or other receptacles for inspection and cleaning.
Cleanup Treatment of horizontal construction joints to remove
all surface material and contamination down to a
condition of cleanness corresponding to that of a
freshly broken surface of concrete.
Cleat Small board used to connect formwork members or
used as a brace.
Clinker A partially fused product of a kiln, which is ground to
make cement; also other vitrified or burnt material.
Coarse- The ratio, expressed as a decimal, of the amount (mass
aggregate or solid volume) of coarse aggregate in a unit volume
factor of well-proportioned concrete to the amount of dry-
rodded coarse aggregate compacted into the same
volume.
Coefficient of Change in linear dimension per unit length or change in
thermal volume per unit volume per degree of temperature
expansion change.
Coefficient of The standard deviation expressed as a percentage of the
variation average.
Cold-worked Steel bars or wires which have been rolled, twisted, or
steel drawn at normal ambient temperatures.
reinforcement
Colloid A substance that is in a state of division preventing
passage through a semipermeable membrane,
consisting of particles ranging from 0.1 to 0.001 µm in
diameter.
Column A member used primarily to support axial compression
loads and with a height of at least three times its least
lateral dimension.
Column, long A column whose load capacity is limited by buckling
rather than strength.
Column, short A column whose load capacity is limited by strength

291
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

rather than buckling; a column which is customarily so

stocky and sufficiently restrained that at least 95
percent of the cross-sectional strength can be
developed.
Column, A column whose load capacity is reduced by the
slender increased eccentricity caused by secondary deflection
moments.
Column capital An enlargement of a column below a slab intended to
increase the shearing resistance.
Column clamp Any of various types of tying or fastening units to hold
column form sides together.
Column side One of the vertical panel components of a column
form.
Column strip The portion of a flat slab over the columns and
consisting of the two adjacent quarter panels on each
side of the column center line.
Combined A structural unit or assembly of units supporting more
footing than one column.
Compacting The ratio obtained by dividing the observed mass of
factor concrete, which fills a container of standard size and
shape when allowed to fall into it under standard
conditions of test, by the mass of fully compacted
concrete which fills the same container.
Composite A concrete compression member reinforced
column longitudinally with structural steel shapes, pipe, or
tubing with or without longitudinal reinforcing bars.
Composite A type of construction using members produced by
construction combining different materials (e.g. concrete and
structural steel) members produced by combining cast-
in-place and precast concrete, or cast-in-place concrete
elements constructed in separate placement but so
interconnected that the combined components act
together as a single member and respond to loads as a
unit.
Compound, An impervious material used to fill joints in pavements
joint-sealing or structures.
Compound, Material used to impart water repellency to a structure
“waterproofing” or a constructional unit.
Compression The widened portion of an I, T, or similar cross-section
flange beam which is shortened or compressed by bending
under normal loads, such as the horizontal portion of
the cross section of a simple span T-beam.
Compression Any member in which the primary stress is longitudinal
member compression.
Compression Reinforcement designed to carry compressive stresses.
reinforcement
Compression Test made on a test specimen of mortar or concrete to
test determine the compressive strength.
Compressive The measured maximum resistance of a concrete or
strength mortar specimen to axial compressive loading;

292
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

expressed as force per unit cross-sectional area; or the

specified resistance used in design calculations.
Compressive The average compressive strength of a given class or
strength strength level of concrete; defined as average
average compressive strength required to statistically meet a
designated specific strength.
Concentric Tendons following line coincident with the gravity axis
tendons of the prestressed concrete member.
Concrete A composite material that consists essentially of a
binding medium within which are embedded particles
or fragments of aggregate, usually a combination of
fine aggregate and a coarse aggregate; in Portland-
cement concrete, the binder is a mixture of Portland
cement and water.
Concrete, Concrete made with calcium-aluminate cement; used
aluminate primarily where high-early-strength and refractory or
corrosion-resistance concrete is required.
Concrete, Concrete which will be permanently exposed to view
architectural and which therefore requires special care in selection of
the concrete materials, forming, placing, and finishing
to obtain the desired architectural appearance.
Concrete, Non-structural concrete used to correct over-
backfill excavation, fill excavated pockets in rock, or prepare a
surface to receive structural concrete.
Concrete, A lightweight product consisting of Portland cement,
cellular cement-silica, cement-pozzolan, lime-pozzolan, or
lime-silica pastes, or pastes containing blends of these
ingredients and having a homogeneous void or cell
structure, attained with gas-forming chemicals of
foaming agent (for cellular concretes containing binder
ingredients other than, or in addition to, Portland
cement, autoclave curing is usually employed).
Concrete, Concrete surfaces formed so as to yield an acceptable
exposed texture and finish for permanent exposure to view.
Concrete, fair- A concrete surface which, on completion of the
face forming process, requires no further (concrete)
treatment other than curing.
Concrete, Concrete containing dispersed, randomly oriented
fiber- fibers.
reinforced
Concrete, field Concrete delivered or mixed, placed, and cured on the
job site.
Concrete, Concrete may very light and cellular by the addition of
foamed a prepared foam or by generation of gas within the
unhardened mixture.
Concrete, fresh Unhardened concrete that can be consolidated by the
intended method.
Concrete, gap- Concrete containing a gap-graded aggregate.
graded
Concrete, Concrete which has set but not appreciably hardened.

293
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

green
Concrete, heat- Any concrete that will not disintegrate when exposed to
resistant constant or cyclic heating at any temperature below
which a ceramic bond is formed.
Concrete, Concrete of substantially higher density than that made
heavyweight using normal-weight aggregates, usually obtained by
use of heavyweight aggregates and used especially for
radiation shielding.
Concrete, Concrete, which, through the use of high-early-strength
high-early- cement or admixtures, attains a given level of strength
strength earlier than normal concrete.
Concrete, Concrete that has a specified compressive strength for
high-strength design of 6000 psi (41 MPa) or greater.
Concrete, in- Concrete that is deposited and allowed to harden in the
situ place where it is required to be in the completed
structure, as opposed to precast concrete.
Concrete, Concrete having low thermal conductivity; used as
insulating thermal insulation.
Concrete, lean Concrete of low cement content.
Concrete, Concrete of substantially lower density than that made
lightweight using aggregate of normal density
Concrete, mass Any volume of concrete with dimensions large enough
to require that measures be taken to cope with
generation of heat from hydration of the cement and
attendant volume change to minimize cracking.
Concrete, Concrete cast with no joints other than construction
monolithic joints.
Concrete, Concrete having a unit weight of approximately 150 lb
normalweight per cu ft (2400 kg/cu m) made with normalweight
aggregates.
Concrete, plain Concrete without reinforcement; reinforced concrete
that does not conform to the definition of reinforced
concrete; also used loosely to designate concrete
containing no admixture and prepared without special
treatment.
Concrete, Concrete in which an organic polymer serves as the
polymer binder; also known as resin concrete; sometimes
erroneously employed to designate hydraulic cement
mortars or concrete in which part or all of the mixing
water is replaced by an aqueous dispersion of a
thermoplastic copolymer.
Concrete, A mixture of water, hydraulic cement, aggregate, and a
polymer- monomer or polymer; polymerised in place when a
cement monomer is used.
Concrete, Concrete cast elsewhere than its final position.
precast
Concrete (1) Concrete that has been mixed for a short period in a
(mortar, stationary mixer before being transferred to a transit
grout), mixer. (2) grout, mortar, or concrete that has been
preshrunk mixed 1 to 3 hr before placing in order to reduce

294
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

shrinkage during hardening.

Concrete, Concrete in which internal streses of such magnitude
prestressed and distribution are introduced that the tensile
streresses resulting from the service loads are
counteracted to a desired degree; in reinforced concrete
the prestress is commonly introduced by tensioning the
tendons.
Concrete, Concrete which is transported through hose or pipe by
pumped means of a pump.
Concrete, Concrete containing adequate reinforcement
reinforced (prestressed or not prestressed) and designed on the
assumption that the two materials act together in
resisting forces.
Concrete, Concrete made with normal-weight aggregates having
siliceous constituents composed mainly of silica or silicates.
aggregate
Concrete, spun Concrete compacted by centrifugal action, e.g., in the
manufacture of pipe and poles.
Concrete, Concrete used to carry structural load or to form an
structural integral part of a structure; concrete of a quality
specified for structural use.
Concrete, Structural concrete made with lightweight aggregate;
structural having an air-dry unit weight of not more than 115
lightweight lb/ft3 (1850 kg/m3) and a 28-day compressive strength
or more than 2500 psi (17.24 MPa)
Concrete, Subaqueous concrete placed by means of a tremie.
tremie
Concrete, Concrete consolidated by vibration during and after
vibrated placing.
Concrete paver (1) A concrete mixer, usually mounted on crawler
tracks, which mixes and places concrete pavement on
the subgrade. (2) Precast concrete paving brick.
Concrete A machine which consolidates a layer of freshly mixed
vibrating concrete by vibration.
machine
Confined Region with transverse reinforcement within beam-
region column joints.
consistency the relative mobility or ability of freshly mixed
concrete or mortar to flow; the usual measurements are
slump for concrete, flow for mortar or grout, and
penetration resistance for neat cement paste.
Consistency A measure of grout fluidity, roughly analogous to
factor viscosity, which describes the ease with which grout
may be pumped into pores or fissures; usually a
laboratory measurement in which consistency is
reported in degrees of rotation of a torque viscosimeter
in a specimen of grout.
Consolidation The process of inducing a closer arrangement of the
solid particles in freshly mixed concrete or mortar,
during placement by the reduction of voids; usually by

295
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

vibration, centrifugation, rodding, tamping, or some

combination of these actions; also applicable to similar
manipulation of other cementitious mixtures, soils,
aggregates, or the like.
Construction The surface where two successive placement of concrte
joint meet, across which it may be desirable to achieve bond
and through which reinforcement may be continuous
Construction The loads to which a permanent or temporary structure
load is subjected during construction.
Contact Pressure acting at and perpendicular to the contact area
pressure between footing and soil, produced by the weight of the
footing and all forces acting on it.
Contact splice A means of connecting reinforcing bars in which the
bars are lapped and in direct contact.
Continuous A combined footing of prismatic or truncated shape,
footing supporting two or more columns in a row.
Continuous A particle size distribution in which all intermediate
grading size fractions are present, as opposed to gap-grading.
Continuous A mixer into which the ingredients of the mixture are
mixer fed without stopping, and from which the mixed
product is discharged in a continuous stream.
Continuous A slab or beam which extends as a unit over three or
slab or beam more supports in a given direction.
Continuously A pavement with continuous longitudinal steel
reinforced reinforcement and no intermediate transverse
pavement expansion or contraction joints.
contraction decrease in either length or volume.
Contraction Formed, sawed, or tooled groove in a concrete structure
joint to create a weakened plane and regulate the location of
cracking resulting from the dimensional change of
different parts of the structure.
Contraction- Injecting of grout into contraction joint.
joint grouting
Control factor The rate of minimum compressive strength to the
average compressive strength.
Conveyor A device for moving materials; usually a continuous
belt, an articulated system of buckets, a confined
screw, or a pipe through which material is moved by
air or water.
Coping The material or units used to form a cap or finish on
top of a wall, pier, pilaster, or chimney.
Corbel A projection from the face of a beam, girder, column,
or wall used as a beam seat or a decoration.
Core (1) The soil material enclosed within a tubular pile
after driving (it may be replaced with concrete). (2)
The mandrel used for driving casings for cast-in-place
piles. (3) A structural shape used to internally reinforce
a drilled-in-caisson. (4) A cylindrical sample of
hardened concrete or rock obtained by means of a core
drill. (5) The molded open space in a concrete masonry

296
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

unit or precast concrete unit.

Core test Compression test on a concrete sample cut from
hardened concrete by means of a core drill.
Coring The act of obtaining cores from concrete structures or
rock foundations.
Corner Metal reinforcement for plaster at re-entrant corners to
reinforcement provide continuity between two intersecting planes; or
concrete reinforcement used at wall intersections or
near corners of square or rectangular openings in walls,
slabs, or beams.
Corrosion Destruction of metal by chemical, electrochemical, or
electrolytic reaction with its environment.
Cotton mats Cotton-filled quilts fabricated for use as a water-
retaining covering in curing concrete surfaces.
Coupler (1) A device for connecting reinforcing bars or
prestressing tendons end to end. (2) A device for
locking together the component parts of a tubular metal
scaffold (also know as a clamp). (3) Internal threaded
device for joining reinforcing bars with matching
threaded ends for the purpose of providing transfer of
either axial compression or axial tension or both from
one bar to the other.
Coupling pin An insert device used to connect lifts or tiers or
formwork scaffolding vertically.
Coupling Device fitting over the ends of two reinforcing bars for
sleeve the eventual purpose of providing transfer of either
axial compression or axial tension or both from one bar
to the other.
Course In concrete construction, a horizontal layer of concrete,
usually one of several making up a lift; in masonry
construction, a horizontal layer of block or brick.
Cover In reinforced concrete, the least distance between the
surface of the reinforcement and the outer surface of
the concrete.
Crack A complete or incomplete separation, of either concrete
or masonry, into two or more parts produced by
breaking or fracturing.
Crack-control Reinforcement in concrete construction designed to
reinforcement prevent opening of cracks, often effective in limiting
them to uniformly distributed small cracks.
Cracked A section designed or analysed on the assumption that
section concrete has no resistance to tensile stress.
Cracking load The load which causes tensile stress in a member to
exceed the tensile strength of the concrete.
Craze cracks Development of shallow cracks at closely spaced but
irregular intervals on the surface of plaster, cement
past, mortar or concrete.
Crazing The development of craze cracks; the pattern of craze
cracks existing in a surface.
Creep Time-dependent deformation due to sustained load.

297
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Creep basic Creep that occurs without migration of moisture to or

from the concrete.
Critical A condition describing the degree of filling by
saturation freezable water of a pore space in cement paste or
aggregate that affects the response to freezing; usually
taken to be 91.7 percent because of the 9 percent
increase in volume of water undergoing the change of
state to ice.
Cross section The section of a body perpendicular to a given axis of
the body; a drawing showing such a section.
Cube strength The load per unit area at which a standard cube fails
when tested in a specified manner.
Curb form A retainer or mold used in conjunction with a curb tool
to give the necessary shape and finished to a concrete
curb.
Curing The maintenance of a satisfactory moisture content and
temperature in concrete during its early stages so that
desired properties may develop.
Curing blanket A built-up covering of sacks, matting, hessian, straw,
waterproof paper, or other suitable material placed over
freshly finished concrete.
Curing A liquid that can be applied as a coating to the surface
compound of newly placed concrete to retard the loss of water or,
in the case of pigmented compounds, also to reflect
heat so as to provide an opportunity for the concrete to
develop its properties in a favourable temperature and
moisture environment.
Curling The distortion of an originally essentially linear or
planar member into a curved shape such as the warping
of a slab due to creep or to differences in temperature
or moisture content in the zones adjacent to its opposite
faces.
Dampproofing Treatment of concrete or mortar to retard the passage
or absorption of water, or water vapor, either by
application of a suitable coating to exposed surfaces, or
by use of a suitable admixture or treated cement, or by
use of pre-formed films such as polyethylene sheet
under slabs on grade.
Dead end In the stressing of a tendon from one end only, the end
opposite that to which the load is applied.
Dead-end The anchorage at that end of a tendon which is opposite
anchorage the jacking end.
Dead load A constant load that in structures is due to the mass of
the members, the supported structure, and permanent
attachments or accessories.
Decenter To lower or remove centering or shoring.
Deck The form on which concrete for a slab is placed, also
the floor or roof slab itself.
Deflection Movement of a point on a structure or structural
element, usually measured as a linear displacement

298
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

transverse to a reference line or axis.

Deformation A change in dimension or shape.
Deformation, Deformation proportional to the applied stress.
elastic
Deformation, Deformation not proportional to the applied stress.
inelastic
Deformation, Deformation resulting from effects such as autogenous
time- volume change, thermal contraction or expansion,
dependent creep, shrinkage, and swelling, each of which is a
function of time.
Deformed bar A reinforcing bar with a manufactured pattern of
surface ridges intended to prevent slip when the bar is
embedded in concrete.
Deformed A flat piece of metal, thicker than ¼" (6mm), having
plate horizontal deformations or corrugations; used in
construction to form a vertical joint and provide a
mechanical interlock between adjacent section.
Deformed Metal bars, wire, or fabric with a manufactured pattern
reinforcement of surface ridges which provide a locking anchorage
with surrounding concrete.
Dehydration Removal of chemically bound, adsorbed, or absorbed
water from a material.
Delivery hose Hose through which shotcrete, grout, or pumped
concrete or mortar passes; also known as conveying
hose or material hose.
Demolding Removal of molds from concrete test specimens or
precast products.
Density Mass per unit volume.
Density (dry) The mass per unit volume of a dry substance at a stated
temperature.
Deterioration (1) Physical manifestation of failure of a material (e.g.
cracking, delamination, flaking, pitting, scaling,
spalling, staining) caused by environmental or internal
autogenous influences on rock and hardened concrete
as well as other materials; (2) Decomposition of
material during either testing or exposure to service.
Detritus Loose material produced by the disintegration of rocks
through geological agencies or processes simulating
those of nature.
Development The embedment length required to develop the design
length strength of the reinforcement at a critical section;
formerly called bond length.
Diagonal crack In a flexural member, an inclined crack caused by shear
stress, usually at about 45 deg to the axis; or a crack in
a slab, not parallel to either the lateral or longitudinal
directions.
Diagonal The principal tensile stress resulting from the
tension combination of normal and shear stresses acting upon a
structural element.
Dilation An expansion of concrete during cooling or freezing

299
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

generally calculated as the maximum deviation from

the normal thermal contraction predicted from the
length change-temperature curve or length change-time
curve established at temperatures before initial
freezing.
Diluent A substance, liquid or solid, mixed with the active
constituents of a formulation to increase the bulk or
lower the concentration.
Disintegration Reduction into small fragments and subsequently into
particles.
Distortion Physical manifestation of cracking and distortion in a
concrete structure as the result of stress, chemical
action, or both.
Distribution- Small diameter bars, usually at right angles to the main
bar reinforcement, intended to spread a concentrated load
reinforcement on a slab and to prevent cracking.
Divider strips In terrazzo work, nonferrous metal or plastic strip of
different thicknesses, usually embedded from 5/8 to
1¼" (10 to 40mm), used to form panels in the topping.
Double-tee A precast concrete member composed of two stems and
beam a combined top flange, commonly used as a beam.
Dowel (1) A steel pin, commonly a plain round steel bar,
which extends into adjoining portions of a concrete
construction, as at a joint in a pavement slab, so as to
transfer shear loads; (2) A deformed reinforcing bar
intended to transmit tension, compression, or shear
through a construction joint.
Drainage The interception and removal of water from, on, or
under an area or roadway; the process of removing
surplus ground or surface water artificially; a general
term for gravity flow of liquids in conduits.
Drainage fill (1) Base course of granular material placed between
floor slab and sub-grade to impede capillary rise of
moisture. (2) also, lightweight concrete placed on
floors or roofs to promote drainage.
Dried strength The compressive or flexural strength of refractory
concrete determined within 3 hrs after first drying in an
oven at 220 to 230 F (105 to 110 C) for a specified
time.
Drip A transverse groove in the underside of a projecting
piece of wood, stone, or concrete to prevent water from
flowing back to a wall.
Dropchute A device used to confine or to direct the flow of a
falling stream of fresh concrete (1) drophute,
articulated – a device consisting of a succession of
tapered metal cylinders so designed that the lower end
of each cylinder fits into the upper end of the one
below (2) dropchute, flexible – a device consisting of a
heavy rubberised canvas or plastic collapsible tube.
Dry-batch The weight of the materials, excluding water, used to

300
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

weight make a batch of concrete.

Dry mix A concrete, mortar, or plaster mixture, commonly sold
in bags, containing all components except water; also a
concrete of near zero slump.
Dry volume Measurement of the ingredients of grout, mortar, or
measurement concrete by their bulk volume.
Duct A hold formed in a concrete member to accommodate a
tendon for post-tensioning; a pipe or runway for
electric, telephone, or other utilities.
Ductility That property of a material by virtue of which it may
undergo large permanent deformation without rupture.
Durability The ability of concrete to resist weathering action,
chemical attack, abrasion, and other conditions of
service.
Dusting The development of a powdered material at the surface
of hardened concrete.
Dynamic load A load which is variable i.e. not stat, such as masonry
load, earthquake or wind.
Dynamic Loading from unit (particularly machinery) which, by
loading virtue of their movement or vibration, impose stresses
in excess of those imposed by their dead load.
Early strength Strength of concrete or mortar usually as developed at
various times during the first 72 hr after placement.
Early The early development of an abnormal reduction in the
stiffening working characteristics of a hydraulic-cement paste,
mortar, or concrete, which may be further described as
false set, quick set, or flash set.
Edge-bar Tension steel sometimes used to strengthen otherwise
reinforcement inadequate edges in a slab, without resorting to edge
thickening.
Effective area Area of a concrete section assumed to resist shear or
of concrete flexural stresses.
Effective area The are obtained by multiplying the right cross-
of sectional area of the metal reinforcement by the cosine
reinforcement of the angle between its centroidal axis and the
direction for which its effectiveness is considered.
Effective depth Depth of a beam or slab section measured from the
compression face to the centroid of the tensile
reinforcement.
Effective Width of slab adjoining a beam stem where the slab is
flange width assumed to function as the flage element of a T-beam
section.
Effective The prestressing force at a specific location in a
prestress prestressed concrete member under the effects of
service dead load or total service load after all losses of
prestress have occurred.
Effective span The lesser of the two following distances: (a) The
distance between supports; (b) The clear distance
between supports plus the effective depth of the beam
or slab.

301
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Effective width That part of the width of a slab taken into account
of slab when designing T- of L-beams.
Efflorescence A deposit of salts, usually white, formed on a surface,
the substance having emerged in solution from within
either concrete or masonry and subsequently been
precipitated by evaporation.
Elastic design A method of analysis in which the design of a member
is based on a linear stress-strain relationship and
corresponding limiting elastic properties of the
material.
Elastic limit The limit of stress beyond which the stain is not wholly
recoverable.
Elastic loss In prestressed concrete, the reduction in prestressing
load resulting from the elastic shortening of the
member.
Elasticity That property of a material by virtue of which it tends
to recover its original size and shape after deformation.
Elongation Increase in length.
Embedment The length of embedded reinforcement provided
length beyond a critical section.
Embedment- The length of embedded reinforcement which can
length develop the same stress as that which can be developed
equivalent by a hook or mechanical anchorage.
Enclosure wall A nonload-bearing wall intended only to enclose space.
Erosion Progressive disintegration of a solid by the abrasive or
cavitation action of gases, fluids, or solids in motion.
Evaporable Water in set cement paste present in capillaries or held
water by surface forces; measured as that removable by
drying under specified conditions.
Evaporation A long-chain organic material such as cetyl alcohol
retardant which when spread on a water film on the surface of
concrete retards the evaporation of bleed water.
Expanded- A metal network, often used as reinforcement in
metal lath concrete or mortar construction, formed by suitably
stamping or cutting sheet metal and stretching it to
form open meshes, usually of diamond shape.
Expansion Increase in either length or volume.
Expansion (1) A separation provided between adjoining parts of
joint structure to allow movement where expansion is likely
to exceed contraction. (2) A separation between
pavement slabs on grade, filled with a compressible
filler material. (3) An isolation joint intended to allow
independent movement adjoining parts.
Exterior panel In a flat slab, a panel having at least one edge which is
not in common with another panel.
Factored load Load, multiplied by appropriate load factors, used to
proportion members by the strength design method.
Falsework The temporary structure erected to support work in the
process of construction; composed of shoring or
vertical posting, formwork for beams and slabs, and

302
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

lateral bracing.
Fascia A flat member or band at the surface of a building or
the edge beam of a bridge; also exposed eave of a
building
Fatigue The weakening of a material caused by repeated or
alternating loads.
Fatigue failure The phenomenon of rupture of material, when
subjected to repeated ladings, at a stress substantially
less than the static strength.
Fatigue The greatest stress which can be sustained for a given
strength number of stress cycles without failure.
Faulting Differential vertical displacement of a slab or other
member adjacent to a joint or crack.
Field-cured Test cylinders that are left at the job-site for curing as
cylinders nearly as practicable in the same manner as the
concrete in the structure to indicate when supporting
forms may be removed, additional construction loads
may be imposed, or the structure may be placed in
service.
Fillet A concave junction formed where two surfaces meet.
Fin A narrow linear projection on a formed concrete
surface, resulting from mortar flowing into spaces in
the formwork; also a type of blade in a concrete mixer
drum.
Final set A degree of stiffening of a mixture of cement and water
greater than initial set, generally stated as an empirical
value indicating the time in hours and minutes required
for a cement paste to stiffen sufficiently to resist to an
established degree, the penetration of a weighted test
needle; also applicable to concrete and mortar mixture
with use of suitable test procedures.
Final setting The time required for a freshly mixed cement paste,
time mortar, or concrete to achieve final set.
Final stress In prestressed concrete, the stress which exists after
substantially all losses have occurred.
Fineness A factor obtained by adding the total percentage of
modulus material in the sample that are coarser than each of the
following sieve (cumulative percentages retained), and
dividing the sum by 100:150-µm (No.100), 300-µm
(No.50), 600-µm (No.30), 1.18mm (No.16), 2.36mm
(No.8), 4.75mm (No.4), 9.5mm (3/8-in.), 19.0mm (¾
in.), 37.5mm (1½ in.), 75mm (3 in.), 150mm (6 in.).
Finish The texture of a surface after consolidating and
finishing operations have been performed.
Finish grinding The final grinding of clinker into cement, with calcium
sulfate in the form of gypsum or anhydrite generally
being added; the final grinding operation required for a
finished concrete surface, e.g. bump cutting of
pavement, fin removal from structural concrete,
terrazzo floor grinding.

303
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Finishing Levelling, smoothing, consolidating, and otherwise

treatment surfaces of fresh or recently placed concrete
or mortar to produce desired appearance and service.
Finishing A power-operated machine used to produce the desired
machine surface texture on a concrete slab.
Flash coat A light coat of shotcrete used to cover minor blemishes
on a concrete surface.
Flat slab A concrete slab reinforced in two or more directions
and having drop panels or column capitals or both.
Flatwork, A general term applicable to concrete floors and slabs
concrete that require finishing operations.
Flexible A pavement structure which maintains intimate contact
pavement with and distributes loads to the subgrade and depends
on aggregate interlock, particle friction, and cohesion
for stability; cementing agents, where used, are
generally bituminous materials as contrasted to
hydraulic cement in the case of rigid pavement.
Flexural A measure of stiffness of a member, indicated by the
rigidity product of modulus of elasticity and moment of inertia
divided by the length of the member.
Flexural The property of a material or a structural member that
strength indicates its ability to resist failure in bending; in
concrete flexural members, the bending moment at
which a section reaches its maximum usable bending
capacity; for under-reinforced concrete flexural
members, the bending moment at which the
compressive strain in the concrete reaches 0.003; for
over-reinforced concrete flexural members, the
bending moment at which the compressive stress
reaches 85 percent of the cylinder strength of the
concrete; for un-reinforced concrete members, the
bending moment at which the concrete tensile strength
reaches the modulus of rupture
Fly ash The finely divided residue resulting from the
combustion of ground or powdered coal and which is
transported from the firebox through the boiler by flue
gases.
Fog curing (1) Storage of concrete in a moist room in which the
desired high humidity is achieved by the atomisation of
fresh water. (2) Application of atomized fresh water to
concrete, stucco, mortar, or plaster.
Form A temporary structure or mold for the support of
concrete while it is setting and gaining sufficient
strength to be self-supporting.
Form anchor Device used to secure formwork to previously placed
concrete of adequate strength; the device is normally
embedded in the concrete during placement.
Form coating A liquid applied to formwork surface for a specific
purpose; to promote easy release from the concrete, to
preserve the form material, or to retard setting of the

304
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

near-surface matrix for preparation of exposed-

aggregate finishes.
Form hanger Device used to support formwork from a structural
framework; the dead load of forms, weight of concrete,
and construction and impact loads must be supported.
Form Insulating material applied to outside of forms between
insulation studs and over the top in sufficient thickness and air
tightness to conserve heat of hydration in order to
maintain concrete at required temperatures in cold
weather.
Form lining Materials used to line the concreting face of formwork
in order either to impart a smooth or patterned finish to
the concrete surface, to absorb moisture from the
concrete, or to apply a set-retarding chemical to the
formed surface.
Form oil Oil applied to the interior surfaces of forms to promote
easy release from the concrete when the forms are
removed.
Form scabbing Inadvertent removal of the surface of concrete because
of adhesion to the form.
Foundation The structural elements through which the load of a
structure is transmitted to the earth.
Free fall Descent of freshly mixed concrete into forms without
dropchutes or other means of confinement; also the
distance through which such descent occurs; also
uncontrolled fall of aggregate.
Free lime Calcium oxide (CaO) as in clinker and cement which
has not combined with SiO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , or Fe 2 O 3 during
the burning process, usually because of underburning,
insufficient grinding of the raw mix, or the presence of
traces of inhibitors.
Free moisture Moisture having essentially the properties of pure
water in bulk; moisture not absorbed by aggregate.
Friction loss The stress loss in a prestressing tendon resulting from
friction between the tendon and duct or other device
during stressing.
Friction pile A load-bearing pile which receives its principal vertical
support from skin friction between the surface of the
buried pile and the surrounding soil.
Frog A depression in the bed surface of a masonry unit;
sometimes called a panel.
Gel Matter in a colloidal state that does not dissolve, but
remains suspended in a solvent from which it fails to
precipitate without the intervention of heat or of an
electrolyte.
Girder A large beam, usually horizontal, that serves as a main
structural member.
Girt Small beam spanning between columns generally used
in industrial buildings to support outside walls.
Glass-fibre A composite material consisting essentially of a matrix

305
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

reinforced of hydraulic cement paste or mortar reinforced with

cement glass fibers; typically precast into units less than 1 in.
(25mm) thick.
Grade beam A reinforced concrete beam, usually at ground level, to
form a foundation for the walls of a superstructure.
Gradient Rate of change in a variable over a distance, as of
temperature or moisture.
Grading The distribution of particles of granular material among
various sizes; usually expressed in terms of cumulative
percentage larger or smaller than each of a series of
size (sieve openings) or the percentages between
certain ranges of size (sieve openings).
Granolithic A surface layer of granolithic concrete which may be
finish laid on a base of either fresh or hardened concrete.
Gravel (1) Granular material predominantly retained on the
4.75mm (No.4) sieve and resulting either from natural
disintegration and abrasion of rock or processing of
weakly bound conglomerate (2) That portion of an
aggregate retained on the 4.75mm (No.4) sieve and
resulting either from natural disintegration and abrasion
of rock or processing of weakly bound conglomerate.
Grid A combined footing formed by intersecting continuous
foundation footings, loaded at the intersection points, and covering
much of the total area within the outer limits of the
assembly.
Grout A mixture of cementitious material and water, with or
without aggregate, proportioned to produce a pourable
consistency without segregation of the constituents;
also a mixture of other composition but of similar
consistency.
Gun (1) Shotcrete material delivery equipment, usually
consisting of double chambers under pressure;
equipment with a single pressure chamber is used to
some extent. (2) Pressure cylinder used to propel
freshly mixed concrete pneumatically.
Gunite A proprietary term for shotcrete.
Gypsum A mineral having the composition calcium sulfate
dihydrate (CaSO 4 .2H 2 O).
Hacking The roughening of a surface by striking with a tool.
Hairline cracks Cracks in an exposed concrete surface having widths so
small as to be barely perceptible.
Hanger A device used to suspend one object from another
object such as the hardware attached to a building
frame to support form.
Harsh mixture A concrete mixture which lacks desired workability
and consistency due to a deficiency of mortar or
aggregate fines.
Haunch A deepened portion of a beam in the vicinity of a
support.
Haunching (1) Concrete support to the sides of a drain or sewer

306
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

pipe above the bedding. (2) Work done in

strengthening or improving the outer strip of a
roadway.
Heat of Heat evolved by chemical reactions with water, such as
hydration that evolved during the setting and hardening of
Portland cement, or the difference between the heat of
solution of dry cement and that of partially hydrated
cement.
High strength Steel with a high yield point, in the case of reinforcing
steel bars 60,000 psi (414 MPa) and greater.
Hinge joint Any joint which permits rotation with no appreciable
moment developed in the members at the joint.
Honeycomb Voids left in concrete due to failure of the mortar to
effectively fill the spaces among coarse aggregate
particles.
Hook A bend in the end of a reinforcing bar.
Hooked bar A reinforcing bar with the end bent into a hook to
provide anchorage.
Hoop A one-piece closed tie or continuously wound tie not
reinforcement less than No.3 in size, the ends of which have a
standard 135-deg bend with a ten-bar diameter
extension, that encloses the longitudinal reinforcement.
Hydration Formation of a compound by the combining of water
with some other substance; in concrete, the chemical
reaction between hydraulic cement and water.
Hydraulic The hydrated dry cementitious product obtained by
hydrated lime calcining a limestone containing silica and alumina to a
temperature short of incipient fusion so as to form
sufficient free calcium oxide to permit hydration and at
the same time leaving unhydrated sufficient calcium
silicates to give the dry powder its hydraulic properties.
Incrustation A crust or coating, generally hard, formed on the
surface of concrete masonry construction or on
aggregate particles.
Initial drying The difference between the length of a specimen
shrinkage (molded and cured under state conditions) and its
length when first dried to constant length, expressed as
a percentage of the moist length.
Initial The prestressing stress (or force) applied to the
prestress concrete at the time of stressing.
Initial set A degree of stiffening of a mixture of cement and water
less thanfinal set, generally stated as a empirical value
indicating the time in hours and minutes required for
cement paste to stiffen sufficiently to resist to an
established degree, the penetration of a weighted test
needle; also applicable to concrete or mortar with use
of suitable test procedure.
Initial setting The time required for a freshly mixed cement paste,
time mortar, or concrete to achieve initial set.
Initial stresses The stresses occurring in prestressed concrete members

307
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

before any losses occur.

I-section Beam cross section consisting of top and bottom
flanges connected by a vertical web.
Isolation joint A separation between adjoining parts of a concrete
structure, usually a vertical plane, at a designed
location such as to interfere least with performance of
the structure, yet such as to allow relative movement in
three directions and avoid formation of cracks
elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or part
of the bonded reinforcement is interrupted.
Jack A mechanical device used for applying force to
prestressing tendons, for adjusting elevation of forms
or form supports, and for raising objects small
distances.
Jacking device The device used to stress the tendons for prestressed
concrete; also the device for raising a vertical slipform.
Jacking force In prestressed concrete, the temporary force exerted by
the device which introduces tension into the tendons.
Jacking stress The maximum stress occurring in a prestress tendon
during stressing.
Jaw crusher A machine having two inclined jaws, one or both being
actuated by a reciprocating motion so that the charge is
repeatedly “nipped” between the jaws.
Joint A physical separation in concrete, whether precast or
cast-in-place, including cracks if intentionally made to
occur at specified locations; also the region where
structural members intersect, such as a beam-column
joint.
Joint filler Compressible material used to fill a joint to prevent the
infiltration of debris and to provide support for
sealants.
Joint sealant Compressible material used to exclude water and solid
foreign materials from joints.
Joist A comparatively narrow beam, used in closely spaced
arrangements to support floor or roof slab (which
require no reinforcement except that required for
temperature and shrinkage stresses); also a horizontal
structural member such as that which supports deck
form sheathing.
Keyed Fastened or fixed in position in a notch or other recess.
Keyway A recess or groove in one lift or placement of concrete
which is filled with concrete of the next lift, giving
shear strength to the joint.
Kip 1000 lb force, equals 4448 newtons.
Knee brace Brace between horizontal and vertical members in a
building frame or formwork to make the structure more
stable; in formwork it acts as a haunch.
Lacing Horizontal bracing between shoring members.
Lagging Heavy sheathing used as in underground work to
withstand earth pressure.

308
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Laitance A layer of weak and nondurable material containing

cement and fines from aggregate, brought by bleeding
water to the top of overwet concrete; the amount is
generally increased by overworking or over-
manipulating concrete at the surface by improper
finishing or by job traffic.
Lap The length by which one bar reinforcement overlaps
another.
Lap splice A connection of reinforcing steel made by lapping the
ends of the bars.
Lapping The overlapping of reinforcing steel bars, welded wire
(reinforcing fabric, or expanded metal so that there may be
steel) continuity of stress in the reinforcing when the concrete
member is subjected to loading.
Lateral Usually applied to ties, hoops, and spirals in columns
reinforcement or column-like members.
Latex A water emulsion of a high molecular-weight polymer
used especially in coatings, adhesives, leveling
compounds, and patching compounds.
L-beam A beam having a cross section in the shape of an L; a
beam having a ledge on one side only.
L-column The portion of a precast concrete frame, composed of
the column, the haunch, and part of the girder.
Lever arm In a structural member, the distance from the conter of
the tensile reinforcement to the center of action of the
compression zone; also the perpendicular distance of a
transverse force from a point about which moment is
taken.
Lift The concrete placed between two consecutive
horizontal construction joints, usually consisting of
several layers or courses.
Limit design A method of proportioning reinforced concrete
members based on calculations of their strength.
Linear Prestressing applied to linear members such as beams,
prestressing columns etc.
Lining Any sheet, plate, or layer of martial attached directly to
the inside face of formwork to improve or alter the
surface texture and quality of the finished concrete.
Lintel A horizontal supporting member above an opening
such as a window or a door.
Load factor A factor by which a service load is multiplied to
determine a factored load used in the strength design.
Load-bearing A wall designed and built to carry super-imposed
wall vertical and shear loads.
Load-transfer The unit (basket or plate) designed to support or link
assembly dowel bars during concrete operations so as to hold
them in place while in the desired alignment.
Loading A hopper in which concrete or other free flowing
hopper material is deposited for discharge into buggies or other
conveyances used for delivery to the forms or to other

309
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

place or processing, use, or storage.

Locking device A device used to secure a cross brace in scaffolding to
the frame or panel.
Longitudinal Cracks that develop parallel to the length of a member.
cracks
Longitudinal A joint parallel to the length of a structure or pavement.
joint
Longitudinal Reinforcement parallel to the length of a concrete
reinforcement member or pavement
Loss Angeles Test for abrasion resistance of concrete aggregates.
Abrasion Test
Loss of The reduction in prestressing force which results from
prestress the combined effects of slip at anchorage, relaxation of
steel stress, frictional loss due to curvature in the
tendons, and the effects of elastic shortening, creep and
shrinkage of the concrete.
Lot A defined quantity.
Macadam, A road consisting of broken stone, crushed slag, or
cement-bound gravel and either a grout or mortar filer; formed by
rolling a base of stone, slag, or gravel to a compacted
mass having an even surface, and then rolling in the
cementitious filler.
Map cracking (1) Intersecting cracks that extend below the surface of
hardened concrete; caused by shrinkage of the drying
surface concrete which is restrained by concrete at
greater depths where either little or no shrinkage
occurs; vary in width from fine and barely visible to
open and well-defined. (2) The chief symptom of
chemical reaction between alkalies in cement and
mineral constituents in aggregate within hardened
concrete; due to differential rate of volume change in
different portions of the concrete; cracking is usually
random and on a fairly large scale, and in severe
instances the cracks may reach a width of 0.50 inch
(12.7mm).
Mat A continuous footing supporting an array of columns in
foundation several rows in each direction, having a slab-like shape
with or without depressions or openings, covering an
area at least 75 percent of the total area within the outer
limits of the assembly.
Matrix In the case of mortar, the cement paste in which the
fine aggregate particles are embedded; in the case of
concrete, the mortar in which the coarse aggregate
particles are embedded.
Mechanical (1) In general concrete construction, the physical
bond interlock between cement paste and aggregate, or
between concrete and reinforcement (specifically, the
sliding resistance of an embedded bar and not the
adhesive resistance). (2) In plastering, the physical
keying of a plaster coat to: (a) another, (b) to the plaster

310
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

base by means of plaster keys to the lath, or (c) through

interlock with adjacent plaster casts created by means
of scratching or cross raking.
Membrane A process that involve either liquid sealing compound
curing (e.g. bituminous and paraffinic emulsions, coal tar cut-
backs, pigmented and nonpigmented resin suspensions,
or suspensions of wax and drying oil) or nonliquid
protective coating (e.g. sheet plastics or “waterproof”
paper), both of which types function as films to restrict
evaporation of mixing water from the fresh concrete
surface.
Mesh The number of openings (including fractions thereof)
per unit of length in either a screen or sieve in which
the openings are ¼ inch (6mm) or less.
Microcracks Microscopic cracks within concrete.
Micron An obsolete term designating a unit of length equal to
one thousandth of a millimetre or one millionth of a
metre; superseded by micrometer (µm).
Middle strip In flat-slab framing, the slab portion which occupies
the middle half of the span between columns.
Mineral Aggregate consisting essentially of in-organic non-
aggregate metallic materials.
Mix The act or process of mixing; also mixture of materials,
such as mortar or concrete.
Mixing water The water in freshly mixed sand-cement grout, mortar,
or concrete, exclusive of any previously absorbed by
the aggregate (e.g. water considered in the computation
of the net water-cement ratio)
Mixer, The adequacy of a mixer in rendering a homogeneous
efficiency product within a stated period; homogeneity is
determinable by testing for relative differences in
physical properties or composition of samples extracted
from different portions of a freshly mixed batch.
Mixing cycle The time taken for a complete cycle in a batch mixer,
i.e. the time elapsing between successive repetitions of
the same operation (e.g. successive discharges of the
mixer).
Mixing speed Rotation rate of a mixer drum or of the paddles in an
open-top, pan, or trough mixer, when mixing a batch;
expressed in revolutions per minute (rpm), or in
peripheral feet per minute of a point on the
circumference at maximum diameter.
Mixing time The period during which the constituents of a batch of
concrete are mixed by a mixer; for a stationary mixer,
time is given in minutes from the completion of mixer
charging until the beginning of discharge; for a truck
mixer, time is given in total minutes at a specified
mixing speed or expressed in terms of total revolutions
at a specified mixing speed.
Mixture The assembled, blended, commingled ingredients of

311
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

mortar, concrete, or the like; of the proportions for their

assembly.
Modified cube A portion of a rectangular beam of hardened concrete
previously broken in flexure; used in determining the
compressive strength of the concrete.
Modified A Portland cement having moderate heat of hydration.
Portland
cement
Modular ratio The ratio of modulus of elasticity of steel Es, to that of
concrete Ec; usually denoted by the symbol n.
Module Any in a series of standardized units for use together in
erecting a structure.
Modulus, bulk The ratio of the change in average stress to the change
in unit volume.
Modulus of The ratio of compressive stress to cubical compression;
compression always positive for all physical substances; also known
as bulk modulus; related to Young’s modulus and
Poisson’ ratio by the equation
K = E ÷ 3 (1-2µ), where k = bulk modulus, E =
Young’s modulus, and
µ = Poisson’s ratio of the material under consideration.
Modulus of (1) A concept of modulus of elasticity expressed as a
deformation function of two time variables; strain in loaded
concrete as a function of the age at which the load is
initially applied and of the length of time the load is
sustained. (2) The ratio of stress to strain for a material
that does not deform in accordance with Hooke’s law
when subjected to applied load.
Modulus of The ratio of normal stress to corresponding strain for
elasticity tensile or compressive stress below the proportional
limit of the material; also referred to as elastic
modulus, Young’s modulus, and Young’s modulus of
elasticity; donated by the symbol E.
Modulus of The ratio of unit shearing stress to the corresponding
rigidity unit shearing strain; referred to as shear modulus and
modulus of elasticity in shear.
Modulus of A measure of the ultimate load-carrying capacity of a
rupture beam and sometimes referred to as rupture modulus or
rupture strength. It is calculated for apparent tensile
stress in the extreme fibre of a transverse test specimen
under the load which produces rupture. Note: the actual
stress in the extreme fibre is less than the apparent
stress since the flexure formula employed in the
calculation is valid only for stress within the
proportional limit of the material; nevertheless, the
nominal rupture strength so obtained is considered the
rupture modulus.
Mohs scale Arbitrary quantitative units, ranging from 1 through 10,
by means of which the scratch hardness of a mineral is
determined; each unit of hardness is represented by a

312
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

mineral that can scratch any other mineral having a

lower-ranking number; the minerals are ranked from
talc or 1 (the softest), upward through gypsum or 2,
calcite or 3, fluorite or 4, apatite or 5, orthoclase or 6,
quartz or 7, topaz or 8, corundum or 9, and diamond or
10 (the hardest).
Moist Slightly damp but not quite dry to the touch; the terms
“wet” implies visible free water “damp” implies less
wetness than wet and moist implies not quite dry.
Moist-air Curing in moist air (not less than 95 percent relative
curing humidity) at atmospheric pressure and normally at a
temperature approximating 73F (22.8C) temperature
and at least 95 percent relative humidity.
Moist room A room in which the atmosphere is maintained at a
selected temperature (usually 23.0+1.7C or 73.4+3.0F)
and a relative humidity of at least 95 percent, for the
purpose of curing and storing cementitious test
specimens; the facilities must be sufficient to maintain
free moisture continuously on the exterior of test
specimens; also known as a fog room.
Moisture The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the mass of
content of water in a given granular mass to the dry weight of the
aggregate mass.
Moisture-free The condition of a material that has been dried in air
until there is no further significant change in its mass.
Mold (1) a device containing a cavity into which neat
cement, mortar, or concrete test specimens are cast. (2)
A form used in the fabrication of precast mortar or
concrete units (e.g. masonry units).
Moment A method of structural analysis for continuous beams
distribution and rigid frames whereby successive converging
corrections are made to an assumed set of moments
until the desired precision is obtained.
Monolith A body of plain or reinforced concrete cast or erected
as a single integral mass or structure.
Monolithic On flatwork: a higher quality, more serviceable topping
topping course placed promptly after the base course has lost
all slump and bleed water.
Moving forms Large prefabricated units of formwork incorporating
supports, and designed to be moved horizontally on
rollers or similar devices, with a minimum amount of
dismantling between successive uses.
Multistage Prestressing performed in stages as the construction
stressing progresses.
Mushroom A four-way reinforced concrete girderless floor slab in
system of flat- which the column reinforcing bars are bent down into
slab the slab around the column head in radial directions
construction and additional reinforcing bars bent into rings laid upon
the radials, thus forming a spider web to provide
additional reinforcement at the column head and to

313
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

support the slab steel; mushroom designs of the true

flat-slab type do not involve drop panels around the
capitals of the columns.
Natural air- The process of drying cured concrete masonry units
drying without any special equipment (e.g the drying that
occurs in a covered storage area).
Natural Either a raw or calcined natural material that has
pozzolan pozzolanic properties (e.g. volcanic ash or pumicite,
opaline chert and shales, tuffs, and some diatomaceous
earths).
Natural sand Sand resulting from natural disintegration and abrasion
of rock.
Neat cement A fluid mixture of hydraulic cement and water, with or
grout without admixture; also the hardened equivalent of
such mixture.
Negative A condition of flexure in which top fibers of a
moment horizontally placed member, or external fibers of a
vertically placed exterior member, are subjected to
tensile stresses.
Negative Steel reinforcement for negative moment.
reinforcement
Neutral axis A line in the plane of a structural member subject to
bending where the longitudinal stress is zero.
Nominal The proportions of the constituents of a proposed
mixture concrete mixture.
Nominal Strength of a member or cross section calculated in
strength accordance with provisions and assumptions of the
strength design method before application of any
strength reduction factor.
Non-bearing A wall that supports no vertical load other than its own
wall weight.
Nonprestressed Reinforcing steel, not subjected to either pretensioning
reinforcement or post-tensioning.
Normal (1) the degree of wetness exhibited by a freshly mixed
consistency concrete, mortar, or neat cement grout when the
workability of the mixture is considered acceptable for
the purpose at hand. (2) The physical condition of neat
cement paste as determined with the Vicat apparatus in
accordance with a standard method of test.
Normal stress The stress component that is perpendicular to the plane
on which the force is applied; designated tensile if the
force is directed away from the plane and compressive
if the force is directed toward the plane.
Offset An abrupt change in alignment or dimension, either
horizontally or vertically; a horizontal ledge occurring
along a change in wall thickness of the wall above.
Offset bend An intentional distortion from the normal straightness
of a steel reinforcing bar in order to move the center
line of a segment of the bar to a position parallel to the
original position of the center line; a mechanical

314
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

operation commonly applied to vertical bars that

reinforce concrete columns.
Oven-dry The condition resulting from having been dried to
essentially constant mass, in an oven, at a temperature
that has been fixed, usually between 221 and 239F (105
and 115C).
Overdesign To require adherence to structural design requirements
higher than service demands, as a means of
compensating for statistical variation or for anticipated
deficiencies or both.
Overlay A layer of concrete or mortar, seldom thinner than 1
inch (25mm), placed on and usually bonded onto the
worn or cracked surface of a concrete slab to either
restore or improve the function of the previous surface.
Oversanded Containing more sand than would be necessary to
produce adequeate workability and a satisfactory
condition for finishing.
Overstretching Stressing of tendons to a value higher than designed for
the initial stress to: (a) overcome frictional losses, (b)
temporarily overstress the steel to reduce steel creep
that occurs after anchorage, and (c) counteract loss of
prestressing force that is caused by subsequent
prestressing of other tendons.
Overvibration Excessive use of vibrators during placement of freshly
mixed concrete, causing segregation, stratification, and
excessive bleeding.
Panel (1) A section of form sheathing, constructed from
boards, plywood, metal sheets, etc, that can be erected
and stripped as a unit. (2) A concrete member, usually
precast, rectangular in shape, and relatively thin with
respect to other dimensions.
Panel strip A strip extending across the length or width of a flat
slab for structural design and construction or for
architectural purposes.
Partial Prestressing to a stress level such that, under design
prestressing load, tensile stresses exist in the precompressed tensile
zone of the prestressed member.
Partial release Release into a prestressed concrete member of a
portion of the total prestress initially held wholly in the
prestressed reinforcement.
Pavement A layer of concrete over such areas as roads, sidewalks,
(concrete) canals, playgrounds, and those used for storage or
parking.
Pedestal An upright compression member whose height does
not exceed three times its average least dimension,
such as a short pier or plinth used as the base for a
column.
Percentage of The ratio of cross-sectional area of reinforcing steel to
reinforcement the effective cross-sectional area of a member,
expressed as a percentage.

315
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Permanent Any form that remains in place after the concrete has
form developed its design strength; it may or may not
become an integral part of the structure.
Permanent set Inelastic elongation or shortening.
Permeability to The rate of discharge of water under laminar flow
water, condition through a unit cross-sectional area of a
coefficient of porous medium under a unit hydraulic gradient and
standard temperature condition, usually 20C.
Petrography The branch of petrology dealing with description and
systematic classification of rocks aside from their
geologic relations, mainly by laboratory methods,
largely chemical and microscopical; also, loosely
petrology or lithology.
Phi (Ø) factor Capacity reduction factor (in structural design); a
number less than 1.0 (usually 0.65-0.90) by which the
strength of a structural member or element (in terms of
load, moment, shear, or stress) is required to be
multiplied in order to determine design strength or
capacity; the magnitude of the factor is stipulated in
applicable codes and construction specifications for
respective types of members and cross sections.
Pigment A colouring matter, usually in the form of an insoluble
fine powder.
Pile A slender timber, concrete, or steel structural element,
driven, jetted, or otherwise embedded on end in the
ground for the purpose of supporting a load or of
compacting the soil.
Pile bent Two or more piles driven in a row transverse to the
long dimension of the structure and fastened together
by capping and (sometimes) bracing.
Pile cap (1) A structural member that is placed on top of a
group of piles and used to transmit loads from the
structure through the pile group into the soil; the piles
may be connected to the cap with reinforcement to
resist uplift or with reinforcement to resist moment so
as to form a bent; also known as a rider cap or girder;
also a masonry, timber, or concrete footing resting on a
group of piles. (2) A metal cap or helmet temporarily
fitted over the head of a precast pile to protect it during
driving; some form of shock-absorbing material is
often incorporated.
Pipe column Column made of steel pipe; often filled with concrete.
Pipe pile A steel cylinder, usually between 10 and 24 inch (250
and 600mm) in diameter, generally driven with open
ends to firm bearing and then excavated and filled with
concrete, this pile may consist of several sections from
5 to 40 feet (1.5 to 8m) long joined by special fitting
such as cast steel sleeves and is sometimes used with
its lower end closed by a conical steel shoe.
Pitting Development of relatively small cavities in a surface;

316
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

in concrete, localized disintegration, such as a popout;

in steel, localized corrosion evident as minute cavities
on the surface.
Placement The process of placing and consolidating concrete; a
quantity of concrete placed and finished during a
continuous operation; in appropriately referred to as
pouring.
Placing The deposition, distribution, and consolidation of
freshly mixed concrete in the place where it is to
harden; inappropriately referred to as pouring.
Plain bar A reinforcing bar without surface deformations, or one
having deformations that do not conform to the
applicable requirements.
Plane of The plane along which a body under stress will tend to
weakness fracture; may exist by design, by accident, or because
of the nature of the structure and its loading.
Plaster A cementitious material or combination of
cementitious material and fine aggregate that, when
mixed with a suitable amount of water, forms a plastic
mass or paste which when applied to surface, and
harden to it and subsequently hardens, preserving in a
rigid state the form or texture imposed during the
period of plasticity; also the placed and hardened
mixture.
Plastic Condition of freshly mixed cement paste, mortar, or
consistency concrete such that deformation will be sustained
continuously in any direction without rupture.
Plastic Cracking that occurs in the surface of fresh concrete
cracking soon after it is placed and while it is still plastic.
Plastic hinge Region where ultimate moment capacity in a member
may be developed and maintained with corresponding
significant inelastic rotation as main tensile steel
elongates beyond yield strain.
Plastic limit The water content at which a soil will just begin to
crumble when rolled into a thread approximately 1/8
inch (3mm) in diameter.
Plasticity A complex property of a material involving a
combination of qualities of mobility and magnitude of
yield value; the property of freshly mixed cement
paste, concrete, or mortar that determines its resistance
to deformation or ease of molding.
Plasticity index The range in water content through which a soil
remains plastic; numerical difference between the
liquid limit and the plastic limit.
Plasticize To produce plasticity or to render plastic.
Plasticizer A material that increases the plasticity of a fresh
cement paste, mortar, or concrete.
Plate (1) In formwork for concrete: a flat, horizontal member
either at the top or bottom, or both, of studs or posts; a
mud sill if on the ground. (2) In structural design: a

317
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

member, the depth of which is substantially less than

its length and width.
Plum A large random-shaped stone dropped into freshly
placed mass concrete to economize on the volume of
the concrete.
Plumb Vertical or to make vertical.
Pneumatic feed Shortcrete delivery equipment in which material is
conveyed by a pressurized air stream.
Point load A load whose area of contact with the resisting body is
negligible in comparison with the area of the resisting
body.
Point of The point on the length of a structural member
inflection subjected to flexure where the curvature changes from
concave to convex or conversely and at which the
bending moment is zero; also called “point of
contraflexure”, location of an abrupt bend in a plotted
locus of points in a graph.
Poisson’s ratio The ratio of transverse (lateral ) strain to the
corresponding axial (longitudinal) strain resulting from
uniformly distributed axial stress below the
proportional limit of the material; the value will
average about 0.2 for concrete and 0.25 for most
metals.
Polish or final The final operation in which fine abrasives are used to
grind hone a surface to its desired smoothness and
appearance.
Polyester One of a large group of synthetic resins, mainly
produced by reaction of dibasic acids with dihydroxy
alcohols; commonly prepared for application by mixing
with a vinyl-group monomer and free-radical catalysts
at ambient temperatures and used as binders for resin
mortars and concrete, fiber laminates (mainly glass),
adhesives, and the like.
Polyethylene A thermoplastic high-molecular-weight organic
compound used in formulating protective coatings or,
in sheet form, as a protective cover for concrete surface
during the curing period, or to provide a temporary
enclosure for construction operations.
Polymer The product of polymerisation; more commonly a
rubber or resin consisting of large molecules formed by
polymerisation.
Polymerisation The reaction in which two or more molecules of the
same substance combine to form a compound
containing the same elements, and in the same
proportions, but of higher molecular weight, from
which the original substance can be generated, in some
cases only with extreme difficulty.
Polystyrene Synthetic resin, varying from colourless to yellow,
resin formed by the polymerisation of styrene on heating
with or without catalysts, that may be used in paints for

318
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

concrete, or for making sculptured molds, or as

insulation.
Polysufide A protective coating system prepared by polymerising
coating a chlorinated alkyl polyether with an inorganic
polysulfide.
Polyurethane Reaction product of an isocyanate with any of a wide
variety of other compounds containing an active
hydrogen group; used to formulate tough, abrasion-
resistant coatings.
Polyvinyl Colourless, permanently thermoplastic resin; usually
acetate supplied as an emulsion or water-dispersible powder
characterized by flexibility, stability towards light,
transparency to ultraviolet rays, high dielectric
strength, toughness, and hardness; the higher the
degree of polymerisation, the higher the softening
temperature; may be used in paints for concrete.
Polyvinyl A synthetic resin prepared by the polymerisation of
chloride vinyl chloride, used in the manufacture of non-metallic
waterstops for concrete.
Popout The breaking away of small portions of a concrete
surface due to localized internal pressure which leaves
a shallow, typically conical, depression; small popouts
leave holes up to 10mm in diameter, medium popouts
leave holes 10 to 50mm in diameter, large popouts
leave holes greater than 50mm in diameter.
Porosity The ratio, usually expressed as a percentage of the
volume of voids in a material to the total volume of the
material including the voids.
Positive Wet-mix shotcrete delivery equipment in which the
displacement material is pushed through the material hose in a solid
mass by a piston or auger.
Positive A condition of flexure in which, for a horizontal simply
moment supported member, the deflected shape is normally
considered to be concave downward and the top fibers
subjected to compression stresses; for other members
and other conditions consider positive and negative as
relative terms. Note: for structural design and analysis,
moments may be designated as positive or negative
with satisfactory results as long as the sign convention
adopted is used consistently.
Positive Reinforcement for positive moment.
reinforcement
Post-tensioning A method of prestressing reinforced concrete in which
tendons are tensioned after the concrete has hardened.
Precast A concrete member that is cast and cured in other than
its final position; the process of placing and finishing
precast concrete.
Precast pile A reinforced pile manufactured in a casting plant or at
the site but not in its final position.
Pre-post- A method of fabricating prestressed concrete in which

319
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

tensioning some of the tendons are pretensioned and a portion of

the tendons are post-tensioned.
Preservation The process of maintaining a structure in its present
condition and arresting further deterioration.
Pressure line Locus of force points within a structure resulting from
combined prestressing force and externally applied
load.
Prestress To place a hardened concrete member or an assembly
of units in a state of compression prior to application of
service loads; the stress developed by prestressing,
such as by pretensioning or post-tensioning.
Prestressing High-strength steel used to prestress concrete,
steel commonly seven-wire strands, single wires, bars, rods,
or groups of wires or strands.
Pretensioning A method of prestressing reinforced concrete in which
the tendons are tensioned before the concrete has
hardened.
Pretensioning The casting bed on which pretensioned members are
bed manufactured and which resists the pretensioning force
prior to release.
Principal stress Maximum and minimum stessses at any point acting at
right angles to the mutually perpendicular planes of
zero shearing stress, which are designated as the
principal plans.
Proof stress Stress applied to materials sufficient to produce a
specified permanent strain; a specific stress to which
some types of tendons are subjected in the
manufacturing process as a mean of reducing the
deformation of anchorage, reducing the relaxation of
steel, or insuring that the tendon is sufficiently strong.
Proportioning Selection of proportions of ingredients to make the
most economical use of available materials to produce
mortar or concrete of the required properties.
Pumice A highly porous and vesicular lava usually of relatively
high silica content composed largely of glass drawn
into approximately parallel or loosely entwined fibres,
which themselves contain sealed vesicles.
Pumping (of The ejection of water, or water and solid materials such
pavements) as clay or silt along transverse or longitudinal joints
and cracks, and along pavement edges caused by
downward slab movement activated by the passage of
loads over the pavement after the accumulation of sage
of loads over the pavement after the accumulation of
free water on or in the base course, subgrade, or
subbase.
Punching (1) Shear stress calculated by dividing the load on a
shear column by the product of its perimeter and the
thickness of the base or cap or by the product of the
perimeter taken at one half the slab thickness away
from the column and the thickness of the base or cap.

320
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(2) Failure of a base when a heavily loaded column

punches a hole through it.
Purlin In roofs, a horizontal member supporting the common
rafters.
Putty A plaster composed of quick lime or hydrated lime and
water with or without plaster of paris or sand.
Quality Actions taken by an owner or his representative to
assurance provide assurance that what is being done and what is
being provided are in accordance with the applicable
standards of good practice for the work.
Quality control Action taken by a producer or contractor to provide
control over what is being done and what is being
provided so that the applicable standards of good
practice for the work are followed.
Quicklime Calcium oxide (CaO).
Raft A continuous slab of concrete, usually reinforced, laid
foundation over soft ground or where heavy loads must be
supported to form a foundation.
Rail-steel Reinforcing bars hot-rolled from standard T-section
reinforcement rails.
Ramming A form of heavy tamping of concrete, grout, or the like
by means of a blunt tool forcibly applied.
Raw mix Blend of raw materials, ground to desired fineness,
correctly proportioned, and blended ready for burning;
such as that used in the manufacture of cement clinker.
Reactive silica Several types of materials which react at high
material temperatures with Portland cement or lime during
autoclaving; includes pulverized silica, natural
pozzolan, and fly ash.
Rebound Aggregate and cement, or wet shotcrete, that bounces
away from the surface against which shotcrete is being
projected.
Rehabilitation The process of repairing or modifying a structure to a
desired useful condition.
Reinforcement Bars, wires, strands, or other slender members which
are embedded in concrete in such a manner that they
and the concrete act together in resisting forces.
Reinforcement Ratio of the effective area of the reinforcement to the
ratio effective area of the concrete at any section of a
structural member.
Relative The ratio of the quantity of water vapor actually
humidity present to the amount present in a saturated atmosphere
at a given temperature; expressed as a percentage.
Release agent Material used to prevent bonding of concrete to a
surface.
Repair To replace or correct deteriorated, damaged, or faulty
materials, components, or elements of a structure.
Reproducibility Variability among replicate test results obtained on the
same material in different laboratories; a quantity that
will be exceeded in only about 5 percent of the

321
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

repetitions by the difference, taken in absolute value, of

two single test results made on the same material in
two different, randomly selected laboratories; in use of
the term all variable factors should be specified.
Required Strength of a member or cross section required to resist
strength factored loads or related internal moments and forces in
such combinations as are stipulated in the applicable
code or specification.
Resin A natural or synthetic, solid or semisolid, organic
material of indefinite and often high molecular weight
having a tendency to flow under stress, usually has a
softening or melting range, and usually fractures
conchoidally.
Restoration The process of re-establishing the materials, form, and
appearance of a structure to those of a particular era of
the structure.
Restraint (of Restriction of free movement of fresh or hardened
concrete) concrete following completion of placing in formwork
or molds or within an otherwise confined space;
restraint can be internal or external and may act in one
or more directions.
Retardation Reduction in the rate of either hardening or setting or
both, i.e. an increase in the tie required to reach time of
initial and final setting or to develop early strength of
fresh concrete, mortar, or grout.
Retarder An admixture that delays the setting of cement paste,
and hence of mixtures such as mortar or concrete
containing cement.
Reveal The vertical surface forming the side of an opening in a
wall, as for a window or door; depth of exposure of
aggregate in an exposed aggregate finish.
Rib One of a number of parallel structural members
backing sheathing; the portion of a T-beam which
projects below the slab; in deformed reinforcing bars,
the deformations or the longitudinal parting ridge.
Ribbed panel A panel composed of a thin slab reinforced by a system
of ribs in one or two directions, usually orthogonal.
Rigid frame A frame depending on moment in joints for stability.
Rigid Pavement that will provide high bending resistance and
pavement distribute loads to the foundation over a comparatively
large area.
Roof insulation Low-density concrete used for insulating purposes only
and placed over a structural roof system.
Rough grind The initial operation in which coarse abrasives are used
to cut the projecting stone chips in hardened terrazzo
down to a level surface.
Rubbed finish A finish obtained by using an abrasive to remove
surface irregularities from concrete.
Rubble Rough stones of irregular shape and size, broken from
larger masses by geological processes or by quarrying;

322
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

concrete reduced to irregular fragments, as by

demolition or natural catastrophe.
Sack rub A finish for formed concrete surfaces, designed to
produce even texture and fill all pits and air holes after
dampening the surface, mortar is rubbed over the
surface; then, before the surface dries, a mixture of dry
cement and sand is rubbed over it with either a wad of
burlap or a sponge-rubber float to remove surplus
mortar and fill voids.
Sample Either a group of units, or portion of material, taken
respectively from a larger collection of units or a large
quantity of material, which serves to provide
information that can be used as a basis for action on the
larger collection or quantity or on the production
process; the terms is also used in the sense of a sample
of observations.
Sandblast A system of cutting or abrading a surface such as
concrete by a stream of sand ejected from a nozzle at
high speed by compressed air; often used for cleanup
of horizontal construction joints or for exposure of
aggregate in architectural concrete.
Sand box (or A tight box filled with clean, dry, sand on which rests a
sand jack) tight-fitting timber plunger that supports the bottom of
posts used in centering; removal of a plug from a hole
near the bottom of the box permits the sand to run out
when it is necessary to lower the centering.
Sand-coarse Ratio of fine to coarse aggregate in a batch of concrete,
aggregate ratio by mass or by volume.
Sand A measure of the relative proportions of detrimental
equivalent fine dust or claylike material or both in soils or fine
aggregate.
Sand stone A cemented or otherwise compacted sedimentary rock
composed predominantly of sand grains.
Saturation In general: the condition of coexistence in stable
equilibrium of either a vapor and a liquid or a vapor
and solid phase of the same substance at the same
temperature; (2) as applied to aggregate or concrete:
the condition such that no more liquid can be held or
placed within it.
Scaffolding A temporary structure for the support of deck forms,
cart ways, or workers, or a combinations of these such
as an elevated platform for supporting workers, tools,
and materials; adjustable metal scaffolding is
frequently adapted for shoring in concrete work.
Scale The oxide formed on the surface of the metal during
heating.
Scour Erosion of a concrete surface, exposing the aggregate.
Screed (1) To strike off concrete lying above the desired plane
or shape. (2) a tool for striking off the concrete surface,
sometimes referred to as a strikeoff.

323
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Screen Production equipment for separating granular material

according to size, using woven-wire cloth or other
similar device with regularly spaced apertures of
uniform size.
Sealing A liquid that is applied as a coating to the surface of
compound hardened concrete to either prevent or decrease the
penetration of liquid or gaseous media, e.g., water,
aggressive solutions, and carbon dioxide, during
service exposure.
Secondary In statically indeterminate structures, the additional
moment moments caused by deformation of structure due to the
applied forces; in statically indeterminate prestressed
concrete structures, the additional moments caused by
the use of a nonconcordant prestressing tendon.
Section A term pertaining to the cross section of a flexural
modulus member; the section modulus with respect to either
principal axis is the moment of inertia with respect to
that axis divided by the distance from that axis to the
most remote point of the tension or compression area
of the section, as required; the section modulus is used
to determine the flexural stress in a beam.
Segmental A structural member made up of individual elements
member prestressed together to act as a monolithic unit under
service loads.
Segregation The differential concentration of the components of
mixed concrete, aggregate, or the like resulting in
nonuniform proportions in the mass.
Separation The tendency, as concrete is caused to pass from the
unconfined ends of chutes or conveyor belts or similar
arrangements, for coarse aggregate to separate from the
concrete and accumulate at one side; the tendency, as
processed aggregate leaves the ends of conveyor belts,
chutes, or similar devices with confining sides, for the
larger aggregate to separate from the mass and
accumulate at one side; or the tendency for the solids to
separate from the water by gravitational settlement.
Service dead The dead weight supported by a member.
load
Service live The live load specified by the general building code or
load bridge specification, or the actual nonpermanent load
applied in service.
Set The condition reached by a cement paste, mortar, or
concrete when it has lost plasticity to an arbitrary
degree, usually measured in terms of resistance to
penetration or deformation; initial set refers to first
stiffening; final set refers to attainment of significant
rigidity; also, strain remaining after removal of stress.
Settlement Sinking of solid particles in grout, mortar, or fresh
concrete, after placement and before initial set.
Settlement A reduction in volume of concrete prior to the final set

324
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

shrinkage of cementitious mixtures, caused by settling of the

solids.
Setting The lowering in elevation of sections of pavement or
structures due to their mass, the loads imposed on
them, or shrinkage or displacement of the support.
Sharp sand Coarse sand consisting of particles of angular shape.
Shear An internal force tangential to the plane on which it
acts.
Shearhead Assembled unit in the tip of the columns of flat slab or
flat plate construction to transmit load from slab to
column.
Shear Reinforcement designed to resist shear or diagonal
reinforcement tension stresses.
Shear strength The maximum shearing force a flexural member can
support at a specific location as controlled by the
combined effects of shear force and bending moment.
Shear stress The stress component acting tangentially to a plane.
Shear wall A wall portion of a structural frame intended to resist
lateral forces, such as earthquake, wind, and blast,
acting in the plane of the wall.
Sheath An enclosure in which post-tensioning tendons are
encased to prevent bonding during concrete placement.
Sheathing The material forming the contact face of forms; also
called lagging or sheeting.
Sheet pile A pile in the form of a plank driven in close contract or
interlocking with other to provide a tight wall to resist
the lateral pressure of water, adjacent earth, or other
materials; may be tongued and grooved if made of
timber or concrete and interlocking if made of metal.
Shell Construction using thin curved slabs.
construction
Shock load Impact of material such as aggregate or concrete as it is
released or dumped during placement.
Shooting Placing of shotcrete.
Shore A temporary support for form work and fresh concrete
or for recently built structures which have not
developed full design strength; also called prop, tom,
post, strut.
Shoring Props or posts of timber or other material in
compression used for the temporary supports of
excavations, formwork or unsafe structures; the process
of erecting shores.
Shoring, Metal or wood load-carrying strut, beam, or trussed
horizontal section use to carry a shoring load from one bearing
point, column, frame, post, or wall to another; may be
adjustable.
Shotcrete Mortar or concrete pneumatically projected at high
velocity onto a surface; also known as air-blown
mortar, pneumatically applied mortar or concrete,
sprayed mortar, and gunned concrete.

325
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Shoulder An unintentional offset in a formed concrete surface

usually caused by bulging or movement of formwork.
Shrinkage Decrease in either length or volume. Note: may be
restricted to effects of moisture content or chemical
changes.
Shrinkage, Shrinkage resulting from carbonation.
carbonation
Shrinkage, Shrinkage that takes place before cement paste, mortar,
plastic grout, or concrete sets.
Shrinkage- See cement, expansive.
compensating
cement
Shrinkage Crack due to restraint of shrinkage.
crack
Shrinkage Cracking of a structure or member due to failure in
cracking tension caused by external or internal restraints as
reduction in moisture content develops, or as
carbonation occurs, or both.
Shrinkage The maximum water content at which a reduction in
limit water content will not cause a decrease in volume of
the soil mass.
Shrinkage loss Reduction of stress in prestressing steel resulting from
shrinkage of concrete.
Shrinkage Reinforcement designed to resist shrinkage stresses in
reinforcement concrete.
Shuttering See formwork
Si (System The modern metric system;
International)
Sieve A metallic plate or sheet, a woven-wire cloth, or other
similar device, with regularly spaced apertures of
uniform size, mounted in suitable frame or holder for
use in separating granular material according to size.
Sieve analysis Particle size distribution; usually expressed as the
weight percentage retained upon each of a series of
standard sieves of decreasing size and the percentage
passed by the sieve of finest size.
Sieve Correction of a sieve analysis to adjust for deviation of
correction sieve performance from that of standard calibrated
sieves.
Sieve fraction That portion of a sample which passed through
standard sieve of specified size and is retained by some
finer sieve of specified size.
Sieve number A number used to designate the size of a sieve, usually
the approximate number of openings per linear inch;
applied to sieve with openings smaller than 6.3 mm
(1/4 in.)
Sieve size Nominal size of openings between cross wires of a
testing sieve.
Silica Silicon dioxide (SiO 2 )
Simple beam A beam without restraint or continuity at its supports;

326
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

also known as a simply supported beam.

Skid resistance A measure of the frictional characteristics of a surface.
Slab A flat, horizontal or nearly so, molded layer of plain or
reinforced concrete, usually of uniform by sometimes
of variable thickness, either on the ground or supported
by beams columns, walls, or other framework.
Slabjacking The process of either raising concrete pavement slabs
or filling voids under them, or both, by injecting
material (cementitous, noncementitious, or as phalitc)
under pressure.
Slender beam A beam, which, if loaded to failure without lateral
bracing of the compression flange, would fail by
buckling rather than in flexure.
Slenderness The effective unsupported length of a uniform column
ratio divided by the least radius of gyration of the cross-
sectional area.
Slip Movement occurring between steel reinforcement and
concrete in stressed reinforced concrete, indicating an
chorage breakdown.
Slipform A form that is pulled or raised as concrete is placed;
may move in a generally horizontal direction to lay
concrete evenly for highway paving or on slopes and
inverts of canals, tunnels, and siphons; or may move
vertically to form walls, bins, or silos.
Sloped footing A footing having sloping top or side faces.
Sloughing Subsidence of shotcrete, plaster, or the like, due
generally to excessive water in the mixture; also called
sagging.
Slugging Pulsating and intermittent flow of shotcrete material
due to improper use of delivery equipment and
materials.
Slump A measure of consistency of freshly mixed concrete,
mortar, or stucco equal to the subsidence measured to
the nearest ¼ in. (6mm) of the molded specimen
immediately after removal of the slump cone.
Slump cone A mold in the form of the lateral surface of the frustum
of a cone with base diameter of 8 in. (203 mm), top
diameter 4 in. (102 mm), and height 12 in. (305 mm),
used to fabricate a specimen of freshly mixed concrete
for the slump test; a cone 6 in. (152 mm), high is used
for tests of freshly mixed mortar and stucco.
Slump loss The amount by which the slump of freshly mixed
concrete changes during as period of time after an
initial slump test was made on a sample or samples
thereof.
Slump test The procedure for measuring slump.
Slurry A mixture of water and any finely divided insoluble
material, such as Portland cement, slag, or clay in
suspension.
Soffit The underside of a part or member of a structure, such

327
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

as a beam, stairway, or arch

Solid panel A solid slab, usually of constant thickness.
Solubility The amount of one material that will dissolve in
another, generally expressed as mass percent, or as
volume percent, or parts per 100 parts of solvent by
mass or volume at a specified temperature.
Solution A liquid consisting of at least two substances, one of
which is a liquid solvent in which the other or others,
which may be either solid or liquid are dissolved.
Solvent A liquid in which another substance may be dissolved.
Soundness The freedom of a solid from cracks, flaws, fissures, or
variations from an accepted standard, in the case of a
cement, freedom from excessive volume change after
setting; in the case of aggregate, the ability to withstand
the aggressive action to which concrete containing it
might be exposed, particularly that due to weather.
Spacer Device that maintains reinforcement in proper position,
also a device for keeping wall forms apart at a given
distance before and during concreting.
Spacing factor An index related to the maximum distance of any point,
in a cement paste or in the cement paste fraction of
mortar or concrete, from the periphery of an air void;
also known as powers’ spacing factor.
Spall A fragment, usually in the shape of a flake, detached
from a larger mass by a blow, by the action of weather,
by pressure, or by expansion within the larger mass; a
small spall involves a roughly circular depression not
greater than 20 mm in depth and 150 mm in any
dimension; a large spall, may be roughly circular or
oval or in some cases elongated, is more than 20 mm
in depth and 150 mm in greatest dimension.
Spalling The development of spalls
Span Distance between the support reactions of members
carrying transverse loads.
Span-depth The numerical ratio of total span to member depth.
ratio
Specific The ratio of the mass of a volume of a material at a
gravity stated temperature to the mass of the same volume of
distilled water at a stated temperature. (1) Apparent
specific gravity the ratio of the mass of a volume of the
impermeable portion of a material at a stated
temperature to the mass of an equal volume of distilled
water at a stated temperature. (2) Bulk specific gravity
the ratio of the mass of a volume of a material
(including the permeable and impermeable voids in the
material, but not including the voids between particles
of the material), at a stated temperature to the mass of
an equal volume of distilled water at a stated
temperature, (3) Bulk specific gravity (saturated
surface-dry) the ratio of the mass of a volume of a

328
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

material, including the mass of water within the voids

(but not including the voids between particles) at a
stated temperature to the mass of an equal volume of
distilled water at a stated temperature.
Specific The ratio of the mass of aggregates (including all
gravity factor moisture), as introduced into the mixer, to the effective
volume displaced by the aggregates.
Specimen A piece or portion of a sample used to make a test.
Spiral Continuously wound reinforcement in the form of a
reinforcement cylindrical helix.
Spirally A column in which the vertical bars are enveloped by
reinforced spiral reinforcement, i.e.; closely spaced continuous
column hooping.
Splice Connection of one reinforcing bar to another by
lapping, welding mechanical couplers, or other means;
connection of welded wire fabric by lapping;
connection of piles by mechanical couplers.
Splitting Tensile strength of concrete determined by a splitting
tensile strength tensile test.
Splitting A test for tensile strength in which a cylindrical
tensile test specimen is loaded to failure in diametral compression
(diametral applied along the entire length.
compression
test
Spread footing A generally rectangular prism of concrete, larger in
lateral dimensions than the column or wall it supports,
to distribute the load of a column or wall to the
subgrade.
Stain Discoloration foreign matter.
Stabilizer A substance that makes either a solution or suspension
more stable, usually by keeping particles from
precipitating.
Standard Exposure of test specimens to specified conditions of
curing moisture and temperature.
Standard The root mean square deviation of individual values
deviation from their average.
Standard hook A hook at the end of a reinforcing bar made in
accordance with a standard.
Static load The weight of a single stationary body or the combined
weights of all stationary bodies in a structure (such as
the load of a stationary vehicle on a roadway); or,
during construction, the combined weight of forms,
stringers, joists, reinforcing bars, and the actual
concrete to be placed.
Static modulus The value of Young’s modulus of elasticity obtained by
of elasticity arbitrary criteria from measured stress-strain
relationships derived from other than dynamic loading
Steam curing Curing of concrete, mortar, grout or neatcement paste
in water vapor at atmospheric or higher pressures and
at temperatures between about 100 & 420F (40 & 215C).

329
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Steam-curing The time interval between the start of the temperature

cycle rise period and the end of the soaking period or the
cooling-off period; also a schedule indicating the
duration of and the temperature range of the periods
that make up the cycle.
Steam-curing A chamber for steam curing of concrete products at
room atmospheric pressure.
Stem bars Bars used in the wall section of a cantilevered retaining
wall or in the webs of a box; when a cantilevered
retaining wall and its footing are considered as an
integral unit, the wall is often referred to as the stem of
the unit.
Stiffness factor A measure of the stiffness of a structural member; for a
prismatic member, it is equal to the ratio of the product
of the moment of inertia of the cross section and the
modulus of elasticity for the material to the length of
the member.
Stirrup A reinforcement used to resist shear and diagonal
tension stresses in a structural member, typically a steel
bar bent into a U or box shape and installed
perpendicular to or at an angle to the longitudinal
reinforcement, and properly anchored; lateral
reinforcement formed of individual units, open or
closed, or of continuously wound reinforcement.
Strain The change in length per unit of length, in a linear
dimension of a body; a dimensionless quantity which
may be measured conveniently in percent, in inches per
inch, in millimeters per millimeters, but preferably in
millionths.
Strain, unit Deformation of a material expressed as the ratio of
linear unit deformation to the distance within which
that deformation occurs.
Strand A prestressing tendon composed of a number of wires
twisted above center wire or core.
Strength A generic term for the ability of a material to resist
strain or rupture induced by external forces.
Strength- A design method which requires service loads to be
design method increased by specified load factors and computed
nominal strengths to be reduced by the specified phi
(Ø) factors.
Strength- See (Ø) factor stress intensity of internal force (i.e.,
reduction force per unit area) exerted by either of two adjacent
factor parts of a body on the other across an imagined plane
of separation; when the forces are parallel to the plane,
the stress is called shear stress; when the forces are
normal to the plane, the stress is called normal stress;
when the normal stress is directed toward the part on
which it acts, it is called compressive stress; when the
normal stress is directed away from the part on which it
acts, it is called tensile stress.

330
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Stress The time-dependent decrease in stress in a material

relaxation held at constant strain.
Stress-strain A diagram in which corresponding values of stress and
diagram strain are plotted against each other; values of stress are
usually plotted as ordinates (vertically) and values of
strain as abscissas (horizontally).
Stringer A secondary flexural member which is parallel to the
longitudinal axis of a bridge or other structure.
Strip To remove formwork or a mold; also a long thin piece
of wood, metal, or other material.
Strip A continuous foundation wherein the length
foundation considerably exceeds the breadth.
stripping The removal of formwork or a mold.
Structural See concrete, structural.
concrete
Stucco A cement plaster used for coating exterior walls and
other exterior surfaces of buildings.
Stud (1) Member of appropriate size and spacing to support
sheathing of concrete forms; (2) A headed steel device
used to anchor steel plates or shapes to concrete
members.
Subbase A layer in a pavement system between the sub grade
and the base course, or between the subgrade and a
portland-cement concrete pavement.
Subgrade The soil prepared and compacted to support a structure
or a pavement system.
Substructure All of that part of a structure below grade.
Sulfate attack Either a chemical or a physical reaction or both
between sulfates usually in soil or ground water and
concrete or mortar; the chemical reaction is primarily
with calcium aluminate hydrates in the cement-paste
matrix, often causing deterioration.
Sulfate Ability of concrete or mortar to with stand sulfate
resistance attack
Surface Free water retained on surfaces of aggregate particles
moisture and considered to be part of the mixing water in
concrete, as distinguished from absorbed moisture.
Surface texture Degree of roughness or irregularity of the exterior
surfaces of aggregate particles and also of hardened
concrete.
Surface voids Cavities visible on the surface of a solid.
Swelling Increase in either length or volume.
Tamper (1) An implement used to consolidate concrete or
mortar in molds or forms. (2) A hand-operated device
for consolidating floor topping or other unformed
concrete by impact from the dropped device in
preparation for strikeoff and finishing; contact surface
often consists of a screen or a grid of bars to force
coarse aggregates below the surface to prevent
interference with floating or trowelling.

331
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Tamping The operation of consolidating freshly placed concrete

by repeated blows or penetrations with a tamper.
Temperature Cracking due to tensile failure, caused by temperature
cracking drop in members subjected to external restraints or by
temperature differential in members subjected to
internal restraints.
Temperature The increase of temperature caused by either
rise absorption of heat or internal generation of heat, e.g.,
hydration of cement in concrete.
Temperature Stress in a structure or a member due to changes or
stress differentials in temperature in the structure or member.
Tempering The addition of water and mixing of concrete or mortar
as necessary to bring the mixture initially to the desired
consistency.
Template A thin plate or board frame used as a guide in
positioning or spacing form parts, reinforcement, or
anchors, also a full size mold, pattern, or frame, shaped
to serve as a guide in forming or testing contour or
shape.
Temporary A stress that may be produced in a precast concrete
stress member, or in a component of a precast concrete
member, during fabrication or erection, or in cast-
inplace concrete structures due to construction or test
loadings.
Tendon A steel element such as wire, cable, bar rod, or strand,
or a bundle of such elements, primarily used in tension
to impart compressive stress to concrete.
Tensile Maximum unit stress that a material is capable of
strength resisting under axial tensile loading; based on the
cross-sectional area of the specimen before loading.
Tension Reinforcement designed to carry tensile stresses such
reinforcement as those in the bottom of a simple beam
Tetracalcium A compound in the calcium aluminoforrite series,
aluminoferrite having the composition 4CaO.Al2O3Fe2O3,
abbreviated C4AF, which is usually assumed to be the
aluminoferrite present when compound calculations are
made from the results of chemical analysis of Portland
cement.
Texture The pattern or configuration apparent in an exposed
surface, as in concrete and mortar, including roughness,
streaking, striation, or departure from flatness.
Texturing The process of producing a special texture on either
unhardened or hardened concrete.
T-head In precast framing, a segment of girder crossing the top
of an interior column; also the top of a shore formed
with a braced horizontal member projecting on two
sides forming a T-shaped assembly.
Thermal The property (of a particular body or assembly)
conductance measured by the ratio of steady-state heat flux in
common between two definite surface (time-rate of

332
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

heat flow per unit area of one surface, which must be

identified to the difference between the average
temperatures of the two surfaces).
Thermal The property (of a homogeneous body) measured by
conductivity the ratio of the steady-state heat flux (time-rate of heat
flow per unit area) to the temperature.
Thermal Contraction caused by decrease in temperature.
contraction
Thermal Expansion caused by increase in temperature.
expansion
Thermoplastic Becoming soft when heated and hard when cooled.
Threaded An anchorage device which is provided with threads to
anchorage facilitate attaching the jacking device and to effect the
anchorage
Tie (1) Loop of reinforcing bars encircling the longitudinal
steel in columns. (2) A tensile unit adapted to holding
concrete forms secure against the lateral pressure of
unhardened concrete.
Tied column A column laterally reinforced with ties.
Torsional The shear stress on a transverse cross section resulting
stress from a twisting action.
Toughness The property of matter which resists fracture by impact
or shock.
Tower A composite structure of frames, braces, and
accessories.
Transfer The act of transferring the stress in prestressing tendons
from the jacks or pretensioning bed to the concrete
member
Transfer bond In pretensioning, the bond stress resulting from the
transfer of stress from the tendon to the concrete .
Transfer The length from the end of the member where the
length tendon stress is zero to the point along the tendon
where the prestress is fully effective; also called
transmission length.
Transfer The concrete strength required before stress is
strength transferred from the stressing mechanism to the
concrete.
Transformed A hypothetical section of one material arranged so as to
section have the same elastic properties as a section of two
materials.
Transverse A joint normal to the longitudinal dimension of a
joint structural element, assembly of elements, slab, or
structure.
Transverse Prestress that is applied at right angles to the
prestress longitudinal axis of a member of slab.
Transverse Reinforcement at right angles to the longitudinal
reinforcement reinforcement.
Transverse See flexural strength and modulus of rupture.
strength
Tremie A pipe or tube through which concrete is deposited

333
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

under water, having at its upper end a hopper for filling

and a bail for moving the assemblage.
Tremie Seal The depth to which the discharge end of the tremie pipe
is kept embedded in the fresh concrete that is being
placed; a layer of tremie concrete placed in a coffer-
dam for the purpose of preventing the intrusion of
water when the cofferdam is dewatered.
Trial batch A batch of concrete prepared to establish or check
proportions of the constituents.
Triaxial A test in which a specimen is subjected to a confining
Compression hydrostatic pressure and then loaded axially to failure.
Test
Triaxial Test A test in which a specimen is subjected simultaneously
to lateral and axial loads.
Tricalcium A compound having the composition 3CaOAl 2 O 3
Aluminate. abbreviated C3A.
Tricalcium A compound having the composition 3CaOSiO 2
Silicate. abbreviated C3S, an impure form of which (alite) is a
main constituent of Portland cement.
Trowel finish The smooth or textured finish of an unformed concrete
surface obtained by trowelling.
Trowelling. Smooth and compacting the unformed surface of fresh
concrete by strokes of a trowel.
Trowwelling A motor driven device which operates orbiting steel
Machine. trowels on radial arms from a vertical shaft.
Tunnel lining A structural system of concrete, steel or other materials
to provide support for a tunnel for exterior loads, to
reduce water seepage, or to increase flow capacity.
Two way Reinforcement arranged in bands of bars at right angles
reinforcement. to each other.
Two way A system of reinforcement; bars rods,or wires placed at
system. right angles to each other in a slab and intended to
resist stress due to bending of the slab in two
directions.
Ultimate The moment at which a reinforced concrete section
design resisting reaches its usable flexural strength, commonly
moment. accepted for under-moment at which the concrete
compressive strain equals 0.003; an obsolete term.
Ultimate load. The maximum load that may be placed on a structure
or structural element before its failure.
Ultimate The bending moment at which a section reaches its
moment. ultimate usable strength, most commonly the moment
at which the tensile reinforcement reaches its specified
yield strength; an obsolete term.
Ultimate shear The loading at a section that result in the member
strength. failing in shear.
Ultimate The maximum resistance to a load or combination of
Strength. loadings a member or structure is capable of
developing before failure.
Ultimate See strength design method.

334
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

strength design
Unbonded A prestressed concrete member post-tensioned with
Member tendons that are not bonded to the concrete between the
end anchorages after stressing.
Unbonded post Post tensioning in which the tendons are not grouted
tensioning after stressing.
Unbonded A tendon that is permanently prevented from bonding
tendon to the concrete after stressing.
Unbraced Distance between lateral support.
length of
column
Undersize. Particles of aggregate passing a designated sieve.
Unit water The quantity of water per unit volume of freshly mixed
content concrete, often expressed as pounds or gallons per
cubic yard; the quantity of water on which the water-
cement ratio is based, not including water absorbed by
the aggregate.
Unsound. Not firmly made, placed or fixed, subject to
deterioration or disintegration during service exposure.
Volume Either an increase or decrease in volume due to any
change. cause.
Volume Change in volume produced by continued hydration of
change, cement, exclusive of effects of applied load and change
autogenous. in either thermal condition or moisture content.
Wall A vertical element used primarily to enclose or separate
spaces.
Warping A deviation of a slab or wall surface from its original
shape, usually caused by either temperature or moisture
differentials or both within the slab or wall.
Warping joint A joint with the sole function of permitting warping of
pavement slabs when moisture and temperature
differentials occur between the top and bottom of the
slabs. I.e. longitudinal or transverse joints with bonded
steel or tie bars passing through them.
Water cement The ratio of the amount of water, exclusive only of that
ratio absorbed by the aggregate, to the amount of a cement
in a concrete, mortar, grout , or cement paste mixture,
preferably stated as a decimal by mass and abbreviated
w/c.
Water proof Impervious to water in a either liquid or vapor state.
(Since nothing can be completely “impervious “to
water under infinite pressure over infinite time, this
term should not be used).
Water Property of a surface that resist wetting (by matter in
repellant. either liquid or vapor state) but permits passage of
water when hydrostatic pressure occurs.
Water tight. Impermeable to water except when under hydrostatic
pressure sufficient to produce structural discontinuity
by rupture.
Water void. Void along the underside of an aggregate particle or

335
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

reinforcing steel which formed during the bleeding

period; initially filled with bleed water.
Wearing A topping or surface treatment to increase the
course. resistance of a concrete pavement or slab to abrasion.
Weathering. Changes in color, texture, strength, chemical
composition or other properties of a natural or artificial
material due to the action of the weather.
Web Reinforcement placed in a concrete member to resist
reinforcement. shear and diagonal tension.
Wedge. A piece of wood or metal tapering to a thin edge; used
to adjust elevation or tighten form work.
Wedge A device for providing the means of an choring tendon
anchorage. by wedging.
Weigh Measuring the constituent materials for mortar or
batching. concrete by weight.
Welded-butt A reinforcing bar splice made by welding the butted
splice. ends.
Welded Reinforcement joined together by welding
reinforcement.
Welded-wire A series of longitudinal and transverse wires arranged
fabric. substantially at right angles to each other and welded
together at all points of intersection.
Welded-wire Welded-wire fabric in either sheets or rolls, used to
fabric reinforce concrete.
reinforcement.
Wet-cast A process for producing concrete items such as pipe
process. that uses concrete having a measurable slump,
generally placed from above, and consolidated by
vibration.
Wet process In the manufacture of cement, the process in which the
raw material are ground, blended, mixed, and pumped
while mixed with water; the wet process is chosen
where raw materials are extremely wet and sticky
which would make drying before crushing and grinding
difficult.
Wetting agent A substance capable of lowering the surface tension of
liquids, facilitating the wetting of solid surfaces and
permitting the penetration of liquids into the capillaries.
Wire wrapping Application of high tensile wire, wound under tension
by machines, around circular concrete or shotcrete
walls, domes, or other tension-resisting structural
components.
Workability that property of freshly mixed concrete or mortar which
determines the ease and homogeneity with which it can
be mixed, placed, consolidated, and finished.
Working load Forces normally imposed on a member in service.
Working stress Maximum permissible design stress using working-
stress design methods.
Working-stress A method of proportioning either structures or
design members for prescribed service loads at stresses well

336
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

below the ultimate, and assuming linear distribution of

flexural stresses and strains.
Woven-wire A prefabricated steel reinforcement composed of cold-
fabric drawn steel wires mechanically twisted together to
form hexagonally shaped openings.
Yellowing Development of yellow color or cast in white or clear
coatings as a consequence of aging.
Yield the volume of freshly mixed concrete produced from a
known quantity of ingredients; the total weight of
ingredients divided by the unit weight of the freshly
mixed concrete; also the number of units produced per
bag of cement or per batch of concrete.
Yield point That point during increasing stress when the proportion
of stress to strain becomes substantially less than it has
been at smaller values of stress.
Yield strength The stress. Less than the maximum attainable stress, at
which the ratio of stress to strain has dropped well
below its value at low stresses, or at which a material
exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the usual
proportionality of stress to strain.
Yoke A tie or clamping device around column forms or over
the top of wall or footing forms to keep them from
spreading because of the lateral pressure of fresh
concrete; also part of a structural assembly for
slipforming which keeps the forms from spreading and
transfers form loads to the jacks.
Young’s See modulus of elasticity.
modulus
Zone, See anchorage zone
anchorage

30-1.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Whenever the specifications permit the Contractor to select the method
or equipment to be used for any operation, it shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility to employ methods and equipment which will produce
satisfactory work under the conditions encountered and which will not
damage any partially completed portions of the work. All concrete
shall be fully supported until the required strength and age has been
reached.

337
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-2 CLASSES OF CONCRETE

30-2.1 GENERAL
The classes of concrete to be used in each part of the structure shall be
as specified or shown on the plans. If not shown or specified the
Engineer will designate the class of concrete to be used.

30-2.2 NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE

30-2.2.1 The classes of concrete recognized in these specifications shall be
designated: A1, A2, A3, B, C, D1, D2, D3, Y and Lean Concrete. The
class of concrete to be used shall be as called for on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer or specified in the Special Provisions. The
following requirements shall govern unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
30-2.2.2 Class A1 concrete shall be used everywhere, for non-reinforded and
reinforced concrete structures, except as noted below or directed by the
Engineer. Concrete placed under water shall be Class A2 with a
minimum cement content of three hundred fifty (350) kg per cubic
meter of concrete with a slump between ten (10) and fifteen (15) cm.
Concrete placed for piles shall be class A3 with a minimum cement
content of four hundred (400) kg per cubic meter.
30-2.2.3 Class B concrete shall be used only where specified.
30-2.2.4 Class C concrete shall be used for cribbing or as otherwise directed by
the Engineer or specified in the Special Provisions or on the Drawings.
30-2.2.5 Class D1, D2 or D3, concrete shall be used for pre-stressed and post-
tensioned elements, as indicated on drawings.
30-2.2.6 Class Y concrete shall be used as filler in steel grid bridge floors, in
thin reinforced sections, or as otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions.
30-2.2.7 Lean concrete shall be used in thin layers underneath footings and
when called for on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
The concrete of the various classes shall satisfy the requirements
shown in table 1 (page 339).

338
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Table 1

28 days Compressive Consistency Maximum

Min Max Size Strength
Classes (range in Permissible
Cement of Coarse
of (Min) (Min) Slump) Water
Kg/Cubic Aggregate
Concrete (Cylinder) (Cylinder) Vibrated Cement
Meter (mm)
(KG/Sq.cm) (lbs/Sq.inch) (mm) Ratio

A1 300 38 210 2400 25.75 0.58

A2 350 20 245 3000 25.75 0.58
A3 400 25 280 3500 100-150 0.58
B 250 51 170 2400 25-75 0.65
C 275 38 210 3000 25-75 0.58
D1 450 25 350 5000 50-100 0.40
D2 500 25 425 6000 50-100 0.40
D3 550 25 500 7000 50-100 0.40
Y 400 13 210 3000 25-75 0.58
Lean 175 51 100 1400 - -
concrete

30-2.3 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

Lightweight concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in
the special provisions or shown on the plans. When the special
provisions require the use of natural sand for a portion or all of the fine
aggregate, the natural sand shall conform to AASHTO M 6 (Annex-II).

339
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-3 MATERIALS

30-3.1 CEMENT
Portland cements shall conform to the requirements of Section 4 of
these specifications.

30-3.2 WATER
Water for concrete shall conform to the requirement of Section 1 of
these specifications.

30-3.3 FINE AGGREGATE

Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of
Section 10-3 of these specifications.

30-3.4 COARSE AGGREGATE

Coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of
Section 10-4 of these specifications.

30-3.5 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE

Lightweight aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C-330.

30-3.6 AIR-ENTRAINING AND CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

30-3.6.1 Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C-260 and Chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C-494. Unless otherwise specified, only Type A (Water
reducing), Type B (retarding), Type D (Water reducing and retarding),
Type F (Water-reducing, high range) or Type G (Water-reducing, high
range and retarding) shall be used. Admixtures containing chloride ion
(CI) in excess of 1% by weight of the admixture shall not be used in
reinforced concrete. Admixtures in excess of 0.1% shall not be used in
prestressed concrete.
30-3.6.2 A Certificate of Compliance signed by the manufacturer of the
admixture shall be furnished to the Engineer for each shipment of
admixture used in the work. Said Certificate shall be based upon
laboratory test results from an approved testing facility and shall
certify that the admixture meets the above specifications.
30-3.6.3 If more than one admixture s used, the admixtures shall be compatible
with each other and shall be incorporated into the concrete mix in

340
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

correct sequence so that the desired effects of all admixtures are

obtained.
30-3.6.4 Air-entraining and chemical admixtures shall be incorporated into the
concrete mix in a water solution. The water so included shall be
considered to be a portion of the allowed mixing water.

30-3.7 MINERAL ADMIXTURES

Fly ash pozzolans and calcined natural pozzolans for use as mineral
admixtures in concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-
618. The use of fly ash as produced by plants that utilize the limestone
injection process or use compounds of sodium, ammonium or sulphur,
such as soda ash, to control stack emissions shall not be used in
concrete. A certificate of Compliance, based on test results and signed
by the producer of the mineral admixture certifying that the material
conforms to the above specifications, shall be furnished for each
shipment used in the work.

30-3.8 STEEL
Materials and installation of reinforcing and prestressing steel shall
conform to the requirements of Section 15 & 31 of these specifications.

341
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-4 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE

30-4.1 MIX DESIGN

30-4.1.1 RESPONSIBILITY AND CRITERIA

30-4.1.1.1 The contractor shall be responsible for the performance of all concrete
mixes used in structures. The mix proportions selected shall produce
concrete that is sufficiently workable and finishable for all uses
intended and shall conform to the requirements in table 1 (page 339)
and all other requirements of this section. For normal weight concrete
the absolute volume method such as described in American Concrete
Institute Publication 211.1, shall be used in selecting mix proportions.
For structural lightweight concrete, the mix proportions shall be
selected on the basis of trial mixes with the cement factor rather than
the water/cement ratio being determined by the specified strength
using methods such as those described in American Concrete Institute
Publication 211.2.
30-4.1.1.2 The mix design shall be based upon obtaining an average concrete
strength sufficiently above the specified strength so that, considering
the expected variability of the concrete and test procedures, no more
than 1 in 10 strength tests will be expected to fall below the specified
strength. Mix designs shall be modified during the course of the work
when necessary to ensure compliance with strength and consistency
requirements.

30-4.1.2 TRAIL BATCH TESTS

For classes of concrete contained in table 1 (page 339), for lightweight
concrete and for other classes of concrete when specified or ordered by
the Engineer satisfactory performance o the proposed mix design shall
be verified by laboratory tests on trial batches. The results of such tests
shall be furnished to the Engineer by Contractor or the manufacturer of
precast elements at the time the proposed mix design is submitted. For
mix design approval, the strengths of a minimum of five test cylinders
taken from a trial batch shall average at least 800 psi greater than the
specified strength. If materials and a mix design identical to those
proposed for use have been used on other work, within the previous
year, certified copies of concrete test results from this work which
indicate full compliance with these specifications may be substituted
for such laboratory tests. If the results of more than 10 such strength
tests are available from historical records for the past year, average
strength for these tests shall be at least 1.28 standard deviations above
the specified strength.

30-4.1.3 APPROVAL
All mix designs, and any modifications thereto shall be approved by
the Engineer prior to use. Mix design data provided to the Engineer for

342
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

each class of concrete required shall include the name, source, type ,
and brand of each of the materials proposed for use and the quantity to
be used per cubic meter of concrete.

30-4.2 WATER CONTENT

For calculating the water/cement ratio of the mix, the weight of the
water shall be that of the total free water in the mix which includes the
mixing water, the water in any admixture solutions and any water in
the aggregates in excess of that needed to reach a saturated-surface-dry
condition. The amount of water used shall not exceed the limits listed
in table 1 (page 339) and shall be further reduced as necessary to
produce concrete of the consistencies listed in table 2 (page 343) at the
time of placement:

Table 2

Type of Work Nominal Slump Maximum Slump

Inches Inches
Formed Elements: 1-3 5
Sections Over 12" thick
Sections 12" thick or Less 1-4 5
Cast-in-place Piles and 5-8 9
Drilled Shafts not Vibrated
Concrete Placed under Water 5-8 9

When Type F or G high range water reducing admixtures are used, the
above listed slump limits may be exceeded as permitted by the
Engineer. When the consistency of the concrete is found to exceed the
nominal slump, the mixture of subsequent batches shall be adjusted to
reduce the slump to a value within the nominal range. Batches of
concrete with a slump exceeding the maximum specified shall not be
used in the work. If concrete of adequate workability cannot be
obtained by the use of the minimum cement content allowed, the
cement and water content shall be increased without exceeding the
specified water/cement ratio, or an approved admixture shall be used.

30-2.3 CEMENT CONTENT

The minimum cement content shall be as listed in table 1 (page 339) or
otherwise specified. The maximum cement or cement plus mineral
admixture content shall not exceed 30 lbs/Cft or 800 pounds per cubic
yard of concrete. The actual cement content used shall be within these
limits and shall be sufficient to produce concrete of the required
strength and consistency.

343
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-2.4 MINERAL ADMIXTURES

Mineral admixtures shall be used in the amounts specified. In addition,
when either Types I, II, IV, or V, cements are used and mineral
admixtures are neither specified nor prohibited, the Contractor will be
permitted to replace up to 20% of the required Portland cement with a
mineral admixture. The weight of the mineral admixture used shall be
equal to or greater than the weight of the Portland cement replaced. In
calculating the water/cement ratio of the mix, the weight o the cement
shall be considered to be the sum of the weights of the Portland cement
and the mineral admixture.

30-2.5 AIR-ENTRAINING AND CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES

Air-entraining and chemical admixtures shall be used as specified.
Otherwise, such admixtures may be used, at the option and expense of
the Contractor when permitted by the Engineer, to increase the
workability or alter the time of set of the concrete.

344
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-3 MANUFACTURE OF CONCRETE

The production of ready-mixed concrete shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C-94, and the requirements of the Section 30-
5.1 of these specifications. The production of concrete with stationary
mixers shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C-94
and the requirements of this article.

30-3.1 STORAGE OF AGGREGATE

The handling and storage of concrete aggregates shall be such as to
prevent segregation or contamination with foreign materials. The
methods used shall provide for adequate drainage so that the moisture
content of the aggregates is uniform at the time of batching. Different
sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate stock piles sufficiently
removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the
piles from becoming intermixed. When specified in table 1 (page 339)
or in the special provisions, the coarse aggregate shall be separated into
two or more sizes in order to secure greater uniformity of the concrete
mixture.

30-3.2 STORAGE OF CEMENT

The contractor shall provide suitable means for storing and protecting
cement against dampness. Cement which for any reason has become
partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected.
Cement held in storage for a period of over 3 months if bagged or 6
months if bulk, or cement which for any reason the Engineer may
suspect of being damaged, shall be subject to a retest before being used
in the work. Copies of cement records shall be furnished to the
Engineer, showing, in such detail, as he may reasonably require, the
quantity used during the day or run at each part of the work.

30-3.3 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIAL

Materials shall be measured by weighing, except as otherwise specified
or where other methods are specifically authorized. The apparatus
provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably
designed and constructed for this purpose. Each size of aggregate and
the cement shall be weighed separately. The accuracy of all weighing
devices shall be such that successive quantities can be measured to
within 1% of the desired amount. Cement in standard packages (sack)
need not be weighed., but bulk cement shall be weighed. The mixing
water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The accuracy of
measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not over 1%.
All measuring devices shall be subject to approval and shall be tested,
at the Contractor’s expense, when deemed necessary by the Engineer.

345
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

When volumetric measurements are authorized for projects, the weight

proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In
such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the
moisture condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in
the fine aggregate.

30-3.4 BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE

30-3.4.1 BATCHING
The size of the batch shall not exceed the capacity of the mixer as
guaranteed by the manufacturer. The measured materials shall be
batched and charged into the mixer by means that will prevent loss of
any materials due to effects of wind or other causes.

30-3.4.2 MIXING
30-3.4.2.1 The concrete shall be mixed only in the quantity required for
immediate use. Mixing shall be sufficient to thoroughly intermingle all
mix ingredients into a uniform mixture. Concrete that has developed an
initial set shall not be used. Retempering concrete by adding water will
not be permitted. For other than transit mixed concrete, the first batch
of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a sufficient
excess of cement, sand, and water to coat the inside of the drum
without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. When mixer
performance tests, as described in AASHTO M 157, are not made, the
required mixing time for stationary mixers shall be not less than 90
seconds nor more than 5 minutes. The minimum drum revolutions for
transit mixers at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer
shall not be less than 70 and not less than that recommended by the
manufacturer.
30-3.4.2.2 The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or
other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal
each time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device,
the Contractor will be permitted to operate while it is being repaired,
provided he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute
and second hands. If the timing device is not placed in good working
order within 24 hours, further use of the mixer will be prohibited until
repairs are made.
30-3.4.2.3 For small quantities of concrete needed in emergencies or for small
noncritical elements of the work, concrete my be hand-mixed using
methods approved by the Engineer. Between uses, any mortar coating
inside of mixing equipment which sets or dries shall be cleaned from
the mixer before use is resumed.

30-3.5 DELIVERY
The organization supplying concrete shall have sufficient plant
capacity and transporting apparatus to ensure continuous delivery at
the rate required. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting
operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing,

346
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval
between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes and shall be sufficient to
prevent joints within a monolithic pour caused by placing fresh
concrete against concrete in which initial set has occurred. The
methods of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will
facilitate placing with the minimum of rehandling and without damage
to the structure or the concrete.

30-3.6 SAMPLING AND TESTING

30-3.6.1 Compliance with the requirements indicated in this Section shall be
determined in accordance with the following standard methods of
AASHTO or ASTM:
30-3.6.2 Sampling Fresh Concrete, AASHTO T 141 (ASTM C 172)
30-3.6.3 Weight Per Cubic Foot, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of
Concrete, AASHTO T 121 (ASTM C 138)
30-3.6.4 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse AGGRGATE, AASHTO T 27
30-3.6.5 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete, AASHTO T 119 (ASTM C 143)
30-3.6.6 Air Content of FRESHLY Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method,
AASHTO T 152 (ASTM C 231)
30-3.6.7 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate, AASHTO T 84
(ASTM C 128)
30-3.6.8 Specific Gravity and Absorption of coarse Aggregate, AASHTO T 85
(ASTM C 127)
30-3.6.9 Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete, ASTM C 567
30-3.6.10 Making and Curing Concrete TEST Specimens in the Laboratory,
AASHTO T 126 (ASTM C 192)
30-3.6.11 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field, AASHTO T
23 (ASTM C 31)
30-3.6.12 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens, AASHTO T
22 (ASTM C 39)

30-3.7 EVALUATION OF CONCRETE STRENGTH

30-3.7.1 TESTS
A strength test shall consist of the average strength of two compressive
strength test cylinders fabricated from material taken from a single
randomly selected batch of concrete, except that, if any cylinder should
show evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, said cylinder
shall be discarded and the strength test shall consist of the strength of
the remaining cylinder.

30-3.7.2 FOR CONTROLLING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

For determining adequacy of cure and protection, and for determining
when loads or stresses can be applied to concrete structures, test
cylinders shall be cured at the structure site under condition that are not
more favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the portions
of the structure which they represent as described in Article 9.44 of
AASHTO T 23. Sufficient test cylinders shall be made and tested at

347
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the appropriate ages to determine when operations such as release of

false work, application of prestressing forces or placing the structure in
service can occur.

30-3.7.3 FOR ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE

For determining compliance of concrete with a specified 28-day
strength, test cylinders shall be cured under controlled conditions as
described in Article 9.3 of AASHTO T 23 and tested at the age of 28
days. Samples or acceptance tests for each class of concrete shall be
taken not less than once a day nor less than once for each 150 cubic
yards of concrete or once for each major placement. Any concrete
represented by a test which indicates a strength which is less than the
specified 28-day compressive strength by more than 500 psi will be
rejected and shall be removed and replaced with acceptable concrete

30-3.7.4 FOR CONTROL OF MIX DESIGN

Whenever the average of three consecutive tests, which were made to
determine acceptability of concrete, falls to less than 150 psi above the
specified strength or any single test falls more than 200 psi below the
specified strength, the Contractor shall, at own expense, make
corrective changes in the materials, mix proportions or in the concrete
manufacturing procedures before placing additional concrete of that
class. Such changes must be approved by the Engineer prior to use.

30-3.7.5 STEAM AND RADIANT HEAT-CURED CONCRETE

When a precast concrete member is steam or radiant heat-cured, the
compressive strength test cylinders made for any of the above purposes
shall be cured under conditions similar to the member. Such concrete
will be considered to be acceptable whenever a test indicates that the
concrete has reached the specified 28-day compressive strength
provided such strength is reached not more than 28 days after the
member is cast.

348
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-4 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

30-4.1 GENERAL
Precautions shall be taken as needed to protect concrete from damage
due to weather or other environmental conditions during placing and
curing operations. Concrete that has been frozen or otherwise damaged
by weather conditions shall be either repaired to an acceptable
condition or removed and replaced. The temperature of the concrete
mixture immediately before placement shall be between 50 F and 90 F,
except as otherwise provided herein.

30-4.2 RAIN PROTECTION

Under conditions of rain, the placing of concrete shall not commence
or shall be stopped unless adequate protection is provided to prevent
damage to the surface mortar or damaging flow or wash of the concrete
surface.

30-4.3 HOT AND WEATHER PROTECTION

When the ambient temperature is above 90 F, the forms reinforcing
steel, steel beam flanges, and other surfaces which will come in contact
with the mix shall be cooled to below 90 F by means of a water spray
or other approved methods. The temperature of the concrete at time of
placement shall be maintained within the specified temperature range
by any combination of the following:
i) Shading the materials storage areas or the production
equipment.
ii) Cooling the aggregates by sprinkling with water which
conforms to the requirements of Section 30-3.2 of these
specifications.
iii) Cooling the aggregates or water by refrigeration or replacing a
portion or all of the mix water with ice that is flaked or crushed
to the extent that the ice will completely melt during mixing of
the concrete.
iv) Liquid nitrogen injection.

30-4.4 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION

30-4.4.1 PROTECTION DURING CURE
When there is a probability of air temperatures below 35 F during the
cure period, the Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer
prior to concrete placement, a cold weather concreting and curing plan

349
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

detailing the methods and equipment which will be used to assure that
the required concrete temperatures are maintained. The concrete shall
be maintained at a temperature of not less than 45 F for the first six
days after placement except that when pozzolan cement or fly ash
cement is used, this period shall be as follows:

Percentage of Required Period of

Cement Replaced , Controlled
by Weight, With Temperature
Pozzolans
10% 8 Days
11-15 % 9 Days
16-20 % 10 Days

The above requirement for an extended period of controlled

temperature may be waived if a compressive strength of 65% of the
specified 28-day design strength is achieved in 6 days. If external
heating is employed, the heat shall be applied and withdrawn gradually
and uniformly so that no part of the concrete surface is heated to more
than 90 F or caused to change temperature by more than 20 F in 8
hours. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
and install two maximum-minimum type thermometers at each
structure site. Such thermometers shall be installed as directed by the
Engineer so as to monitor the temperature of the concrete and the
surrounding air during the cure period.

30-4.4.2 MIXING AND PLACING

When the air temperature is below 35 F, the temperature of the
concrete at the time of placement in sections less than 12 inches thick
shall be not less than 60 F. Regardless of air temperature, aggregates
shall be free of ice, frost and frozen lumps when batched and concrete
shall not be placed against any material whose temperature is 32 F or
less.

30-4.4.3 HEATING OF MIX

When necessary in order to produce concrete of the specified
temperature, either the mix water or the aggregates, or both, shall be
heated prior to batching. Heating shall be done in a manner which is
not detrimental to the mix and does not prevent the entrainment of the
required amount of air. The methods used shall heat the materials
uniformly. Aggregates shall not be heated directly by gas or oil flame
or on sheet metal over fire. Neither aggregates nor water shall be
heated to over 150 F. If either are heated to over 100 F, they shall be
mixed together prior to the addition of the cement so that the cement
does not come into contact with materials which are in excess of 100 F.

350
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-4.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BRIDGE DECKS

During periods of low humidity, wind or high temperatures and prior
to the application of curing materials, concrete being placed and
finished for bridge decks shall be protected from damage due to rapid
evaporation. Such protection shall be adequate to prevent premature
crusting of the surface or an increase in drying cracking. Such
protection shall be provided by raising the humidity of the surrounding
air with fog sprayers operated upwind of the deck, the use of wind-
breaks or sun-shades, additionally reducing of the temperature of the
concrete, scheduling placement during the cooler times of days or
nights, or any combination thereof. For bridge decks that are located
over or adjacent to salt water or when specified, the maximum
temperature of the concrete at time of placement shall be 80 F.

30-4.6 CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SALT WATER

Unless otherwise specifically provided, concrete for structures exposed
to salt or brackish water or concrete placed under water shall be class
A2. Such concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 2
minutes and the water content of the mixture shall be carefully
controlled and regulated so as to produce concrete of maximum
impermeability. The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated as
necessary to produce maximum density and a complete lack of rock
pockets. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the clear distance
from the face of the concrete to the reinforcing steel shall be not less
than 4 inches. No construction joints shall be formed between levels of
extreme low water and extreme high water or the upper limit of wave
action as determined by the Engineer. Between these levels the forms
shall not be removed, or other means provided, to prevent salt water
from coming in direct contact with the concrete for a period of not less
than 30 days after placement. Except for the repair of any rock pockets
and the plugging of form tie holes, the original surface as the concrete
comes from the forms shall be left undisturbed. Special handling shall
be provided for precast members to avoid even slight deformation
cracks.

30-4.7 CONCRETE EXPOSED TO SULFATE SOILS OR

WATER
When the special provisions identify the area as containing sulfate soils
or water, the concrete that will be in contact with such soil or water
shall be mixed, placed and protected from contact with soil or water as
required for concrete exposed to salt water except that the protection
period shall be not less than 72 hours.

351
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-5 FORM WORK

30-5.1 FORM WORK DESIGN

Forms work shall conform to the various shaped lines, grades and
dimensions of the concrete as shown on the drawings or as established
by the Engineer-in-charge. Their material and design shall be subject
to the approval by the Engineer-in-charge before their construction is
started. However, such approval shall not relieve the contractor of the
responsibility for the adequacy of the forms nor from the necessity for
remedying any defects which may develop or become apparent with
use. The Engineer-in-charge may at any time condemn any sections of
forms found deficient in any respect, and the contractor shall promptly
remove the condemned forms from the work and replace them at his
own expense.

30-5.2 FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION

i) Forms work to confine the concrete and shape it to the required
lines shall be used wherever necessary. They shall be made of
metal, of metal lined timber, or of smooth planed boards in
good condition.
ii) A smooth finished surface of the concrete shall be required.
The forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape
and size, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to
maintain their position and shape under loads and operations
incident to placing and vibrating the concrete.
iii) All forms when erected shall be tight. Adequate and suitable
means for removing the forms without injury to the surface of
the finished concrete shall be provided.
iv) Chamfer strips shall be placed in the form so as to produce
leveled edges on permanently exposed concrete surfaces if
indicated on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
v) All forms shall be properly secured in position so as to prevent
floating, or other movements, during the placing of concrete.
Form supports shall be carried to firm foundation so that no
settlement of the forms is possible during construction.
vi) Unless otherwise specified sliding forms shall be used for
enclosing vertical structures which maintain a constant section
to give a lift of concrete from 2 to 4 feet. In very tall structures
they shall be made to move continuously during concreting
operations.

352
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-5.3 TREATMENT OF FORMWORK SURFACE

Unless otherwise specified the faces of this formwork which come into
contact with the concrete shall be treated with parting agents, such as,
mineral oils, vegetables oils and soaps, before reinforcement is placed,
in order to prevent concrete from adhering to formwork and to reduce
the risk of damage when the formwork is struck.

30-5.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS

In all cases the contractor shall satisfy himself that reinforced and
prestressed concrete has thoroughly set before removing formwork and
shuttering or supports and shall obtain the permission of the Engineer-
in-charge before removing formwork, shuttering and supports. The
following minimum times shall elapse after depositing reinforced
concrete in forms before the later may be removed.

Cold Weather Hot Weather

Columns, sides to beams 3 days 2 days
Props to slabs and beams 10 days 7 days
Props to beams and slabs in 14 days 10 days
composite action

353
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-6 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE

30-6.1 GENERAL
30-6.1.1 Concrete shall be handled, placed, and consolidated by methods that
will not cause segregation of the mix and will result in a dense
homogeneous concrete which is free of voids and rock pockets. The
methods used shall not cause displacement of reinforcing steel or other
materials to be embedded in the concrete. Concrete shall be placed and
consolidated prior to initial set and in no case more than 1 ½ hours
after cement was added to the mix. Retempering the concrete by
adding water to the mix shall not be done.
30-6.1.2 Concrete shall not be placed until the forms, all materials to be
embedded and, for spread footings the adequacy of the foundation
material have been inspected and approved by the Engineer. All mortar
from previous placements, debris, and foreign material shall be
removed from the forms and steel prior to commencing placement. The
forms and subgrade shall be thoroughly moistened with water
immediately before concrete is placed against them. Temporary form
spreader devices may be left in place until concrete placement
precludes their need, after which they shall be removed.
30-6.1.3 Placement of concrete for each section of the structure shall be done
continuously without interruption between planned construction or
expansion joints. The delivery rate, placing sequence and methods
shall be such that fresh concrete is always placed and consolidated
against previously placed concrete before initial set has occurred in the
previously placed concrete.
30-6.1.4 During and after placement of concrete, care shall be taken not to
injure the concrete or break the bond with reinforcing steel. Workmen
shall not walk in fresh concrete. Platforms for workmen and equipment
shall not be supported directly on any reinforcing steel. Once the
concrete is set, forces shall not be applied to the forms or to reinforcing
bars, which project from the concrete, until the concrete is of sufficient
strength to resist damage.

30-6.2 SEQUENCE OF PLACEMENT

Whenever a concrete placement plan or schedule is specified or
approved, the sequence of placement shall conform to the plan. Unless
otherwise specifically permitted by such a placement plan, the
requirements of the following paragraphs shall apply.

30-6.2.1 VERTICAL MEMBERS

Concrete for columns and retaining walls, and other similar vertical
members shall be placed and allowed to set and settle for a period of
time before concrete for integral horizontal members, such as caps,
slabs, or footings is placed. Such period shall be adequate to allow

354
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

completion of settlement due to loss of bleed water and shall be not

less than 12 hours for vertical members over 15 feet in height and not
less than 30 minutes for members over 5 feet but not over 15 feet in
height. When friction collars or falsework brackets are mounted on
such vertical members and unless otherwise approved, the vertical
member shall have been in place at least 7 days and shall have attained
its specified strength before loads from horizontal members are
applied.

30-6.2.2 SUPERSTRUCTURES
30-6.2.2.1 Unless otherwise permitted, no concrete shall be placed in the
superstructure until substructure forms have been stripped sufficiently
to determine the character of the supporting substructure concrete.
30-6.2.2.2 Concrete for T_beam or deck girder spans whose depth is less than 4
feet may be placed in one continuous operation or may be placed in
two separate operations; first, to the top of the girder stems, and
second, to completion. For T-beam or deck girder spans whose depth is
4 feet or more and, unless the false work is nonyielding, such concrete
shall be placed in two operations and at least 5 days shall elapse after
placement of stems before the top deck slab is placed.
30-6.2.2.3 Concrete for box girders may be placed in two or three separate
operations consisting of bottom slab, girder stems and top slab. In
either case the bottom slab shall be placed first and, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer, the top slab shall not be placed until the
girder stems have been in place for at least 5 days.

30-6.2.3 ARCHES
The concrete in arch rings shall be placed in such a manner as to load
the centering uniformly and symmetrically. Arch rings shall be cast in
transverse sections of such size that each section can be cast in a
continuous operation. The arrangement of the sections and the
sequence of placing shall be as approved and shall be such as to avoid
the creation of initial stress in the reinforcement. The sections shall be
bonded together by suitable keys or dowels. Arch barrels for culverts
and unless prohibited by the special provisions, other arches may be
cast in a single continuous operation.

30-6.2.4 PRESENT ELEMENTS

The sequence of placement for concrete in precast elements shall be
such that sound well-consolidated concrete which is free of settlement
or shrinkage cracks is produced throughout the member.

30-6.3 PLACING METHODS

30-6.3.1 GENERAL
30-6.3.1.1 Concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible in its final position and
the use of vibrators for extensive shifting of the mass of fresh concrete
will not be permitted.

355
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-6.3.1.2 Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers of a thickness not

exceeding the capacity of the vibrator to consolidate the concrete and
merge it with the previous lift. In no case shall the depth of a lift
exceed 2 feet. The rate of concrete placement shall not exceed that
assumed for the design of the forms as corrected for the actual
temperature of the concrete being placed.
30-6.3.1.3 When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more
than 5 feet, the concrete shall be dropped through a tube fitted with a
hopper head, or through other approved devices, as necessary to
prevent segregation of the mix and spattering of mortar on steel and
forms above the elevation of the lift being placed. This requirement
shall not apply to cast-in-place piling when concrete placement is
completed before initial set occurs in the first-placed concrete.

30-6.3.2 EQUIPMENT
30-6.3.2.1 All equipment used to place concrete shall be of adequate capacity and
designed and operated so as to prevent segregation of the mix or loss
of mortar. Such equipment shall not cause vibrations that might
damage the freshly placed concrete. No equipment shall have
aluminum parts which come in contact with the concrete. Between
uses, the mortar coating inside of placing equipment which sets or
dries out shall be cleaned from the equipment before use is resumed.
30-6.3.2.2 Chutes shall be lined with smooth watertight material and, when steep
slopes are involved, shall be equipped with baffles or reverses.
30-6.3.2.3 Concrete pumps shall be operated such that a continuous stream of
concrete without air pockets is produced. When pumping is completed,
the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be
ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the
concrete or separation of the ingredients.
30-6.3.2.4 Conveyor belt systems shall not exceed a total length of 550 lineal feet,
measured from end to end of the total assembly. The belt assembly
shall be so arranged that each section discharges into a vertical hopper
arrangement to the next section. To keep segregation to a minimum,
scrapers shall be situated over the hopper of each section so as to
remove mortar adhering to the belt and to deposit it into the hopper.
The discharge end of the conveyor belt system shall be equipped with a
hopper, and a chute or suitable deflectors to cause the concrete to drop
vertically to the deposit area.

30-6.4 CONSOLIDATION
30-6.4.1 All concrete, except concrete placed under water and concrete
otherwise exempt, shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration
immediately after placement. The vibration shall be internal except that
external form vibrators may be used for thin sections when the forms
have been designed for external vibration.
30-6.4.2 Vibrators shall be of approved type and design and of a size
appropriate for the work. They shall be capable of transmitting

356
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4,500 impulses

per minute.
30-6.4.3 The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to
properly compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the
forms. The Contractor shall also have at least one spare vibrator
immediately available in case of breakdown.
30-6.4.4 Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete
around the reinforcement and imbedded fixtures and into the corners
and angles of the forms. Vibration shall be applied at the point of
deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. The vibrators
shall be inserted and withdrawn out of the concrete slowly. The
vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly
consolidate the concrete, but shall not be continued so as to cause
segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the
extent that localized areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators
shall be at points uniformly spaced and not further apart than 1.5 times
the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
30-6.4.5 Vibration shall not be applied directly to, or through the reinforcement
to sections or layers of concrete which have hardened to the degree that
the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. Vibrators shall not be
used to transport concrete in the forms. When immersion-type
vibrators are used to consolidate concrete around epoxy-coated
reinforcement, the vibrators shall be equipped with rubber or other
non-metallic coating.
30-6.4.6 Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to
ensure smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in
corners and locations impossible to reach with the vibrators. When
approved by the Engineer, concrete for small noncritical elements may
be consolidated by the use of suitable rods and spades.

30-6.5 UNDERWATER PLACEMENT

30-6.5.1 GENERAL
30-6.5.1.1 Only concrete used in cofferdams to seal out water may be placed
under water unless otherwise specified or specifically approved by the
Engineer.. The minimum cement content of the mix shall be increased
by 10% to compensate for loss due to wash.
30-6.5.1.2 To prevent segregation, concrete placed under water shall be carefully
placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie,
concrete pump, or other approved method, and shall not be disturbed
after being deposited. Still water shall be maintained at the point of
deposit and the forms under water shall be watertight. Cofferdams
shall be vented during the placement and cure of concrete to equalize
the hydrostatic pressure and thus prevent flow of water through the
concrete.
30-6.5.1.3 Concrete placed under water shall be placed continuously from start to
finish. The surface of the concrete shall be kept as nearly horizontal as
practicable. To ensure through bonding, each succeeding layer of seal
shall be placed before the preceding layer has taken initial set. For

357
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

large pours, more than one tremie or pump shall be used to ensure
compliance with this requirement.

30-6.5.2 EQUIPMENT
30-6.5.2.1 A tremie shall consist of a watertight tube having a diameter of not less
than 10 inches and fitted with a hopper at the top. The tremies shall be
supported so as to permit free movement of the discharge end over the
entire top surface of the work and so as to permit rapid lowering when
necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end
shall be sealed closed at the start of work so as to prevent water from
entering the tube before the tube is filled with concrete. After
placement has started the tremie tube shall be kept full of concrete to
the bottom of the hopper. If water enters the tube after placement is
started, the tremie shall be withdrawn, the discharge end resealed, and
the placement restarted. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the
flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly raising the discharge end,
always keeping it in the deposited concrete. The flow shall be
continuous until the work is completed. When cofferdam struts prevent
lateral movement of tremies, one tremie shall be used in each bay.
30-6.5.2.2 Concrete pumps used to place concrete under water shall include a
device at the end of the discharge tube to seal out water while the tube
is first being filled with concrete. Once the flow of concrete is started,
the end of the discharge tube shall be kept full of concrete and below
the surface of the deposited concrete until placement is completed.

30-6.5.3 CLEANUP
Dewatering may proceed after test specimens cured under similar
conditions indicate that the concrete has sufficient strength to resist the
expected loads. All laitance or other unsatisfactory materials shall be
removed from the exposed surface by scraping, chipping, or other
means which will not injure the surface of the concrete before placing
foundation concrete.

358
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-7 COVER OVER REINFORCEMENT

Unless otherwise specified the following minimum thickness of
concrete cover, exclusive of plaster or other decorating finish, shall be
provided in all cases:
i) For each end of reinforcing bar, not less than 1 inch or twice
the diameter of such bar.
ii) For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column, not less than 1 ½
inches or the diameter of such bar. In the case of columns with
a minimum dimension of 7 ½ inches or less where bars do not
exceed ½ inch diameter, one inch cover shall be used.
iii) For longitudinal reinforcing bar in a beam not less than one
inch or the diameter of such bar.
iv) For tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement in a slab
not less than ½ inch or the diameter of such reinforcement.
v) For any other reinforcement not less than ½ inch or the
diameter of such reinforcement.
vi) In case of works in saline or corrosive conditions a minimum of
1 ½ inches cover over bars, stirrups or links

359
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

30-8.1 GENERAL
Construction joints shall be made only where located on plans, or
shown in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved. All planned
reinforcing steel shall extend uninterrupted through joints. In the case
of emergency, construction joints shall be placed as directed by the
Engineer and , if directed, additional reinforcing steel dowels shall be
placed across the joint. Such additional steel shall be furnished and
placed at the Contractor’s expense.

30-8.2 BONDING
30-8.2.1 Unless otherwise shown on the plans, horizontal joints may be made
without keys and vertical joints shall be constructed with shear keys.
Surfaces of fresh concrete at horizontal construction joints shall be
rough floated sufficiently to thoroughly consolidate the surface and
intentionally left in a roughened condition. Shear keys shall consist of
formed depressions in the surface covering approximately one-third of
the contact surface. The forms for keys shall be beveled so that
removal will not damage the concrete.
30-8.2.2 All construction joints shall be cleaned of surface laitance, curing
compound and other foreign materials before fresh concrete is placed
against the surface of the joint. Abrasive blast or other approved
methods shall be used to clean horizontal construction joints to the
extent that clean aggregate is exposed. All construction joints shall be
flushed with water and allowed to dry to a surface dry condition
immediately prior to placing concrete.

30-8.3 BONDING AND DOWELING TO EXISTING

STRUCTURES
30-8.3.1 When new concrete is shown on the plans to be bonded to existing
concrete structures, the existing concrete shall be cleaned and flushed
as specified above. When the plans show reinforcing dowels grouted
into holes drilled in the existing concrete at such construction joints,
the holes shall be drilled by methods that will not shatter or damage the
concrete adjacent to the holes. The diameters of the drilled holes shall
be ¼ inch larger than the nominal diameter of the dowels unless shown
otherwise on the plans. The grout shall be a neat cement paste of
Portland cement and water. The water content shall be not more than 4
gallons per 94 pounds of cement. Retempering of grout will not be
permitted. Immediately prior to placing the dowels, the holes shall be
cleaned of dust and other deleterious materials, shall be thoroughly
saturated with water, have all free water removed and the holes shall

360
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

be dried to a saturated surface dry condition. Sufficient grout shall be

placed in the holes so that no voids remain after the dowels are
inserted. Grout shall be cured for a period of at least 3 days or until
dowels are encased in concrete.
30-8.3.2 Hen specified or approved by the Engineer epoxy may be used in lieu
of Portland cement grout for the bonding of dowels in existing
concrete. When used epoxy shall be mixed and placed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

30-8.4 FORMS AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

When forms at construction joints overlap previously placed concrete,
they shall be retightened before depositing new concrete The face
edges of all joints that are exposed to view shall be neatly formed with
straight bulk-heads or grade strips, or otherwise carefully finished true-
to-line and elevation.

361
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-9 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

30-9.1 GENERAL
Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed at the locations
and in accordance with the details shown on the plans. Such joints
include open joints, filled joints, joints sealed with sealants or
waterstops, joints reinforced with steel armor plates or shapes and
joints with combinations of these features.

30-9.2 MATERIAL
30-9.2.1 PREMOLDED EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS
Premolded fillers shall conform to one of the following specifications:
30-9.2.1.1 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and structural Construction, ASTM-1751 Specification for
Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, ASTM D-1752), Type II
(cork) shall not be used when resiliency is required.
30-9.2.1.2 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete,
ASTM D- 994.

30-9.2.2 POLYSTYRENE BOARD FILLERS

Board fillers shall be expanded polystyrene with a minimum flexural
strength of 35 pounds per square inch, as determined by ASTM C-203
and a compressive yield strength of between 16 and 40 pounds per
square inch at 5% compression. When shown on the plans, or required
to prevent damage during concrete placement, the surface of
polystyrene board shall be faced with 1/8 inch thick hardboard.

30-9.2.3 CONTRACTION JOINT MATERIAL

Material placed in contraction joints shall consist of asphalt saturated
felt paper or other approved bond-breaking material.

30-9.2.4 POURABLE JOINT SEALANTS

Pourable sealants for placement along the top edges of contraction or
filled expansion joints shall conform to the following:
30-9.2.4.1 Hot-poured sealants shall conform to ASTM D-3406 except that when
the sealant will be in contact with asphaltic material, it shall conform
to ASTM D-3405.
30-9.2.4.2 Cold-poured sealant shall be silicone type. The sealant shall be a one-
part, low modulus silicone rubber type with an ultimate elongation of
1,200%.
30-9.2.4.3 Polyethylene foam strip, for use when shown on the plans, shall be of
commercial quality with a continuous impervious glazed top surface,

362
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

suitable for retaining the liquid sealant at the proper elevation in the
joint while hardening.

30-9.2.5 METAL ARMOR

Expansion joint armor assemblies shall be fabricated from steel in
conformance with the requirements of Chapter of Structure Steel.
Assemblies shall be accurately fabricated and straightened at the shop
after fabrication and galvanizing as necessary to conform to the
concrete section.

30-9.2.6 WATERSTOPS
Waterstops shall be of the type, size and shape shown on the plans.
They shall be dense, homogeneous, and without holes or other defects.

30-9.2.6.1 Rubber Waterstops

30-9.2.6.1.1 Rubber waterstops shall be formed from synthetic rubber made
exclusively from neoprene, reinforcing carbon black, zinc oxide,
polymerization agents, and softeners. This compound shall contain not
less than 70% by volume of neoprene. The tensile strength shall not be
less than 2,750 pounds per square inch with an elongation at breaking
of 600%.. The Shore Durometer indication (hardness) shall be between
50 and 60. After seven days in air at temperature of 158 (+2) F and
300 pounds per square inch pressure, the tensile strength shall not be
less than 65% of the original.
30-9.2.6.1.2 Rubber waterstops shall be formed with an integral cross section in
suitable molds, so as to produce a uniform section with a permissible
variation in dimension of 1/32 inch plus or minus. No splices will be
permitted in straight strips, Strips and special connection pieces shall
be well cured in a manner such that any cross section shall be dense,
homogeneous, and free from all porosity. Junctions in the special
connection pieces shall be full molded. During the vulcanizing period,
the joints shall be securely held by suitable clamps. The material at the
splices shall be dense and homogeneous throughout the cross section.

30-9.2.6.2 Polyvinylchloride Waterstops

30-9.2.6.2.1 Polyvinylchloride waterstops shall be manufactured by the extrusion
process from an elastomeric plastic compound, the basic resin of which
shall be polyvinylchloride (PVC). The compound shall contain any
additional resins, plasticizers, stabilizers, or other materials needed to
ensure that, when the material is compounded, it will meet the
performance requirements given in this Specification. No reclaimed
PVC or other material shall be used.
30-9.2.6.2.2 The material shall comply with the following physical requirements
when tested under the indicated ASTM test method:

363
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.35 Max

Durometer Hardness ASTM D 2240 75 + 5
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 1.800 psi Min
Elongation ASTM D 412 350%
Cold Brittleness ASTM D 746 -35F
Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 350 psi Min.

30-9.2.6.3 Copper Waterstops

Sheet copper shall conform to the Specifications for Copper Sheet,
Strip, Plate and Rolled Bar, ASTM B-152

30-9.2.6.4 Testing of Waterstop Material

The manufacturer shall be responsible for the testing, either in his own
or in a recognized commercial laboratory, of all waterstop materials,
and shall submit three certified copies of test results to the Engineer.

30-9.3 INSTALLATION
30-9.3.1 OPEN JOINTS
Open joints shall be constructed by the insertion and subsequent
removal of a wood strip, metal plate or other approved material. The
insertion and removal of the template shall be accomplished without
chipping or breaking the corners of the concrete. When not protected
by metal armor, open joints in decks and sidewalks shall be finished
with an edging tool. Upon completion of concrete finishing work, all
mortar and other debris shall be removed from open joints.

30-9.3.2 FILLED JOINTS

When filled joints are shown on the plans, premolded-type fillers shall
be used unless polystyrene board is specifically called for. Filler for
each joint shall consist of as few pieces of material as possible.
Abutting edges of filler material shall be accurately held in alignment
with each other and tightly fit or taped as necessary to prevent the
intrusion of grout,. Joint filler material shall be anchored to one side of
the joint by waterproof adhesive or other methods so as to prevent it
from working out of the joint but not interfere with the compression of
the material.

30-9.3.3 SEALED JOINTS

Prior to installation of pourable joint sealants, all foreign material shall
be removed from the joint, the filler material shall be cut back to the
depth shown or approved and the surface of the concrete which will be
in contact with the sealant cleaned by light sand blasting. When
required, a polyethylene foam strip shall be placed in the joint to retain

364
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the sealant and isolate it from the filler material. The sealant materials
shall then be mixed and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s directions. Any material that fails to bond to the sides
of the joint within 24 hours after placement shall be removed and
replaced.

30-9.3.4 WATERSTOPS
Adequate waterstops of metal, rubber, or plastic shall be placed as
shown on the plans. Where movement at the joint is provided for,
waterstops shall be of a type permitting such movement without injury.
They shall be spliced welded, or soldered, to form continuous
watertight joints. Precautions shall be taken so that the waterstops shall
be neither displaced nor damaged by construction operations or other
means. All surfaces of the waterstops shall be kept free from oil,
grease, dried mortar, or any other foreign matter while the waterstop is
being embedded in concrete. Means shall be used to insure that all
portions of the waterstop designed for embedment shall be tightly
enclosed by dense concrete.

30-9.3.5 EXPANSION JOINT ARMOR ASSEMBLIES

Armor assemblies shall be installed so that their top surface matches
the plane of the adjacent finished concrete surface throughout the
length of the assembly. Positive methods shall be employed in placing
the assemblies to keep them in correct position during the placing of
the concrete. The opening at expansion joints shall be that designated
on the plans at normal temperature or as directed by the Engineer for
other temperatures, and care shall be taken to avoid impairment of the
clearance in any manner.

365
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-10 FINISHING PLASTIC CONCRETE

30-10.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified, after concrete has been consolidated and
prior to the application of cure, all surfaces of concrete which are not
placed against forms shall be struck off to the planned elevation or
slope and the surface finished by floating with a wooden float
sufficiently to seal the surface. While the concrete is still in a workable
state, all construction and expansion joints shall be carefully tooled
with an edger. Joint filler shall be left exposed.

30-10.2 ROADWAY SURFACE FINISH

All bridge decks, approach slabs, and other concrete surfaces for use
by traffic shall be finished to a smooth skid-resistant surface in
accordance with this article. During finishing operations the contractor
shall provide suitable and adequate work bridges for proper
performance of the work, including the application of fog sprays and
curing compound, and for inspecting the work.

30-10.2.1 STRIKING OFF AND FLOATING

30-10.2.1.1 After the concrete is placed and consolidated according to Section
30-7, top surface of structures serving as finished pavements shall be
finished using approved power-driven finishing machines. Hand-
finishing methods may be used if approved by the Engineer for short
bridges 50 feet or less in length or for irregular areas where the use of a
machine would be impractical.
30-10.2.1.2 All surfaces shall be struck-off by equipment supported by and
traveling on rails or headers. The rails, headers, and strike-off
equipment shall be of sufficient strength and be adjusted so that the
concrete surface after strike-off will conform to the planned profile and
cross section.
30-10.2.1.3 The rails or headers shall be set on nonyielding supports and shall be
completely in place and firmly secured for the scheduled length for
concrete placement before placing of concrete will be permitted. Rails
for finishing machines shall extend beyond both ends of the scheduled
length for concrete placement a sufficient distance that will permit the
float of the finishing machine to fully clear the concrete to be placed.
Rails or headers shall be adjustable for elevation and shall be set to
allow for anticipated settlement, camber, and deflection of falsework,
as necessary to obtain a finished surface true to the required grade and
cross section. Rails or headers shall be of a type and shall be so
installed that no springing or deflection will occur under the weight of
the finishing equipment and shall be so located that finishing
equipment may operate without interruption over the entire surface
being finished. Rails or headers shall be adjusted as necessary to

366
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

correct for unanticipated settlement or deflection that may occur during

finishing operations. If rail supports are located within the area where
concrete is being placed, as soon as they are no longer needed they
shall be removed to at least 2 inches below the finished surface and
the void filled with fresh concrete.
30-10.2.1.4 Before the delivery of concrete is begun, the finishing machine or, if
used, the hand-operated strike-off tool shall be operated over the entire
area to be finished to check for excessive rail deflections, for proper
deck thickness, and cover on reinforcing steel, and to verify operation
of all equipment. Any necessary corrections shall be made before
concrete placement is begun.
30-10.2.1.5 The finishing machine shall go over each area of the surface as many
times as it is required to obtain the required profile and cross section. A
slight excess of concrete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge of the
screed at all times. This excess of concrete shall be carried all the way
to the edge of the pour or form and shall not be worked into the slab,
but shall be wasted.
30-10.2.1.6 After strike-off, the surface shall be finished with a float, roller, or
other approved device as necessary to remove any local irregularities
and to leave sufficient mortar at the surface of the concrete for later
texturing.
30-10.2.1.7 During finishing operations, excess water, laitance, or foreign
materials brought to the surface during the course of the finishing
operations shall not be reworked into the slab, but shall be removed
immediately upon appearance by means of a squeegee or straightedge
drawn from the center of the slab towards either edge.
30-10.2.1.8 The addition of water to the surface of the concrete to assist in
finishing operations will not be permitted.

30-10.2.2 STRAIGHT EDGING

After finishing as described above, the entire surface shall be checked
by the Contractor with a 10-foot metal straightedge operated parallel to
the center line of the bridge and shall show no deviation in excess of
1/8 inch from the testing edge of the straightedge. For deck surfaces
that are to be overlaid with 1 inch or more of another material, such
deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Deviations in excess of
these requirements shall be corrected before the concrete sets. The
checking operation shall progress by overlapping the straightedge at
least one-half the length of the preceding pass.

30-10.2.3 TEXTURING
The surface shall be given a skid-resistant texture by either burlap or
carpet dragging, brooming, tining, or by a combination of these
methods. The method employed shall be as specified or as approved by
the Engineer. Surfaces that are to be covered with a waterproofing
membrane deck seal shall not be coarse textured. They shall be
finished to a smooth surface free of mortar ridges and other
projections. This operation shall be done after floating and at such time

367
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

and in such manner that the desired texture will be achieved while
minimizing displacement of the larger aggregate particles.
30-10.2.3.1 Dragged
If the surface texture is to be a drag finish, the surface shall be finished
by dragging a seamless strip of damp burlap over the full width of the
surface. The burlap drag shall consist of sufficient layers of burlap and
have sufficient length in contact with the concrete to slightly groove
the surface and shall be moved forward with a minimum bow of the
lead edge. The drag shall be kept damp, clean, and free of particles of
hardened concrete. As an alternative to burlap, the Engineer may
approve or direct that carpet or artificial turf of approved type and size
be substituted.
30-10.2.3.2 Broomed
If the surface texture is to be a broom finish, the surface shall be
broomed when the concrete has hardened sufficiently. The broom shall
be of an approved type. The strokes shall be square across the slab,
from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped, and shall
be made by drawing the broom without tearing the concrete, but so as
to produce regular corrugations not over 1/8 of an inch in depth. The
surface as thus finished shall be free from porous spots, irregularities,
depressions, and small pockets or rough spots such as may be caused
by the accidental disturbing of particles of coarse aggregate embedded
near the surface during the final brooming operation.
30-10.2.3.3 Tined
If the surface is to be tined, the tining shall be in a transverse direction
using a wire broom, comb or finned float having a single row of tines
or fins. The tining grooves shall be between 1/16 inch and 3/16 inch
wide and between 1/8 inch and 3/16 inch deep, spaced ½ to ¾ inch on
centers. Tining shall be discontinued 12 inches from the curb line on
bridge decks. The area adjacent to the curbs shall be given a light
broom finish longitudinally. As an alternative, tining may be achieved
using an approved machine designed specifically for tining or grooving
concrete pavements.

30-10.2.4 SURFACE TESTING AND CORRECTION

After the concrete has hardened, an inspection of finished deck
roadway surfaces, which will not be overlaid with a wearing surface,
will be made by the Engineer. Any variations in the surface which
exceed 1/8 inch from a 10-foot straightedge will be marked. The
Contractor shall correct such irregularities by the use of concrete
planning or grooving equipment which produces a textured surface
equal in roughness to the surrounding unground concrete without
shattering or otherwise damaging the remaining concrete.

30-10.3 PEDESTRIAN WALKWAY SURFACE FINISH

After the concrete for sidewalks and decks of pedestrian structures has
been deposited in place, it shall be consolidated and the surface shall

368
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

be struck off by means of a strike board and floated with wooden or

cork float. If directed, the surface shall then be lightly broomed in a
transverse direction. An edging tool shall be used on edges and
expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more than 1/8 inch under a
5-foot straightedge. The surface shall have a granular or matte texture
that will not be slippery when wet. Sidewalk surfaces shall be laid out
in blocks with an approved grooving tool as shown on the plans or as
directed.

30-10.4 TROWELED AND BRUSHED FINISH

Surfaces which are shown on the plans or specified to be troweled shall
first be finished as specified under Section 30.10.1 then, after the
concrete is partially set, the surface shall be finished to a smooth
surface by troweling with a steel trowel until a slick surface free of
bleed water is produced. The surface shall then be brushed with a fine
brush using parallel strokes.

30-10.5 SURFACE UNDER BEARINGS

When metallic masonry plates are to be placed directly on the concrete

or on filler material less than 1/8-inch thick, the surface shall fist be
finished with a float finish. After the concrete has set, the area which
will be in contact with the masonry plate shall be ground as necessary
to provide full and even bearing. When such plates are to be set on
filler material between 1/8 and ½-inch thick, the concrete surface shall
be steel-trowel finished without brushing and the flatness of the
finished surface shall not vary from a straightedge laid on the surface
in any direction within the limits of the masonry plate by more than
1/16 inch. Surfaces which fail to conform to the required flatness shall
be ground until acceptable. Surfaces under elastomeric bearings and
under metallic masonry plates which are supported on mortar or filler
pads ½ inch or greater in thickness shall be finished by wood floating
to a flat and even surface free of ridges.

369
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-11 CURING CONCRETE

30-11.1 GENERAL
30-11.1.1 All newly placed concrete shall be cured so as to prevent loss of water
by use of one or more of the methods specified herein. Curing shall
commence immediately after the free water has left the surface and
finishing operations are completed. If the surface of the concrete
begins to dry before the selected cure method can be applied, the
surface of the concrete shall be kept moist by a fog spray applied so as
not to damage the surface.
30-11.1.2 Curing by other than steam or radiant heat methods shall continue
uninterrupted for 7 days except that when pozzolans in excess of 10%
by weight, of the Portland cement are used in the mix. When such
pozzolans are used, the curing period shall be 10 days. For other than
top slabs of structures serving as finished pavements, the above curing
periods may be reduced and curing terminated when test cylinders
cured under the same conditions, as the structure indicate that concrete
strengths of at least 70% of that specified have been reached.
30-11.1.3 When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot
weather, water shall be applied to concrete surfaces being cured by the
liquid membrane method or by the forms-in-place method, until the
Engineer determines that a cooling effect is no longer required. Such
application of water will be paid for as extra work.

30-11.2 MATERIALS
30-11.2.1 WATER
Water shall conform to Section 30-3.2 of these specifications.

30-11.2.2 LIQUID MEMBRANES

Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM C-309.

30-11.2.3 WATERPROOF SHEET MATERIALS

Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, and white burlap polyethylene
sheet shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-171.

30-11.3 METHODS
30-11.3.1 FORMS-IN-PLACE METHOD
Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the forms in
place without loosening for the required time.

370
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-11.3.2 WATER METHOD

Concrete surface shall be kept continuously wet by ponding, spraying
or covering with materials that are kept continuously and thoroughly
wet. Such materials may consist of cotton mats, multiple layers of
burlap or other approved materials which do not discolor or otherwise
damage the concrete.

30-11.3.3 LIQUID MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND METHOD

30-11.3.3.1 The liquid membrane method shall not be used on surfaces where a
rubbed finish is required or on surfaces of construction joints unless it
is removed by sand blasting prior to placement of concrete against the
joint. Type 2, white pigmented, liquid membranes may be used only on
the surfaces of bridge decks, on surfaces that will not be exposed to
view in the completed work or on surfaces where their use has been
approved by the Engineer.
30-11.3.3.2 When membrane curing is used, the exposed concrete shall be
thoroughly sealed immediately after the free water has left the surface.
Formed surfaces shall be sealed immediately after the form are
removed and necessary finishing has been done. The solution shall be
applied by power-operated atomizing spray equipment is one or two
separate applications. Hand-operated sprayers may be used for coating
small areas. Membrane solutions containing pigments shall be
thoroughly mixed prior to use and agitated during application. If the
solution is applied in two increments, the second application shall
follow the first application within 30 minutes. Satisfactory equipment
shall be provided, together with means to properly control and assure
the direct application of the curing solution on the concrete surface so
as to result in a uniform coverage at the rate of 1 galon for each 150
square feet of area.
30-11.3.3.3 If rain falls on the newly coated concrete before the film has dried
sufficiently to resist damage or if the film is damaged in any other
manner during the curing period, a new coat of the solution shall be
applied to the affected portions equal in curing value to that above
specified.

30-11.3.4 WATERPROOF COVER METHOD

30-11.3.4.1 This method shall consist of covering the surface with a waterproof
sheet material so as to prevent moisture loss from the concrete. This
method may be used only when the covering can be secured
adequately to prevent moisture loss.
30-11.3.4.2 The concrete shall be wet at the tie the cover is installed. The sheets
shall be of the widest practicable width and adjacent sheets shall
overlap a minimum of 6 inches and shall be tightly sealed with
pressure sensitive tape, mastic, glue or other approved methods to form
a complete waterproof cover of the entire concrete surface. The paper
shall be secured so that wind will not displace it. Should any portion of
the sheets be broken or damaged before expiration of the curing period,

371
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the broken or damaged portions shall be immediately repaired.

Sections that have loss their waterproof qualities shall not be used.

30-11.3.5 STEAM OR RADIANT HEAT CURING METHOD

30-11.3.5.1 This method may be used only for precast concrete members
manufactured in established plants.
30-11.3.5.2 Steam curing or radiant heat curing shall be done under a suitable
enclosure to contain the live steam or the heat. Steam hall be low
pressure and saturated. Temperature recording devices shall be
employed as necessary to verify that temperatures are uniform
throughout the enclosure and within the limits specified.
30-11.3.5.3 The initial application of the steam or of the heat shall be from 2 to 4
hours after the final placement of concrete to allow the initial set of the
concrete to take place. If retarders are used, the waiting period before
application of the steam or of the radiant heat shall be increased to
between 4 and 6 hours after placement. The time of initial set may be
determined by the “Standard Method of Test for Time of Setting of
Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance,” ASTM C-403, and the
time limits described above may then be waived.
30-11.3.5.4 During the waiting period, the temperature within the curing chamber
shall not be less than 50 F and live steam or radiant heat may be used
to maintain the curing chamber at the proper minimum temperature.
During this period the concrete shall be kept wet.
30-11.3.5.5 Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete or on
the forms so as to cause localized high temperatures. During the initial
application of live steam or of radiant heat, the ambient temperature
within the curing enclosure shall increase at an average rate not
exceeding 40 F per hour until the curing temperature is reached. The
maximum curing temperature within the enclosure shall not exceed
160 F. The maximum temperature shall be held until the concrete has
reached the desired strength. In discontinuing the steam application,
the ambient air temperature shall not decrease at a rate to exceed 40 F
per hour until a temperature 20 F above the temperature of the air to
which the concrete will be exposed has been reached.
30-11.3.5.6 Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, hot
oil or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat curing
shall be done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat, and
moisture loss shall be minimized by covering all exposed concrete
surfaces with a plastic sheeting or by applying an approved liquid
membrane-curing compound to all exposed concrete surfaces. Top
surfaces of concrete members to be used in composite construction
shall be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not
to reduce bond below design limits. Surfaces of concrete members to
which other materials will be bonded in the finished structure shall be
clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not to reduce
bond below design limits.
30-11.3.5.7 Unless the ambient temperature is maintained above 60 F, for
prestressed members the transfer of the stressing force to the concrete
shall be accomplished immediately after the steam curing or the heat
curing has been discontinued.

372
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-12 FINISHING FORMED CONCRETE

SURFACES

30-12.1 GENERAL
30-12.1.1 Surface finishes for formed concrete surfaces shall be classified as
follows:
Class 1 Ordinary Surface Finish
Class 2 Rubbed Finish
Class 3 Tooled Finish
Class 4 Sandblast Finish
Class 5 Wire Brush, or Scrubbed Finish
30-12.1.2 All concrete shall be given a class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish, and in
addition if further finishing is required, such other type of finish as is
specified.
30-12.1.3 If not otherwise specified, exposed surfaces except the soffits of
superstructures and the interior faces and bottoms of concrete girders
shall also be given a class 2, Rubbed Finish.
30-12.1.4 Class 3, 4, or 5 type surface finishes shall be applied only where shown
on the plans or specified.

30-12.2 CLASS-1, ORDINARY SURFACE FINISH

30-12.2.1 Immediately following the removal of forms, fins, and irregular
projections shall be removed from all surfaces which are to be exposed
or waterproofed. Bulges and off-sets in such surfaces shall be removed
with carborundum stones or discs.
30-12.2.2 Localized poorly bonded rock pockets or honey-combed concrete shall
be removed and replaced with sound concrete or mortar. If rock
pockets, in the opinion of the Engineer, are of such an extent or
character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to
endanger the life of the steel reinforcement, he or she may declare the
concrete defective and require the removal and replacement of the
portion of the structure affected.
30-12.2.3 On all surfaces the cavities produced by form ties and all other holes,
broken corners or edges, and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned,
and after having been thoroughly saturated with water shall be
carefully pointed and trued with a cement:sand mortar conforming to
Section 16. For exposed surfaces, white cement shall be added to the
mortar in an amount sufficient to result in a patch which, when dry,
matches the surrounding concrete. Mortar used in pointing shall be not
more than 1 hour old. The concrete shall then be rubbed if required or
the cure continued as specified under Section 30-12. Construction and
expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled
and free of mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed
for its full length with clean and true edges.

373
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-12.2.4 The resulting surfaces shall be true and uniform. Repaired surfaces the
appearance of which is not satisfactory, shall be “rubbed” as specified
under Class 2, Rubbed Finish.

30-12.3 CLASS-2, RUBBED FINISH

30-12.3.1 After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon
as its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work, the
concrete shall be thoroughly saturated with water. Sufficient time shall
have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar used in the
pointing of rod holes and defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be
finished shall be rubbed with a medium coarse carborundum stone,
using a small amount of mortar on its face. The mortar shall be
composed of cement and fine sand mixed in proportions used in the
concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until form marks,
projections, and irregularities have been removed, voids have been
filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The paste produced by
this rubbing shall be left in place.
30-12.3.2 After other work which could effect the surface has been completed,
the final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum
stone and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire
surface is of a smooth texture and uniform color.
30-12.3.3 After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it shall
be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left free
from all unsound patches, paste, powder, and objectionable marks.
30-12.3.4 When metal forms, fiber forms, lined forms or plywood forms in good
condition are used, the requirement for a Class 2, Rubbed Finish may
be waived by the Engineer when the uniformity of color and texture
obtained with Class I finishing are essentially equal to that which could
be attained with the application of a Class 2, Rubbed Finish. In such
cases, grinding with powered disc grinders or light sandblasting with
fine sand or other means approved by the Engineer may be utilized in
conjunction with Class I finishing.

30-12.4 CLASS-3, TOOLED FINISH

Finish of this character for panels and other like work may be secured
by the use of a bushhammer, pick, Crandall, or other approved tool.
Air tools, preferably shall be employed. No tooling shall be done until
the concrete has set for at least 14 days and as much longer as may be
necessary to prevent the aggregate particles from being “picked” out of
the surface. The finished surface shall show a grouping of broken
aggregate particles in a matrix of mortar, each aggregate particle being
in slight relief.

374
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-12.5 CLASS-4, SANDBLASTED FINISH

30-12.5.1 The thoroughly cured concrete surface shall be sandblasted with hard,
sharp sand to produce an even fine-grained surface in which the mortar
has been cut away, leaving the aggregate exposed.

30-12.6 WIRE BRUSHED OR SCRUBBED FINISH

As soon as the forms are removed and while the concrete is yet
comparatively green, the surface shall be thoroughly and evenly
scrubbed with stiff wire or fiber brushes, using a solution of muriatic
acid in the proportion of one part acid to four parts water until the
cement film or surface is completely removed and the aggregate
particles are exposed, leaving an even-pebbled texture presenting an
appearance grading from that of fine granite to coarse conglomerate,
depending upon the size and grading of aggregate used. When the
scrubbing has progressed sufficiently to produce the texture desired,
the entire surface shall be thoroughly washed with water to which a
small amount of ammonia has been added, to remove all traces of acid.

375
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-13 PRE-CAST CONCRETE MEMBERS

30-13.1 GENERAL
30-13.1.1 Precast concrete members shall be constructed and placed in the work
in conformance with the details shown on the plans, specified or shown
on the approved working drawings.
30-13.1.2 If approved by the Engineer, the use of precasting methods may be
used for elements of the work which are otherwise indicated to be
constructed by the cast-in-place method. When such precasting is
proposed, the Contractor shall submit working drawings showing
construction joint details and any other information required by the
Engineer.

30-13.2 WORKING DRAWINGS

Whenever specified or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide working drawings for precast members. Such drawings shall
include all details not provided in the plans for the construction and the
erection of the members and shall be approved before any members are
cast. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility under the contract for the successful completion of the
work.

30-13.3 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE

30-13.3.1 The materials and manufacturing processes used for precast concrete
members shall conform to the requirements of the other articles in this
section except as those requirements are modified or supplemented by
the provisions that follow.
30-13.3.2 When precast members are manufactured in established casting yards,
the manufacturer shall be responsible for the continuous monitoring of
the quality of all materials and concrete strengths. Tests shall be
performed in accordance with appropriate ASTM methods. The
Engineer shall be allowed to observe all sampling and testing and the
results of all tests shall be made available to the Engineer.
30-13.3.3 Established, Precast Concrete Manufacturing Plants shall be approved
by Building Research Station of Communication & Works
Department for the category of work being manufactured.
30-13.3.4 Plant Quality Control personnel shall be certified in by I.S.O Quality
Control Personnel Certification Program. Plant Quality Control
Managers shall be also certified by I.S.O. These requirements may be
met by alternative experience and certification considered to be
equivalent.

376
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-13.3.5 Precast members shall be cast on unyielding beds or pallets. Special

care shall be used in casting the bearing surface so that they will join
properly with other elements of the structure.
30-13.3.6 For prestressed precast units, several units may be cast in one
continuous line and stressed at one time. Sufficient space shall be left
between ends of units to permit access for cutting of tendons after the
concrete has attained the required strength.
30-13.3.7 The side forms may be removed as soon as their removal will not
cause distortion of the concrete surface, providing that curing is not
interrupted. Members shall not be lifted from casting beds until their
strength is sufficient to prevent damage.
30-13.3.8 When cast-in-place concrete will later be cast against the top surfaces
of precst beams or girders, these surfaces shall be finished to a coarse
texture by brooming with a stiff coarse broom. Prior to shipment, such
surfaces shall be cleaned of laitance or other foreign material by
sandblasting or other approved methods.
30-13.3.9 When precast members are designed to be abutted together in the
finished work, each member shall be match-cast with its adjacent
segments to ensure proper fit during erection. AS the segments are
match-cast they must be precisely aligned to achieve the final structure
geometry. During the alignment, adjustments to compensate for
deflections shall be made.

30-13.4 CURING
Unless otherwise permitted, precast members shall be cured by either
the water method or the steam or radiant heat method.

30-13.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

30-13.5.1 Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast
prestressed concrete members. Precast girders shall be transported in
an upright position and the points of support and directions of the
reactions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same
during transportation and storage as when the member is in its final
position.
30-13.5.2 Prestressed concrete members shall not be shipped until tests on
concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under
the same conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the
particular member has attained a compressive strength equal to the
specified design compressive strength of the concrete in the member.
30-13.5.3 Care shall be taken during storage, hoisting , and handling of the
precast units to prevent cracking or damage. Units damaged by
improper storage or handling shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
expense.

377
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-13.6 ERECTION
30-13.6.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of precast members
during all stages of construction. Lifting devices shall be used in a
manner that does not cause damaging bending or torsional force. After
a member has been erected and until it is secured to the structure,
temporary braces shall be provided as necessary to resist wind or other
loads.
30-13.6.2 Precast deck form panels shall be erected and placed so that the fit of
mating surfaces shall be such that excessive grout leakage will not
occur. If such fit is not provided, joints shall be dry-packed or sealed
with an acceptable caulking compound prior to placing the cast-in-
place concrete. End panels for skewed structures may be sawed to fit
the skew.

378
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-14 MOULDED CEMENT CONCRETE ARTICLES

30-14.1 GENERAL
All coping landing, steps, slabs, ashlar, cobber stone, kerb stone and
other similar things specified or shown on the drawings to be moulded
concrete shall consist of well-graded aggregate. The proportions of
Portland cement shall be as specified. Concrete shall be cast in strongly
proportioned moulds fitted with all requisites for the formation of
chamfers, radii, V-grooves, recesses, lewis holes, etc, to produce
blocks perfect in shape, true to dimensions, having smooth and true
faces and clearly defined chamfers, radii and sharp arises on all
exposed edges.

30-14.2 MOULDING
Concrete shall be deposited slowly in layers, and shall be thoroughly
worked in and packed so as to dispel all air and fill the moulds
perfectly. The moulds shall not be slackened off or removed till a
period of 36 hours has elapsed since the blocks were made.
Immediately after the removal of moulds, the back and side joints of
the blocks against which concrete-in-mass or mortar will abut shall be
thoroughly roughened whilst the concrete is still green. No plastering
of any exposed face or surface shall be allowed. All moulded concrete
shall be kept continuously watered for a period of at least 28 days after
the moulding.

30-14.3 CARBORANDUM NO-SKID SURFACE

If so specified, the top surface of copings of all descriptions and the
treads of steps shall be impregnated with carborandum grains dusted
through a No.12 mesh hand-screen upon the concrete in such a manner
as to ensure an even distribution. Each superficial square yard of
surface so treated shall receive 2 ¾ lbs of carborandum grains which
shall be well worked into the surface of the concrete by a wooden
hand float.

30-14.4 NIPPER HOLES AND V-GROOVES

Nipper holes shall not be allowed in any exposed face whatsoever and
if lewis holes are to be provided they shall be filled solid with 1 to 2
grout at the same time as the joints are filled. Lewis holes shall not be
allowed in copings, but V-grooves shall be provided which can be used
for setting with chain clips.

379
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-14.5 DEPOSITING CONCRETE IN MOULDS

Concrete shall be transported from the mixing machine to the moulds
as quickly as possible and shall be deposited and spread in them in
layers. Each batch of concrete shall be well worked in and thoroughly
packed against the faces of the moulds. On the completion of each
block, its top surface shall be well beaten down and struck off true and
level by means of a long straight edge and finally floated off with a
hand float. When the manufacture of an item has begun the supply of
concrete shall be continuous and the item shall be finished off
complete in one operation. All precast concrete shall be kept
continuously watered for a period of at least 28 days after casting.

30-14.6 REMOVAL OF MOULDS

When th concrete has set sufficiently the sides and ends of a mould
shall be slackened off and eased away from the face of the green
concrete to allow the circulation of air but this shall not be done till
twenty-four hours have elapsed since concreting was completed,
except when items have hollow faces.

30-14.7 PRE-CAST CONCRETE NOT SQUARE OR

HONEYCOMBED
If the sides or ends of any precast concrete are not true as a result of
the building of the mould or faulty setting, all such roundings or
inequalities shall be dressed off neatly and accurately by masons so as
to produce true and even faces when it is set in position. If honeycomb
exists in a slight degree only it shall be stopped neatly and carefully
with 2 to 1 cement mortar rubbed in with dry sand by means of a hand
float fair with the general face of the block. Precast concrete that is
irreparably out of square or badly honeycombed shall not be accepted
for use in the permanent work.

30-14.8 BORKEN OR DAMAGED PRE-CAST CONCRETE

Broken or damaged precast concrete shall not be allowed to be set
anywhere in the permanent work unless approved in writing by the
Engineer-in-charge and provided that the concrete shall be good and
sound.

30-14.9 LIFTING AND DATING PRE-CAST CONCRETE

No precast concrete shall be lifted off the floor till at least seven days
have elapsed after precasting it. Its date of manufacture shall be legibly
written on the top directly after it has been floated off and finished.

380
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-14.10 STACKING PRE-CAST CONCRETE

The precast concrete after being cured shall be placed in stacks to
mature and air space shall be left around each one of them.

30-14.11 DATE OF USING

No precast concrete shall be set in the permanent work unless four
weeks have elapsed since its date of manufacture.

30-14.12 OTHER RESPECT

In all other respects precast concrete shall conform to Section 30-2 for
Cement Concrete (General) of these specifications.

381
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-15 MORTAR AND GROUT

30-15.1 GENERAL
This work consists of the making and placing of mortar and grout for
use in concrete structures other than in prestressing ducts. Such uses
include mortar for filling under masonry plates and for filling keyways
between precast members where shown on the plans, mortar used to
fill voids and repair surface defects, grout used to fill sleeves for
anchor bolts, and mortar and grout for other such uses where required
or approved.

30-15.2 MATERIALS AND MIXING

30-15.2.1 Materials for mortar and grout shall conform to the requirements of
Article 20.3. The grading of sand for use in mortar when the width or
depth of the void to be filled is less than ¾ inch shall be modified so
that all material passes the No.8 sieve.
30-15.2.2 Type IA, air entraining, Portland cement shall be used when air
entrainment is required for the concrete against which the grout or
mortar is to be placed.
30-15.2.3 Unless otherwise specified or ordered by the Engineer, the proportion
of cement to sand for mortar shall be one to two and for grout shall be
one to one. Proportioning shall be by loose volume.
30-15.2.4 When nonshrink mortar or grout is specified, either a nonshrink
admixture or an expensive hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C
845 of a type approved by the Engineer, shall be used.
30-15.2.5 Only sufficient water shall be used to permit placing and packing. For
mortar, only enough water shall be used so that the mortar will form a
ball when squeezed gently in the hand.
30-15.2.6 Mixing shall be done by either hand methods or with rotating paddle-
type mixing machines and shall be continued until all ingredients are
thoroughly mixed. Once mixed, mortar or grout shall not be
retempered by the addition of water and shall be placed within 1 hour.

30-15.3 PLACING AND CURING

30-15.3.1 Concrete areas to be in contact with the mortar or grout shall be
cleaned of all loose or foreign material that would in any way prevent
bond and the concrete surfaces and shall be flushed with water and
allowed to dry to a surface dry condition immediately prior to placing
the mortar or grout.
30-15.3.2 The mortar or grout shall completely fill and shall be tightly packed
into recesses and holes, on surfaces, under structural members and at
other locations specified. After placing, all surfaces of mortar or grout

382
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

shall be cured by the water method as provided in Section 30-13 of

these specifications for a period of not less than 3 days.
30-15.3.3 Keyways, spaces between structural members, holes, spaces under
structural members, and other locations where mortar could escape
shall be mortar-tight before placing mortar.
30-15.3.4 No load shall be allowed on mortar that has been in place less than 72
hours, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
30-15.3.5 All improperly cured or otherwise defective mortar or grout shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at own expense.

383
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-16 APPLICATION OF LOADS

30-16.1 GENERAL
Loads shall not be applied to concrete structures until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength and, when applicable, sufficient
prestressing has been completed, so that damage will not occur.

30-16.2 EARTH LOADS

Whenever possible the sequence of placing backfill around structures
shall be such that overturning or sliding forces are minimized. When
the placement of backfill will cause flexural stresses in the concrete,
and unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the placement shall
not begin until the concrete has reached not less than 80% of its
specified strength.

30-16.3 CONSTRUCTION LOADS

30-16.3.1 Light materials and equipment may be carried on floor slab / bridge
decks only after the concrete has been in place at least 24 hours,
providing curing is not interfered with and the surface texture is not
damaged. Vehicles needed for construction activities and weighing
between 1,000 and 4,000 pounds, and comparable materials and
equipment loads, will be allowed on any span only after the last placed
deck concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 2,400
pounds are square inch. Loads in excess of the above shall not be
carried on bridge decks until the deck concrete has reached its
specified strength. In addition, for post-tensioned structures, vehicles
weighing over 4,500 pounds, and comparable materials and equipment
loads, will not be allowed on any span until the prestressing steel for
that span has been tensioned.
30-16.3.2 Precast concrete or steel girders shall not be placed on substructure
elements until the substructure concrete has attained 70% of its
specified strength.
30-16.3.3 Otherwise, loads imposed on existing, new or partially completed
portions of structures due to construction operations shall not exceed
the load, carrying capacity of the structure, or portion of structure, as
determined by the Load Factor Design methods of AASHTO using
Load Group IB. The compressive strength of concrete (f’) to be used in
computing the load-carrying capacity shall be the smaller of the actual
compressive strength at the time of loading or the specified
compressive strength of the concrete.

384
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

30-17 MEASUREMENT AND RATE

30-17.1 MEASUREMENT
30-17.1.1 Except for concrete in components of the work for which payment is
made under other bid items, all concrete for structures will be
measured by ether the cubic foot or cubic meter for each class of
concrete included in the schedule of bid items or by the unit for each
type of precast concrete member listed in the schedule of bid items.
30-17.1.1.1 When measured by the cubic foot or cubic meter, the quantity of
concrete will be computed from the dimensions shown on the plans or
authorized in writing by the Engineer with the following exceptions.
30-17.1.1.2 The quantity of concrete involved in fillets, scorings and chamfers I
square inch or less in cross-sectional area will not be included or
deducted. Deductions for embedded materials as reinforcing, structural
and prestressing steel, expansion joint filter material, waterstops and
deck drains will not be made.
30-17.1.1.3 When there is a bid item for concrete to be used as a seal course in
cofferdams, the quantity of such concrete to be paid for shall include
the actual volume of concrete seal course in place, but in no case shall
the total volume to be paid for exceed the cubical contents contained
between the vertical surfaces 1 foot outside the neat lines of the seal
course as shown on the plans. The thickness of seal course to be paid
or shall be thickness shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the
Engineer.
30-17.1.2 The number of precast concrete members of each type listed in the
schedule of bid items will be the number of acceptable members of
each type furnished and installed in the work.
30-17.1.2.1 Whenever an alternative or option is shown on the plans or permitted
by the specifications, the quantities of concrete will be computed on
the basis of the dimensions shown on the plans and no change in
quantities measured for payment will be made because of the use by
the Contractor of such alternatives or options.
30-17.1.3 The number of moulded concrete articles of each type listed in the bid
items will be number of acceptable numbers of each type furnished.

30-17.2 RATE
The unit rates for various types of Portland cement concrete listed in
table 1 (page 339) shall be full compensation for all the work specified
in this section including testing of concrete and shall also include all
forms, false work, weep holes, drain setting anchor bolts and dowels,
surface finish and cleaning up as shown on the drawings or ordered by
the Engineer-in-charge.

385
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–31

REINFORCING STEEL

31-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel in
accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the plans.

31-1.2 MATERIALS
Reinforcing plain or deformed billet steel bars of specified grade shall
conform to Section 15 of these specifications.

31-1.3 BAR LISTS AND BENDING DIAGRAMS

When the plans do not include detailed bar lists and bending diagrams,
the Contractor shall provide such lists and diagrams to the Engineer for
review and approval. Fabrication of material shall not begin until such
lists have been approved. The approval of bar lists and bending
diagrams shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expense incident to the
revision of material furnished in accordance with such lists and
diagrams to make it comply with the design drawings shall be borne by
the Contractor.

31-1.4 FABRICATION
31-1.4.1 BENDING
Bar reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shapes shown on the
plans. All bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted. Bars
partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as shown
on the plans or specifically permitted.

31-1.4.2 HOOKS AND BEND DIMENSION

The dimensions of hooks and the diameters of bends measured on the
inside of the bar shall be as shown on the plans. When the dimensions
of hooks or the diameter of bends are not shown, they shall be in
accordance with ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete”.

386
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

31-1.5 HANDLING, STORING, AND SURFACE

CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground on
platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected from
mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to
conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement
shall be free from dirt, loose rust or scale, mortar, paint, grease, oil, or
other nonmetallic coatings that reduce bond. Reinforcement, shall be
free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. Bonded
rust, surface seams, surface irregularities, or mill scale will not be
cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions cross-sectional
area, and tensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen meet the
physical requirements for the size and grade of steel specified.

31-1.6 PLACING AND FASTENING

31-1.6.1 GENERAL
Steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed as shown on the plans
and firmly held in position during the placing and consolidation of
concrete.

31-1.6.2 SUPPORT SYSTEM

Reinforcing steel shall be supported in its proper position by use of
precast concrete blocks wire bar supports, supplementary bars or other
approved devices. Such reinforcement supports or devices shall be of
such height and placed at sufficiently frequent intervals so as to
maintain the distance between the reinforcing steel and the formed
surface or the top surface of slabs within ¼ inch of that indicated n the
plans. Platforms for the support of workers and equipment during
concrete placement shall be supported directly on the forms and not on
the reinforcing steel.

31-1.6.3 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCKS

Precast concrete blocks shall have a compressive strength not less than
that of the concrete in which they are to be embedded. The face of
blocks in contact with forms for exposed surfaces shall not exceed 2
inches by 2 inches in size and shall have a colour and the texture that
will match the concrete surface. When used on vertical or sloping
surface such blocs shall have an embedded wire for securing the block
to the reinforcing steel. When used in slabs, either such a tie wire or
when the weight of the reinforcing steel is sufficient to firmly hold the
blocks a place, a groove in the top of the block maybe used.

387
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

31-1.7 SPLICING OF BARS

31-1.7.1 GENERAL
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths indicated on the
plans unless otherwise permitted. Except for slices shown on the plans
and lap slices for No.5 or smaller bar, splicing of bars will not be
permitted without written approval. Splices shall be staggered as far as
possible.

31-1.7.2 LAP SPLICING

Lap splices shall be of the lengths shown on the plans. If not shown on
the plans, the length of lap splices shall be approved by the Engineer.
In lap splices, the bars shall be placed and tied in such a manner as to
maintain the minimum distance to the surface of the concrete shown on
the plans. Lap splices shall not be used for Nos. 14 and 18 bars except
as approved by the Engineer.

31-1.7.3 WELDED SPLICES

Welded splices of reinforcing bars shall be used only if detailed on the
plans or if authorization is made by the Engineer in writing. Welding
shall conform to the Structural Welding Code, Reinforcing Steel,
ANSI AWS D1.4 of the American Welding Society and applicable
special provisions in the contract documents.

31-1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
Substitution of different size reinforcing bars will be permitted only
when authorized by the Engineer. The substituted bars shall have an
area equivalent to the design area, or larger.

31-1.9 MEASUREMENTS
Steel reinforcement incorporated in the concrete will be measured in
pounds / Kg on the total computed weight for the sizes and lengths of
bars. The weight of bars will be computed using the following weights.
Weight lbs. per lin
Bar Size
feet
No.3 0.376
No.4 0.668
No.5 1.043
No.6 1.502
No.7 2.044
No.8 2.670
No.9 3.400
No.10 4.303
No.11 5.313
No.14 7.65
No.18 13.60

388
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

No allowance will be made for clips, wire, separators, wire chairs, and
other material used in fastening the reinforcement in place, If bars are
substituted upon the Contractor’s request and as a result more
reinforcing steel is used than specified, only the amount specified will
be included. The additional reinforcing steel required for splices that
are not shown on the plans but are authorized as provided herein, will
not be included.

31-1.10 RATE
The unit rate for the quantity of reinforcement determined under
measurement for each class of reinforcing steel shown in the bid
schedule will be made at the contract price per pound / Kg.
Reinforcement steel to be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating,
splicing, and placing of the reinforcing steel including all incidental
work and materials required as per above specifications specially
included in the contract.

389
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–32

BRICKWORK
32-1 GENERAL

32-1.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, all brickwork shall be finished in a
workmanlike manner, true to dimensions and grades shown on the
drawings to the following specification.

32-1.2 GLOSSARY
Frog Indentation formed on the bedding surface of a
brick manufactured by moulding or pressing.
The indentation may be shallow (not exceeding
3/8" (9.5mm). The frog face is to be kept
upward in brickwork.
Course Row of bricks between tow consecutive bed
joints. Its thickness is taken as one brick plus
one mortar joint.
Bed Joints Joints normal to the pressure.
Quoins External corners of walls. The term is
sometimes used for bricks or stones which
from the quoins e.g. quoin brick, quoin stone.
Prepends Vertical joints of the face of the wall. In plain
walling it is necessary for good bond that these
joints should, in alternate coursed, be vertically
one above the other.
Stretchers Bricks laid with their lengths on the face of
wall or parallel to the face of wall.
Headers Bricks laid with their widths on the face of wall
or parallel to the face of wall.
Bats Pieces of bricks and are usually known as ½ or
¾ bat according to the fraction of a whole
brick.
Lap Horizontal distance between the vertical joints
in two consecutive. Queen Closers Bricks made
with the same length and thickness but with
half the width of a brick. They are usually
placed next to the quoin header to obtain the
lap. They are usually made economically by
cutting the broken bricks.
King Closer Bricks which are cut in such a way that one end
is half the width of the brick. They are used in

390
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the construction of reveals to avoid having any

face brick less than four inches on the bed.
Squint Quoins Bricks cut or moulded to form angles other
than right angles in plan. They are cut to show
a ¾ brick on one face and a ¼ brick on return.
No closers are then used on the front of the
brickwork.
Keyed brick Brick used to provide effective key for plaster.
Cellular brick Brick having hallow cells to lighten the weight
of wall and to increase thermal insulation.
Plinth bricks Bricks moulded with a splay or moulding of a
projection of 2¼ and are used to form the top
member of a projecting plinth.
Bull-nose Bricks Bricks moulded with an angle employed to
form quoints. The radius of the curve lies on
the long centre line of the brick.
Cow-nose Brick having double bull-nose on end brick.
Junctions of Cross The bond is obtained in cross or party walls
Walls abutting against main walls by placing a closer
of 4½ inches from the face in every alternate
course in the main wall thus leaving a space 2½
inches deep and having a length equal to the
thickness of the cross wall for the reception of
the 2¼ inches projection in every other course
of the cross wall.
Projecting Courses There are three cases in which it is necessary to
enlarge the horizontal area of walls: first, to
increase the area of the base to distribute the
pressure over greater area of earth as in footing;
secondly, to form a projection to afford a
bearing area to support the ends of girders or
joist; and thirdly, to obtain architectural effect,
as in the construction of strings or cornices.
The following tow rules must be complied with
in order to obtain the greatest efficiently. First,
in any course the projection should not exceed
one-fourth the length of the brick. This is to
prevent the bricks from overturning, provided
they are properly weighted at their back end.
Secondly, all bricks as far as possible should be
laid as headers; this renders the bricks more
secure from being drawn from the wall.
Footings They are the side courses placed at the base of
a wall to distribute the pressure over a greater
area of foundation.
Corbelling It is sometimes necessary to support loads. It
consists of one or more courses projecting a
distance sufficient to afford the required
bearing area for the load.
Throating Groove on the surface of copings or string

391
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

course.
Coping Covering course of brickwork at the lightest to
form the water-proof top for preventing the
interior of the wall from wetting. Copings are
commonly throated.
Drip Course Drip course throws off water clear of walls. It
has a throated under surface and is usually done
over arches, doors and window sills and
parapets.
String Courses Horizontal projections of brickwork often
constructed below windows.
Flush joint Joint formed by slicing surplus surface mortar
on the face of brickwork.
Raked joint Joint formed by raking the mortar about ¼ inch
or 3/8 inch so that the joint is in shade. It is
effective when the perpends are flush.
Weathered joint Joint formed by drawing the point of trowel at
a slight angle along the course. It is the best
joint for reducing the ingress of water.
Mason’s V joint Where it is desired to produce the even looking
joints, mason’s V joint is formed.

32-1.3 CLASSIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified, brickwork shall be of the following 2
classes.
(a) Brickwork 1st Class
(b) Brickwork 2nd Class

32-1.4 MATERIALS
32-1.4.1 BRICKS
Bricks shall conform to Section 6-1 of the specifications for Clay
Bricks, unless otherwise specified. No bats shall be used, except where
absolutely necessary for obtaining the dimensions of different courses
or the specified bond.

32-1.4.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be contained in bill of quantities. It shall be prepared in
accordance with he relevant provisions set forth in Section 16 of these
specifications for the specified Mortar.

32-1.4.3 WATER
Water in brickwork shall conform to Section 1 of these specifications.

392
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-1.5 TOOLS
All equipment used for mixing mortar, transporting it and for laying
bricks shall be clean and free from set mortar, dirt, or other injurious
foreign substances. It shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each
day’s work.

32-1.6 WETTING OF BRICKS

Before use all bricks, except sun-dried bricks, shall be soaked in clean
water in a tank or pit for at least 2 hours. In the case of masonry in mud
mortar, however, dry bricks shall be used.

32-1.7 BOND
Unless otherwise specified, all brickwork shall be laid in English Bond
with facing frogs upwards.

32-1.8 LAYING OF BRICKS

Each brick shall be set with both bed and vertical joints filled with
mortar and thoroughly bedded in by tapping with handle of trowel. At
every fourth course bricks shall be flushed with mortar and grouted
full.

32-1.9 JOINTS
Horizontal joints shall be parallel and truly level, vertical joints in
alternate course shall come directly over one another. Thickness of
joints, unless otherwise specified, shall not be less than ¼ of an inch
and shall not be more than 3/8 of an inch. The height of 4 courses and
3 joints as laid shall not exceed more than 1 inch the height of 4 bricks
as piled dry one upon the other.

32-1.10 CORNER
At all corners alternate courses of bricks shall be laid header-wise and
stretcher-wise so as to bond the two walls well together.

32-1.11 ROUND PILLARS

Round pillars shall be built with quadrant shaped bricks; if the pillars
are of considerable height flat circular discs of stone or cement
concrete of the same diameter as the pillar about 3 inches thick shall be
introduced at every 4 to 6 feet as bond stone. The cost of this operation
will be included in the unit rate.

393
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-1.12 PLUMB BOBS AND STRAIGHT EDGES

All brickwork shall be truly plumbed and each set of 4 brick course
shall be checked with plumb bob and straight edge.

32-1.13 FACE WORK

All face work shall be finished with neat drawn joints and pointed out
if it has not to be plastered. If it has to be plastered the joints shall be
raked out before any plaster is laid on. For face work the bricks shall
be of true edges, uniform colour and correct dimensions. If specially
required, face work shall be laid up with pressed bricks. All brick
courses shall be so proportioned that they will work out evenly with
the height of windows and doors. Backing of the pressed brickwork
shall be done as per specifications for brickwork 1st class.

32-1.14 JOINING WORKS

When fresh masonry is to join masonry that has partially or fully set,
the exposed joining surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned,
roughened and wetted so as to effect the best possible bond with the
new work. All loose bricks and mortar shall be removed. In all cases,
returns, buttresses, counterforts, etc., shall be built up well course by
course and carefully bonded with the main wall and shall never be
joggled on afterwards.

32-1.15 STRIKING JOINTS

Where in the case of brickwork in lime or cement mortar, pointing or
plastering to the face work is not provided as a separate item the joints
in face work shall be struck.

32-1.16 RAKING JOINTS

The joints of brickwork, which is to be pointed or plastered, shall be
raked out with a hook to a depth of half an inch. The raking shall be
done before the mortar sets each day.

32-1.17 CUT BRICKWORK

Bricks shall be cut, dressed or grooved, as required for shaping jambs,
fitting chowkats and for architectural features of the building. Corners
shall be made with cut bricks; five bricks shall be used for each corner.

32-1.18 FIXTURES
Holdfasts and similar fixtures shall be built in with the surrounding
brickwork in their correct position in specified mortar. They shall be

394
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

built in as the work progresses and not inserted later on into space left
for them.

32-1.19 PROGRESS
Brickwork shall be carried up in a uniform manner. No portion shall be
raised more than 3 feet above another at the same time. Temporary
spaces left during construction shall be racked and not toothed.
Straight edges supplied to bricklayers shall have courses marked on
them with saw cut or measuring rod shall be provided and the height of
course shall be checked all over the building from time to time so as to
keep all courses level.

32-1.20 BED PLATE

Bed plates of concrete or stone shall be provided under beam. They
shall conform to the dimension given in the drawing and shall be
carefully laid to correct level. Backing up, if necessary, shall be done
with tiles or split bricks.

32-1.21 BRICKLAYING IN FREEZING WEATHER

32-1.21.1 PROTECTION OF BRICKS
All bricks delivered for use in freezing weather shall be fully protected
immediately upon delivery by a weather-tight covering that will
prevent the accumulation of water, snow or ice on the bricks; loose
board covering shall not be permitted.
32-1.21.2 HEATING OF SAND
All sand shall be heated in such a manner as will remove all frost, ice
or excess moisture but will prevent the burning or scorching of the
sand.
32-1.21.3 HEATING OF BRICKS
All frosted bricks shall be defrosted by heating them to a temperature
of approximately 180o F.
32-1.21.4 HEATING OF WATER
All water used shall be heated to a temperature of approximately 180o
F.
32-1.21.5 SLAKING OR SOAKING OF LIME
All slaking of quick lime or soaking of hydrated lime shall be done at a
temperature of at least 60oF, and this temperature shall be maintained
until lime is incorporated into the mortar.
32-1.21.6 PROTECTION OF MORTAR AGAINST FREEZING
After the mortar has been mixed it shall be maintained at such
temperature as will prevent its freezing at all times and if necessary the

395
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

contractor shall use metal mortar board equipped with oil torches. No
anti-freez liquid, salt or other substance shall be used in mortar, except
when specified or permitted by the Engineer-in-charge.
32-1.21.7 ENCLOSURES AND ARTIFICIAL HEAT
All work under construction shall be protected from freezing for a
period of 48 hours by means of enclosures, artificial heat or by other
suitable methods duly approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

32-1.22 OPENING
Door and window openings shall have flat or relieving arches or lintels
spanning across them as shown on the drawing or as specified.

32-1.23 CENTRING
Centrings for all openings shall be strong enough to support the lintels
or arches spanning the openings and shall remain in position till the
brickwork has set. No additional payment will be made to the
contractor for this item of work.

32-1.24 SCAFFOLDING
The contractor shall provide all scaffolding, staging, ladders, etc.
necessary for the work. All walls or other brickwork shall be securely
braced and protected against damages by wind and storms during the
construction period. No extra rate shall be paid for this item.

32-1.25 PUTLOGS
Only headers shall be left out to allow a putlog to be inserted and not
more than one brick shall be left out for each putlog. Under no
circumstances shall putlogs be made immediately under or next to the
impost or skew back of arches.

32-1.26 PROTECTION & WATERING

All brickwork shall be protected during construction from the effects
of rain and frost by suitable covering. The brickwork laid in cement or
in cement and lime mortar shall be kept moist for a period of 10 days.

32-1.27 MEASUREMENT
Brickwork shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings
having a superficial area of one square foot or less.

396
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-1.28 RATE
32-1.28.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for brickwork shall include cost of
carrying out brickwork, cutting bricks wherever required, curing and
protecting as per above specifications specially included in the
contract. It shall further include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports
and other tools and plants required for carrying out brickwork as per
above specifications.
32-1.28.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of bricks, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-1.28.1.

397
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-2 BRICKWORK 1ST CLASS

32-2.1 DESCRIPTION
The brickwork shall be executed in accordance with section 32-1 of
these specifications using the specified mortar.

32-2.2 MATERIALS
32-2.2.1 BRICKS
Bricks shall conform to section 6-3.1 of these specifications. Their size
shall be as specified.
32-2.2.2 MORTAR
Mortars shall conform to Section 16-2 of these specifications as
specified.

32-2.3 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-2.4 MEASUREMENT
Brickwork shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings
having a superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-2.5 RATE
32-2.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for brickwork shall include cost of
carrying out brickwork, cutting bricks wherever required, curing and
protecting as per above specifications specially included in the
contract. It shall further include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports
and other tools and plants required for carrying out brickwork as per
above specifications.
32-2.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of bricks, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-2.5.1.

398
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-3 BRICKWORK 2ND CLASS

32-3.1 DESCRIPTION
The work covers brickwork 2nd class in accordance with Section 32-1
of these specifications using the specified mortar.

32-3.2 MATERIALS
32-3.2.1 BRICKS
Bricks shall conform to section 6-3 of these specifications. Their size
shall be as specified.
32-3.2.2 MORTAR
It shall conform to section 16 of these specifications as specified.

32-3.3 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-3.4 MEASUREMENT
Brickwork shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings
having a superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-3.5 RATE
32-2.5.3 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for brickwork shall include cost of
carrying out brickwork, cutting bricks wherever required, curing and
protecting as per above specifications specially included in the
contract. It shall further include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports
and other tools and plants required for carrying out brickwork as per
above specifications.
32-2.5.4 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of bricks, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-3.5.1.

399
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-4 BRICKWORK IN ARCHES

32-4.1 DESCRIPTION
The work covers brickwork in Arches.

32-4.2 MATERIAL
32-4.2.1 BRICKS
1st class bricks shall conform to section 6-3 of these specifications.
32-4.2.2 MORTAR
Mortar composition as mentioned in BOQ shall conform to Section 16
of these specification.

32-4.3 CENTERING
Centering shall be strong enough to bear the weight of an arch without
any deflection. The surface of centering shall be correctly struck to the
curvature of the soffit of the arch.

32-4.4 WEDGES AND SAND BOXES

Centres of arches over 5 feet in span shall be erected on wedges, those
over 10 feet in span on double wedges and those over 20 feet span on
sand boxes so as to allow the gradual lowering of centre (i.e. striking).

32-4.5 BUILDING OF ARCHES

The building of Arches shall not commence till abutments have been
built to their full width and up to the level of skew backs. Arch work
shall be carried up evenly from both abutments and as soon as the arch
is complete, masonry shall be built up evenly on both sides to the
heights of the crown so as to load the haunches.
The brickwork in arches shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications, except with the following modifications.
(a) In all arches, the voussoir joints shall be truly radial. Bricks
shall be laid in full beds of mortar and shall be thoroughly
rubbed and pressed into their beds so as to squeeze out surplus
mortar and leave the joints as thin as possible.
(b) Joints in arches shall not exceed ¼ inch in thickness at any
point Radial joints in gauged arches shall not exceed 1/8 inch in
thickness.
(c) Skewbacks shall be formed of bricks correctly shaped to radiate
from the centre of curvature and shall not be packed with

400
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

mortar or chips. Before the building of an arch is commenced

abutments shall be exactly as the same level and skewbacks in
place.
(d) For gauged arch work, the arch shall be laid out full size on the
ground on lime plaster and all joints carefully marked out.
Templates shall then be made as a guide for the special shapes
of bricks. Special bricks shall, where possible, be moulded and
burnt but if the amount of work is small they shall conform to
the requirements of the Engineer incharge and shall be
carefully cut and rubbed to the required shape. All bricks for an
arch shall be prepared in full and set up dry on the ground
before the work begins.
(e) Segmental arches used over rectangular door or window
openings shall have a flat rectangular soffit and segmental
extrados.
(f) Flat arches shall be built in the same manner as gauged arches
but with all the voussoir joints converging on the apex of an
equilateral triangle described on the soffit of the arch. Cross
joints and extrados shall be parallel to the soffit. The arch shall
be built with a camber of 1/8 per foot of span.
(g) Arches shall be built in concentric rings and each ring shall be
completed before work on the one above it is commenced. In
all cases, whether, specially moulded brick or ordinary bricks
are used, the center line of the brick face shall be radially
placed. The arch rings shall, in all cases, be bonded together by
a special bond stone (key stone) which shall be of stone
concrete or brickwork, as actually specified or shown on the
drawing.

32-4.6 STRIKING OF CENTRE

Centre shall be struck as noted below:
(a) For single segmental arch, center shall be struck immediately
after the arch is finished.
(b) For series of segmental arches, center of each arch shall be
struck as soon as the arch succeeding it is completed.
(c) For semi-circular, elliptical or pointed arches, centers shall be
struck as soon as the brickwork has reached two-thrids the
height of such arches.

32-4.7 PRECAUTIONS FOR RELIEVING ARCHES

The space between the relieving and flat arches shall not be filled till
the wall has been completed.

32-4.8 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to section 32-1 of these
specifications.

401
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-4.9 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-4.10 RATE
32-4.10.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for brickwork in arches shall
include cost of carrying out brickwork, cutting bricks wherever
required, curing and protecting as per above specifications specially
included in the contract. It shall further include the cost of providing,
using and removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders,
supports and other tools and plants required for carrying out brickwork
as per above specifications.
32-4.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of bricks, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-4.10.1.

402
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-5 CORBELLING

32-5.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge,
corbelling shall be affected by 1/4th brick projection in ordinary work
and 1/8th brick projection in a work where greater strength is required.

32-5.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-5.3 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-5.4 RATE
32-5.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for corbelling shall include cost of
carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as per above
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding, shuttering,
centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and plants required
for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-5.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of corbelling, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-5.4.1.

403
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-6 COPING

32-6.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, the top courses of all plinths, parapets,
steps, etc., shall be built in brick on edge. In case of parapet walls the
outside half of the brick shall be weathered and throated. The corners
shall be made by cutting fine bricks or by special bricks of 9" x 9" x 4-
3/8" size to give a radiated and keyed joint.

32-6.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-6.3 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-6.4 RATE
32-6.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for coping shall include cost of
carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as per above
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding, shuttering,
centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and plants required
for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-6.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of coping, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-6.4.1.

404
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-7 WINDOW SILLS

32-7.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, window sills shall be made by laying brick
on edge over 1½ inch tile creasing to keep the joints in line. The bricks
shall project 3 inches from the face of the wall and shall be weathered
on the upper edge and throated underneath up to 3 inches from either
end.

32-7.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-7.3 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-7.4 RATE
32-7.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for window sill shall include cost of
carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as per above
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding, shuttering,
centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and plants required
for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-7.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of window sills, mortar and any
other material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in
Section 32-7.4.1.

405
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-8 CORNICES

32-8.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge, all
cornices shall be in line with the straight and parallel faces. All
exposed cornices shall be weathered and rendered on top in specified
mortar and throated underneath. The profile shall be checked
constantly with the sheet iron templates. Cornices intended to be
pointed shall be made with specially moulded bricks or bricks cut and
rubbed so as to give mouldings true to drawings. In cornices to be
plastered the bricks shall be roughly cut so as to allow the plaster to
finish true to drawings and templates. Thickness of plaster shall not be
less than half an inch and more than one inch.

32-8.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-8.3 MEASUREMENT
The measurement of cornice shall be done by length. The unit of
measurement shall be one running foot.

32-8.4 RATE
32-8.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for cornices shall include cost of
carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as per above
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding, shuttering,
centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and plants required
for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-8.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of cornices, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-8.4.1.

406
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-9 STRING COURSES

32-9.1 DESCRIPTION
String courses shall comprise bricks laid on edge or flat in one or two
courses as actually specified.

32-9.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-9.3 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-9.4 RATE
32-9.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for string courses shall include cost
of carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as per
above specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding,
shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and
plants required for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-9.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of string courses, mortar and any
other material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in
Section 32-9.4.1.

407
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-10 EAVE BRICKWORK

32-10.1 DESCRIPTION
Eave bricks shall be laid flat or on edge as specified with a projection
of 3 inches and chamfered 1½ inch on the upper edge.

32-10.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-10.3 MEASUREMENT
Eave brickwork shall be measured by length. The unit of measurement
shall be one running foot.

32-10.4 RATE
32-10.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for eave brickwork shall include
cost of carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as
per above specifications specially included in the contract. It shall
further include the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding,
shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and
plants required for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-10.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of eave brickwork, mortar and any
other material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in
Section 32-10.4.1.

408
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-11 DRIP COURSE

32-11.1 DESCRIPTION
Brickwork in drip courses when made of flat bricks, shall conform to
Section 32-10 of these specifications for Eave Brickwork and
measured at the same rate. When built in brick on edge it shall conform
to Section 32-7 of these specifications for Window Sills and measured
and paid at the same rate.

409
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-12 BRICKWORK IN REIMBURSEMENT TO

DRAIN

32-12.1 DESCRIPTION
Bricks shall be laid flat or on edge as shown on drawings or as
specified. Each brick shall be set on a layer of at least ¼ inch mortar
with vertical joints filled with mortar and bedded in by tapping with
the handle of the trowel. The width of reimbursement shall be 9 inches
and shall be constructed on sides of the roads sloping towards the
drain; the slope shall be 1/8 of an inch in 9 inches. Cut and dressed
bricks shall be laid in imbursements for laying narrow strips in width
along sides of drain, for all curves, bends, slopes, change of slopes and
irregular areas. No extra amount shall be paid for any difficulty or
complicated items required during execution.

32-12.2 JOINTS
The thickness of the joint shall not be less than ¼ of an inch and not
more than 3/8 of an inch. All joints between bricks and along outer end
and inner side of reimbursement shall be completely filled with mortar
and struck.

32-12.3 BASE
The base concrete shall be of specified thickness.

32-12.4 STRIKE
All strips, sides and narrow width areas shall be filled with bricks on
edge or flat.

32-12.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications. The base concrete shall be paid separately.

32-12.6 MEASUREMENT
The brickwork in reimbursement shall be measured by length. The unit
of measurement shall be one running foot.

410
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-12.7 RATE
32-12.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for eave brickwork shall include
cost of carrying, cutting wherever required, curing and protecting as
per above specifications specially included in the contract. It shall
further include the cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding,
shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and
plants required for carrying out brickwork as per above specifications.
32-12.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of brickwork in reimbursement,
mortar and any other material required, in addition to the labour rate
detailed in Section 32-12.7.1.

411
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

32-13 BRICKWORK IN TEGA TO DRAIN

32-13.1 DESCRIPTION
Bricks shall be laid on end, 3 inches or 4½ inches in thickness as
specified on a bed not less than ¼ of an inch and not more than 3/8 of
an inch thick. All external surface joints shall be struck.

32-13.2 BASE
The base concrete shall be of specified thickness.

32-13.3 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications.

32-13.4 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100
cubic feet. No deduction shall be made for openings having a
superficial area of one square foot or less.

32-13.5 RATE
32-13.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for brickwork in tega shall include
cost of carrying out brickwork, cutting bricks wherever required,
curing and protecting as per above specifications specially included in
the contract. It shall further include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports
and other tools and plants required for carrying out brickwork as per
above specifications.
32-13.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of bricks, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
32-13.5.1.

412
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–33

STONE

33-1 STONE MASONRY (GENERAL)

33-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of all stone masonry carrying out work in
accordance with these specifications to dimensions and grades shown
on the drawings.

33-1.2 GLOSSARY
Surface Finishes
Angle Tooled/ Stone dressed so that the tool marks run
Angle Droved diagonally across the face.
Axed A patent axe or a bush hammer having a surface
obtained by using an axe. A surface is said to be
‘fine axed’ when it had been chopped with fine
axe marks. ‘Once-axed is the term used for
rough chopping of a surface with an axe.
Batted (Broad A surface having been obtained by using a
Tooled) batting tool in parallel strokes, each traversing
the full depth of the stone face. The strokes may
be vertical, when it is often referred to as
tooling or oblique at an angle of 45o to 60o. The
result is a regular pattern of fluted cuts in the
stone face. The number of strokes per inch may
very from 8 to 10
Blocking cut Roughly shaping a slab or stone.
Boasted/Droved A stone finished by dressing with boaster.
Boasted for Reduced by rough dressing, usually with a point
Carving tool, approximately the form required by a
sculptor.
Broached (Droved) Worked with a point to show diagonal or
horizontal furrows.
Cloured Hacked or hammer dressed.
Drafted Margin A tooled margin, ¾ of an inch to 2 inches wide
worked on the face of a rough squared stone.
Having a rough face prepared with a hammer.
Hammer Dressed/
Bull Faced
A stone cut with the laminae running vertically
Joint Bedded
and parallel to the joints.

413
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Moulded Cut to the profile of a moulding.

Picked/Pecked/Spa A dressing obtained by means of a point tool or
rrow Pocked pick
Pitched A surface produced by a pitching tool to
resemble the natural rock face.
Polished Having a high-gloss mirror- like finish. It is
also synonymous with the term ‘rubbed’ used
for stones.
Surface Finishes Various types of surface finishes are as below:
a) Quarry Face or Rock Face
It is the original face of a stone when it comes
from the quarry. It may be formed by quarrying
operations, or may be a natural seam. In the
later case it is known as a seam face. Quarries
producing seam face stone are traversed in all
directions by natural seam forming relatively
small blocks of stone of irregular shape and
size. Seam faces are often highly coloured by
deposits from mineral laden waters which have
penetrated into the seams. It is employed in
pitching, dumping, retaining walls, etc.
b) Hammer Dressed or Scabbled Face
Scabbling mean taking off the irregular angles
of stone with the scabbling hammer. That is
usually done at the quarry, and the stone is then
said to be quarry pitched, hammer faced or
hammer blocked. If, after scabbling, the face of
stone is roughly dressed also by Waller’s
hammer, the finish is called hammer dressed
face. Hammer dressed faces are commonly used
on granite and harder limestones and sandstones
but are not suitable for softer varieties of
limestone. This type of stone is used in rubble
masonry or stone pitching.
c) Rough Tooled Face
Rough tooled (also called one-line dressed face)
is sparrow pitched or chisel dressed. No portion
of the dressed face is more than ¼" from a
straight edge placed on it. It is analogous to
rough or coarse pointed finish. This sort of
finish is usually employed to give a bold
appearance to quoin and plinth stones and
where so used, it usually has a chisel drafted
margin about the perimeter.
d) Chisel Dressed Face
Chisel dressed face (also called two-line
dressed face) is again sparrow pitched or chisel
dressed. No portion of the dressed face is more
than 1/8 inch from a straight edge placed on it.
It is analogous to medium pointed finish. This

414
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

is usually employed in quoins and jambs for

doors and windows or in ashlar masonry.
e) Fine Dressed Face
This is a superlative degree of tooled finishes.
(It is also called three-line dressed face). It is
the best finish which can be given to a stone
with chisel and other dressing tools without
rubbing. A straight edge laid along the face of
the stone so dressed, remains in contact with the
surface at every point.
f) Sawed Finish
It is the surface produced by the saws in cutting
a stone to size. The marks of the saws are
visible.
g) Smooth Finish
It is produced by planers without hand work
except the removal of objectionable tool makrs.
h) Rubbed Finish
It is obtained by rubbing the surface of stone till
it becomes perfectly regular, and it also as
smooth as possible. The work is done by hand
by rubbing a piece of stone with another.
During the first stages of the process, water and
sand are added; gradually the quantity of sand is
reduced. Large quantities of stone are machine-
rubbed by means of large horizontal revolving
iron discs. The stones are placed on and kept
from revolving with the disc by means of
stationary timbers fixed across the table a few
inches above the stone. No pressure other than
the weight of the stone is applied. Water and
sand are added to accelerate the process. Only
plane surfaces can be rubbed in this way.
i) Polished Finish
Marbles, granites and many limestones, after
beingworked to a smooth surface, are often
polished. Polishing by manual labour is an
exceedingly tedious job. The polishing of
marble by hand is done by using rubbers and
pads, sand and water, pumices, snake stone and
putty powder. The polishing of marble sawn-cut
slabs can also be done by machines.
j) Drafted Face
The margin or border of a stone may have one
type of finish and the remaining area another
type, a tooled margin with the remainder of the
surface roughly dressed by hammer. Stones
finished in this fashion are called drafted stone.
k) Sandblasting Face
Even fine-grained surface obtained through
sand blasting.

415
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fixing Stone in Positions

Centering A temporary wooden structure on
which arches are built.
Cramp A short length of metal or slate suitably bedded
into sinking cut in stone. It is stones to tie
stones to one another or to their backing.
Dowel/Slate Dowel A short piece of metal or slate bedded in
sinkings cut in the joint faces of adjacent stones
to prevent independent movement of the two
stones.
Fixer’s Bedding Lime putty used by fixers.
Grout Liquid mortar consisting of cement and
sand.
Hollow Bedded Blocks se with mortar at the ends only. The
centre portion is left hollow to guard against
breakage in case of settlement.
Slate Cramp A piece of slate, approximately 2 inches by 7
inches by 1 inch. It is generally used in flat
coping stones and cut to a double dove-tail
form. It is embedded in Portland cement in
sinkings formed to receive it.
Slate Joggle A small piece of slate left into a vertical joint
and into the top bed to the stone below to
prevent independent movement of stones.

Architectural and Engineering Terms

Abutment The solid structure at the extremity of an arch
or beam.
Apex Stone The top stone of a gable, spire or pediment.
Arch A method of spanning an opening with
masonry consisting of a series of wedgeshaped
stones, known as voussoirs or arch stones
which are supported by lateral pressure induced
across the radial joints.
Flat Arch An arch in which the voussoirs or arch stones
are arranged to provide a horizontal soffit.
Joggled Arch An arch in which adjacent stones are
interlocked by means of rebates or tongues and
grooves.
Skew Arch An arch whose face is not at right angles to its
supports.
Squinch Arch An arch built across an internal angle such as
across that of a square structure, to support one
side of an octagonal spire rising from the
structure.
Stilted Arch An arch having its springing line higher than
the line of the impost.
Band Stone An intermediate coping stone or stones inserted
in a gable between a springer and the apex and
bonded into the gable wall.

416
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Base Course The lowest course of a wall.

Batter An inward inclination of the exterior face of
wall.
Bed The lower surface upon which a block of stone
rests, and the upper surface which supports the
stone above.
Bed Joint A horizontal joint in a wall or a radiating joint
between the voussoirs of an arch.
Bed Mould The lowest moulding or course of a cornice.
Bedstone A large flat stone upon which machines or
structural members are mounted or bedded.
Belting A course which protrudes from the face of a
wall into which it is built, and which may have
a convex surface.
Block Stone A stone roughly squared at the quarry.
Blocking Course A plain course of masonry over a cornice.
Breaking Joint An arrangement of stones whereby the vertical
joints in one course do not coincide with those
in the course above or below.
Bonder/Bondstone A stone whose longer dimension is in the
thickness of the wall and which may run right
through the thickness of the wall.
Chamfer The flat surface formed by planning off the
sharp angle made by the meeting of two
surfaces. This term is usually applied to stone
or wood surfaces, while a ‘bevel’ refers
generally to glass or metal surfaces.
Check A sinking either in the form of a rebate or a
slot.
Cladding Thin slabs of stone or other material used
externally as a non-load-bearing covering for
the structure of a building.
Clean Back The inside vertical surface of a stone, which
extends through the thickness of the wall and
forms a face on the inside.
Closer A stone placed in a course to close or fill a gap.
Column A free standing vertical member, usually
circular on plan.
Coping The topmost course of masonry on a wall,
which may overlap the surface to give
protection from the weather to the courses
beneath.
Segmental coping A coping with a rounded top.
Wedge Coping A wedge-shaped coping. It is higher on the
front face to divert water towards the back and
has a horizontal bottom bed and a weathered
top bed. The coping usually projects beyond
each face to the wall, and these projections are
throated on both the undersides. Sometimes,
the coping projects and is throated only at the
back with the front face flush with the face of

417
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the wall.
Corbel A stone or series of stones which project from a
wall and often used as a support.
Corbel Step Crow step in a stepped gable.
Crow step The stone from which steps are formed in a
stepped gable of a wall.
Dressings A general term used for all masonry.
Drum One of the stone composing the shaft of a
column.
Edge Bedded/Joint A stone cut with the laminae running vertically
Bedded rather than horizontally. (Note Edge bedding is
used in the cutting of voussoirs with a view to
distributing strain around the arch and so
helping to avoid breakage and exfoliation when
the stone is submitted to the action of time and
atmosphere.)
Header A stone laid so that its greatest dimension in
the thickness of the wall.
Hearting The infilling which forms the core of a rubble
wall.
Impost The top member of a pier or pillar from which
an arch springs.
Inban/Inband A quoin or jamb stone short on main wall face
and long (for bonding) in return or reveal, c.f.
outban or outband.
Inband Rybat Header stone in a jamb of an opening.
Inbond Header on a reveal or return.
Indenting The omission of stones to from recesses into
which future work can be bonded.
Jamb Stone One of the number of stones forming part of
the vertical surface at the sides of a door or
window opening.
Joggle (1) A projection on one stone to fit into a
corresponding recess in another stone. (2)
Adjacent recesses for filling with cement grout
or mortar.
Kerb/Curb Stone A stone used as an edging (See ‘curb Stone’).
Keystone The central stone of an arch.
Kilt Slight weathering commonly given to stone
steps in the setting.
Kneeler A stone bonded into the wall and forming an
intermediate length of the coping to a gable
end.
Linings Thin slabs of stone or other material used
internally as a non-load-bearing covering.
Lintel (head) A stone which spans, in one piece, the top of an
aperture.
Long Stone/Saving A relieving arch over a lintel.
Mason’s Mitre A mitre worked out of a single piece of stone
and not forming a joint at the mitred angle as in
a joiner’s mitre.

418
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Moulding Moulding of various profiles and worked upon

stones for producing or namental affect, both
by hand and by machine.
Mullion A vertical member sub-dividing a window.
Outban/Outband Quoin or jamb stone long on main wall face for
bonding and short in return or reveal c.f. Inban
or Outban.
Outbank Rybat Stretcher stone in a jamb or opening.
Padstone/template A stone incorporated in the structure to
distribute a concentrated load
Pen/Pen Check/ A birds mouth rebate
Pend
Pier Any load bearing vertical mass of masonry,
either isolated or attached to a wall.
Pilaster A flat rectangular pillar which projects from a
wall.
Pillar A free standing vertical member rectangular or
polygonal on plan.
Pining A series of small shallow stones introduced at
intervals to make up the height of certain
course, thus giving a chequered effect.
Plinth The projecting base of wall or column.
Plinth Course An eaves course, wall head course, or plinth
course.
Podium A raised platform forming the base of the
building.
Quoin A stone at an external angle of a wall.
Raggle/Raglet A sinking to receive a flashing for the edge of
steps.
Ragletting/Ragling The process of cutting a raggle.
Rebate A continuous rectangular sinking, along the
edge of a stone either to receive window or
door frames or anther member.
Respond A half pillar or pilaster corresponding to an
other or to a pillar opposite to it.
Return A charge of direction in wall member or
moulding.
Returned End The termination of stone worked to match the
face with an external mitre.
Reveal That part of the jamb of the window or door
opening which is not covered by a frame.
Sill/Cill The lower horizontal member of window
opening and certain external door openings
Skew The sloping dressed stones or coping that finish
the top of a gable.
Skewback An inclined or splayed surface of an abutment
from which an arch spring.
Skew Putt/Club The bottom stone at skew supporting a raking,
Skew, Skew Corbal coping or skew above.
Slip Narrow piece of stone inserted between large
blocks.

419
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Soffit The under surface of a lintel or an arch or the

lower surface of a vault.
Spandrel A triangular space enclosed by the curve of an
arch with a horizontal line drawn through its
apex and a vertical line drawn through its
springing
Splay Any surface included to a main surface, e.g. an
incline window reveal.
Springer Any surface included to a main surface, e.g. an
inclined window reveal.
Springing line The stone form which an arch springs.
Spur Stone/Powl A stone suitably shaped and fixed at the corner
Stone /Stone of a building or opening to prevent damage to
Codding the structure from traffic.
Stool A seating such as that on both ends of a sill to
which a window jamb is fixed.
Stopped End The termination of a moulding worked in the
solid.
Stretcher A stone lid in a way that its greatest dimension
is the length of the wall.
String/Stringer A series of inclined slabs at the free end of
steps covering the concrete core and following
the line of the staircase.
String Course/Belt A narrow moulded or plain projecting course
course /band course continued horizontally along the face of the
building.
Throating/Throat/ A groove worked in the under surface of
Drip projecting stone work to prevent rain water
from flowing back to the wall.
Through Stones Stone which extend through the entire
thickness of the wall as a tie or bond.
Toothing The end of a wall left with course breaking
joint for future extension.
Transom A horizontally bar sub-dividing a window or
other opening.
Upstart/Start A reveal; stone long in vertical dimension.
Voussoir A wedge-shaped stone forming a unit of an
arch.

Walling
Ashlar Masonry consisting of plain blocks of stone,
finely dressed to given dimensions and laid in
their courses.
Block in Course Roughly squared block of stone which may
very in length having worked beds and hammer
dressed face and joints and set in course which
may very in height not exceeding 12 inches.
(Note –Used in heavy engineering masonry).
Brought to Courses Walling, similar to un-coursed rubble, which is
roughly leveled up to courses at intervals and
varies in height according to the locality and

420
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the type of stone used. (Note –the course

heights usually correspond with the heights of
the quoin and jamb stones.)
Core A filling of undressed stone used In the interior
of a wall.
Course A continuous layer of stone of uniform height.
Coursed Rubble Rough sq1uared stone walling in courses to suit
the heights of corner stones or rybats.
Damp-proof A layer of material impervious to moisture e.g.
Courses slate, interposed between other materials to
prevent the passage of water by capillary action
or otherwise.
Dry walling Walling without mortar.
Dyke A rubble boundary wall.
Galleted/Gaenetted Having small stones inserted into the mortar
face joints in un-jointed walling, usually for
decorative purposes but sometimes to wedge
the larger stones in position.
Knapped Flint Flint cobbles or nodules split across and used in
walls with the split face showing.
Lacing Courses A course of bricks, dressed stone, tile or other
material built into walls of random rubble or
flint to give added stability and strength.
Parpend Ashlar Ashlar faced on both sides, as for parapet walls.
Polygonal/Rar Walling built of stones of irregular shape which
Walling may be roughly pitched to fit the adjacent
stones.
Random rubble Walling built of irregular unsquared stone not
in course. When it is leveled up, about every 12
inches in height, it is called ‘Random rubble
brought to courses’.
Rubble Stone of irregular shape and size.
Sneck A small stone in squared rubble work to make
up the bed for bonding.
Snecked Rubble walls in which the stones of irregular
size squared with small stones or snacks are
introduced to break the courses.
Squared rubble Walling, built of irregular squared stone, not in
courses. When it is leveled up, about every 12
inches in height, it is called ‘Squared rubble
brought to courses.
Square flint A wall in which each flint is cut to a uniform,
regular size generally 4 inches square and laid
in courses.
Weathering Working the top face of a stone to a plane
surface inclined to the horizontal for the
purpose of throwing off rain water.

421
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-1.3 MATERIAL
33-1.3.1 STONE
Stone shall be produced from an approved source and shall conform to
Section 11-1 for stone. Approved sample of the stone shall be retained
as a standard of martial to be furnished at the site of work. All stone
used in the work shall be equal in all respects to the approved samples.
33-1.3.2 MORTAR
33-1.3.2.1 Composition
Mortar shall be used as specified in bill of quantities.
33-1.3.2.2 Preparation
It shall be prepared in accordance with the relevant provisions set forth
in Section 16-2 & 16-3 of these specifications for the specified mortar.
33-1.3.2.3 Water
Water shall conform to Section 1 of these specifications.

33-1.4 STACKING OF STONE

Through bond stone shall be staked separately and shall be marked on
the face with tar or paint. Marks shall be made on the inner face or face
to be plastered.

33-1.5 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

All equipment used for mixing and transporting mortar for lying stone
shall be clean and free from set mortar dirt or other injurious foreign
substances. The equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned at the end of
each day’s work.

33-1.6 WETTING OF STONE

Before use, all stone shall be soaked in clean water in a tank or a pit for
at least 2 hours, expect in case of masonry in mud mortar where dry
stone shall be used.

33-1.7 LAYING STONE MASONRY

(a) Every stone shall be laid in the work on its natural quarry bed
or in such a manner that the stresses borne by it come normal to
such bed.
(b) Whenever breaks are unavoidable, joints shall be made in
gradual steps. Cross walls shall be carefully bonded into the
main wall and junctions of wall shall be formed at the time the
walls are being built.

422
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) Each stone shall be set with both bed and vertical joints filled
with mortar, except in case of dry stone pitching or masonry
and thoroughly bedded in.
(d) All masonry shall be taken up in truly plumb or at Specified
slope in the case if batter.
(e) Quoins and jambs shall be laid at a true right angle to the bed
corners being straight and vertical. In the case of masonry with
hammer dressed stone a chisel draft one-inch wide shall be
given in each external face to allow accurate plumbing. Quoins
shall be laid using headers and stretchers alternately.
(f) Jambs for door and window opening shall be formed with
quoins of the full height of the course. The length and breadth
of the quoins shall be at least 2½ times X 1¼ times the depth of
the course respectively. For door openings three and for
window openings two of these quoins shall be stone of full
thickness of wall. Door and window frames shall be let into ½
inch in the quoins.

33-1.8 FIXTURE
Holdfasts and similar fixtures shall be built in with the surrounding
stone masonry in their correct position in specified mortar. These shall
be built in as the work progresses and not inserted later on onto space
left for them.

33-1.9 LINTEL AND INSIDE STONE

All lintels and inside stones, not to be plastered over, shall be of the
full width of the wall in which they are laid, including the thickness of
the plastered face or faces.

33-1.10 OPENINGS
Door and window openings shall have flat or relieved arches or lintels
spanning across them as shown on the drawing or as specified.

33-1.11 SCAFFOLDING
The contractor shall provide all scaffolding, staging, ladders etc.,
necessary for the work. All walls or other stone masonry of the
building shall be securely braced and protected against damages by
wind and storms during construction. No extra rate will be paid for this
item of work.

33-1.12 CENTRING
The centering for all openings shall be strong enough to support lintels
or arches spanning the openings. They shall be subjected to the
approval of the Engineer-in-charge and shall remain in position till

423
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

stone masonry has set. No additional payment will be made to the

contractor for this item of work.

33-1.13 PUTLOGS
Only headers shall be left out to allow a putlog to be inserted and hot
more than one stone shall be left out for each putlog. Under no
circumstances shall putlogs be made immediately under or next to the
impost skew back of arches.

33-1.14 ROUNDED CORNER

Corners shall be rounded where specified (Such work shall be payable
separately in the case of exposed masonry but not in the case of
masonry to be plastered).

33-1.15 STRIKING OF JOINTS

The exposed surface shall be finished as specified. Joints shall be
struck simultaneously with masonry work keeping the face of the work
clean. (Payment for striking the joints shall be made separately on
superficial area of the masonry.)

33-1.16 BED PLATES

Bedplates shall be provided under all beams and joists. They shall be
chisel dressed on all faces and conform to the dimensions given in the
drawing and shall be carefully laid having fine joints with the specified
packing to give the correct level.

33-1.17 CRAMPS
Cramps, joggles and dowels shall be used whenever specified or
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Cramps shall be from 6 inches to
12 inches in length, 3/8 inch in thickness and 1 inch to 2 inches in
width, as specified. They have each end turned at right angle. Copper
cramps shall be forged, and set with neat cement. Lead cramps shall be
formed by running molten lead into the dove-tail channels. Joggles and
dowels shall be of double wedge form and made of copper, slate or
similar material and set in neat cement. On no account iron cramps,
joggles or dowels, whether galvanized or otherwise, shall be used.

33-1.18 PROTECTION AND WATERING

All stone masonry shall be protected during construction from the
effects of rain and frost by suitable covering. The masonry laid in
cement and lime shall be kept moist for a period of 10 days.

424
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-1.19 COPING AND CORNERS

Coping stone shall be of full size throughout, of dimensions indicated
on the drawing or as specified, if not shown on the drawing. Beds,
joints and top shall be fine pointed. All coping shall be dowelled or
cramped as specified, and the corners of pillars skew back and similar
work shall be joggled to the stone below, if so specified.

33-1.20 STRING COURSES

The string courses shall tail at least 9 inches into the work, a full
bearing for at least 4 inches and shall be paid for at rate per running
foot along the course. They shall also be throated on the underside, if
so directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

33-1.21 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment
shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for
opening having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-1.22 RATE
33-1.22.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-1.22.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

425
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-2 DIMENSION STONE

(DRESSING AND CUTTING)

33-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of dressing & cutting stones. All visible edges
shall be free from chipping.

33-2.2 CUT STONE WORK OR MOULDING

It shall be executed accurately in accordance with the design and
worked to approve templates. The exposed face shall be finished as
specified or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

33-2.3 FINE DRESSED STONE

Also called three-line dressed stone, it shall be fine chisel dressed
having the best surface, which can be given to a stone with chisel and
without rubbing. A straight edge laid along the face of the stone so
dressed shall be in contact with the surface at every point.

33-2.4 CHISEL DRESSED STONE

Also called two-line dressed, it shall be sparrow picked or chisel
dressed so that no portion of the dressed face is more than 1/8 inch
from a straight edge placed on it.

33-2.5 ROUGH TOOLED STONE

Also called one-line dressed, it shall be sparrow picked or chisel
dressed so that no portion of the dressed face is more than ¼ inch from
a straight edge placed on it.

33-2.6 HAMMER DRESSED STONE

Scabbled or hammer dressed stone shall be dressed with a scabbling
hammer with out any picking chiselling or rubbing.

33-2.7 MEASUREMENT
All cut stone, moulded or ornamental stone shall be measured by
superficial area of each stone unless otherwise specified in BOQ.

426
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-2.8 RATE
The unit rate for dressing /cutting or moulding shall include dressing /
cutting or moulding the stone as per above specifications and stacking
at the site of dressing.

427
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-3 ASHLAR MASONRY

33-3(A) ASHLAR FINE

33-3(A).1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of carrying out the ashlar masonry in line with
the specified architectural details, dimensions and grades in a
workmanlike manner according to following specifications.

33-3(A).2 STONE DRESSING

Every stone in fine ashlar shall be dressed on all beds, joints and faces
in accordance with the section 33-2 for dressing of stone; full true and
out of winding if the surface are plain or to uniform curve and twists if
so specified.

33-3(A).3 THICKNESS OF JOINTS

Stone shall be set in specified mortar, the beds or joints being in no
case more than 1/8 inch in thickness. Each stone shall be struck with a
maul, when laid, to bring it to a solid bearing, both to the bed and the
joints.

33-3(A).4 SIZE OF STONE

Stone shall be laid in regular course not less than 9 inch in height. All
courses shall be of the same height unless otherwise specified. No
stone shall be less in breadth than 1¼ times its length or less in length
than 2½ times its height.

33-3(A).5 BOND
The face stone shall be laid header and stretcher alternately unless
otherwise specified. The headers are arranged to come as nearly as
possible in the middle of the stretchers below and the stone in adjacent
layers shall break joints on the face for at least half the height of the
course, and the bond shall be carefully maintained throughout.

33-3(A).6 THROUGH STONE

In walls 2½ feet thick and less the header shall run right through the
wall.

428
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-3(A).7 COURSES
The courses line shall be horizontal and side joint vertical throughout.

33-3(A).8 JAMBS
Jambs in door and window openings shall be formed with quoins of the
full height of the course. Unless otherwise specified, the quoins shall
not be less in breadth than 1½ times or in length less than twice the
depth. At least three quoins in case of doors, and two quoins in case of
window, shall be stones of the full thickness of the wall.

33-3(A).9 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall comply with the Section 33-1 for
Stone Masonry (General).

33-3(A).10 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment
shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for
opening having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-3(A).11 RATE
33-3(A)11.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-3(A)11.1 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

429
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-3(B) ROUGH TOOLED OR BASTARD ASHLAR

33-3(B).1 DESCRIPTION
The faces exposed to view shall have a fine dressed chisel draft, one
inch wide, all round the edges and be rough tooled between the drafts,
and on all beds and joints, which shall not exceed 3/8 inch in thickness.

33-3(B).2 MORTAR
The stone shall be set in specified mortar. Mortar shall conform to
Section 16-1 – 16.3 of these specifications.

33-3(B).3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

The stone shall be set in specified mortar. In other respects such as size
of stones, bond, jambs, courses etc., specification shall be the same as
laid down for Fine Ashlar Section 33-3(A).

33-3(B).4 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment
shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for
opening having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-3(B).5 RATE
33-3(B).5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-3(B).5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

430
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-3(C) ROCK RUSTIC OR QUARRY FACED ASHLAR

MASONRY

33-3(C).1 DESCRIPTION
It shall be similar to Section 33.3(B) of these specifications, except that
the exposed faces of the stone between the drafts shall be left rough as
the stone comes from the quarry. But no rock face or “bushing” shall
project more than 3 inches form plane of drafts. The drafts may be
omitted altogether, except at quoins if required for architectural
purposes or as specified.

431
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-4 ASHLAR FACING

33-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of stone facing of specified rough-tooled, rustic
(with or without chisel draft, except at quoins) or chamfered. For a
particular work, facing shall have, as specified, a backing of
brickwork, concrete or rubble masonry.

33-4.2 DRESSING STONES

In walls of rubbles or concrete faced ashlar, the dressing shall be as
specified, except for the dressing of the backs of stone, which may be
left rough in the state they are received from the quarry.

33-4.3 SIZE OF STONE

No course shall be less than 8 inches in height. One-third of the entire
length of each course shall be headers, used at regular intervals.
Headers shall not be less than the breadth of the ashlar stone plus 18
inches. Unless otherwise specified, no stone shall be less than 1½ feet
long.

33-4.4 DEPTH OF FACING

Unless otherwise specified, the depth of the facing shall not be less
than 4½ inch and 9 inch in alternate courses.

33-4.5 HEIGHT OF COURSES

The height of the courses shall be equal to the exact number of courses
of brick or rubble with intermediate mortar joints. The backing shall be
carried up simultaneously with the face work.

33-4.6 BEDS AND JOINTS

Beds and joints shall be true and square for at least 4½ inches and 1½
inch respectively from the face. Beds and joints shall not be more than
1/8 inch thick and ¼ inch thick respectively.

33-4.7 BOND STONE

Bond stones shall run right through backing when wall is not more
than 2½ feet thick. In case it is thicker, stones shall overlap at least 6
inches and shall be inserted between 5 feet and 6 feet apart, clear in
every course.

432
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-4.8 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects this work shall comply with the Section 33-1 of
these specifications for Stone Masonry (General).

33-4.9 MEASUREMENT
In work of this sort, the face work alone shall be measured for as
ashlar, as is dressed back, according to the type of ashlar masonry 33
(A), (B), (C), true and square on the beds and joints, 1/3rd more is
allowed for header (e.g. in 12 inch courses a thickness of 16 inch from
the face would be measured for as ashlar), and the remainder is
measured for according to the character of the backing.

33-4.10 RATE
22-4.10.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

22-4.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

433
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-5 ASHLAR BLOCK IN COURSE MASONRY

33-5.1 DESCRIPTION
Stone shall be rough tooled on all beds and joints so as to give
rectangular shape. Faces shall be accurately square and all face joints
dressed at right angle to the face for a distance of 4 inches.

33-5.2 SIZE OF STONE

Each course shall consist of stones of even thicknesses and no course
shall be less than 6 inches in height. Stones shall break joints on the
face by at least half the height of the course. No course shall be greater
in height than the one below it. No stones in face, except closer, shall
have less breadth than height. No stone shall tail into the wall less than
its height and at least 1/3rd of the face stones shall tail into the wall
twice their height.

33-5.3 LAYING
All courses shall be laid with beds truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical. Each bed and joint shall be full of the mortar specified and
each stone shall be struck with a wooden maul to bring it to a solid
bearing. No face joint shall be thicker than ¼ inch.

33-5.4 BOND STONE

In walls less than 2 feet thick, through stone shall be inserted at every
course at 5 feet internals breaking joints with similar stone in courses
above and below. In walls more than 2 feet thick through stone shall
overlap each other by at least 6 inches.

33-5.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In other respects the work shall comply with Section 33-1 for Stone
Masonry (General).

33-5.6 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment shall be 100
cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for opening
having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

434
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-5.7 RATE
33-5.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-5.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

435
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-6 ASHLAR BLOCK IN COURSE FACING

33-6.1 DESCRIPTION
Walls built in brickwork, concrete or rubble masonry shall be faced
with ashlar block in course masonry. The work shall comply with
Section 33-5 for Ashlar Block in Course Masonry.

33-6.2 SIZE OF STONES

No stone shall be less than 6 inches, and 1/3rd of the entire length of the
stone shall be header. No stone shall be less than 15 inches long. The
depth of the facing shall not be less than 10½ inches. No header shall
project less than 10½ inches into the backing.

33-6.3 HEIGHT OF COURSE

The height of the course shall equal an exact number of courses of
brick or rubble with intermediate mortar joints. The backing shall be
carried up simultaneously with the face work.

33-6.4 BEDS AND JOINTS

Beds and joints shall be rough-tooled, true and square for at least 3
inches and 1½ inches thick.

33-6.5 BOND STONE

Bond stone shall run right through the backing when the wall is less
than 2 feet thick. In thicker walls they shall overlap at least 6 inches.
Bond stone shall be inserted 5 feet apart in every course.

33-6.6 FACE
The face of the stone shall be left rough (but no projection shall exceed
2 inches) without chisel draft, except at quoins, where ½ inch draft
shall be given.

33-6.7 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects this work shall comply with the Section 33-1 of
these specifications for Stone Masonry (General).

436
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-6.8 MEASUREMENT
Only so much of the face stone as is dressed back full, true and square
from face shall be measured and paid for as block in course. One third
shall be added for headers. The remainder work shall be measured and
paid for according to the character of the backing.

33-6.9 RATE
33-6.9.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-6.9.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

437
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-7 COPINGS, CORNICES AND COLUMNS

33-7.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of mortar stone cornices, copings, pillars, string
courses, corbels, brackets, chajjas and similar works shall be made
from stone of uniform color and texture and of the kind specified for
each.

33-7.2 STONE DRESSING

The stone shall be dressed full or to the approved templates. Unless
otherwise specified, the exposed faces shall be fine chisel dressed
(three line). All visible angles and edges shall be free from chipping.

33-7.3 SIZE OF STONE

No stone shall be less than 18 inches in length nor less in height than
the height of the copings. In cornices and string courses which do not
extend right through wall, every stone shall tail into the wall by at least
as much as the projection behind the face of the wall and in no case
less than 6 inches. Coping stone shall extend the entire depth of the
coping, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-
charge in writing.

33-7.4 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF STONE

Physical properties of stone shall conform to Section 11-1.3 of these
specifications.

33-7.5 MORTAR
Cornices, string courses, corbels and pillars shall be set in lime mortar
or cement mortar of specified mix. It shall conform to section 16-1 to
16-3 of these specifications.

33-7.6 CHAJJAS
Chajjas in the case of isolated windows, shall consist of a single stone;
in continuous chajjas all joints shall come over the brackets.

33-7.7 JOINTS
No joint shall be more than 1/8 inch in thickness.

438
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-7.8 WEATHERING AND THROATING

All outside cornices, copings, corbels and similar projecting courses
shall be weathered on the top and throated underneath.

33-7.9 DOWELS
Coping stones and other similar works are to be cramped or dowelled
and courses of pillars, skew backs and similar works shall be joggled,
wherever specified.

33-7.10 MEASUREMENTS
Cornices, string courses and chajjas shall be measured by length. The
unit of measurement shall be one foot. Copings shall be measured by
volume. The unit of measurement shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic
meter.

33-7.11 RATE
22-7.11.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for cornices/string
courses/copings/chajjas shall include the cost of carrying out
cornices/string courses/copings/chajjas, cutting and dressings stone.
Whenever required, curing and protecting it as per above specifications
and/or any other specifications specially included in the contract. It
shall further include the cost of providing, using and removing
scaffolding, shuttering, centring, staging, ladders, supports and other
tools and plants required for carrying out cornices/string
courses/copings/chajjas as per above specifications.

22-7.11.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required in addition to the labour rate detailed above.

439
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-8 COURSE RUBBLE MASONRY

(1ST CLASS)

33-8.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of course rubble masonry and shall conform to
these specifications.

33-8.2 HEIGHT OF COURSE

Stone shall be laid in horizontal courses not less than 6 inches in
height. All stones in a course shall be of equal height and all courses of
the same height, unless otherwise specified. But no course shall be
thicker than the course below it. All stones shall be set full in specified
mortar in beds and joints.

33-8.3 DRESSING
The face stone shall be square on all joints in masonry. The beds shall
be hammer or chisel-dressed, true and square, for at least 3 inches back
from the face, and the joints for at least 1½ inches. The face of the
stone shall be hammer dressed and “bushing” not to project more than
1 ½ inches.

33-8.4 THICKNESS OF JOINT

All side joints shall be vertical and beds horizontal, and no joint shall
be more than 3/8 inch in thickness. No pinning shall be allowed on
face.

33-8.5 SIZE OF STONE

No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height, nor shall it tail
into the work to a length less than its height; at least 1/3rd of the stone
shall tail into the work at least twice its height or in walls thicker than
2 feet, three times its height.

33-8.6 THROUGH STONE AND HEADERS

Through stones shall be inserted 5 to 6 feet apart in every course, and
shall run right through the wall, not more than 2 feet thick. When the
wall is more than 2 feet thick, a line of two or more headers shall be
laid from face to back, which shall overlap each other at least 6 inches.
The headers shall have a length of at three times the height.

440
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-8.7 BREAKING OF JOINTS

Stone shall break joint by at least half the height of the course.

33-8.8 QUOINS
Quoins shall be of the same height as the course in which they occur,
shall be formed of stone at least 1½ feet long and shall be laid stretcher
and header alternately. They shall be laid square on their beds which
shall be fairly dressed to a depth of at least 4 inches.

33-8.9 INTERIOR FACE

The work on the interior face shall be precisely the same as on the
exterior face, except that side joints need not be vertical.

33-8.10 HEARTING
The interior of the wall, called hearting, shall consist of flat-bedded
stones carefully laid on their proper beds and solidly bedded in mortar.
Chips and spawls of stone are wedged in, wherever necessary, so as to
avoid thick beds or joints of mortar. No dry work or hollow spaces
shall be left any where in the masonry. The face work and hearting
shall be brought up evenly, but the hearting shall not be levelled up at
each course by the use of chips.

33-8.11 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 33-1 for Stone Masonry
(General).

33-8.12 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment shall be 100
cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for opening
having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-8.13 RATE
33-8.13.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
course rubble masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified
degree of refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications
and any other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall
further include the cost of providing, using and required for building
stone masonry as per above specifications.
33-8.13.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of course rubble masonry, mortar
and any other material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

441
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-9 COURSE RUBBLE MASONRY

(2ND CLASS)

33-9.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consisting of course rubble masonry (2nd class) shall
conform to Section 33-8 of the specification for Course Rubble
Masonry (1st class) with the following exception.
(a) All stones in a course need not be of the same height, but short
lengths of course shall be made up by two courses, equal in
height to the through course. No course shall be of a height
greater than the course below it. The thickness of the joint shall
not exceed half an inch.
(b) In each course, headers, hammer dressed and of the full height
of the course, shall be placed 5 feet apart. Each header shall
have a breadth not less than the height and shall tail into the
work at least three times its height. Between the headers each
course shall be built of smaller stones not less than 2 inches
thick of which there may be two or three in the height of the
course. These stones need not be dressed but shall be as flat-
bedded as possible. Side joints need not be vertical, but no side
joint shall form an angle with a bed joint sharper than 60o. No
stone shall be less in breadth or length than its height, and care
shall be taken to make the stone in different courses break joint.
All stones shall be set full in mortar. The thickness of joint
shall not exceed 5/8 inch.

33-9.2 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall comply with the Section 33-1 of
these specifications for Stone Masonry (General).

33-9.3 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment shall be 100
cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for opening
having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-9.4 RATE
33-9.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
course rubble masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified
degree of refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications
and any other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall

442
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

further include the cost of providing, using and required for building
stone masonry as per above specifications.

33-9.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of course rubble masonry, mortar
and any other material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

443
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-10 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY

33-10.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of random rubble masonry. Stone shall be hammer
dressed on the face and on the sides and beds to such an extent that
weak corners are chipped off and the stones come into close proximity,
when laid. Each stone shall be laid on its quarry bed and shall be
wedged or pinned strongly into position in the wall by spawls or chips
which may show on the face.

33-10.2 JOINTS
No stone shall tail into the wall less than 1½ times its height. The stone
shall be arranged to break joints as much as possible. Care shall be
taken to avoid long continuous vertical joints.

33-10.3 THROUGH STONE OR HEADERS

One header stone shall be inserted at least every 5 square feet of the
surface and shall run right through the wall if it is not more than 2 feet
thick. If the wall is more than 2 feet thick, a line of headers shall be
laid from face to back which shall overlap each other at least 6 inches.

33-10.4 HEARTING
Hearting or interior filling between the front and back face shall
consist of rubble stone, not less than 6 inches in any direction,
carefully laid, hammered down with a wooden mallet into place and
solidly bedded n mortar. Chips and spawls of stone shall be used,
wherever necessary, so as to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar. No
dry work or hollow spaces shall be left anywhere in the body of the
masonry. Hearting shall be laid nearly level with each course except
that at about 3 feet interval vertical “plumbs” projecting 6 to 9 inches
shall be firmly embodied to form a bond between successive courses.
Hearting shall not be brought to the same level as the front and back
stones by the use of chips. The use of chips shall be restricted to only
wedges in the hearting.

33-10.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, the work shall comply with the Section 33-1 of
these specifications for stone Masonry (General).

444
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-10.6 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment shall be 100
cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for opening
having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

33-10.7 RATE
33-10.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
random rubble masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified
degree of refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications
and any other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall
further include the cost of providing, using and required for building
stone masonry as per above specifications.

33-10.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of course rubble masonry, mortar
and any other material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

445
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-11 DRY RUBBLE MASONRY

33-11.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of dry rubble masonry and shall conform to the
following specifications.

33-11.2 SIZE OF STONE

Dry rubble masonry shall be laid with the largest practicable size of the
stone available-the larger stone being used in the lower courses.

33-11.3 BEDS
Stone shall be roughly dressed to secure the maximum bedding
surfaces without unduly reducing the size of the stone. Each course
shall be built through the entire thickness of the wall.

33-11.4 BOND STONE

Bond stone shall be provided in each course at an interval of 5 feet. It
shall be of the height of the course in which it is to be used, at least as
broad and of the greatest length procurable. No bond stone shall be less
than 2 feet long. When the length is less than the thickness of the wall
2 or more stones shall be used overlapping each other by at least 6
inches to provide through bond form front to back. All bond stones
shall be separately stacked before use and marked so that they can be
identified after having been built in the wall.

33-11.5 FILLING
Wherever required, filling behind dry stone walls shall be done
immediately with stone refuse or chips. Earth shall not be used where
stone refuse is available.

33-11.6 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by volume. The unit of payment shall be 100
cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be made for opening
having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

446
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-11.7 RATE
33-11.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building dry
rubble masonry, cutting and dressing stone to the specified degree of
refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications and any
other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further
include the cost of providing, using and required for building stone
masonry as per above specifications.

33-11.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of course rubble masonry, mortar
and any other material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

447
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-12 STONE MASONRY IN ARCHES

33-12.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consists of stone masonry in Arches and shall conform to
the specifications. All stone masonry in arches shall be finished in a
workmanlike manner, true to dimensions and grades shown on the
drawings and according to the following specifications.

33-12.2 CUTTING, DRESSING OF STONE

Stone to be cut and dressed shall follow the Section 33-2.

33-12.3 CENTRING
Centring shall be strong enough to bear the weight of an arch without
any deflection. The surface of centring shall be correctly struck to the
curvature of the soffit of the arch.

33-12.4 WEDGES AND SAND BOXES

Centres of arches of over 5 feet span shall be erected on wedges.
Centres of over 10 feet span shall be on double wedges and of those
over 20 feet span on sand boxes so as to allow the gradual lowering of
centre.(i.e striking).

33-12.5 BUILDING OF ARCHES

The building of arches shall not begin until the abutments have been
built to their full width and up to the level of skew backs. Arch work
shall be done evenly from both abutments, and as soon as the arch is
complete, masonry shall be built evenly on both sides to the heights of
the crown so as to load the haunches.
Stone masonry in arches shall conform to Section 33-1 for Stone
Masonry work, except with the following modifications.
(a) In all arches, the voussoir joints shall be truly radial. Stone
shall be laid in full beds of mortar and shall be well rubbed and
pressed into their beds so as to squeeze out surplus mortar and
leave the joints as thin as possible.
(b) Joints in arches shall not exceed ¼ inch in thickness at any
point. Radial joints in gauged arches shall not exceed 1/8 inch
thickness.
(c) Skew backs shall be formed of stone correctly shaped to radiate
from the centre of curvature and shall not be packed with
mortar or chips. Before the building of an arch is started

448
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

abutments shall be exactly at the same level and skew backs in

place.
(d) For gauged arch work, the arch shall be laid out full size on the
ground on plaster and all joints carefully marked out.
Templates shall then be made as a guide for the special shapes
of stones. Stones shall be carefully cut and then rubbed to the
required shape. All the stones for any arch shall be prepared in
full and set up dry on the ground before commencing work.
(e) Segmental arches used over rectangular door or window
openings shall have a flat rectangular soffit and segmental
extrados.
(f) Flat arches shall be built in the same manner as gauged arches
but with all the voussoir joints converging on the apex of an
equilateral triangle described on the soffit of the arch. Cross
joints and extrados shall be parallel to the soffit. The arch shall
be built with a camber of 1/8 per foot of span.
(g) Arches shall be built in concentric rings and each ring shall be
completed before work on the ring above is started. In all cases,
care shall be taken that the centre line of the stone face is
radially placed. The arch rings shall, in all cases, be bonded
together by special bond stone.

33-12.6 THROUGH STONE

In the case of arches in walls the two springers and the key stone and
every third stone in between shall be through stones. Unless otherwise
specified, all stones, shall be through stones in the case of ashlar walls
having a thickness of 2½ feet or less.

33-12.7 SIZE OF STONE

Unless otherwise specified, the height of each stone shall be equal to
the thickness of the arch up to 15 inches. Above this, two stones may
be used, but no stone shall be less than 6 inches in height. The intrados
of all stones shall be rectangular, no side being less than 4 inches
(rhembold in skew arches).

33-12.8 BREAKING JOINTS

All stones in arches shall have their ends inside the wall squarely
dressed. All joints shall break with each other and no stone shall lie
over a circumferential joint by less than half the width of the extrados.

33-12.9 MEASUREMENT
Stone masonry in arches shall be measured by volume. The unit of
payment shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic meter. No deduction shall be
made for opening having a superficial area of 1 sft or less.

449
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

33-12.10 RATE
33-12.10.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour basis) shall include the cost of the building
stone masonry in arches, cutting and dressing stone to the specified
degree of refinement, curing and protecting as per above specifications
and any other specifications specially included in the contract. It shall
further include the cost of providing, using and required for building
stone masonry as per above specifications.

33-12.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of stone, mortar and any other
material required, in addition to the rate detailed above.

450
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–34

ROOFING

GLOSSARY
Roof The covering or the upper part of a building
constructed to preserve it from exposure to
weather is known as roof.
Type of roofs Roofs can be broadly be divided into following
major types:
Flat roofs The so called flat has a small slope to drain
water from the roof. The various flat roofs
commonly used are as under:
 Jack Arch Flat It is constructed in the form of small span brick
Roof arches over R.S. Joists. These joists rest on
walls and spandrels are fitted by cheap inert
materials such as lean concrete (fig-1, Page
481).
 Terrace roof The roofing consists of R.C.C. steel joist or
wood beams resting over bed plate on the wall.
The opening between joists is spanned by
wooden joist or steel T-sections over which the
terrace bricks or clay tiles.
 R.C.C. slab roof Roof comprises of reinforcement cement
concrete structural members like beams & slab
or simply slab.
 Pitched roofs A pitched roof is composed of a framework and
roof covering. Frame generally known as
trusses are placed at suitable distances spanning
the two supports. Terms related to pitch roofing
are as under:
Abutment The sloping intersection of a roof surface with
a part of the structure which rises above.
Barge board A member, usually of timber, fixed along the
edges of a gable and covering the ends of the
horizontal roof members.
Battens Horizontal timber members of small section on
which tiles or slates may be laid. They are
sometimes termed tile or slate battens, or tile or
slate laths.
Bedding The laying of tiles or slates in mortar.
Counter battens Timber members of small section fixed at right
angle or obliquely to the direction of the
battens between them and the surface below.
Dormer A vertical window formed in a sloping roof.
Eaves The lower edge of an inclined roof.

451
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Flashing A strip of flexible impervious material, usually

metal, used to exclude water from the junction
between a roof covering and another part of the
structure.
Apron Flashing A flashing whose lower edge is dressed over
the roof covering.
Cover flashing A flashing, used in conjunction with other
components such as soakers, the vertical parts
of which it overlaps.
Raking flashing A flashing at an abutment, its upper edge being
secured into the horizontal joints of brickwork
or masonry and stopped up the slopes from
course to course.
Gable The part of a wall above the general eaves level
at the end of a ridged or partially hipped roof.
Gauge The distance from the line of fixings of a
course of slates or tiles to the fixing of the
course below.
Gutter Any form of roof water channel.
Hip (Piend, Scotish) The sloping intersection of two inclined roof
surfaces which meet at a salient angle.
Hip Iron or Hip A metal strap bent to form a stop for the hip
Hook (Piend Strap covering and screwed to the lower end of a hip
Scottish) rafter.
i) General
The distance that one course of slates or tiles
covers the course next but one below it.
ii) Slate head-nailed with a single nail
The distance that one course of slate covers the
course next but one below it, less the distance
of the nail hole from the slate head.
iii) Single lap tiling
The distance that one course of tiles covers the
course next below it.
Mansard A roof with two pitches on each side of the
ridge, the steeper commencing at the eaves and
intersecting with a flatter pitch finishing at the
ridge. The term is sometimes used for a roof
with steeply pitched slopes surmounted by a
flat.
Margin The distance from the lower edge of a slate or
tile to the lower edge of the course immediately
above.
Pitch The angle of inclination with the horizontal of
the rafters or the surface on which slates or tiles
are laid.
Ridge The intersection of two inclined surfaces at the
apex of a roof.
Slate back The upper surface of a slate as normally laid.
Slate Fillet Slates fitted to form a fillet as an alternative to

452
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

flashings.
Slate Head The upper edge of a slate when laid.
Slate Tail The lower edge of a slate when laid.
Soaker Flexible members, usually of metal, lapped
with slates or tiles and bent to form a watertight
joint, as for example at abutments where it is
used in conjunction with cover flashings, or at
mitred hips, valleys and angles.
Tile Fillet Tiles cut and fitted to form a fillet as an
alternative to flashings.
Tilting Piece A fillet, usually of wood, used at eaves or at
open valley gutters to support the slates in the
correct position relative to the roof surface.
Top Edge The upper edge of a roof surface finishing at a
ridge or against a part of the structure which
rises above the roof surface.
Torching The mortar pointing to the heads and/or the
side joints on the underside of the tiles or
slates.
Undercloak A course or courses of tiles or slates laid under
the bedding of slating or tilling at a verge.
Valley The sloping intersection of two inclined roof
surfaces at a re-entrant angle.
Valley, laced A valley in which the courses are not
horizontal, each course being swept up to a tile
and a half, or slate and a half, laid aslant on a
wide board in the valley.
Valley, mitred A valley at which the tiles or slates of each
course are mitred.
Valley, swept A valley in which tiles or slates, made or cut to
a taper, sweep round in horizontal courses.
 Types of
pitched roofs
Shed roof It slopes in one direction. This type is used
generally on a temporary structure where
appearance is not important and where it
cannot be seen in connection with other types
to form a ‘lean to’.
Gable roof It slopes in two directions as shown in Fig-3
(page 481). This type of roof is widely in use in
big halls of cinemas, auditoriums, etc. The
most common slopes are between 1:2 to 1:1.
Hip roof It slopes in four directions. This type of roof is
widely in use. Its slope varies similarly as in
case of gable roof.
Gambrel roof It slopes in two directions but there is a break
in the slope on each side. This roof is used for
houses on account of efficient use which can be
made of the space under the roof.
Mansard roof It slopes in four directions, but there is a break

453
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

in the slope.
Deck roof It slopes in four directions, but has a deck at the
top.
Sawtooth roof As shown in Fig-8 (page 482), it is used quite
extensively in industrial buildings on account
of the advantage of sufficient light and good
ventilation that it offers. The steep vertical
faces as shown in figures are mostly glazed and
are kept towards the north.
 Shall roof In case of very large openings and massive
structures such as theatres, factories, assembly
halls etc RCC shell roofs are becoming
extremely popular because of the
comparatively thin section which results in
considerable reduction of dead load. The shall
is designed as a membrance and hence it is free
from large bending stress.
 Dome roof Domes are similar in construction to shells in
which also very small RCC section provide
roof covering over very large area within
certain height and diameter ratios. They are
particularly constructed from architectural
consideration, in moments and other similar
buildings.

454
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-1 FIRST CLASS TILE ROOFING

34-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work covers construction of 1st class tile roofing in accordance
with these specifications.

34-1.2 OPERATIONS
The first class tile roofing shall consist of:
(a) First layer of tiles laid in 1:6 cement sand mortar or 1:2 lime-
surkhi mortar resting on battens.
(b) Second layer of tiles in 1:6 cement sand mortar or 1:2 lime-
surkhi mortar laid over a bed half an inch thick 1:6 cement-
sand mortar.
(c) Half an inch thick 1:6 cement sand plaster over second layer of
tiles.
(d) A coat of hot bitumen blinded with sand.
(e) Four inches earthfilling finished with 1 inch mud plaster with
gobri leeping.

34-1.3 MATERIALS
34-1.3.1 BEAMS & BATTENS
Beams and battens shall be of size and types as mentioned in BOQ of
the work.
34-1.3.2 TILES
Unless otherwise specified, tiles used in both the layers shall be of size
12"x6"x1¼" and shall conform to Section 7 of these specifications.
34-1.3.3 CLAY
Clay used in earth filling shall conform to Section 2 of these
specifications.
34-1.3.4 CEMENT MORTAR
It shall conform to section 16-2 of these specifications.
34-1.3.5 BITUMEN
Bitumen shall conform to Section 23 of these specifications.
34-1.3.6 MUD MORTAR
It shall conform to Section 16-1 of these specifications.

34-1.4 LAYING OF BEAMS & BATTENS

The beams and battens shall be of specified type and size shall have
proper finished surface on top so as to give a good bearing to the tile.

455
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

They shall be spaced 12 inches apart center to center and shall be

placed in straight and parallel lines.

34-1.5 TYPES OF BEAMS & BATTENS

34-1.5.1 WOOD
Wood of beams and battens shall be as specified in BOQ of the work.
Wood shall conform to Section 12 of these specifications.
34-1.5.2 STEEL
Steel section shall be as given in BOQ of the work. Steel shall conform
to Section 15 of these specifications.
34-1.5.3 PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS
These shall conform to section 30-15 of these specifications.

34-1.6 SLOPE TO ROOF

The necessary main slope in the roof shall be formed by sloping the
beam or battens.

34-1.7 LAYING OF FIRST LAYER OF TILES

Over the battens the first layer of tiles shall be laid in mortar with the
joints coming over the centre of the battens. Tiles shall be laid straight
and square. All vertical joints shall be as fine as possible.

34-1.8 LAYING OF SECOND LAYER OF TILES

The second layer of tiles shall then be laid in specified mortar on half
an inch thick bed of specified mortar spread over the first layer of tiles.
The joints shall be broken in both directions with the first layer of tiles
laid underneath. The vertical joints shall be as fine as in the case of
first layer of tiles and shall be flushed with mortar at top.

34-1.9 BONDING OF TILES WITH PARAPET WALL

Tiles resting on wall shall have bearing of preferably 4½ inch and in no
case less than 3 inches. These tiles shall butt closely against the
brickwork of the parapet wall leaving no voids; wherever possible, the
ends of the tiles shall be bonded into the brickwork with specified
mortar.

34-1.10 CEMENT PLASTER TO PARAPET

The portion of the parapet wall between the tiles and drip course shall
be plastered with half an inch thick cement sand plaster of 1:3 ratio,
unless otherwise specified.

456
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-1.11 BED FOR BITUMINOUS COATING

Half an inch thick cement sand plaster of specified ratio shall then be
laid over the surface of the second layer of tiles to serve as a bed for
bitumen.

34-1.12 CURING OF BED

The bed shall be cured for seven days, and the surface shall then be
allowed to dry thoroughly before bitumen is laid.

34-1.13 APPLICATION OF BITUMEN THICKNESS

Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature specified by the manufacturer
and poured on the surface to be treated and pulled out so that the
minimum thickness is 1/16 of an inch. The coat of bitumen shall be
continued along with the parapet wall.

34-1.14 BLINDING OF BITUMINOUS COATING

The bitumen coat shall be blinded with sand at the rate of one cubic
foot per 100 square feet of the surface area.

34-1.15 EARTH FILLING AND MUD PLASTER

Four inches thick of good earth (clay) shall then be put and thoroughly
rammed and watered. The roof shall be finished with one inch thick
mud plaster with gobri leeping which shall be done in accordance with
Section 36-6 of these specifications. This shall be done before laying
the drip to ensure a close joint with the wall.

34-1.16 KHURRAS
Khurras shall be made before the earth is laid and shall be in
accordance with the Section 34-9 of these specifications.

34-1.17 POINTING OF TILES UNDERNEATH

Unless otherwise specified, on the completion of the work the
underside of the tiles shall be washed and neatly pointed with 1:2
cement sand mortar.

34-1.18 FILLING SPACES BETWEEN BATTENS

In case of wooden battens, the spaces over the beam and between the
battens shall be closed by one-inch planks nailed to distance pieces
which in turn are nailed to the battens. Where concrete battens have
been used the spaces shall be filled with 1:3:6 cement concrete block

457
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

of exact size and laid in spaces with 1:3 cement sand mortar. The
filling shall be equal to the battens in height and the outer faces shall
be exactly in line with the edge of the beam.

34-1.19 PAINTING WITH PRESERVATIVES

The top surface of wooden battens in contact with the tiles and the end
shall be painted with an approved preservative.

34-1.20 MEASUREMENTS
First class tile roofing shall be measured by the superficial area of the
roof. The unit of measurement shall be 100 square feet or square meter.

34-1.21 RATE
34-1.21.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Laying of first layer of tiles in specified mortar on battens.
(b) Laying of second layer of tiles in specified mortar over half an
inch thick bed of specified mortar.
(c) Laying of half an inch thick cement sand plaster over second
layer of tiles.
(d) Laying of coat of hot bitumen blinded with sand.
(e) Laying of 4-inch earthfilling finished with I-inch mud plaster
with gobri leeping.
(f) Cement plastering portion of parapet against which mud plaster
and earthfilling butt.
(g) Pointing the underside of the tiles with specified mortar.
(h) Filling spaces between battens over the beam.
(i) Providing, using and removing scaffolding, staging, ladders,
supports and other tools and plants required for carrying out the
work as per above specifications. It shall also include making
good of any damaged portion of the walls or other structure on
which the roof is being laid.
NOTE: The rate does not include labour required for the construction of
khurras or any other kind of rain water outlet. The rate also does not include
hoisting and fixing in position, battens and beams. Painting of wooden
beams & battens with preservative, is also not included.
34-1.21.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of the materials specified above for
carrying out the work in accordance with above specifications, in
addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 34-1.21.1 of the
specification.

458
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-2 SECOND CLASS TILE ROOFING

34-2.1 DESCRIPTION
Second class tile roofing shall conform to Section 34-1 of these
specification in all respects with the following exceptions:
Only one layer of tiles shall be laid instead of two and their size shall
be 12"x6"x2" as specified in Section 7-1 of these specifications.

459
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-3 JACK ARCH ROOFING

34-3.1 DESCRIPTION
The work covers construction of Jack Arch roofing in accordance with
specification and the drawing of the work.

34-3.2 OPERATIONS
Jack Arch roofing shall involve the following operations:
(a) Construction of brick segmental arches in specified mortar.
(b) Filling of haunches and crown with specified cement concrete.
(c) Laying of bitumen blinded with sand over half an inch thick
bed of specified mortar.
(d) Earthfilling finished with mud plaster and gobri leeping.
(e) Plastering soffits of arches.

34-3.3 MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the following specifications:
 Bricks – Section 6 of the specifications.
 Mortar – Section 16 of the specifications.
 Steel – Section 15 of the specifications.
 Paints – Section 14 of the specifications.
 Concrete – Section 30 of the specifications.

34-3.4 RISE OF ARCH AND TYPE

Unless otherwise specified, the arches shall be true segment of a circle
and shall have a rise equal to 1/8th of the span.

34-3.5 PAINTING OF STEEL

Before fixing in position, R. S. beams and all other iron work shall be
given specified coats of paint as detailed in Section 38-8 & 38-9 for
“Painting Iron Work above water” and Painting Iron Work which
remains under Water” of these specifications.

34-3.6 LAYING OF TIE BARS AND WALL PLATES

The end arch of series of Jack Arches springing from an unsupported
outer wall shall be supported by an angle iron or a rail of specified
section embodied in the wall immediately beyond the springing of the
arch and shall be tied to the first joist by tie rods. Tie rods shall be
perfectly straight and evenly spaced not more than 4 to 5 feet apart and

460
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

shall be of ½ of an inch to 5/8 of an inch of diameter for span up to 6

feet, 3/4 of an inch diameter for span up to 7 feet and one inch to 1½
inches in diameter for spans more than 7 feet. In series of arches
having more than 10 spans, intermediate tie rods shall be provided in
every fifth span. Tie rods shall be put in at the specified place and nuts
at the ends shall be tightened up correctly before centrings are fixed.

34-3.7 SUPPORTING OF CENTRING

Centring shall be of sufficient stiffness to retain its curved shape
without deflection. Its surface shall be correctly struck to the curvature
of the soffit of the arch. The centring shall be supported on pillars built
up from the ground or shall be suspended from the bottom flanges of
the beams only if approved by the Engineer-in-charge. In the later
case, cross timber carrying the centring shall be suspended from the
outer flanges of the beams by hook bolts of square section. No centring
shall be attached nor shall the weight of centring come in any way on
tie rods.

34-3.8 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DISPLACEMENT

To prevent lateral displacement of the beams under the thrust of the
arch at least 3 complete sets of centrings shall always be used so that
each arch under construction shall have two preceding ones still
supported till the whole roof is finished. Except in special
circumstances in a wide roof where specified, all arches of one roof
shall be started simultaneously from one side of the roof and the
centring moved forward along the joists.

34-3.9 BUILDING OF ARCH

Brickwork in arches shall conform to Section 32-1 of these
specifications and for arch work section 32-4 of these specifications.

34-3.10 SPRING COURSE

Bricks forming the spring courses shall be specially moulded so as to
fit the joist and at the same time give a truly radiating skew back joints.
In the absence of moulded bricks, the bricks shall be cut to the required
shape, if approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

34-3.11 KEY
Key shall be driven firmly into position with a wooden mallet and shall
lie truly and centrally of a vertical line through the centre of the span.

461
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-3.12 SLOPE
Unless otherwise specified, the slope in the roof shall be given in R. S.
beams while placing them in position.

34-3.13 FILLING OF HAUNCHES AND CROWN

The haunches of the arch shall be filled and the arching covered with
specified concrete thoroughly rammed and finished to a level so as to
give a maximum thickness of 1½ inches over the crown, or the joists
whichever is higher. The concrete shall be cured for ten days.

34-3.14 BED FOR BITUMINOUS COATING

After filling up haunches half an inch thick cement sand plaster of
specified ratio shall be laid over the surface to serve as a bed for
bitumen.

34-3.15 CURING OF BED

The bed shall be cured for seven days and the surface shall be allowed
to dry thoroughly before bitumen is applied.

34-3.16 APPLICATION OF BITUMEN

Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature specified by the manufacturer
and poured on the surface to be treated and pulled out so that the
minimum thickness is 1/16 of an inch. The coat of bitumen shall be
continued along with the parapet wall up to the drip course.

34-3.17 BLINDING OF BITUMINOUS COATING

The bitumen coat shall be blinded with sand at the rate of one cubic
foot per 100 square feet of the surface area.

34-3.18 EARTHFILLING AND MUD PLASTERING

Three inches thick of good earth (clay) conforming to Section 2 of
these specifications shall then be put and thoroughly rammed and
watered. The roof shall then be finished with one inch thick mud
plaster with gobri leeping conforming to section 36-6 of these
specifications.
34-3.19 PLASTERING OF SOFFITS
The soffits of the arches shall be plastered with specified mortar as per
Section 16 of these specifications.

462
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-3.20 PLASTERING BOTTOM FLANGES OF BEAMS

In case where the lower (exposed) flange of the beam has to be
covered with plaster, ½ inch mesh wire netting not lighter than 20
gauge shall be wound round it to let the plaster go under the flange.
The netting shall be clipped on with hoop iron and shall be kept away
from the flange by pieces of wood so as to afford a key to the plaster.

34-3.21 MEASUREMENTS
Jack Arch roofing shall be measured by the superficial area of the roof.
The unit of measurement shall be 100 square feet or square meter.

34-3.22 RATE
34-3.22.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) Laying of bricks in segmental arches in specified mortar. Cutting
of bricks, whenever required, curing and protecting as per above
specifications and/or any other specifications specially included in
the contract.
(b) Filling of haunches and crown with specified concrete.
(c) Laying of coat of hot bitumen blinded with sand over half an inch
thick bed of specified mortar.
(d) Laying of 3 inches thick earthfilling finished with mud plaster and
gobri leeping.
(e) Plastering of soffits of arches in specified mortar.
(f) Providing, using and removing scaffolding, shuttering, centring,
ladders, supports and use of any other tools and plants, required for
carrying out the work as per above specifications
NOTE: The rate does not include hoisting, fixing in position and painting of R.S.
beam, tie rods or other anchor. The rate also does not include the plastering of bottom
flange of beams.
34-3.22.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all the materials specified above
in carrying out the work in accordance with the above specifications, in
addition to the labour rates detailed above.

463
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-4 JACK ARCH ROOFING

(SPRUNG FROM TOP OF BEAMS)

34-4.1 DESCRIPTION
Jack Arch roof (sprung from the top of beams) shall conform to
Section 34-3 of these specifications in all respects, except the
following:
(a) EXTRA TIE BARS ANCHORAGE
A second length of 3"x3"x3/8" angle iron shall be provided
wherever tie rods are to be provided, to serve as an anchorage
for the other ends of the tie rods which in this case cannot be
anchored to the beams.

464
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-5 JACK ARCH ROOFING

(FOR CARRYING FLOORING OF THE
ROOM)

34-5.1 DESCRIPTION
The work covers the construction of Jack Arch Roofing intended to
carry the flooring of a room shall conform to section 34-3 of these
specifications in all respects, except the following:
Operations referred to in section 34-3.2 (d) and (e) of these
specification shall not be performed.

34-5.2 MEASUREMENTS
Roofing shall be measure by the superficial area of roof. The unit of
measurement shall be square foot or square meter.

34-5.3 RATE
34-5.3.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Laying of bricks in segmental arches in specified mortar.
Cutting of bricks, whenever required, curing and protecting as
per above specifications and/or any other specifications
specially included in the contract.
(b) Filling of haunches and crown with specified concrete.
(c) Plastering of soffits of arches in specified mortar.
(d) The cost of providing, using and removing scaffolding,
shuttering, centring, ladders, supports and any other tools and
plants, required for carrying out the work as per above
specifications
NOTE: The rate does not include hoisting, fixing in position and painting of R.S.
beam, tie rods or other anchor. The rate also does not include the plastering of bottom
flange of beams.
34-5.3.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all the materials supplied at site
of work, specified above in carrying out the work, in addition to the
labour rates detailed above.

465
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-6 GLAVANZIED CORRUGATED STEEL SHEET

ROOFING

34-6.1 DESCRIPTION
This work covers laying galvanized corrugated steel sheet roofing in
accordance with the specifications on already placed in position
wooden or steel trusses.

34-6.2 MATERIALS
34-6.2.1 GALVANIZED CORRUGATED STEEL SHEETS
These shall conform to Section 18-4 of these specifications.
34-6.2.2 FIXING ACCESSORIES
Hook bolts, screws, bolts, nuts, rivets, washers shall be galvanized or
shall be of any other approved quality.
34-6.2.3 SEALING MATERIAL
It shall be bituminous mastic.
34-6.2.4 FLASHING GUTTERS
These shall conform to Section 34-9 of these specifications.

34-6.3 LAP
(a) End lap shall be minimum of 6 inches for slope and 4 inches
for vertical falls which shall be sealed with specified sealing
material.
(b) Side lap shall be formed on the sides of the sheet, away from
the prevailing direction of wind. The side lap shall vary from
one to two corrugations as specified.

34-6.4 INSULATION
Wherever specified, insulation material of specified quality shall be
laid either between the purlins and the sheet or under purlins
incorporating air gap.

34-6.5 PURLIN
Purlin spacings for roof covering with G.C.S. sheets shall be arranged
with a view to using standard sheets of uniform length throughout, and
the trusses shall be designed for purlin spacings to suit the standard
length of these sheets to avoid unnecessary cuttings. Ridge purlins
shall be as near to the ridge as possible having regard to the type of
ridge capping to be used and the manner in which it is to be fixed.

466
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-6.6 HOLES
The holes for fixing bolts shall be made through crown of the
corrugations and shall be either punched or drilled and shall be 1/16 of
an inch larger in diameter than the bolts or fixing screws to be used.
Holes shall be in the exact position to suit the purlins and no holes for
fixing bolts shall be nearer than 1½ inches to the end of the sheet.
These holes shall be made in a manner that the arrisses of the punched
hole shall come on top when the sheets are laid. Where 4 sheets
overlap, holes shall be drilled and not punched.

34-6.7 LAYING OF SHEET

Before the laying of sheet begins it shall be seen that all purlins are in
true plane correctly spaced and securely fixed. The purlins spacing and
the length of sheet shall first be checked to see that the arrangement
will provide the specified overhanging at the eaves and the laps. The
eave course shall be laid first and work shall start at the leeward end of
the building so that side laps have better protections from the rain
driven by the prevailing wind. The top edges of eave sheet shall extend
at least 1½ inch beyond the back of steel purlins or 3 inches beyond the
centre line of a timber purlin.

34-6.8 FIXING SHEETS

Sheets shall be fixed to steel purlins by hook bolts and to timber
purlins by mushroom-headed galvanized drive screws. Hook bolts and
drive screws shall be from 1/4 of an inch to 3/8 of an inch in diameter
as specified and shall be spaced at an interval of not more than 15
inches. Sheets shall be secured at every purlins by at least 2 bolts. Nuts
or heads of drive screws shall have specially made washers to render
the holes waterproof. Washers shall be "Limpet" patent doom and shall
be bedded on bituminous felt. Screws or bolts shall be tightened
sufficiently to seat washers over the corrugation.

34-6.9 RIDGES AND HIPS

(a) General accessories. Ridge or hip capping, wherever possible,
shall be secured to the purlins by the same bolts or screws
which secured the sheeting.
(b) Ridge cap shall be made up of galvanized flat steel conforming
to Section 34-6 or Flat Steel Sheet or otherwise specified. In
case (a) above is not possible as the purlin is not sufficiently
near the ridge, the capping shall be secured to the sheet by ¼ of
an inch to 3/8 of an inch diameter bolts: two roofing bolts to
each wing capping at centre not further apart than the bolts
used for sheets. The lap of the capping along the ridge shall not
be less than 6 inches and shall be so arranged as to protect the
joints from the prevailing wind.

467
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) Hip cap shall be cut to the required mitre and shall be close
butted. The slope joints shall be covered with plain ridge cap
which shall be secured through the roof sheet or the slope
runner by one bolt on each side at the same spacing as for the
roof sheets. Hip caps shall have a minimum lap of 6 inches.

34-6.10 SPECIAL FASTENING AGAINST CABLES

For any situation exposed to strong winds, sheets shall be fastened
down above the eaves by continuous length of 1½"x½" flat iron bars
bolted down every 5 feet by ½-inch bolt built a foot into the wall and
secured at the lower end by a 3-inch square washer.

34-6.11 PAINTING OF SHEETS

Wherever desired, sheets shall be painted with specified paint.

34-6.12 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of corrugated iron sheet roofing shall be done by the
superficial area of the roofing. The unit rate shall be 100 square feet or
square meter.

34-6.13 RATE
34-6.13.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Hoisting and fixing of corrugated iron sheets in position with
the specified fixing accessories.
(b) Punching or drilling holes and cutting of sheets.
(c) Providing, using, erecting and removing of scaffolding,
benching ladders, templates and use of other tools and plants
required for carrying out the work in accordance with the above
specifications.
The labour for fixing trusses, purlins, flashing and painting is not
included.
34-6.13.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of (i) galvanized corrugated steel
sheet with all the specified overlaps, (ii) all bolts, nuts, hook bolts,
screws and washers required for properly fixing sheets as per above
specifications, in addition to the labour rate detailed in 34-6.13.1. The
unit rate shall not includes the cost of trusses and purlins.

468
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-7 CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEET

ROOFING

34-7.1 DESCRIPTION
This work covers construction of corrugated asbestos cement sheet
roofing in accordance with these specifications on the previously
placed in position the truss and purlins or battens.

34-7.2 MATERIALS
34-7.2.1 CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT SHEETS
These shall conform to Section 18-2 of these specifications.
34-7.2.2 FIXING ACCESSORIES
Hook bolts, nuts, and screws shall be galvanized or of any other
approved quality. Washers shall be bituminous and galvanized iron or
of any other approved type and quality.
34-7.2.3 SEALING MATERIAL
When specially required, sealing material shall consist of mastic of
approved quality.
34-7.2.4 FLASHING GUTTERS
These shall conform to Section 34-9 of these specifications.

34-7.3 LAP
(a) End lap shall be of a minimum size of 6 inches.
(b) Side lap shall be formed on the sides of the sheet away from the
prevailing wind. It shall be half the corrugation of sheets.

34-7.4 OVERHANGING
The minimum end overhanging in case of eave verges and cable ends
shall be 12 inches. Overhanging verges shall be supported by purlins
over the full width the sheet.

34-7.5 PURLIN SPACINGS

Purlin spacings shall be arranged with a view to using standard sheets
of uniform length throughout, and the trusses shall be designed for
purlin spacings to suit the standard length of these sheets to avoid
unnecessary cuttings. Ridge purlins shall be as near to the ridge as
possible having regard to the type of ridge capping to be used and the
manner in which it is to be fixed.

469
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-7.6 HOLES
Holes in sheets shall always be drilled and shall on no account be
punched They shall be 1/16 of an inch larger in diameter than that of
bolt or fixing screw, and shall be drilled through the crown of the
corrugations. Holes shall be drilled in exact position to suit the purlins.
No hole shall be made in valleys of corrugations and closer than 1½
inches from the edge.

34-7.7 LAYING OF SHEETS

Before sheeting begins the structure shall be inspected to see that all
purlins are in true plane, correctly spaced and securely fixed. Purlin
spacings and the length of sheet shall be checked to see that the
arrangement provides the specified laps and overhanging. The eave
course shall be laid first, and work shall start at the leeward end of the
building, so that the side laps shall have better protection from rain
driven by the prevailing winds. The top edge of eave sheets shall
extend 3 inches beyond the central line of purlines. Close fittings of
sheets at the junction of side and end laps shall be ensured.

34-7.8 FIXING SHEET

G.I. bolts and screws required for fixing sheets shall be ¼ to 5/16 of an
inch in diameter. Nuts or heads of screws shall bear evenly on washers.
Bolts or screws shall be fixed with G.I. washers over bituminous
washers to fit tightly on the outer face of the sheet. Bolts or screws
shall in the first operation be tightened lightly. They shall be tightened
fully when about a dozen of sheets have been laid in position. For
metal angle purlins the sheet shall be secured by bolts of ‘J’ or ‘L’
shape. For wooden purlins the sheet shall be fixed with gimlet pointed
roofing screws which shall not be hammer-driven.

34-7.9 RIDGE CAP

Capping shall be secured to the ridge purlins by the same bolts or
screws which secured the sheeting; if ridge purlin is not sufficiently
near the ridge to permit this each wing of the ridge, capping shall be
secured to the sheeting by 1½"x5/16" roofing bolts. Other asbestos
cement accessories such as flashing etc. shall be secured either to the
structure or by the roofing bolt of the sheeting.

34-7.10 MEASUREMENTS
The A.C.C. sheet roofing shall be measured by the superficial area of
the roof. The unit of measurement shall be 100 sq. feet or sq. meter.

470
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-7.11 RATE
34-7.11.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Hoisting and fixing of A.C.C. sheets in position with specified
fittings, i.e. nuts, screws, washers, hook bolts, bituminous
washers etc.
(b) Cutting of sheets and drilling of holes.
(c) Providing, using and removing of scaffolding, benching ladders
and use of other tools and plants required for carrying out the
work in accordance with the above specifications.
34-7.11.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of (i) A.C.C. sheets with all the
specified overlaps, (ii) all bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc., required
for the proper fixing of sheets, in addition to the labour rate as detailed
in Section 34-7.11.1.

471
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-8 “KHURRAS” “PARNALAS” AND SPOUTS

34-8.1 DESCRIPTION
This work covers construction of Khurras, Parnalas and Spouts in
accordance with these specifications. The location of these shall be as
shown on the drawings.

34-8.2 KHURRAS
34-8.2.1 TOP KHURRAS
Unless otherwise specified, top khurras shall be 2 feet x 2 feet and
shall be made of 1:2:4 cement concrete 1½-inch thick, laid on 1:4:8
cement concrete. The outside edge of the khurras shall be lower than
the level of the mud plaster or leepai and the surface shall slope
uniformly from that place to the outlet, which shall be 2 inches lower
than the edges. Concrete shall have a slope 1:1 at the sides so as to be
overlapped by earth and mud plaster. Cement concrete shall be
continued into the outlet so as to ensure a watertight joint.
34-8.2.2 BOTTOM KHURRAS ON ROOF
Unless otherwise specified, bottom khurras on top of verandah or roofs
shall be 2' x 2' and will consist of a 1½" layer of 1:2:4 cement concrete
laid on 1:4:8 cement concrete. The surface shall be shaped like a
saucer drain, the depth of the saucer being 2", and joining up with the
roof drain.
34-8.2.3 BOTTOM KHURRAS ON GROUND
Unless otherwise specified, bottom khurras when used on the ground,
in conjunction with spouts, shall be 4' x 2' and shall consist of bricks
on edge in cement sand mortar 1:3 ratio laid on 3" of 1:4:8 cement
concrete.

34-8.3 PARNALAS
34-8.3.1 REVEALED PARNALAS
Unless otherwise specified, revealed parnalas shall be made by leaving
a channel 7 inches wide and 2¼ inches deep in the wall during
construction, and afterwards plastering the channel with 1:3 cement
sand plaster. The corner of the channels shall be rounded to a radius of
one inch in plastering. If revealed parnalas are left in a wall made of
brickwork in mud, the bricks shall be laid in cement mortar (1:3) for a
depth of 4½ inches from the back and sides of the parnalas, this work
being included in the rate.
34-8.3.2 KHASSI PARNALAS
Unless otherwise specified, khassi parnalas shall consist of two fillets
of cement plaster (1:3) raised 1½ inches and spaced 9 inches apart, the

472
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

space in between being plastered with 1:3 cement sand plaster. The
fillets shall be prismatic in section (but with all corners and angles
rounded), the inner sides being at right angle to the wall and the outer
sides sloping. Unless otherwise specified, khassi parnalas shall in no
case be made on top of the cement or other plaster on the wall, but
made in contact with the brickwork or masonry after raking out the
joints.

34-8.4 SPOUTS
Unless otherwise specified, spouts shall be made of reinforced cement
concrete and shall have an open channel 3¼"x3½" with a semi-circular
bottom. These shall project at least 15 inches from the face of the wall
and shall be built into the wall for a depth of at least 13½ inches. The
part built into the wall shall be sufficiently thickened to provide
adequate support for the overhanging portion. Spouts shall be fixed at a
slope not flatter than 1 in 6 and shall have a lip at the lower edge to
allow water to drip clear.

34-8.5 ROOF DRAINS

Roof drains shall be provided on verandah and similar roofs to conduct
water, discharged by the parnalas of a higher roof, to the outlet. They
shall run in a straight line from the bottom khurra of one to the (top)
khurra for the outlet concerned. Unless otherwise specified, the drain
shall be saucer-shaped in section, the depth being 2 inches. Drains
shall be made of 2 inches thick 1:2:4 cement concrete laid on cement
concrete 1:4:8 of a section to give the necessary shape, with edges
flush with the roof plaster.

34-8.6 MEASUREMENTS
The parnalas and drains shall be measured along their length. The unit
of measurement shall be per running foot. The khurras and spouts shall
be measured as a jobs item. The unit of measurement shall be for a
complete unit.

34-8.7 RATE
34-8.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit of rate shall include (i) all the labour required for the above
operation and (ii) use of all the tools and plants required for carrying
out work in accordance with the above specifications.
34-8.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials at site of work
required for carrying out the work as per above specifications, in
addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 34-8.7.1 above.

473
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-9 GUTTERS AND FLASHINGS

34-9.1 DESCRIPTION
This work covers providing and fixing gutters, flashings in accordance
with these specifications.

34-9.2 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified these shall be made from lead, copper, zinc
or galvanized steel sheet:
34-9.2.1 LEAD SHEETS
Lead sheets shall be made from melted lead and shall not be less than
the following weight per foot.
Gutters 6 lbs
Flashings 5 lbs
34-9.2.2 COPPER SHEETS
Copper sheets used for gutter shall be cold rolled and shall not be
thinner than 22 S.W.G. For flashings it shall be dead soft temper and
shall not be thinner than 24 S.W.G.
34-9.2.3 ZINC SHEETS
Zinc sheets shall not be thinner than 20 S.W.G.
34-9.2.4 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEETS
Galvanized steel sheets shall be:
For gutters No.18 S.W.G. to No.22 S.W.G.
For flashings No.20 S.W.G. to No.24 S.W.G.

34-9.3 SHAPE AND FIXING

34-9.3.1 GUTTERS
Unless otherwise specified, gutters shall be semi-circular in shape,
made of the material specified above and shall be properly finished and
laid in specified shape. Gutters shall be supported with brackets fixed
to wall or roofing at a specified distance apart.
34-9.3.2 FLASHING
When the edge of a roof sheeting, or of a valley gutter is turned up
against a wall, the edge shall be weather-proofed with a flashing. The
flashing shall be inserted into the brickwork or masonry joints to a
depth of 2 inches, the joints being filled up with 1:3 cement sand
mortar unless otherwise specified. It shall be further secured in the
joint by means of galvanized iron clips, in at least 4 inches into the
masonry. The lower edge of the flashing shall overlap the sheeting

474
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

below it by at least 4 inches, the edges of the sheeting and flashing

being left free to expand and contract. Wherever flashing has to be laid
at a slope, it shall be stepped at each course of the masonry, the steps
being cut back at an angle of not less than 30 degrees to the vertical.

34-9.4 MEASUREMENTS
34-9.4.1 GUTTERS
The measurement of gutters shall be along its length and the unit of
measurement shall be per running foot or meter.
34-9.4.2 FLASHING
The measurement of flashing shall be by the superficial area and its
unit of measurement shall be per square foot or per square meter.

34-9.5 RATE
The rate for gutters and flashings is for completed work fixed in
position, including all laps, supports and other fixing accessories.

475
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-10 TREATMENT OF ROOF SLAB

34-10.1 DESCRIPTION
This work consist of treatment of pre-laid roof slab by application of
bitumen, blinding of bituminous coating with sand, laying of polythene
sheet, earth filling, mud plaster, laying of clay tile grouting of joints
with cement sand mortar according to this specification.

34-10.2 MATERIALS
34-10.2.1 BITUMEN
It shall conform to Section 23 of these specifications.
34-10.2.2 SAND
It shall conform to Section 10-3 of these specifications.
34-10.2.3 POLYTHENE
It shall conform to Section 21 of these specifications.
34-10.2.4 EARTH
It shall conform to Section 2 of these specifications.
34-10.2.5 CLAY TILES
These shall conform to Section 7 of the specification.
34-10.2.6 MORTAR OF CEMENT:SAND (1:3)
It shall conform to Section 16-2 of these specifications.

34-10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT

34-10.3.1 SURFACE CLEANING
The top surface of roof slab shall be scrubbed with steel wire brushes
to remove / clean the loose particles of any material and dust.
34-10.3.2 APPLICATION OF BITUMEN
Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature specified by the
manufacturers and shall be sprayed / painted at the rate of 34 lbs/100
sft. Precaution should be made that not patch/pin hole in the bitumen
films created as a result of bitumen application.
34-10.3.3 SAND BUILDING
The bitumen surface shall be blinded with sand at the rate of 1 cft/ 100
sft surface area.
34-10.3.4 LAYING OF POLYTHENE SHEET
Polythene sheet of gauge 500mm (0.005") shall be laid on the bitumen
blinded surface. Care should be taken to lay polythene sheet in such a
way that overlaps allow flowing water to trickle down.
34-10.3.5 EARTH FILLING
4" average thick earth shall then be put and shall be thoroughly

476
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

rammed and watered. For efficient run of the rain water, the earth
should be laid in accordance with roof drainage profile.
34-10.3.6 MUD PLASTER
Rammed earth surface shall be finished with 1" mud plaster to act as
bedding for tiles.
34-10.3.7 LAYING OF TILES
Clay Tiles 9" x 4½" x 1½" shall be laid on the mud plaster by keeping
maximum joint between the two tiles not more than ¼".
34-10.3.8 CEMENT SAND GROUTING
The joints between the tiles shall be grouted with cement-sand
mortar/slurry. It should be ensued that there shall be no slurry
remained deposited on the flat surface of tiles.

34-10.4 MEASUREMENT
The measurement of roof treatment shall be measured by the
superficial its unit shall be 100 Sft or Sq. Meter.

34-10.5 RATE
34-10.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The rate shall include:
a) Cleaning of the surface of the pre-laid R.C. slab.
b) Heating and spraying of bitumen.
c) Sand blinding.
d) Laying of polythene sheet.
e) Lifting and laying earth on roof including watering and
ramming.
f) Laying of bedding of mud mortar.
g) Laying of tiles.
h) Grouting of joint with cement sand mortar.
i) Cost for providing T&P required for carrying out work in
accordance with above specification.

34-10.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The rate shall include the cost of materials supplied at site as specified
in section 34-10.5.1 to the labour.

477
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-11 THERMAL INSULATION OF R.C.C. ROOF

34-11.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of thermal insulation of pre-laid RCC roof slab
by application of bituminous coating with sand blinding, laying of
polythene sheet, laying thermopore sheet, laying of 3" (average) earth
filling 1" mud plaster, laying of clay tiles 9" x 4½" x 1½" grouting of
joints with cement sand mortar according to this specification.

34-11.2 MATERIALS
34-11.2.1 BITUMEN
It shall conform to Section 23 of these specifications.

34-11.2.2 SAND
It shall conform to Section 10-3 of these specifications.

34-11.2.3 POLYTHENE SHEET

It shall conform to Section 21 of these specifications

34-11.2.4 THERMOPORE
It shall conform to Section 20 of these specifications.

34-11.2.5 EARTH
It shall conform to Section 2 of these specifications.

34-11.2.6 CLAY TILES 9" X 4½" X 1½"

These shall conform to Section 7 of these specifications.

34-11.2.7 MORTAR CEMENT SAND 1:3.

It shall conform to Section 16-2 of these specifications.

34-11.3 COMPOSITION FO THERMAL INSULATION OF

ROOF
34-11.3.1 Bitumen painting two coats at the rate of 34 Lbs/100 sft for both coats.
34-11.3.2 Polythene sheet of 250 mm Micron.
34-11.3.3 Thermopore sheet of density not less than 30 kg/m3 and having
thickness not less than 1".
34-11.3.4 Polythene sheet 500 Micron followed by
34-11.3.5 3" (A.V) earth cushion very lightly rammed after sprinkling of water
followed by.

478
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-11.3.6 1" mud plaster for bedding of tile followed by.

34-11.3.7 Clay tile 9" x 4½" x 1½" laid with open joint not more then ¼"
followed by.
34-11.3.8 Grouting of tile joints with 1:3 cement sand mortar slurry.

34-11.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT

34-11.4.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be in accordance with the Section 34-10.3.1 of these
specifications.

34-11.4.2 APPLICATION OF BITUMEN

It shall be in accordance with the Section 34-10.3.2 of these
specifications.

34-11.4.3 SAND BLINDING

It shall be in accordance with the section 34-10.3.3 of these
specifications.

34-11.4.4 LAYING OF POLYTHENE

It shall be in accordance with the section 34-10.3.4.

34-11.4.5 LAYING OF THERMOPORE SHEET

On pre-laid film of polythene thermopore sheet of specified thickness
shall be laid. Care shall be taken not to allow workmen, to work
directly on the thermopore sheets.

34-11.4.6 LAYING OF POLYTHENE

Polythene sheet of 500 Micron shall be laid over the thermopore sheet
in accordance with Section 34-10.3.4 of these specifications.

34-11.4.7 EARTH CUSHION

3" thick earth cushion lightly rammed fully damped properly leveled in
accordance to the roof drainage profile shall be laid.

34-11.5 IN ALL OTHER RESPECTS

It shall conform to section 34-10 of the specification.

34-11.6 MEASUREMENT
The measurement of the treated area shall be surface area its unit shall
be 100 sft.

479
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

34-11.7 RATE
34-11.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The rate shall include:
a) Cleaning of the surface of the pre-laid R.C.C slab.
b) Heating and spraying of bitumen.
c) Sand blinding
d) Laying of polythene sheet.
e) Laying of thermopore sheet.
f) Laying of polythene sheet 500 Micron
g) Lifting and laying earth on roof including watering and
ramping laying of bedding of mud mortar.
h) Laying of bedding of mud mortar.
i) Laying of tiles.
j) Grouting of joint with cement sand mortar.
k) Cost for providing T&P required for carrying of work in
accordance with above specification.

34-11.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The rate shall included the cost of materials supplied at site as
specified in Section 34-11.7.1.

480
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:1, Shed Roof

Fig:2, Shed Lean to

Fig:3, Gable Roof

Fig:4, Hip Roof

481
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:5, Gambrel Roof

Fig:6, Mansard or Curb Roof

Fig:7, Deck Roof

Fig:8, Saw-tooth Roof

Fig:9, Modified saw-tooth Roof

482
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:10, Gutters & Flashing

483
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:11, Details of Corrugated Steel Sheeting

484
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:12.

Fig:13

Fig:14

485
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:15

Fig:16

Fig:17

486
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:18

Fig:19

Fig:20

487
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–35

FLOORING

GLOSSARY
Floor The tiers or levels which divide a building in
two stages or storeys are called floors. These
are made of materials quite different both in
composition and construction. They range from
relatively thin covering, contributing little or no
structural strength to a building, to much
thicker materials capable of withstanding
reasonable stresses, and in some design,
essential to the strength of the building.
The selection of proper floor has an important
bearing on the building. It affects its
appearance, usefulness and the cost of upkeep.
Types of floor
Earth floors These floors are made of good earth. Earth is
filled to the required level in layers, with each
layer not exceeding 6 inches in thickness. Each
layer is well watered + compacted before
placing the next layer. These floors are
generally used for stables, cattle sheds etc.
Mud floors Earth floors intended for human occupation are
provided with 1" thick mud plaster surface
followed by gobri leeping.
Brick floors Brick floors are very common in areas where
good, hard and well-burnet bricks are cheap
and readily available. They are very durable,
fire resistant and generally used for stores and
godowns.
Tile floors Tiles are placed on lean concrete. A thin layer
of 1:2 cement mortar is placed over the floor
base and tiles of required material shape, size
and thickness are placed over the floor base.
Some of the most common types of tiles used
are:
Clay Tile They are manufactured in different shapes and
designs. Most common size available in the
market are (i) 12"x6"x2" (ii) 12"x6"x1¼"
(iii) 9"x4½"x1½".
Cement concrte / They are precast tiles and are made general in
Mozaic tiles sizes (i) 6"x6" (ii) 8"x8" (iii) 9"x9"
(iv) 12"x12" usually 1" thick.
Glazed tiles They are made of ball clay, China clay, China

488
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

stone and flint. They are of two kinds:

earthenware glazed and colour enamels and are
available in different colours and sizes.
Marble & other Marble slabs are laid over bedding mortar of
varieties of building 1:2 cement sand evenly spread on a base. They
stone floor are so laid that the joints are very fine i.e. not
more than 1/16 of an inch thick which are well
grouted in the cement putty of colour matching
to the marble. These slabs are available in
different colours, shapes, size and are laid in
various patterns.
Flagstone floor It is composed of chisel dressed slabs or flags
of stone laid to proper level on the floor base.
Cement concrete It comprises cement concrete topping laid in
floors panels over a floor base. It is laid as single or
double layer. Thickness of topping various with
requirement.
Terrazzo floors Terrazzo-wearing surfaces are constructed in a
manner similar to concrete wearing surfaces,
but a special aggregate of marble chips or other
decorative material is always used and this
aggregate is expose by grinding the surface.
Wooden floors Wooden flooring is usually provided in places,
places like dancing halls, auditoria. Wooden
floors should not only be stiff made of hard
rigid for the maximum load that they have to
carry but should also be perfectly smooth.
Single floor Wooden planking, in this case, rests in the
single system of bridging joists which span the
opening. These joists in turn rest on wall plate
on either end and have to be as stiff as possible
so that there is not difficulty in nailing planking
to them. The basic requirement of a bridging
joist is its stiffness and rigidity for the
maximum load the floor is to carry. For this
purpose the timber is usually of greater strength
than considered necessary by the usual design
calculations. The bridging joists have a
sufficient breadth (normally not less than 2
inches) and are placed one foot apart as shown
in the Fig 9 (page 522). In general use, the
single flooring does not have a span more than
12 feet since there is a danger of the joist
bulking or bending sideways. To prevent
bulking they are strutted apart.
Double floor In this type of floors the bridging joists do not
span the whole room but rest on other joists
placed at right angle to them called the binding
joist or binders. These binder joists are
generally placed 6 to 8 feet apart and rest on

489
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

wall as shown in Figure-10 (page 523).

Framed floors It is not possible to have either a single or a
double system of joists where the span is
greater. In such cases another timber in the
shape of a girder is added and the binding joists
are framed into the main girder as shown in
Figure-11 (page 523).

490
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-1 MUD FLOORING

35-1.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, mud flooring shall be laid in accordance
with the following specifications.

35-1.2 MATERIALS
(a) Earth (clay) shall conform to specifications as contained in
Section 2 of clay.
(b) Mortar shall conform to specification as contained in Section 16-
1 for Mud mortar.

35-1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-1.3.1 LAYING & COMPACTION

After doing earth filling as per Section 27-3, the surface shall be
finished with one-inch thick mud plaster with gobri leeping
conforming to specifications as contained in Section 36-6 for Mud
plaster of these specifications.

35-1.4 MEASUREMENTS
Mud flooring shall be measured by the superficial area of the floor.
The unit of measurement shall be 100 sq. ft or sq.m.

35-1.5 RATE
35-1.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of labour for mud plastering and
“gobri leeping”.

35-1.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of labour, earth, chopped “bhoosa”
used in mud plastering and cow-dung.

491
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-2 BASE FOR FLOORING

35-2.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, the base of all ground floors shall be laid in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-2.2 MATERIALS
a) Earth (clay) shall conform to the specifications as contained in
Section 2 of these specifications.
b) Sand shall conform in all respects to the specification as
contained for fine aggregate in Section 10.3.
c) Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or shingle and
conform to the specification as contained in Section 10-4 for
aggregate for base of floor & foundation.
d) If brick ballast is used it shall conform to Section 10-6 of these
specifications.
e) Water shall conform to the specification contained in Section 1.

35-2.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-2.3.1 PREPARATION OF SUB-BASE
Earth filling shall be done up to the specified level in accordance with
specification as contained in Section 27-3. The sub-base shall be
properly levelled before sand filling.

35-2.3.2 SAND FILLING

Sand shall be placed in position to the required depth, as shown on the
drawings as required in writing by the Engineer-in-charghe. It shall be
well compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inch in thickness 95% of
maximum dry density as per AASHTO determined in accordance with
AASHTO T-191-02.

35-2.3.3 COARSE AGGREGATE LAYING & RAMMING

Coarse aggregate shall be laid in a uniform layer of specified thickness,
absolutely true and parallel to the required level of the finished surface
and to the entire satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge. During the
progress of the work, the Engineer or his representative shall make
density tests in accordance with AASHTO T-191, modified to include
only material passing a ¾ inch sieve, and if he finds the density is less
than 95 per cent of the maximum density, the Contractor shall perform
additional rolling or tamping as may be necessary to obtain that
density.

492
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-2.3.4 SURFACING TO BOND WITH TOPPING

The surface shall be kept wet and protected from earth, dirt or other
foreign matters before laying the topping.

35-2.3.5 LEVELS AND SLOPES

Unless otherwise specified, the base shall be perfectly levelled. A slope
of 1:64 shall, however, be provided in verandahs and bath rooms.

35-2.4 MEASUREMENTS
The components of the base for floors specified in section 35-2.3.2 and
35-2.3.3 shall be measured in volume separately. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 cft or m3.

35-2.5 RATE
35-2.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include preparation of sub-base, laying and
ramming of base components viz. 35-2.3.2 and 35-2.3.3, use of tools
and plants required for carrying out of the work in accordance with the
above specifications.

35-2.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include cost of all the materials required in the
above operations in addition to the labour rates detailed in Section 35-
2.5.1.

493
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-3 BRICK OR TILE FLOORING

35-3.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, brick or tile flooring shall be laid in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-3.2 MATERIALS
(a) Bricks or tiles shall conform to the specifications as contained
in Section 6 for Clay Bricks and Section 7 for Clay Tiles of
these specifications.
(b) Mortar shall conform to the specifications as contained in
Section 16 for Mortar.

35-3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-3.3.1 BASE FOR GROUND FLOOR
For ground floor the base shall be laid as per specifications contained
in Section 35-2.3.
35-3.3.1.1 Base for 1st and Subsequent Floors/Terraces
For first and subsequent floors, the base shall comprise of specified
thickness of coarse aggregate or brick ballast. For terraces, the base
shall comprise of bitumen @ 34 lbs per 100 sft followed at specified
thickness of brick ballast or coarse aggregate. Size of aggregate shall
not exceed 1½" gauge.

35-3.3.2 WETTING OF BRICKS/TILES

Bricks or tiles shall be wetted in accordance with specifications as
contained in Section 32-1 for Brickwork (General).

35-3.3.3 PATTERN
The laying of bricks or tiles shall be plain, diagonal, herring bone or
any other specified pattern.

35-3.3.4 JOINTS
(a) Where pointing is not to be done, the joints shall not exceed
3/16 inch in thickness. The mortar oozing out of the joints shall
be struck off with trowel or wiped off with damp cloth.
(b) Where pointing is to be done, the joints shall not exceed 3/8
inch in thickness. The mortar in the joint shall be raked out one
inch deep, while it is still green.

494
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-3.3.5 POINTING
Unless otherwise specified, the joints shall be flush pointed with
specified mortar.

35-3.3.6 PREPARATION OF BASE

Before laying bricks/tiles the surface of the base shall be washed and
scrubbed with wire brushes.

35-3.3.7 THICKNESS OF BEDDING MORTAR

The floor shall be laid on 3/4-inch thick bed of specified bedding
mortar spread evenly on the base.

35-3.3.8 LAYING OF BRICKS/TILES

Bricks/tiles shall be laid in position with specified mortar on the
bedding mortar.

35-3.3.9 PROTECTION
Flooring shall be allowed to mature undisturbed, and protected from
the effects of weather. It shall be kept wet for at least 7 days after
completion. If pointing is to be done, it shall be kept wet for at least 7
days after the completion of pointing.

35-3.3.10 SURFACE
Surface shall be finished to specified levels. All joints shall be
uniform, parallel and square. Bricks shall be rubbed to ensure this
where it is very necessary, without extra cost.

35-3.3.11 EDGES WITH BULLNOSED BRICKS

No damaged brick or tile shall be used. Bats shall not be used except to
close any course of bricks or tiles. Unless otherwise specified, the
overhanging edge of the paving shall be finished off by special bull-
nosed bricks.

35-3.4 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of brick or tile flooring shall be by the superficial
area. Its unit of rate shall be 100 cubic feet or cubic meter.

35-3.5 RATE
35-3.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Watering and cleaning of base in case of ground floors and
scrubbing and washing of the base slabs in case of upper floors.
(b) Laying of bedding mortar over the base.

495
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) Laying of bricks/tiles in specified mortar over the bedding

mortar.
(d) Protection and curing of the work.
(e) Cost of providing tools and plants required for carrying out the
work in accordance with the above specifications.
The labour for pointing is not included.

35-3.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all the materials supplied at site
as specified above, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-
3.5 above. The rate, however, does not provide for laying and cost of
bitumen and brick ballast or coarse aggregate.

496
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-4 FLAGSTONE FLOORING

35-4.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, flagstone flooring shall be laid in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-4.2 MATERIALS
35-4.2.1 STONE
Stone shall conform to the specifications as contained in Section 11 for
Stone.
35-4.2.1.1 Quality
Flagstone shall be hard, durable and fine-grained. Flagstone shall be
procured from the approved querry.
35-4.2.1.2 Size of Flagstone
Flagstone shall not be less than one and a half inches thick. The length
and breadth shall not be less than 12 inches and more than 30 inches.
The size of flagstone shall be such as to give uniform parallel courses.
35-4.2.1.3 Dressing
Flagstone shall be chisel dressed so as to have a flat surface, free from
windings. All edges shall be accurately dressed, truly square to their
full depth. Flagstone projecting over the edges of verandahs or steps
shall have their outer edges bull-nosed.

35-4.2.2 MORTAR
Specified mortar shall conform to Section 16 of these specifications as
actually specified.

35-4.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-4.3.1 PREPARATION OF BASE SURFACE
The base shall be laid in accordance with the Section 35-2.

35-4.3.2 SOAKING
Flagstone shall be soaked in water for at least one hour before laying.

35-4.3.3 THICKNESS OF BEDDING MORTAR

Flags shall be laid over specified bedding mortar not more than 3/4-
inch thick.

497
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-4.3.4 LAYING OF FLAGS

Flags shall be placed in position and brought down to the required
finished level and the joints shall then be filled with specified mortar.

35-4.3.5 PATTERN
Flags shall be laid in the specified pattern. The courses shall be of
uniform width and, unless otherwise specified, parallel to the wall
having the main entrance. Flags shall break joint in adjacent courses by
not less than 8 inches.

35-4.3.6 JOINTS
The thickness of joints shall not be more than 1/8 of an inch. Unless
otherwise specified, the mortar in joints shall be made flush with a
trowel.

35-4.3.7 POINTING
If pointing has been specified the flags shall be laid against wood or
iron strips of uniform thickness, so as to form joints not less than 1/4
inch wide. When a row of flags is laid, the strips shall be removed and
the open joints shall at once be filled with specified mortar, and shall
then be flush pointed with specified mortar.

35-4.3.8 PROTECTION AND CURING

The floor shall be protected from the effects of weather. During the
progress of work and for 7 days after laying, the floor shall be kept
watered. Three clear days shall be given for setting before anyone is
allowed to walk over, but no weight shall be brought on the surface till
7 clear days have elapsed after the completion of laying.

35-4.4 MEASUREMENTS
The flagstone flooring shall be measured by superficial area. The unit
of measurement shall be 100 sq. ft./sq.m.

35-4.5 RATE
35-4.5.1 LABOUR RATE
It shall include:
(a) Watering & cleaning of bases according to Section 35-3.3.6.
(b) Laying of ¾ inch thick bedding mortar.
(c) Laying of flagstone and filling of joints with specified mortar.
(d) Curing and protection of work.
(e) Use of all tools and plants required for carrying out work as per
above specifications.
The labour for pointing is not included in the rate.

498
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-4.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all the materials supplied at site
of work as per above specifications, in addition to the labour rate
detailed in Section 35-4.5.1 above.

499
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-5 MARBLE FLOORING

35-5.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified marble flooring shall be constructed in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-5.2 MATERIAL
35-5.2.1 MARBLE STONE SLABS
Marble slabs conform to the specification contained in Section 11-1.
Marble stone slab shall be of the size, type and colour as specified. All
slab shall have a true plain surface and shall be accurately swan, truly
square at edges to the full thickness.

35-5.2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

Portland cement concrete screed 1" thick of nominal maximum 1:2:4.

35-5.2.3 MORTAR
Cement sand mortar ratio 1:2 conforming to the specification as
contained in Section 16-2.

35-5.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-5.3.1 PREPARATION OF BASE
The base shall be laid in accordance with the Section 35-2. Before
laying marble slabs, the surface of the base shall be washed and
scrubbed with wire brushes.

35-5.3.2 P.C.C. SCREED

P.C.C. Screed 1" thick will be laid on this base.

35-5.3.3 BEDDING MORTAR

Marble stone slabs shall be laid over bedding mortar not more than ¾"
thick.

35-5.3.4 JOINTS
No joints shall be more than 1/16 of an inch in thickness. Slabs
projecting over the edges of verandah or steps shall have their edges
finished with a bull-nosed ending.

35-5.3.5 LAYING
Slabs shall be laid in position on bedding mortar in specified pattern.
The joints shall be filled with specified putty.

500
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-5.3.6 LEVELS
The surface of marble slabs when laid shall be perfectly true, level,
projected or sloped.

35-5.3.7 PROTECTION AND CURING

The floor shall be protected from the effects of weather. During the
progress of work and for 10 days after laying, the floor shall be kept
watered. Three clear days shall be given for setting before anyone is
allowed to walk over, but no weight shall be brought on the surface till
7 clear days have elapsed after the completion of laying.

35-5.3.8 GRINDING
After the marble slab has hardened enough, it shall be ground with an
approved type of grinding machine wing rapid cutting carborundum
stones. The floors shall be kept wet during the grinding process. All
materials ground off shall be removed by sweeping and flushing with
water. Then the floor surface shall receive a second grinding followed
by final grinding to remove the film of cement paste and to give the
floor a polish. It shall then be thoroughly washed and all surplus
material removed.

35-5.3.9 POLISHING & FINISHING

The surface after grinding will be left undisturbed for a period of one
week. After this period the surface shall be cleaned of dirt and dust by
rubbing gently with pumice stone using sufficient water. If the surface
has somehow been dirtied it must be washed with washing soda. Then
the surface will be cleaned and rubbed hard with Oxlic acid (1:10
solution) using felt or an old blanket. Thereafter the surface shall be
cleaned and washed with plenty of water. After the surface has dried it
will be finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge with wax
polish by using polishing machine.

35-5.4 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of marble flooring shall be done by the superficial
area. The unit of measurement shall be 100 square feet or m2.

35-5.5 RATE
35-5.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Washing, scrubbing and cleaning of base (in the case of ground
floor).
(b) Laying of bedding mortar.
(c) Laying of marble slabs over bedding mortar and RCC screed.
(d) Filling of joints with white/grey cement with matching
pigment.

501
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(e) Levelling, curing, grinding & polishing of marble slabs as per

these specifications.
(f) Use of all the tools and plants required for carrying out work in
accordance with these specifications.

35-5.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It includes the cost of all the materials supplied at site of work as per
these specifications, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
35-5.5.1.

502
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-6 GLAZED TILE FLOORING

35-6.1 DESCRIPTION
The tiles shall be of approved make. These will be of ceramic tiles with
one face glazed and shall be white or coloured as specified in the
schedule of quantities. The thickness used shall be ¼" or 3/8" as
specified.
Unless otherwise specified, tile flooring shall be laid in accordance
with the following specifications.

35-6.2 MATERIALS
(a) Tiles shall conform to the specifications as contained in Section
35-6 for Glazed Tiles.
(b) Mortar shall conform to the specifications as contained in
Section 16-2 for Mortar.

35-6.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-6.3.1 BASE AND ITS PREPARATION
For ground floor the base shall be laid as per specifications contained
in Section 35-2. The base 1st floor and subsequent floors shall be
prepared in accordance with Section 35-3.3.1.1.

35-6.3.2 WETTING OF TILES

Tiles shall be wetted in water for 12 hours before they are laid in
position.

35-6.3.3 PATTERN
The laying of tiles shall be plain, diagonal, or any other specified
pattern.

35-6.3.4 JOINTS
(a) The joints shall not exceed 1/32 inch in thickness. The mortar
oozing out of the joints shall be wiped off immediately with
damp cloth.

35-6.3.5 THICKNESS OF BEDDING MORTAR

The floor shall be laid on ¾" thick bed of specified bedding mortar
spread evenly on the base.

503
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-6.3.6 LAYING OF TILES

35-6.3.6.1 Over the base course (ground floor) or directly on the reinforced
concrete (first floor) ¾" thick 1:2 cement mortar (1 of cement and 2 of
sand) shall be evenly laid. The cement mortar shall be allowed to
partially set before the floating coat consisting of liquid mixture of neat
grey cement and water is poured on it. Each tile shall then be set
individually over the floating coat and cement slurry will be worked up
by tapping the tiles gently with a wooden mallet. The joints shall be as
close as possible and edges should be rubbed down to get an exact size
and thin joint. Joints shall be pointed with matching cement. Soon after
this the tiles shall be washed and the surface shall then be dried by
using a soft cloth.
35-6.3.6.2 Laying the tiles should start from the centre of the area so that the
opposite sides will require the same number of tiles and so that the
border design may work symmetrically.
35-6.3.6.3 If the tiles have to be cut to the required size for the border, the edges
of the tile shall be cut using electric cutter and evenly finished true and
square by rubbing with carborundum stone or by any other approved
means. The contractor will not be entitled to claim anything extra for
cutting the tiles to the required size and finishing the edges as approved
by the Engineer-in-charge. Tiles to be jointed at right angles shall have
ends chamfered at 45o.

35-6.3.7 PROTECTION
Flooring shall be allowed to mature undisturbed, and protected from
the effects of weather. It shall be kept wet for at least 7 days after
completion.

35-6.3.8 SURFACE
Surface shall be finished to specified levels. All joints shall be
uniform, parallel and square.

35-6.4 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of tile flooring shall be by the superficial area. Its
unit of rate shall be 100 sq. ft. or sq.m.

35-6.5 RATE
35-6.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Watering and cleaning of base in case of ground floors and
scrubbing and washing of the base slabs in case of upper floors.
(b) Laying of bedding mortar over the base.
(c) Laying of tiles in specified mortar over the bedding mortar.

504
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(d) Protection and curing of the work.

(e) Cost of providing tools and plants required for carrying out the
work in accordance with the above specifications.

35-6.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all the material supplied at site as
specified above, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-
6.5.1 above.

505
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-7 MOSAIC TILE FLOORING

35-7.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified mosaic tile flooring shall be laid in
accordance with the following specifications:

35-7.2 MATERIALS
35-7.2.1 ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
Ordinary Portland Cement shall conform to specification contained in
Section 4.
35-7.2.2 FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 10-3 of these specifications.
35-7.2.3 COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section 10-4 of these specifications.
35-7.2.4 WATER
Water shall conform to Section 1 of these specifications.
35-7.2.5 MARBLE CHIPS
Marble chips generally having size of 7 No. & 8 No., or approved size,
colour, grade and quality shall be used.

35-7.3 MANUFACTURING OF TILES

35-7.3.1 GENERAL
In making these tile the surface layer consists of some specially
selected aggregate, usually crushed marble or granite or prepared
aggregate, mixed in the proportion of 1 part of cement to 2 parts of
aggregate. The facing aggregate should be well graded from ¼" to ½"
maximum size down to material that will just be retained on a sieve
having 8 meshes per linear inch. The facing material is mixed rather
wet and the backing dry. The final finish is given by grinding the
surface with sand on a wheel and polishing with carborundum wheels.
It is important that the mould is always filled exactly to the same level
and that the same pressure is applied to each tile. If this is not done,
tiles of varying thicknesses will be produced and they will complicate
the work of the tile layer. Various kinds of hardeners and admixtures
are often used to give the tiles greater strength and harder wearing
surface.

506
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-7.3.2 WORKSHOP
It is essential that the manufacture of coloured cement floor tiles
should be carried out in a well-constructed and properly ventilated
building which should be free from draught and the direct rays of the
sun. A plant with an output of 90 sq. yds, per day would require
approximately 1500 sq. ft area for manufacturing and stacking the
freshly made tiles; 50' x 30' are good dimensions. To that must be
added the storing room for the finished tiles which should also be free
from draught and direct light.
35-7.3.3 CURING
Curing has a very important bearing on the strength and soundness of
concrete. Tiles should be completely immersed in water as soon as
they are hard enough to be handled safely. (Generally after 6 to 8 hours
of moulding). With a thin product such as a tile, made with semi-dry
concrete, it is practically certain that a very brief total immersion in
water say of 12 hours, will cause the water to soak right through the
tile. After this the tiles should be kept moist resting on their edges in
racks for one week. It is safer to keep the tiles under cover for one
week more before their curing is considered complete.
35-7.3.4 GRINDING
Grinding the mosaic or inlaid tiles is done after thorough curing.
Various types of machines are available for the purpose. Before
polishing, the mosaic or inlaid tiles are levelled off on smoothing and
levelling machine and are retouched with fluid binding cement. They
are then placed in the recesses provided in the revolving table of the
polishing machine. The polishing stone or block (generally a piece of
carborundum) is held in a special holder and is kept in contact with the
tiles by the application of light pressure by the workman; a jet of water
continually plays on the revolving tiles. Polishing starts with a very
coarse type of carborundum stone and finishes with the finest type to
get a good polish.
35-7.3.5 SIZE
The common sizes of tiles are (i) 6"x6" (ii) 8"x8" (iii) 9"x9" and
(iv) 12"x12". The 9"x9" and 12"x12" sizes are used primarily in large
floor areas such as hotels and club lobbies and store rooms. The
smaller sizes are used in bathrooms, kitchen floors and walls.

35-7.4 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-7.4.1 BASE AND ITS PREPARATION
For ground floor the base shall be laid as per Section 35-3.3.
35-7.4.2 CEMENT CONCRETE SCREED
Cement concrete screed of class A, shall be laid duly compacted on the
base of floor.

507
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-7.4.3 BEDDING MORTAR

Tiles shall be laid over bedding cement sand ratio 1:3 mortar not more
than ¾" thick.

35-7.4.4 JOINTS
No joints shall be more than 1/16 of an inch in thickness. Slabs
projecting over the edges of verandahs or steps shall have their edges
finished with a bull-nosed ending.

35-7.4.5 LAYING
Tiles shall be laid in position on bedding mortar in specified pattern.
The joints shall be filled with specified putty.

35-7.4.6 LEVELS
The surface of tiles when laid shall be perfectly true, level, projected or
sloped.

35-7.4.7 PROTECTION & CURING

The floor shall be protected from the effects of weather. During the
progress of work and for 7 days after laying, the floor shall be kept
watered. Three clear days shall be given for setting before anyone is
allowed to walk over, but no weight shall be brought on the surface till
7 clear days have elapsed after the completion of laying.

35-7.5 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 square feet or m2.

35-7.6 RATE
35-7.6.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Washing, scrubbing and cleaning of base (in the case of ground
floor).
(b) Laying of mosaic tiles and filling of joints with specified
mortar including cutting of tiles if required.
(c) Coring and protection of work.
(d) Grinding & polishing.

35-7.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It includes the cost of all the materials supplied at site of work in
addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-7.6.1. This item,
however, does not include the cost of cement concrete screed.

508
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-8 CONGLOMERATE FLOORING

(CEMENT CONCRETE-SINGLE COAT)

35-8.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, the conglomerate flooring shall be laid in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-8.2 MATERIALS
(a) Cement Concrete Class-AI
Cement concrete shall conform to the specifications contained
in Section 4.

35-8.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

35-8.3.1 BASE AND ITS PREPARATION
Laying of floor base for ground floor shall conform to the
Specification as contained in Section 35-3.3.

35-8.3.2 DIVIDING INTO PANELS

Before laying the concrete topping, the surface of the base shall be
divided into symmetrical panels by glass or marble strips. Unless
otherwise specified the area of individual panel shall not exceed 16
sq.ft. Top of glass or marble strips shall be adjusted to the specified
thickness of concrete topping and this level of the finished floor
surface.

35-8.3.3 FINISHING
The surface shall be levelled with a wooden trowel. Excessive
trowelling in the early stage shall be avoided. The surface shall be
tested with a straight edge to detect undulations, which, if found, shall
be eliminated. The finer stuff in the concrete which has come to the
surface with the stroking shall be quickly but carefully smoothed with
the steel trowel. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently,
trowelling shall be done with steel trowel. No dry cement or a mixture
of dry cement with sand shall be sprinkled on the surface for hardening
the surface.

35-8.3.4 CURING
The concrete topping shall be cured in accordance with specification
contained in Section 30-13.

509
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-8.4 MEASUREMENTS
The conglomerate floor shall be measured by superficial area. The unit
of measurement shall be 100 square feet or m2.

35-8.5 RATE
35-8.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Washing, scrubbing and cleaning of base at ground floor.
(b) Dividing into panels mixing, placing, compacting, finishing and
curing of the topping concrete.
(c) Use of all related T&P for carrying out work in accordance
with above specifications.

35-8.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It shall includes cost of all the material supplied at site of work as
specified above, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-
8.4.1 above.

510
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-9 CONGLOMERATE FLOORING

(TWO COAT)

35-9.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, the conglomerate flooring (two coat work)
shall be laid in accordance with the Specifications contained in Section
35-8 for Conglomerate floor (single coat) except with the following
modifications:
(a) It shall be laid in two layers with a top layer half an inch thick,
wearing surface composed of aggregate (¼" to 3/16") crushed
stone and cement conforming to Specifications contained in
Section 35-10 and a bottom layer of specified thickness.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, the cement concrete for the bottom
layer shall be composed of one cubic foot of cement, 3 cubic
feet of fine aggregate and 6 cubic feet of coarse aggregate by
volume.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, the surface layer shall compose of
one part of cement and two parts of (¼" to 3/16") crushed stone
aggregate by volume.
(d) The bottom layer shall be brought to a level so that top layer
shall have a minimum thickness of half an inch. The bottom
layer shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping but shall not
be finished smooth. While the bottom layer is still plastic, the
top layer shall be placed over it and levelled with a steel float
after light tapping for five minutes.

35-9.2 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respect the work shall comply with Section 35-8 of these
specifications.

35-9.3 MEASUREMENTS
The conglomerate floor shall be measured by superficial area. The unit
of measurement shall be 100 square feet or m2.

35-9.4 RATE
35-9.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include:
(a) Washing, scrubbing and cleaning of base at ground floor.
(b) Dividing into panels mixing, placing, compacting, finishing and
curing of the topping concrete.

511
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) Use of all related T&P for carrying out work in accordance
with above specifications.

35-9.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It shall includes cost of all the material supplied at site of work as
specified above, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-
9.4.1 above.

512
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-10 TERRAZZO FLOORING

35-10.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified, terrazzo floor shall be laid in accordance
with the following specifications.

35-10.2 MATERIALS
(a) Marble chips shall be of the approved grade, colour, size and
quality.
(b) Cement shall conform to Section 4 of these specifications. For
laying terrazzo floor. Pigment of specified colour shall be
mixed in white cement wherever required. Quantity of pigment
shall, however, not exceed 12% of the weight of cement.
(c) Fine aggregate shall conform to the Specifications contain in
Section 10-3.
(d) Course aggregate shall conform to the Specifications contain in
Section 10-4.
(e) Water shall conform to the specifications contain in Section 1.

35-10.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT

35-10.3.1 BASE
The base shall be laid in accordance with the Section 35-3.3.

35-10.3.2 PROPORTION
Unless otherwise specified, the cement concrete used for bottom layer
shall be of Class-‘A’, conforming to the Specifications contained in
Section 30 for Cement Concrete. The Terrazzo topping shall consist of
2 parts of marble chips and one part of cement by volume.

35-10.3.3 THICKNESS
The topping shall not be less than 3/8 of an inch thick and shall be laid
mono lithic with the bottom layer of cement concrete (Class‘AI’) of
specified thickness. The total thickness of the topping and cement
concrete shall not be less than I 3/8 inches.

35-10.3.4 BOTTOM LAYER OF CONCRETE

The bottom layer of concrete shall not be smooth finished but shall
have a rough surface so that it shall be well bonded with the Terrazzo
topping.

513
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-10.3.5 PREPARING SURFACE OF BOTTOM CONCRETE

Before laying Terrazzo topping the surface of bottom layer of concrete
shall be cleaned. It shall be free from dust, plaster or other foreign
matters.

35-10.3.6 DIVIDING INTO PANELS

Unless, otherwise, mentioned the area of individual panel shall not
exceed 16 sq.ft, for pannelling the floor, dividing strips of glass
marble, brass, copper, stain-less steel specified thickness should be
used. Dividing strips shall be to the full depth of topping. The strips
shall be added in a manner that their tops are in level with the required
finished surface of the floor.

35-10.3.7 LAYING
The top course shall be laid over the bottom course of concrete within
36 hours after the bottom course of concrete has been laid. If laying of
top course is delayed by more than the specified time, a slurry of neat
cement shall be brushed on to it immediately before the topping is laid.
The terrazzo mix shall be placed on the bottom concrete and
compacted by tamping.

35-10.3.8 CURING
After laying the top course, the surface shall be covered with damp
hessian cloth and every precaution shall be taken to prevent its being
subjected to the effects of weather. The flooring shall be maintained in
a damp condition till it is fit for grinding.

35-10.3.9 FACE GRINDING

The grinding of terrazzo shall commence 3 days after laying is
completed.
(a) The first grinding shall be done with an approved coarse
abrasive (curborandum blocks or disc) by sprinkling fine sand
over the surface and by using an ample quantity of water to
assist the grinding. The flooring shall be washed clean with
plenty of water till trace of ground slurry is removed and
marble chips are visible.
(b) All holes or open pores shall be made good with neat cement,
the grout being well worked into the surface by rubbing with a
stone and finishing of a little above the level of the finished
surface of floor. The portion so treated shall be kept damp till
the floor is ready for the second grinding.
(c) The second grinding shall be done after about 5 days using an
approved medium graded coarse abrasive (curborandum blocks
or disc), and pores, if any, shall be treated similarly as after the
first grinding.
(d) The final grinding shall be done with an approved fine graded
curborandum stone and the surface thoroughly washed down
with water.

514
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-10.3.10 FINISHING
After final grinding the floor shall be thoroughly washed. Tartaric Acid
or powder oxalic acid shall be sprinkled over the floor and rubbed with
gunny bags wrapped round rods. The floor shall be allowed to dry and
then more oxalic or tartaric acid shall be rubbed with cloth pads. When
floor is completely dry, the final gloss shall be given by an approved
wax polish.

35-10.4 MEASUREMENTS
The terrazzo floor shall be measured by the superficial area. Its unit of
measurement shall be 100 square feet or m2.

35-10.5 RATE
35-10.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include
(a) Preparing surface of bottom concrete.
(b) Dividing into panels, mixing, pouring, curing, surface grinding,
final finishing and polishing.
(c) Providing, using tools and plants for carrying out work in
accordance with the above specifications including POL and
electricity consumption charges.

35-10.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at the site
of work as per above specifications, in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 35-10.5.1.

515
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-11 DRY BRICK PAVING

35-11.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified dry brick paving shall be done in
accordance with the following specifications.

35-11.2 MATERIALS
(a) Bricks shall conform to Section 6 of these specifications for
clay bricks.
(b) Sand shall conform to Section 10-3 of these specifications for
Fine Aggregate.
(c) Mud mortar shall conform to Section 16-1 of these
specifications for Mud Mortar.

35-11.3 PREPARING SURFACE

The ground surface shall be thoroughly watered, well rammed and
shall be dressed to the specified slope, camber or cross grade.

35-11.4 LAYING
Bricks shall be laid dry, on edge or flat in the specified pattern over
half an inch thick mud plaster given on the surface. The joints shall not
exceed one quarter of an inch in thickness. After laying the bricks the
joints shall be sand grouted.

35-11.5 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of dry brick paving shall be by the superficial area.
Its unit of measurement shall be cft or cubic meter.

35-11.6 RATE
35-11.6.1 LABOUR RATE
It shall include:
(i) Preparation of surface.
(ii) Laying of mud plaster.
(iii) Laying of bricks on mud plaster and grouting with sand.
(iv) Use of all the tools and plants required to carryout work
according to the above specifications.
(v) Sweeping away all surplus sand and cleaning away all debris or
broken bricks.
35-11.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of brick, mortar and sand supplied
at site of work, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section 35-
11.6.1.

516
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-12 WOODEN FLOORING

35-12.1 DESCRIPTION
Wooden floor shall be either hollow floor with planking of required
size and thickness fixed on floor bearer frames or wooden block
flooring fixed on concrete bed by bituminous adhesive. All timber
shall conform to Specification contained in Section 12 and shall be
specified species.

35-12.2 FLOOR BEARERS; GROUND FLOORS

In the case of upper floors, the bridging joists shall rest on wall plates,
beams, rails or on other joists as shown on the drawings, or otherwise
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

35-12.3 SUSPENDED FLOORS

In case of upper floors, the bridging joists shall rest on wall plates,
beams, rails or on other joists as shown on the drawings, or otherwise
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

35-12.4 FLOOR BEARERS; MATERIAL & FIXING

The timber for the floor joists shall be of the kind specified and shall
be in accordance with the general specifications for wood work. The
full number of joist for each continuous floor shall be laid and dressed
to one level and tested before flooring is commenced.

35-12.5 PRESERVATIVES
All joists, wall plates, bearers, and the underside of planking shall be
given two coats of hot wood preservative such as solignum, creosote,
or coal tar, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

35-12.6 BOARDING, MATERIAL & SIZE

The boarding for the floor shall not be planed on the underside in the
case of ground floors and suspended floors to be coiled. Unless
otherwise specified or shown the drawings, in the case of deodar, kail
or chir wood, the boards or battens shall be 1½ inches thick, not more
than 6 inches wide and not more than 20 feet long. In the case of teak
they shall be I inch thick, 4 inches wide and as long as possible. No
board shall be less than 6 feet long, the ends being truly squared up
after any split portion has been sawn off. All boards shall be uniform
and parallel in width and shall have the same thickness.

517
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

35-12.7 JOINTS
The planks shall be planed true on one side (on both sides for uncoiled
upper floors), the edges to be planed, rebated or tongued and grooved
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Unless otherwise specified, the
edges shall be tongued and grooved, with concealed joints for teak
wood floors, and rebated joints for other floors.

35-12.8 PLANKING, METHOD OF LAYING

The outer lines of boarding shall be accurately fixed paralleled with
and close to the wall. Each subsequent line shall have the side joints
carefully joined up and shall then be cramped into position by floor
cramps, and nailed or screwed as specified, so that the heads shall be
sunk below the finished surface of floor, or otherwise fixed with
“secret joints”. The cramps shall not be removed until the nails or
screws have been fixed. The ends of plank shall rest on the centre of
joist, and the ends of no two adjacent planks shall be on the same joist.
Paved floors shall be stopped under a brass strip screwed to wooden
floors where the two meet.

35-12.9 NAILS & SCREWS

The nails or screws shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-
charge and shall have a length at least twice the thickness of the plank,
two being used at each end and one at every intermediate joist
alternately on opposite sides of the plank. All screws shall be oiled
before insertion.

35-12.10 PLANNING
After the floor has been laid, it shall be planed in both directions and
made perfectly smooth. All depressions in the wood, nail holes and all
small defects of every kind, where permitted by the Engineer-in-charge
to remain in the work, shall unless otherwise specified, be filled with
"Beaumontage" or wax used for stopping/filling holes or other defects.

35-12.11 MEASUREMENTS
The measurements of wood flooring shall be done by the superficial
area. The unit of measurement shall be sq.ft/sq.m.

35-12.12 RATE
The unit rate shall include the floor boarding laid and fixed in position
and planned in both directions, provision of brass screws in the case of
teak wood floor where concealed fixing is not employed. Works like
sand papering, oiling, waxing, staining or varnishing are not covered
and shall be paid for separately. The unit rate does not include joists,
wall plates, bearers, beams, rolled steel joists, rails, concrete or
masonry pillars. Payment for these shall be made separately.

518
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:1, Single Joisted Floor

Fig:2, Double Floor with Ceiling Joists

Fig:3, Framed Floor

519
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:4, Construction of Ground Floors

Fig:5, Upper Floors

520
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:6, Squared

Fig:7, Cross Tongued

521
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:8, Grooved Tongued

Fig:9, Rebated

522
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:10, Filleted Longitudinal Joint

Fig:11, Rebated Grooved and Tongued

523
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:12, Splayed Rebated G and T

Fig:13, Square Heading Joint

524
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:14, Splayed

Fig:15, Forked

525
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–36

SURFACE RENDERINGS
36-1 GENERAL DEFECTS IN PLASTER
& THEIR REMEDIES

36-1.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge the
following measures shall be adopted to remedy defects and faults
incidental to plaster work.
(a) Fine aggregate (sand) shall be clean and free from all
impurities. It shall be washed before use.
(b) Lime shall be properly staked before use.
(c) A proper key shall be provided.
(d) The background shall be kept moist, but excessive moisture
shall be avoided.
(e) Proper curing shall be done to eliminate excessive and rapid
thermal changes.
(f) Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next is applied.

36-1.2 DEFECTS IN PLASTER

Various defects observed on plaster along with their causes are given
below:

36-1.2.1 CRACKS
Cracks briefly occur on account of:
(a) Structural defects in building and discontinuity of surface.
(b) Plastering on very wet background.
(c) Old surface not properly prepared.
(d) Over-rapid drying.
(e) Excessive shrinkage of the plaster owing to thick coats and
richer mixes.

36-1.2.2 PITTING AND BLOWING

These defects are noticed in case of faulty slaking and hydration of the
lime particles in the plaster.

36-1.2.3 FALLING OUT

Plaster falls out mainly on account of (i) Lack of adhesion for not
having formed a proper "key" in the background (ii) Excessive
moisture in the background (iii) Excessive thermal changes either in

526
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

the background or in plaster itself. (iv) Rapid drying. (v) Insufficient

drying between each coat of plaster.

36-1.3 REPAIRING CRACKS

Hair cracks generally disappear with whitewashing. Wider cracks can
be filled in by forcing down a mortar consisting of plaster of paris,
cement and sand in the proportion of 1:2:7 by weight. The mortar
should be prepared in a quantity, which must be consumed within half
an hour.

36-1.4 MORTARS FOR PLASTERING

The following proportions (by volume) of dry material are suggested.

Cement Sand Lime

paste
General 1 2 to 4
Watertight mortar 1 2 to 3 1/3 to 1/2
Under coat 1 4 to 6 1
Finishing coat 1 9 2
Watertight finishing 1 10 to 12 3
For chimney breasts 1 8 to 10 3

36-1.5 SCAFFOLDING
The scaffolding for plaster shall always be double.

36-1.6 INSPECTION OF PLASTERING

Plastering shall be inspected by the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative when the work is in progress and after its
completion. The following points will be kept in view while making
the inspection.
(a) If wood skirtings are specified, the plastering has been finished
tight on to them.
(b) The surface checked by means of straight edge and tips of the
fingers is perfectly even.
(c) All intricate places like soffits, cupboard and their recesses,
specified to be plastered, have been properly plastered.
(d) The work has been properly finished at the junction with other
materials such as woodwork at window and door openings,
fireplaces and similar other places.
(e) If wood angle-beads are specified, they are of proper section,
under cut for key, securely fixed, and the plaster has been
finished up to them in a proper manner.

527
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(f) Special care has been taken of cornices and moulding sections.
The templates shall be thoroughly checked and compared with
the approved drawing.
(g) All ornamental work is true to design and securely fixed and
bonded.
(h) If Keene's or other hard plaster angles are specified, they have
been duly executed.
(i) In external stucco, rough cast, or pebble-dashing, the coats are
of even thickness and are uniformly laid.
(j) The plastered surface struck with the knuckles does not give
hollow sound, If it rings hollow, it is an indication of
insufficient adhesion between various coats of plaster.

36-1.7 REMEDIES OF DEFECTS

Hair-cracks on fresh plaster normally disappear after whitewashing.
But wide cracks shall be filled in by forcing down mortar consisting of
plaster of paris, cement and sand in the proportion of 1:2:7, unless
otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Surface
areas showing pitting, blowing, popping and blister shall be remedied
by cutting out patches in rectangular shape, under cutting the edges to
form a dovetail key and making good on a Portland cement ground. All
these remedial measures shall be carried out by the contractor at his
own expense.

528
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-2 CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING

36-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This works shall consist of plastering brick work or stone masonry or
concrete with cement sand mortar of specified proportions and
thickness in conformity with lines and dimensions shown on the
drawings and shall conform with these specifications.

36-2.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

A stiff wire brush is used to remove all loose dust from joints, and the
surface is then thoroughly washed with water. Plastering should not be
done on too much wet walls, because the results will not be
satisfactory. A good key is essential to a successful rendering and to
avoid cracking and crazing. All joints in the masonry are raked to a
depth of at least half an inch with a hooked tool specially made for the
purpose and not with trowel or hammer. This is to be done while the
mortar is still green and not later than 48 hours of the time of laying.
After raking, the brickwork is brushed to remove all loose dust from
the joints and thoroughly washed with water. In case of old walls, it
may sometimes be advisable to ensure a good key for the new
rendering by destroying the smooth surface of the brickwork with
some tool.

36-2.3 MORTAR
Cement sand mortar shall conform to Section 16-2 of these
specifications. The ingredients of mortar shall be proportioned as
mentioned in the BOQ of the contract.

36-2.4 PROPORTIONS OF MORTARS

The following proportions (by volume) of dry materials shall be used
as specified.
Cement Sand
1 : 2
1 : 3
1 : 4
1 : 5

36-2.5 PLASTERING
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized subordinate in writing, wooden screeds three inches wide
and having a thickness equal to the plaster shall be fixed vertically 8

529
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

feet to 10 feet apart to act as gauges and guides in applying the plaster.
The arrises shall then be plastered for a space of four inches on each
side and up to the ceiling, except in case of openings where it shall run
around them. This plaster shall also serve as a guide for thickness etc.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge all
corners and arrises shall be rounded off to a radius of 3/4 inch only and
no more. This work is included in the unit rate of plastering. The
mortar shall be laid on the wall between the screeds, using a plasterer's
float for the purpose and pressing mortar so that the raked joints are
properly filled. The plaster shall then be finished off with a wooden
straight-edge reaching across the screeds. The straight-edge shall be
worked on the screeds with an upward and sideways motion, two
inches or three inches at a time. Finally the surface shall be finished off
with a plasterer's wooden float. Metal floats shall not be used. The
plaster shall be laid to a true and plumb surface and tested frequently
with a straight-edge and plumb-bob. The straight-edge shall not be less
than 10 feet in length. As the work proceeds, all horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level, and all jambs and corners with a
plumb-bob. All mouldings and decorations shall be worked true to
template and shall be neat, clean, level, and parallel, or truely plumb,
as the case may be. Unless otherwise specified, plaster shall not exceed
half an inch in thickness and shall not be less than quarter of an Inch at
the thinnest part.

36-2.6 CURING

The plastered surface shall be protected from the sun, hot winds by wet
screens till it has hardened sufficiently to remain unaffected by the
external application of water. It shall then be watered and kept damp
for a period of at least ten days and allowed to dry as slowly as
possible.

36-2.7 DEFECTS

All defects detected shall be treated by the contractor at his expenses in

accordance with Section 36-1.

36-2.8 MEASUREMENTS
Plastering shall be measured by the superficial area, no deduction
being made for the openings of doors or windows of any size or
additions or returns and soffits from any of the two sides. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 sq. ft. or one sq. meter. Ornamental work to
finished and plastered shall be measured and paid separately and their
unit of measurement shall be 1 foot or 1 metre (linear).

530
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-2.9 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-2.9.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Preparing, cleaning and watering the surface to be plastered.
(b) Plastering surfaces and corners as per above specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the plaster after completion for 10 days.
(d) Providing, erecting and removing scaffoldings.
(e) Providing tools such as special floats, straight edges, levels and
plumb bobs.

36-2.9.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid all items mentioned in
Section 36-2.9.1 and cost of all materials used at site of work for
plastering.

531
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-3 LIME-CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING

36-3.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of plastering brickwork or stone masonry with
lime cement sand mortar in conformity with lines and dimensions as
shown on the drawing and in accordance with these specifications.

36-3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Surface shall be prepared in accordance with Section 36-2.2.

36-3.3 MORTAR
The mortar shall conform to Section 16-4 of these specifications. The
ingredients of mortar shall be proportioned as mentioned in the BOQ
of the contract.

36-3.4 PLASTERING
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized subordinate in writing, wooden screeds three inches wide
and having a thickness equal to the plaster shall be fixed vertically 8
feet to 10 feet apart to act as gauges and guides in applying the plaster.
The arrises shall then be plastered for a space of four inches on each
side and up to the ceiling, except in case of openings where it shall run
around them. This plaster shall also serve as a guide for thickness etc.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge all
corners and arrises shall be rounded off to a radius of 3/4 inch only and
no more. This work is included in the unit rate of plastering. The
mortar shall be laid on the wall between the screeds, using a plasterer's
float for the purpose and pressing mortar so that the raked joints are
properly filled. The plaster shall then be finished off with a wooden
straight-edge reaching across the screeds. The straight-edge shall be
worked on the screeds with an upward and sideways motion, two
inches or three inches at a time. Finally the surface shall be finished off
with a plasterer's wooden float. Metal floats shall not be used. The
plaster shall be laid to a true and plumb surface and tested frequently
with a straight-edge and plumb-bob. The straight-edge shall not be less
than 10 feet in length. As the work proceeds, all horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level, and all jambs and corners with a
plumb-bob. All mouldings and decorations shall be worked true to
template and shall be neat, clean, level, and parallel, or truely plumb,
as the case may be. Unless otherwise specified, plaster shall not exceed
half an inch in thickness and shall not be less than quarter of an Inch at
the thinnest part.

532
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-3.5 PROTECTION DURING CURING

After completion, plaster shall be kept wet for 10 days and shall be
protected during that period from extreme fluctuations of temperature
and weather.

36-3.6 DEFECTS

All defects detected shall be treated at the contractor's expense

according to Section 36-1.

36-3.7 MEASUREMENTS
Plastering shall be measured by the superficial area, no deduction
being made for the openings of doors or windows of any size or
additions or returns and soffits from any of the two sides. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 sq. ft. or sq. meter. Ornamental work to
finished and plastered shall be measured and paid separately and their
unit of measurement shall be 1 foot or 1 metre (linear).

36-3.8 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-3.8.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Preparing, cleaning and watering the surface to be plastered.
(b) Plastering surfaces and corners as per above specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the plaster after completion for 10 days.
(d) Providing, erecting and removing scaffoldings.
(e) Providing tools such as special floats, straight edges, levels and
plumb bobs.

36-3.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid all items mentioned in
Section 36-3.8.1 and cost of all materials used at site of work in
plastering.

533
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-4 COLOURED CEMENT-SAND PLASTERING

36-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of coloured cement sand plastering and
polishing on brickwork or stone work with coloured cement putty
conforming to the lines and dimensions as shown on the drawing and
in accordance with these specifications.

36-4.2 USE
When it is not required to subsequently paint, distemper or colour-
wash the cement plaster, it shall be finished to the final colour and
polished. Plasterer's putty shall be used for the finishing coat.

36-4.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND PLASTERING

The surface will be prepared in accordance with Section 36-2.2 and

plastering shall be done in accordance with the Section 36-2.5 of these
specifications.

36-4.4 FINISHING COAT

The finishing coat of plasterer's putty prepared as above shall be
applied on the floated coat after it has set. The floated coat shall be
finished according to specifications for single coat or double coat, as
the case may be. The thickness of this coat shall be 1/8th of an inch
unless otherwise specified. The surface shall be rubbed smooth with a
steel plasterer's trowel to give it a polished surface.

36-4.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, this shall conform to the
Sections of 36-1 & 36-2 of these specifications.

36-4.6 MEASUREMENTS
Plastering shall be measured by the superficial area, no deduction
being made for the openings of doors or windows of any size or
additions or returns and soffits from any of the two sides. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 sq. ft. or one sq. meter. Ornamental work to
finished and plastered shall be measured and paid separately and their
unit of measurement shall be 1 foot or 1 metre (linear).

534
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-4.7 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-4.7.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Preparing, cleaning and watering the surface to be plastered.
(b) Plastering surfaces and corners as per above specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the plaster after completion for 10 days.
(d) Providing, erecting and removing scaffoldings.
(e) Providing tools such as special floats, straight edges, levels and
plumb bobs.

36-4.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid all items mentioned in
Section 36-4.7.1 and cost of all materials used at site of work for
plastering.

535
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-5 COLOURED LIME PLASTERING

36-5.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of coloured lime plaster and polishing on
brickwork or stone work with coloured lime putty conforming to the
lines and dimensions as shown on the drawing and in accordance with
these specifications.

36-5.2 USE
When it is not required to subsequently paint, distemper or colour-
wash the lime plaster, it shall be finished to the final colour and
polished. Plasterer's putty shall be used for the finishing coat.

36-5.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND PLASTERING

The surface will be prepared in accordance with Section 36-2.2 and

plastering shall be done in accordance with the Section 36-3.4 of the
specifications.

36-5.4 PLASTERER’S PUTTY

Unless otherwise specified plasterer’s putty shall be made as follows:
Pure fat lime shall be slaked and then immersed in water for at least 48
hours. The lime shall then be thoroughly stirred with water and
strained through muslin cloth. On settling, the surplus water shall be
removed and further water allowed to evaporate, till the paste becomes
thick enough for use. Suitable pigments are added to it to obtain the
desired colour as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

36-5.5 FINISHING COAT

The finishing coat of plasterer's putty prepared as above shall be
applied on the floated coat after it has set. The floated coat shall be
finished according to specifications for single coat or double coat, as
the case may be. The thickness of this coat shall be 1/8th of an inch
unless otherwise specified. The surface shall be rubbed smooth with a
steel plasterer's trowel to give it a polished surface.

36-5.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, this shall conform to the
Sections 36-1 & 36-3 of these specifications.

536
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-5.7 MEASUREMENTS
Plastering shall be measured by the superficial area, no deduction
being made for the openings of doors or windows of any size or
additions or returns and soffits from any of the two sides. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 sq. ft. or sq. meter. Ornamental work to
finished and plastered shall be measured and paid separately and their
unit of measurement shall be 1 foot or 1 metre (linear).

36-5.8 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-5.8.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Preparing, cleaning and watering the surface to be plastered.
(b) Plastering surfaces and corners as per above specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the plaster after completion for 10 days.
(d) Providing, erecting and removing scaffoldings.
(e) Providing tools such as special floats, straight edges, levels and
plumb bobs.

36-5.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid all items mentioned in
Section 36-5.8.1 and cost of all materials used at site of work in
plastering.

537
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-6 MUD PLASTER

36-6.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of applying mud plaster on walls, roofs and
floors in conformity with lines and dimension shown on the drawings
and in accordance with these specifications.

36-6.2 MORTAR
Mud mortar shall conform to Section 16-1 of these specifications.

36-6.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Before plastering, the joints of old brickwork or masonry shall be
raked out with a hook (not hammer or tessi) to a depth of half an inch.
The earth and mortar dust coming out of these joints as a result of
raking shall be removed with wire brush 24 hours before mortar is
applied. All putlog holes shall be filled up before plastering, as the
scaffolding for masonry is being taken down.

36-6.4 PLASTERING
The arrises shall be plastered for a space of four inches on each side
and up to the ceiling, except in case of openings where it shall run
around them. This plaster shall also serve as a guide for thickness etc.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-charge all
corners and arrises shall be rounded off to a radius of ¾ inch only and
no more. This work is included in the unit rate of plastering. The
mortar shall then be spread evenly over the wall so as to be not more
than 3/4 inch thick. After spreading, the mortar shall be floated with a
straight-edge, till the surface is perfectly smooth, level and true. The
plaster shall be laid to a true and plumb surface and tested frequently
with a straight-edge and plumb-bob. The straight-edge shall not be less
than 10 feet in length. As the work proceeds, all horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level, and all jambs and corners with a
plumb-bob. All mouldings and decorations shall be worked true to
template and shall be neat, clean, level and parallel or truly plumb as
shown of drawings. Unless otherwise specified, plaster shall not
exceed ¾" in thickness on walls and 1" on floors and roofs. Any cracks
that open out during drying shall be filled with liquid cow-dung.

36-6.5 FINISH
When the surface has dried, it shall be leeped over and finished off
with a trowel or float in the case of walls and roofs. In the case of

538
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

floors, it shall be applied and finished by hand. The leeping shall be

done with a preparation described below: Cow-dung is steeped in
water to render it free from grass, straw, seeds and other impurities. If
considered necessary, it shall be passed through a fine sieve. An equal
part of finely-powdered clay shall then be mixed with it thoroughly in
a tub.

36-6.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, this shall conform to the
Sections of 36-1 & 36-2 of these specifications.

36-6.7 MEASUREMENTS
Plastering shall be measured by the superficial area, no deduction
being made for the openings of doors or windows of any size or
additions or returns and soffits from any of the two sides. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 sq. ft. or one sq. meter. Ornamental work to
finished and plastered shall be measured and paid separately and their
unit of measurement shall be 1 foot or 1 metre (linear).

36-6.8 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-6.8.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Preparing, cleaning and watering the surface to be plastered.
(b) Plastering surfaces and corners as per above specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the plaster after completion for 10 days.
(d) Providing, erecting and removing scaffoldings.
(e) Providing tools such as special floats, straight edges, levels and
plumb bobs.

36-6.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid all items mentioned in
Section 36-6.8.1 and cost of all materials used at site of work for
plastering.

539
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-7 GYPSUM PLASTER

36-7.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers the minimum requirement for full-thickness
(in accordance with table 5, page 547) interior gypsum plastering on
metal, masonry, or monolithic concrete bases designed or prepared to
receive gypsum plaster.

36-7.2 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS

All manufactured materials shall be delivered in the original packages,
container, or bundles bearing the brand name and manufacturer (or
supplier) identification.

36-7.3 PROTECTION
Plasters and other cementitious materials shall be kept dry until used;
they shall be stored off the ground, under cover, and away from walls
with condensation and other damp surfaces. Metal products shall be
protected, which stored, against rusting

36-7.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION

36-7.4.1 TEMPERATURE
When the ambient outside temperature at the building site is less than
55oF (13oC), a temperature of not less than 55oF (13oC) and not more
than 80oF (27oC) shall be maintained continuously inside the building
for a period of not less than one week prior to the application of
plaster, while the plastering is being applied, and for one week after the
plaster has set, or until the plaster has dried. Heat shall be distributed
evenly by using deflective or protective screens to prevent
concentrated or uneven heat or cold on the plaster.
36-7.4.2 VENTILATION
Sufficient ventilation shall be provided to remove excess water given
off through the drying process.

36-7.5 MATERIALS
This shall conform to Section 5 of these specifications.
36-7.5.1 GYPSUM CASTING AND MOLDING PLASTER
This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 59.

540
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-7.5.2 GYPSUM KEENE’S CEMENT

This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 61.
36-7.5.3 LIME
36-7.5.3.1 Finishing Hydrated Lime
This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 206, Type S.
36-7.5.3.2 Quicklime for Structural Purposes
This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 5.
36-7.5.4 LIME PUTTY
Lime putty exceeding 8 weight % of unhydrated magnesium oxide
shall not be used for finish coat plaster.
36-7.5.5 AGGREGATES
36-7.5.5.1 Aggregates for Base Coat Plaster
This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 35.
36-7.5.5.2 Aggregates for Finish Coat Plaster
This shall conform to Specification specified in table-1 (page 542).
36-7.5.5.3 Sand for job mixed lime putty-gypsum gauged, sand float finish (see
31-7.7.6.6.1) shall be graded within the limits specified in table 2 (page
542).
36-7.5.6 WATER
Water used in mixing and finishing plaster shall be clean, fresh,
suitable for domestic water consumption, and free of such amounts of
mineral or organic substances that affect the set, the plaster, or any
metal in the system.
36-7.5.7 METAL PRODUCTS
Metal products shall meet the appropriate product standard, have a
protective coating, and be approved for the intended use.
36-7.5.8 BONDING COMPOUNDS
This shall conform to ASTM Specification C 631.

36-7.6 SURFACE PREPARATION

36-7.6.1 SUBSTRATES
Surfaces of substrates for the application of gypsum plaster shall be
free of materials that will inhibit bond or adhesion, shall be straight,
plumb, level, square, and true to required plan angles and curves.
36-7.6.1.1 All accessories shall be securely attached to the substrate and be
installed to permit embedment of flanges.
36-7.6.1.2 Gypsum and Metal Lath – Shall have been installed in compliance
with ASTM C 841.
36-7.6.2 CONDITIONING
All depressions in masonry and concrete surfaces deeper than 1/8 inch
(3.2mm) shall be brought flush to the surface with compatible

541
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

materials prior to plaster application. Fins or protrusions extending

more than 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from the surface shall be removed.
Protrusions less than 1/16 inch (1.6mm) shall be feathered out with
compatible materials prior to plaster application.
36-7.6.2.1 Masonry
All masonry surfaces shall be wetted immediately prior to the plaster
application. No free water shall remain visible on the substrate surface.
36-7.6.2.1.1 Where the surface is too smooth to provide mechanical key, the surface
shall be roughened or bonding compound shall be used.
36-7.6.2.1.2 Where bond cannot be obtained over the entire surface by the methods
specified in 31-7.6.2.1.1, self-furring metal lath shall be used in
accordance with ASTM C 841.
36-7.6.2.2 Monolithic Concrete
Bonding compounds shall be used prior to plastering all monolithic
concrete surface.
Table 1
Aggregate for Finish Coat Plasters, Percentage Retained
on Each Sieve, Cumulative
Perlite, Natural and Manufactured Sand
Sieve size Volume % Weight %
Max Min Max Min
No. 20 (850 m) 0 --- 0 ---
No. 30 (600 m) 10 --- 0.5 ---
No. 100 (150 m) 100 40 100 40
No. 200 (75 m) 100 70 100 70
Table 2
Sand for Job-Mixed Lime Putty-Gypsum Gaged Sand Float
Finish, Percent Retained on Each Sieve by Weight, Cumulative
Sieve Size Max Min
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 0 0
No. 30 (600 m)) 50 20
No. 50 (300 m) 70 50
No. 100 (150 m) 100 80
36-7.6.2.3 Grounds, beads, and screeds shall be installed prior to the plastering as
modified herein.
36-7.6.3 GROUTING
36-7.6.3.1 Metal bases for solid partitions shall be grouted with gypsum plaster
leaving approximately ¼ in. (6.4 mm) below the top edge of the base,
and be formed with a center groove that will permit the lath to extend
¾ in. (19 mm) below the top edge of the base, or plaster grout shall be
placed after installation of lath.
36-7.6.3.2 Metal Frames – Hollow door and window frames shall be filled with
gypsum plaster grout.

36-7.7 MIX DESIGN

36-7.7.1 MIXING GENERAL

542
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

All plaster mixing shall be done by mechanical means unless hand

mixing is specified.
36-7.7.1.1 Retempered, partially set, frozen, caked or lumpy material shall not be
used.
36-7.7.1.2 Each batch shall be mixed separately and mixers shall be free of all set
and hardened materials prior to mixing each batch.
36-7.7.1.3 All tools shall be kept clean.
36-7.7.1.4 The setting time shall be permitted to be adjusted but in no case shall
the setting time be more than 4 h.
36-7.7.2 HAND MIXING
When permitted.
36-7.7.3 MECHANICAL MIXING
In accordance with manufacturer’s printed directions.
36-7.7.4 BASE COAT PROPORTIONS
36-7.7.4.1 Gypsum Neat Plaster
Proportions of sand, perlite, or vermiculite aggregate to 100 lb
(45.4 kg) of gypsum neat plaster shall be not more than those specified
in Table 3 (page 543).
Table 3
Base Coat Proportions
Aggregates
Perlite or
Sand
Vermiculite
Plaster Base
By volume, ft3 By weight, lb
By volume,
(m3), Damp and (kg), Damp
ft3 (m3)
Loose and Loose
Over Gypsum Lath
Two-Coat work:
Base coat 2 ½ (0.071) 250 (113) 2 (0.06)
Three-coat work
Scratch coat 2 (0.056) 200 (91) 2 (0.06)
Brown coat 3 (0.085) 300 (136) 2 (0.06)
Or
Scratch and 2 ½ (0.071) 250 (113) ---
Brown coats
Over metal lath
Three-coat work:
Scratch coat 2 (0.058) 200 (91) 2 (0.06)
Brown coat 3 (0.085) 300 (136) 2 (0.06)
Or
Scratch and 2 ½ (0.071) 250 (113) ---
Brown coats
Over unit Masonry (Note 6)
Two Coat work
Base coat 3 (0.085) 300 (136) 3 (0.085)
Three-coat work
Scratch coat 3 (0.085) 300 (136) 3 (0.085)
Brown coat 3 (0.085) 300 (136) 3 (0.085)
Over Monolithic Concrete
For base coat properties applicable to monolithic concrete,

543
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-7.7.4.2 Gypsum Wood-Fibered Plaster

Proportion of damp, loose sand or perlite or vermiculite shall be not
more than 1 ft3 (0.028 m3) to 100 lb (45.4 kg) of gypsum wood-fibered
plaster.

36-7.7.5 PREPARATION OF LIME PUTTY

36-7.7.5.1 Lime putty shall be prepared from Type S hydrated lime or pulverized
quicklime, in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed directions.
36-7.7.5.2 Hydrated Lime – Type S lime shall only be sued after soaking for the
time period required in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
directions.

36-7.7.6 FINISH COAT PROPORTION

36-7.7.6.1 Finish coats shall be either ready mixed or job mixed in accordance
with table 4A (page 546) and table 4B (page 547).
36-7.7.6.1.1 Where thickness of the finish coat is more than 1/8 in (3.2mm), the
proportion of the gypsum gauging plaster shall be increased to
minimize shrinkage type cracks.
36-7.7.6.2 Troweled Finishes of lime putty gauged with gypsum gauging plaster
or ready mixed gypsum plaster shall be proportioned in accordance
with table 4A (page 546).
36-7.7.6.2.1 Where finish in 36-7.7.6.2 is to be applied over base coats containing
perlite or vermiculite, the addition of not less than ½ ft3 (0.14 m3) or
not more than 1 ft3 (0.028 m3) of fine aggregate meeting the sieve
analysis of table 1 (page 542) shall be added to the mix.
36-7.7.6.3 Troweled finishes of lime putty gauged with gypsum Keene’s cement
shall be specified as medium or hard and shall be proportioned in
accordance with table 4A (page 546).
36-7.7.6.3.1 When finish in 36-7.7.6.3 is mechanically mixed, the water shall be
placed in the mixer first, then the lime, the fine aggregate (if used), and
finally the gypsum Keene’s cement.
36-7.7.6.4 Troweled finishes of gypsum ready mixed plaster shall be mixed in
accordance with table 4A (page 546).
36-7.7.6.5 Float finishes of lime putty gauged with gypsum gauging plaster shall
be proportioned in accordance with Table 4A (page 546).
36-7.7.6.5.1 When finish in 36-7.7.6.5 is to be mixed with sand, the sand shall be
graded within the limits shown for basecoats in ASTM Specification
C35 except that all of the sand shall pass a No.8 (2.36mm) sieve.
36-7.7.6.6 Float finishes of lime putty gauged with gypsum Keene’s cement shall
be proportioned in accordance with table 4A (page 546).
36-7.7.6.6.1 When the finish in 36-7.7.6.6 is to be mechanically mixed wet, follow
procedures in 36-7.7.6.3.1. For mixing dry, add lime first, then gypsum
Keene’s cement, and sand. This dry mix shall be mixed to a uniform
color and then add water to achieve the desired consistency.
36-7.7.6.7 Float finishes of job mixed gypsum and sand shall be proportioned in
accordance with table 4A and 4B (page 546, 547).
36-7.7.6.8 Float finishes of ready mixed plaster and sand shall be mixed with
water only in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed directions.

544
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-7.7.6.9 Float finishes of job mixed plaster shall be proportioned in accordance

with table 4B (page 547).
36-7.7.6.10 Float or textured ready mixed coloured plaster shall be mixed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed directions.
36-7.7.6.11 Float or textured job mixed colour plaster shall be proportioned in
accordance with table 4A or 4B (page 546, 547).
36-7.7.6.12 Special finishes shall be proportioned in accordance with the
applicable provision of table 4A or 4B (page 546, 547).

36-7.8 APPLICATION
36-7.8.1 GENERAL
Plaster shall be applied by hand or machine as specified herein.
36-7.8.2 PLASTER THICKNESS
36-7.8.2.1 Gypsum plaster shall be applied to the thickness specified in table 5
(page 547). Plaster thickness shall be measured from the face plane of
all plaster bases.

545
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Table 4A
Proportion of Gypsum to Not More than Lime/Aggregate, with Dry and Wet Equivalent

Dry Lime Putty Wet Equivalent

Weight. lb (kg) Volume, ft3 (m3) ft3 (m3) U.S. gal lb (kg)
Gypsum Lime Aggregate Gypsum Lime Aggregate (litres)
Troweled Finishes: A
Lime putty with: B
Gypsum gauging 100 (45.4) 225 (102) 0A 1 (.028) 3 (.085) 0 6.75 (.191) 52.5 (199) 450 (204)
Gypsum Keene’s cement:
Medium 100 (45.4) 50 (22.7) 0A 1 (.028) 1 (.028) 0 1-1/8 (.032) 8 ¾ (33) 100 (45.4)
Hard 100 (45.4) 25 (11.3) 0A 1 (.028) ½ (.014) 0 5/8 (.018) 4 ½ (17) 50 (22.7)
Ready-mixed gypsum 100 (45.4) 0 0 1 (.028) 0 0 0 0 0
Plaster
Gypsum vermiculite 100 (45.4) 0 7 to 15 (32 1 (.028) 0 1 (.028) 0 0 0
to 6.8)
Floated Finishes:
Lime putty with:
Gypsum gauging 100 (45.4) 255 (102) 200 (90.7) 1 (.028) 3 (.028) 2 (.057) 6.75 (.191) 52.5 (199) 450 (204)
Gypsum Keene’s cement
Medium 150 (68.0) 100 (45.4) 450 (204) 1 ½ (.042) 2 (.057) 4 ½ (.127) 2 ¼ (.064) 17 ½ (66) 200 (90.7)
Ready-mixed gypsum 100 (45.4) 0 0 1 (.028) 0 0 0 0 0
Plaster C
Gypsum-vermiculite 100 (45.4) 0 7 to 15 (32 1 (.028) 0 1 (.028) 0 0 0
to 6.8)
Gypsum-sand (job-mixed) D 100 (45.4) 0 200 (90.7 1 (.028) 0 2 (.057) 0 0 0

A See 31-7.7.6.2, 31-7.7.6.3, 31-7.7.6.4 and 31-7.7.6.5.

B If additional hardness of finish coat is desired, increased amounts of gypsum shall be used; however,
hard finishes shall not be used over lightweight aggregate base coats.
C Mixed with water only, in accordance with manufacturers’ printed directions.
D Gypsum shall be neat, unfibered plastered.

546
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Table 4B
Trowel Finishes of Lime Putty Gaged With Gypsum Gaging
Plaster Proportions
Proportions of Fine Aggregate
Not Less Than Not More Than Per
½ ft3 (0.014 m3) 1 ft3 (0.028 m3) 100 ft3 (45.4 kg)gypsum gauging
or 1/8 ft3 (0.0035 m3) ¼ ft3 (0.007 m3) 1 lb (22.7 kg) dry hydrated lime
or 1 U.S. gal (3.78 L) 2 U.S. gal (7.57 L) 1 ft3 (0.028 m3) lime putty
or 1 pt (0.473 L) 1 pt (0.946 L) 1 U.S. gal (3.78 L) lime putty

Table 5
Thickness of Plaster
Thickness of Plaster Including Finish
Plaster Base
Coat, in. (mm)
Metal plaster base 5/8 (16) min
All other types of plaster base ½ (13) min
Unit masonry 5/8 (16) min
Monolithic concrete surfaces:
Vertical 5/8 (16) min
Horizontal 1/8 (3) to 5/8 (10)

36-7.8.3 APPLICATION OF BASE COATS

36-7.8.3.1 Two-Coat Work
The first coat shall be applied with sufficient material and applied with
enough pressure to form a good bond to the substrate. The second coat
shall be applied by doubling back before the first coat sets and with the
plaster brought out to the grounds or screeds or specified thickness.
36-7.8.3.1.1 The plaster shall be straightened to a true plane without application of
water leaving the surface porous and rough enough to provide a
mechanical bond for the finish coat.
36-7.8.3.2 Three-Coat Work
The first coat or scratch coat shall be applied with sufficient material
and applied with enough pressure to form tight contact with and a good
bond to solid plaster bases, or to form full keys through metal
reinforcement. The first coat shall have sufficient depth of material
leaving the surface sufficiently porous and rough (scratch or raked) to
provide mechanical bond for the second or brown coat.
36-7.8.3.2.1 After the first or scratch coat has set, screeds shall be applied over the
first coat prior to application of the second coat to ensure full plaster
thickness. The second or brown coat to shall be applied with sufficient
material and pressure to ensure tight contact with the scratch coat and
to bring the thickness of the second coat out to the grounds or specified
thickness. The second coat shall straighten the surface to a true plane
without application of water, and leave the surface sufficiently porous
and rough enough to provide mechanical bond for the third or finish
coat.
36-7.8.3.2.2 Metal base and metal frames for hollow partitions shall be plaster
grouted prior to plastering, or shall be grouted solid between base or
frame and plaster base at the time of plastering.

547
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-7.8.3.3 Plastering on Monolithic Concrete

All applicable requirements of (36-7.6.1), 36-7.6.1.1, 36-7.6.2,
36-7.6.2.1, 36-7.6.2.1.1, 36-7.6.2.1.3, and table-5 (page 547) shall be
followed.
36-7.8.3.3.1 Walls and columns shall have a coat of dash-bond, bonding compound
or metal plaster base or shall have a two coat plaster application as
provided in 36-7.8.3.1 with a proportion of gypsum neat plaster to
aggregate of 100 lb (45.4 kg) of plaster to not more than 3 ft3 (0.028
m3) of aggregate.
36-7.8.3.3.2 Ceiling shall be prepared and two coat work applied in accordance
with 36-7.8.3.1.
36-7.8.3.4 Solid Plaster Partitions with Steel Studs (Metal Lath and Plaster)
Partitions shall be not less than 2 inch (51mm) thick and shall have
scratch, brown, and finish coats applied in accordance with
36-7.8.3.4.1 through 36-7.8.3.4.4. Where studs are temporarily braced,
the bracing shall be maintained until the scratch coat on the lath side
has set.
36-7.8.3.4.1 The scratch coat on the lath side shall be applied first, with sufficient
material and pressure to form full keys and embed the lath and with
sufficient depth of material to be scored to a rough surface
immediately following its application.
36-7.8.3.4.2 The back-up coat on the channel side shall applied in not less than two
applications after the scratch coat on the lath side has set and partially
dried. The first application shall completely cover the keys of the
scratch coat. The second application shall bring the plaster out to the
grounds in a true plane with the surface, left porous and sufficiently
rough to provide mechanical bond for the finish coat. Extra water shall
not be used in straightening the wall to a true plane.
36-7.8.3.4.3 The brown coat on the lath side shall be applied after the brown coat
on the channel side has set, and left as specified for the finish coat.
36-7.8.3.4.4 Plaster shall extend to the floor, except that where plaster grouted
combination metal bases and screeds are used, the plaster shall extend
to the grout below the top of the base. Spaces between the grounds and
all metal doorframes shall be filled.
36-7.8.3.5 Studless Solid Partitions (Metal Lath and Plaster)
Partitions shall be not less than 2 inch (51mm) thick constructed using
either rib lath or diamond mesh (flat expanded) lath, and with plaster
applied in the same number of coats as for solid partitions with steel
studs (see 36-7.8.3.4).
36-7.8.3.5.1 Where rib metal lath is used, the scratch coat shall be applied first to
the flat side with temporary bracing on the rib side.
36-7.8.3.5.2 Where diamond mesh lath is used, the temporary bracing shall be
attached to either side or the scratch coat applied on the opposite side.
36-7.8.3.5.3 Sequence application of brown coats in accordance with one of the
following methods:
(1) Brown coat shall be applied over the face of the scratch coat
followed by the brown coat on the opposite side of the partition, or

548
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(2) Brown coat shall be applied on the rib side of the metal lath, or on
the backside of the scratch coat followed by the brown coat applied
over the face of the scratch coat.
36-7.8.3.6 Studless Solid Partitions (Gypsum Lath and Plaster)
Partitions shall be not less than 2 inch (51mm) thick and shall be three-
coat work on both sides.
36-7.8.3.6.1 Scratch coat shall be applied approximately 3/8 inch (9.5mm) thick
with not less than 3/16" (4.8mm) thickness at any point. The
application shall be started at the side opposite the temporary bracing,
then on the braced side without removing the bracing. The thickness
shall be the same on both sides.
36-7.8.3.6.2 The brown coat shall be applied to the side opposite the bracing after
the scratch coat has set and is partially dry. The bracing shall be
removed when this brown coat has set and is partially dry. Both sides
shall have been brought to 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6mm to 3.2mm) of the
required thickness leaving a surface ready to receive a finish coat (see
36-7.8.3.4.2), which will bring the partition to an overall thickness of
not less than 2 inch (51mm).
36-7.8.3.7 Studless Solid Partitions (Multiple-Thickness Gypsum Lath and
Plaster)
Partitions shall be not less than 2 inch (51mm) thick with three coats
on each side. Each side shall be not less than ½ inch (12.7mm) thick.
36-7.8.3.8 Gypsum Lath Ceilings Attached by Clips
Plastered ceiling with clip attached gypsum lath shall be covered with
three-coat work with the scratch coat not less than 3/16 to ¼ inch
(4.8mm to 6.4mm) thick over the face of the gypsum lath. The total
thickness of scratch and brown coats shall be not less than 7/16 inch
(11mm).

36-7.8.4 APPLICATION OF FINISHES

36-7.8.4.1 Finish coats shall be applied to a partially dry base coat or to a
thoroughly dry base coat that has been evenly wetted by brushing or
spraying. No water shall be left standing on the surface prior to plaster
application.
36-7.8.4.2 Troweled finishes shall be applied by drawing the first application
down tight to the entire base coat surface and doubling back to fill out
to a true even surface of from 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6mm to 3.2mm)
thick, free from catfaces and other blemishes or irregularities. Final
troweling or texturing shall be done with a minimum of water after the
finish coat has become firm.
36-7.8.4.2.1 Lime putt-gypsum gauged Keene’s cement finish (see 36-7.7.6.3) shall
be done in accordance with 36-7.8.4.2 except that the final troweling
shall be continued until the finish has set.
36-7.8.4.2.2 Ready mixed gypsum troweled finishes (see 36-7.7.4.2) shall be
applied in accordance with the printed directions of the manufacturer.
36-7.8.4.3 Textured/float finishes shall be applied in accordance with 36-7.8.4.2
except the float applied finish shall also meet the requirements of the
specific texture required. The texture required shall be created by the

549
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

type of float surface used (wood, carpet, cork, rubber, or other) and the
length of time between trowel application and floating (take-up).
36-7.8.4.3.1 The mixes in 36-7.8.4.2.1 and 36-7.8.4.2.2 used for float finish shall be
applied in accordance with 36-7.8.4.3.
36-7.8.4.4 Texture or special finishes shall be applied in accordance with the
printed directions of the manufacturer.
36-7.8.4.5 Job mixed finishes shall be applied in accordance with 36-7.8.4.2 or
36-7.8.4.3. The texture or special finish coat shall reduce the total
thickness by not more than 1/16 inch (1.6mm) while matching the
approved sample as closely as possible.
36-7.8.4.5.1 Special finishes shall not reduce the combined thickness of the base
coat and finish coat to less than that specified in table 5 (page 547).
36-7.8.4.5.2 Acoustical plaster and finish shall be applied in accordance with the
printed directions of the manufacturer.

36-7.9 MEASUREMENT
As per Section 36-2.8 of these specifications.

36-7.10 RATE
The unite rates shall include:

36-7.10.1 LABOUR RATE

Compensation for labour and T&P to execute item Section 36-7 of the
work in accordance with these specifications.

36-7.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It includes cost of materials used in plastering and all items mentioned
in Section 36-7.10.1 of these specifications.

550
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-8 POINTING

36-8.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of pointing on brick masonry walls, roofs &
floors in accordance with these specifications.

36-8.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Before pointing old brickwork or new brickwork in mud, the joints
shall be raked out with a hook (not hammer) to a depth of half an inch.
If, for any reason, the joints in new brickwork in lime or cement are
not struck as the work proceeds, they shall be raked out before the
mortar sets. All earth and mortar dust coming out of the joints as a
result of raking shall be washed off and the brickwork sufficiently
watered. The face shall once again be washed just before starting
pointing. The surface prepared in the manner described above shall be
inspected by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorised subordinate, and
shall be approved by one of them before actual pointing begins.

36-8.3 POINTING

Unless otherwise specified various types of pointing suitable for

different situations shall be as follows:-

36-8.3.1 DEEP OR STRUCK CEMENT POINTING

(a) This type of pointing shall be done to all unplastered faces of
brickwork in mud where the brickwork is liable to be affected
by dampness and saltpetre, such as in plinths of buildings.
(b) The mortar shall be prepared as per Section 16-2 of these
specifications for Cement Mortar.
(c) The mortar shall be filled in the joints flush with masonry or
brickwork with a pointing trowel and then pressed in with
proper pointing tools. Lining with a spike on a mass of mortar
shall not be allowed.

36-8.3.2 DEEP OR STRUCK LIME POINTING

(a) This type of pointing shall be done to all unplastered faces of
brickwork in mud. Its colour shall match with that of the bricks.
(b) The mortar shall be prepared as per Section 16-3 of these
specifications for Lime Mortar.
(c) The mortar shall be filled in the joints flush with masonry or
brick work with a pointing trowel and then pressed in with
proper pointing tools. Lining with a spike on a mass of mortar
shall not be allowed.

551
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-8.3.3 FLUSH CEMENT POINTING

(a) This type of pointing shall be done to all brickwork with an
exposed face, when the finish of the face is not important or
when a flush floor surface is required or when the floor or
brickwork is subject to wear or to the effects of dampness and
saltpetre.
(b) The mortar shall be prepared as per Section 16-2 of these
specifications for Cement Sand Mortar.
(c) The mortar shall be filled and pressed into the joints with a
pointing trowel, and finished off level with the edges of the
bricks to give the smoothest possible appearance to the work.

36-8.3.4 FLUSH LIME POINTING

(a) This type of pointing shall be done to all unplastered faces of
brickwork in mud, where the finish of the faces is not important
or where the face is to be ultimately whitewashed or colour-
washed. Brick, tile or other paved floors shall also be pointed in
this fashion.
(b) The mortar shall be prepared as per Section 16-3 of these
specifications for Lime Mortar.
(c) The mortar shall be filled and pressed into the joints with a
pointing trowel, and finished off level with the edges of the
bricks to give the smoothest possible appearance to the work.

36-8.3.5 RULED POINTING

(a) This type of pointing shall be done, when specified, to
brickwork not liable to be flushed with water.
(b) The cement or lime mortar as actually specified shall be used.
These mortars shall be prepared as per Sections 16-2 and 16-3
of these specifications for Cement Mortar and Lime Mortar
respectively.
(c) The mortar shall be filled and pressed into the joints with a
pointing trowel, and finished off level with the edges of the
bricks and shall then be ruled along the centre of all joints with
a half round tool ½" wide.

36-8.3.6 STRIKING JOINT

(a) All new unplastered faces of work in cement or lime mortar
shall be finished by striking joints as the work proceeds
according to the relevant part of Section 32-1.15 of these
specifications as contained under brickwork.
(b) In case of walls, joints shall be struck by raking out the green
mortar after the brickwork has been laid, and finished with a
pointing tool.

552
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-8.4 POINTING TOOLS

The pointing tools for horizontal joint shall be such as to form
weathered and struck joints; and for vertical joint, triangles, so as to
make a (v) notch in the joint. Care shall be taken not to develop a
cutting edge in the tools since the idea is to compress the green mortar
into the joints and not to cut it away.

36-8.5 EDGES OF BRICKS

The mortar shall not be spread irregularly over the edges and corners
of the bricks, which shall be left clearly visible. The practice of
smearing mortar over defects in bricks, to hide them, shall not be
allowed and shall render the whole brickwork liable to be rejected.

36-8.6 WASHING AFTER POINTING

After pointing, the face of the work shall be cleared off all surplus
mortar sticking to the face. No washing shall be done till the pointing
has set.

36-8.7 CURING
Lime pointed work shall be kept wet for five days and cement pointed
work for 10 days after completion. The work shall be protected during
that period from extreme fluctuations of weather.

36-8.8 MEASUREMENTS

Pointing shall be measured by the superficial area. The deduction shall

be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether pointing
is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement shall be 100
square feet or one sq. meter.

36-8.9 RATE
The unit rate for pointing shall include:

36-8.9.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) Raking out joints, cleaning and watering the surface to be
pointed.
(b) Pointing the surface as per Section 36-8.3 of these
specifications.
(c) Curing and protecting the pointing after completion for 10 or 5
days as the case may be.
(d) Provision, erection and removal of scaffoldings.

553
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(e) Provision of all tools required for pointing.

36-8.9.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items

mentioned in Section 36-8.9.1 and cost of all materials used at site of
work in pointing.

554
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-9 WHITEWASHING

36-9.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of whitewashing on plastered and cement
concrete surfaces in accordance with these specifications.

36-9.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

(a) The surface shall be clean, smooth and completely dry before
whitewash is applied.
(b) New plaster to be whitewashed shall not be trowelled to a
glazed surface, because whitewash would not adhere to it.
(c) The old loose whitewash shall be removed from walls
previously whitewashed, and the surface thoroughly cleaned.
(d) If the old whitewash is not loose, but is discoloured by smoke,
it shall be treated by a wash of yellow earth before
whitewashing.
(e) Before whitewashing all greasy stops shall be treated with a
coat of rice, water and sand.
(f) When the whitewash and plaster are in a deteriorated condition
of repair, they shall be either pulled down completely or cut in
squares and new patches put in as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge or his authorized subordinate. As soon as these patches
dry up two extra coats of whitewash shall be given prior to the
regular coat. The work of scraping old whitewash and
deteriorated plaster and of repairing the plaster in whole or in
patches is not included in the unit rate and hence shall be
payable separately.

36-9.3 PREPARATION OF WITEWASH

Whitewash shall be prepared from pure fat lime brought to the site of
work in an unslaked condition and in order to slake the lime water
shall be added to it in a tub till the mixture attains the consistency of
cream, and is allowed to rest for 24 to 48 hours. It shall then be
strained through coarse cloth and 115 gm of glue or gum or rice
dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic foot of it.

36-9.4 APPLICATION
(a) Whitewash shall be applied with a brush. Each coat shall
consist of four strokes, one in each direction.
(b) Each coat of whitewash shall be allowed to dry and inspected
by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized subordinate. The
next coat shall not be applied unless the previous one has been

555
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

approved by either of them. A dry coat must not show any sign
of cracking, nor must whitewash come off readily on fingers
when rubbed.
(c) Whitewash, when completed, shall form an opaque coat of
uniform white colour, through which the old work does not
show and shall present a smooth regular surface free from
powdery matter.

36-9.5 MEASUREMENTS
Whitewashing shall be measured by superficial area. The deduction
shall be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether
whitewashing is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 square feet of one sq.meter.

36-9.6 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-9.6.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.

(a) The preparation of surface and whitewash as per Section 36-9.2
and 36-9.3 of these specifications.
(b) The provision, erection and removal of scaffolding and ladders
(shot with gunny bags at both ends to prevent damage to the
floor and walls).
(c) The protection of floor, fixed furniture, doors and windows, as
well as all such places and things as are not to be whitewashed.
These places and things shall be protected from all droppings
and slashes of whitewash, if any, and cleaned.
(d) Provision of all tools and brushes required for whitewashing.

36-9.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items

mentioned in section 36-9.6.1 and cost of all material used at site of
work in whitewashing.

556
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-10 CEMENT WASH

36-10.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of applying cement wash on the concrete
surface in accordance with these specifications.

36-10.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The surface shall be prepared in accordance with Section 36-9.2 of
these specifications.

36-10.3 CEMENT WASH

Cement wash is simply a thin grout made of Portland cement and water
and of such a consistency that it can be applied with a brush. Fine sand
is sometimes added. This wash may be coloured, if desired, but with
certain tints it is desirable to use white Portland cement. Paints
consisting of two parts of Portland cement to one part of lime are
usually used.

36-10.4 APPLICATION
(a) Cement wash shall be applied with a brush. Each coat shall
consist of four strokes, one in each direction.
(b) Each coat of Cement wash shall be allowed to dry and
inspected by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized
subordinate. The next coat shall not be applied unless the
previous one has been approved by either of them. A dry coat
must not show any sign of cracking, nor must whitewash come
off readily on fingers when rubbed.
(c) Cement wash, when completed, shall form an opaque coat of
uniform cement colour, through which the old work does not
show and shall present a smooth regular surface free from
powdery matter.

36-10.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 36-9.

36-10.6 MEASUREMENTS
Whitewashing shall be measured by superficial area. The deduction
shall be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether

557
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

whitewashing is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement

shall be 100 square feet of one sq.meter.

36-10.7 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-10.7.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.

(a) The preparation of surface and whitewash as per Section 36-
10.2 and 36-10.3 of these specifications.
(b) The provision, erection and removal of scaffolding and ladders
(shot with gunny bags at both ends to prevent damage to the
floor and walls).
(c) The protection of floor, fixed furniture, doors and windows, as
well as all such places and things as are not to be whitewashed.
These places and things shall be protected from all droppings
and slashes of whitewash, if any, and cleaned.
(d) Provision of all tools and brushes required for whitewashing.

36-10.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items

mentioned in section 36-10.7.1 and cost of all material used at site of
work in whitewashing.

558
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-11 COLOUR WASHING

36-11.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of colour washing on the specified surface in
accordance with these specifications.

36-11.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The surface to be colour washed shall be prepared in accordance with
Section 36-8.2 of these specifications.

36-11.3 PREPARATION OF COLOUR WASH

The colour wash shall be prepared by adding necessary colouring

pigment to the whitewash which has been strained. White wash shall
be prepared in accordance with Section 36-9.3 of the specifications.
The mixture shall be stirred thoroughly and passed though a clean five
cloth. Only such quantity of wash shall be prepared as can be
consumed in a day’s work.

36-11.4 APPLICATION
(a) New or scraped surface shall be given a coat of whitewash,
prior to colour-wash.
(b) Old surface, when the colour-wash is satisfactory, shall be
given only one new coat of colour-wash.
(c) When replacing one colour with another of a lighter shade, the
old colour shall be thoroughly scraped and a coat of whitewash
given before the new colour is applied.
(d) Each coat of colour-wash shall be allowed to dry and shall be
inspected by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized
subordinate. The next coat shall not be applied unless the
previous one has been approved by either of them.
(e) The completed wall shall be of u uniform colour, free from
blots, lines or cut shades, and shall present a smooth regular
surface which shall neither crack nor come off readily on
fingures when rubbed.
(f) Each room shall be finished in one operation and work shall not
start in a room so late that it cannot be finished the same day.

36-11.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 36-9.

559
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-11.6 MEASUREMENTS
Whitewashing shall be measured by superficial area. The deduction
shall be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether
whitewashing is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 square feet of one sq.meter.

36-11.7 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-11.7.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.

(a) The preparation of surface and wash as per Section 36-11.2 and
36-11.3 of these specifications.
(b) The provision, erection and removal of scaffolding and ladders
(shot with gunny bags at both ends to prevent damage to the
floor and walls).
(c) The protection of floor, fixed furniture, doors and windows, as
well as all such places and things as are not to be whitewashed.
These places and things shall be protected from all droppings
and slashes of whitewash, if any, and cleaned.
(d) Provision of all tools and brushes required for whitewashing.

36-11.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items

mentioned in section 36-11.7.1 and cost of all material used at site of
work in whitewashing.

560
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-12 VINYL EMULSION

36-12.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of furnishing and applying vinyl emulsion on a
surface in accordance with these specifications.

36-12.2 MATERIALS
Vinyl emulsion manufactured by the approved manufacturers shall be
used.

36-12.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

(a) Newly-plastered surface, when absolutely dry, shall be sand-
papered to remove all irregularities, making good inequalities
and holes with gypsum, which shall be allowed to set hard.
Unless the surface is perfectly clean and smooth, no pleasing
effect shall result from vinyl emulsion.
(b) Old plastered surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. If it is
whitewashed or colour-washed, it shall be rubbed off with
sand-paper or cocoanut fibre in case it is loose and then stopped
and sized.
(c) After rubbing and cleaning, all plastered surface, old or new,
shall be sized with a coat of equal parts of size and alum
dissolved in hot water. Decomposed size shall not be used
under any circumstances. Where the makers of the vinyl
emulsion recommend a special priming coat only that coat shall
be applied.
(d) If the existing surface is cleanly vinyl emulsioned all the vinyl
emulsion shall not necessarily be removed. The surface shall be
smoothed down with glass paper and any firm vinyl emulsion
that remains on the wall after such rubbing shall be left.

36-12.4 MIXING
Vinyl emulsion mix shall be prepared strictly in accordance with the
maker's instructions or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge, and the
quantity shall be just sufficient for the day's work.

36-12.5 APPLICATION
(a) Vinyl emulsion shall be applied only with proper brushes. The
brushes shall be washed in hot water after each day’s work and
hung up to dry. Old brushes caked with dry emulsion mix shall
not be allowed to be used on the work.

561
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(b) Vinyl emulsion shall be applied quickly and boldly leaving no

dry edges. The brush shall be dipped in emulsion and stroked
cross-wise on the wall, then immediately stroked up and down
and stopped.
(c) Unless otherwise or directed two men shall work on wall
together, one working from the ceiling downwards as far as he
can reach and the other following him applying the vinyl
emulsion from below. No patchy overlap shall be allowed
under any circumstances.
(d) On newly-plastered walls two coats over one coat of priming
shall be applied.
(e) On old walls covered with one or two coats of hard dry
whitewash free from efflorescence or kalar, one coat without
priming coat shall be applied.
(f) The consumption of emulsion should be in accordance with
spreading power as prescribed by the manufacturer.

36-12.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 36-9.

36-12.7 MEASUREMENTS
Whitewashing shall be measured by superficial area. The deduction
shall be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether
whitewashing is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 square feet of one sq.meter.

36-12.8 RATE
The unit rate shall include:
36-12.8.1 LABOUR RATE
When only labour rate is to be paid.
(a) The preparation of surface as per Section 36-12.3 of these
specifications.
(b) The provision, erection and removal of scaffolding and ladders
(shot with gunny bags at both ends to prevent damage to the
floor and walls).
(c) The protection of floor, fixed furniture, doors and windows, as
well as all such places and things as are not to be whitewashed.
These places and things shall be protected from all droppings
and slashes of whitewash, if any, and cleaned.
(d) Provision of all tools and brushes required for whitewashing.
36-12.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items
mentioned in section 36-12.8.1 and cost of all material used at site of
work in whitewashing.

562
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-13 PLASTIC EMULSION

36-13.1 DESCRIPTION
The work shall consist of providing, furnishing and applying plastic
emulsion on a surface in accordance with these specifications.

36-13.2 GENERAL
Emulsions consist of a polymer latex, a plasticizer, a stabilizer and
thickening agent, together with colouring pigments. Paints of this kind
are used internally for decorating non-absorbent surfaces such as tone-
plaster, or cement-asbestos sheeting. Occasionally they are used on
wood but not on metal. They are easily applied by brush or roller but
are not suitable for external use. The most commonly used plastic
emulsion paints are polyvinyl acetate (PVA) based; PVA being a
synthetic, resin. They range from matt to oil-gloss finish; the flat and
egg-shell gloss types being best for damp walls since the glossier types
are apt to blister if used in this way. All PVA based paints will resist
alkali attack; they are, however, acid in the liquid state and, may,
therefore, foster the corrosion of iron and steel. For this reason, these
paints should not be used in steel paint kettles. They work easily, are
free from persistent smell while drying and dry rapidly. They are not
suitable, for situation where maximum protective action is required.
The paint in the can will not withstand frost and in this respect
resembles distemper. They can be washed from 3 to 7 days after
application. The best surfaces on which to apply them are brick,
retarded semi-hydrate plaster or renderings, softer surfaces such as un-
gauged lime plaster or smooth hard surfaces such as highly-trowelled
Keene’s cement are likely to cause trouble and special primers should
be used in such cases. Further notes on emulsion paints are given
below:
(a) Paints of this kind should not be applied to soft or friable
surfaces such as old lime plasters or lime washes; even more
care is needed in the preparation of such surfaces than is
necessary with oil-gloss paints. Emulsion paints are not
recommended for use in situations where condensation may
occur such as in kitchens and bathrooms nor on highly
trowelled smooth plasters.
(b) Emulsion paints will not adhere to oily or greasy surfaces.
(c) The use of such paints on difficult surfaces may be facilitated
by the use of a suitable oily primer.
(d) Some emulsion paints are not suitable for external use on
brickwork or renderings although polyvinyl acetate (PVA)
emulsion paints can sometimes be so used in off-white or fawn

563
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

colours showing some sheen; they should only be applied in

very dry weather.
(e) Certain emulsion paints can be applied to notoriously difficult
surfaces such as asbestos cement sheetings and some of the
PVA variety can ' even be applied over old hard bituminous
coatings.
(f) The probable life of these paints on exterior surfaces is
intermediate between that of oil bound distempers (shortest)
and oil-gloss paints (longest); used internally, the life of
emulsion paints should equal that of normal oil paints.

36-13.3 MATERIALS
Plastic emulsion manufactured by the approved manufacturers shall be
used.

36-13.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

(a) Newly-plastered surface, when absolutely dry, shall be sand-
papered to remove all irregularities, making good inequalities
and holes with gypsum, which shall be allowed to set hard.
Unless the surface is perfectly clean and smooth, no pleasing
effect shall result from plastic emulsion.
(b) Old plastered surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. If it is
whitewashed or colour-washed, it shall be rubbed off with
sand-paper or cocoanut fibre in case it is loose and then stopped
and sized.
(c) After rubbing and cleaning, all plastered surface, old or new,
shall be sized with a coat of equal parts of size and alum
dissolved in hot water. Decomposed size shall not be used
under any circumstances. Where the makers of the plastic
emulsion recommend a special priming coat only that coat shall
be applied.
(d) If the existing surface is cleanly plastic emulsioned all the
plastic emulsion shall not necessarily be removed. The surface
shall be smoothed down with glass paper and any firm plastic
emulsion that remains on the wall after such rubbing shall be
left.

36-13.5 MIXING
Plastic emulsion mix shall be prepared strictly in accordance with the
maker's instructions or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge, and the
quantity shall be just sufficient for the day's work.

564
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

36-13.6 APPLICATION
(a) Plastic emulsion shall be applied only with proper brushes. The
brushes shall be washed in hot water after each day’s work and
hung up to dry. Old brushes caked with dry emulsion mix shall
not be allowed to be used on the work.
(b) Plastic emulsion shall be applied quickly and boldly leaving no
dry edges. The brush shall be dipped in emulsion and stroked
cross-wise on the wall, then immediately stroked up and down
and stopped.
(c) Unless otherwise or directed two men shall work on wall
together, one working from the ceiling downwards as far as he
can reach and the other following him applying the plastic
emulsion from below. No patchy overlap shall be allowed
under any circumstances.
(d) On newly-plastered walls two coats over one coat of priming
shall be applied.
(e) On old walls covered with one or two coats of hard dry
whitewash free from efflorescence or kalar, one coat without
priming coat shall be applied.
(f) The consumption of emulsion should be in accordance with
spreading power as prescribed by the manufacturer.

36-13.7 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 36-9.

36-13.8 MEASUREMENTS
Whitewashing shall be measured by superficial area. The deduction
shall be made for openings of any size from one side only, whether
whitewashing is done on one or two sides. The unit of measurement
shall be 100 square feet of one sq.meter.

36-13.9 RATE
The unit rate shall include:

36-13.9.1 LABOUR RATE

When only labour rate is to be paid.

(a) The preparation of surface as per Section 36-13.4 of these
specifications.
(b) The provision, erection and removal of scaffolding and ladders
(shot with gunny bags at both ends to prevent damage to the
floor and walls).
(c) The protection of floor, fixed furniture, doors and windows, as
well as all such places and things as are not to be whitewashed.

565
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

These places and things shall be protected from all droppings

and slashes of whitewash, if any, and cleaned.
(d) Provision of all tools and brushes required for whitewashing.

36-13.9.2 COMPOSITE RATE

When rate for completed job is to be paid, it includes all items

mentioned in section 36-13.9.1 and cost of all material used at site of
work in whitewashing.

566
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–37

WOOD WORK
37-1 GENERAL

37-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of converting timber, conforming to Section 12
of these specifications into a desired shape for use in making doors,
windows, roofs, floors, stairs, frames, bridges, centrings, shores, struts
and large gates etc.

37-1.2 GLOSSARY
Woodwork is the process of converting timber into a desired shape and
erecting it into its final position. It is mostly carpenter’s and jointer’s
work.
Apron Lining A board used to form a finish at the edges of
the floor around a stair well.
Architrave The trim to a door, window or other opening.
(Note: Not to be confused with facing.)
Arris A sharp external angle.
Back Lining A thin member closing a jamb or head of a
cased frame, (figure 6 page 611)
Baluster A vertical individual member of a balustrade.
(figure 8 page 612)
Balustrade The infilling between a handrail and a string,
landing or floor. (figure 8 page 612)
Battened and The assembly of this type of shutter is
Ledged Shutter composed of vertically
V-jointed, tongued and grooved battens tied
together by a cross.
Battened, Ledged Same as battened and ledged, but braced
and Braced Shutter against sag.
Bead A rounded moulding, which may have one or
two quirks.
Bead Butt A panel, flush with the framing, finished with a
bead on two opposite edges only (figure-4 page
611).
Bead Flush A panel, flush with the framing, finished with a
bead on all edges (Figure-4 page 611).
Bed Mould A moulding under a window beard or shelf.
Blockings Pieces of timber fixed as stiffeners in the angles
of casings, as in the heads of sash windows,
stairs, etc (figure-5 & 8 page 611 & 612).

567
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Bolection A moulding raised above a surface.

Borrowed Light A window in an internal wall or partition.
Bottom Rail The horizontal bottom member of a door,
casement or lower sash (figure-5 & 7 page 611
& 612).
Brackets Short pieces of board fixed to the carriage of a
stair to give additional support to the treads
(figure-8 page 612).
Carpenter’s work It includes all work on timber used in roofs,
floors, verandas, staircases, doors and
windows, frames, bridges, centrings, shores,
struts, large gates, and generally all wood work
of which the scantling exceeds three-quarters of
an inch, except in case of battens used in roof
trellis-works which is specially moulded or
carved. When the thickness of carpenter’s work
does not exceed two inches but its width
exceeds twice the thickness, it is called
“planking”.
Carriage An inclined timber placed against the underside
of steps to add support between the strings
(figure-8 page 612)
Cased Frame The hollow built-up frame of a sash window
housing the counter balancing weights (see
Figure-6 page 611)
Casement The hinged light of a casement window (figure-
7 page 612).
Casement Door A hinged door, or a pair of doors, almost
wholly glazed (French door, French windows,
glazed door).
Casement Window A window in which one or more lights are
hinged to open (figure-7 page 612)
Chamfer The surface produced by beveling an edge or
corner.
Clear Span The distance between the walls on which roof
is to be constructed.
Combed Joint An angle joint formed by a series of tenors
engaging in corresponding slot (figure-2 page
610) corner locked, finger joint limited.
Core The solid or skeleton structure of a flush door.
Cover Strip A plain or moulded strip employed to conceal
the joints of wall boards and the like.
Door A hinged barrier to close entrance to a room,
consisting of a frame and one or more shutters.
Dead Light A light in which the glass is fixed direct into
the framing (figure-7 page 612)
Door Frame The surround, usually rebated, to a doorway in
which the door is hung.
Door Lining The plain or rebated surround to an internal
doorway in which the door is hung, usually the

568
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

full depth of the opening.

Dowel A cylindrical piece of wood or metal used for
fixing one piece of material to another. Wood
dowels are sometimes grooved (keyed) to
facilitate glueing.
Effective Span The horizontal distance between the centres of
the bearings in roofs.
Fanlight A glazed light in the upper part of door window
frame.
Fillet A narrow strip of wood; and a small moulding
of a square section.
Fixed Light A non-opening sash or casements.
Filler A tread with parallel edges in the straight
portion of a stair, as opposed to a winder
(figure-8 page 612)
Flight A series of steps without change of direction
(figure-8 page 612)
Flush shutter A flush shutter is one in which the shutter has a
framed core covered on both sides with
plywood with or without edge cover strips
(lipping). The shutter may be solid cored or
skeleton framed (hollow cored).
Flush Bead A bead run on a flat surface and level with it
(Note: Not to be confused with Bead Flush).
Flush Door A door with a surface in one plane on each
face.
Folding Casements A pair of casements, usually with rebated
meeting stiles, hung in a frame having no
mullion.
Folding Doors A pair of doors, usually with rebated meeting
stiles, hung in a frame having no mullion.
Frame A frame fixed to the soffits & Jams of an
opening on which the shutter hangs.
Glazing Bar A rebated member dividing light into panes
(Sash bar, astragal) figure-5 page 611.
Glazing Bead A small wood strip of moulding employed as
an alternative to putty to retain glass in a
rebate.
Glue Blocks See Blocking.
Groove A continuous narrow sinking.
Ground The sawn or wraught member on which
another finishing, e.g. a skirting is fixed.
Half Space Landing A platform on width equal to two flights
Handrail A rail parallel with a string or landing.
Head The horizontal top member of a window frame,
doorframe or lining (figure-13 page 615)
Head Weather A small additional member applied to the head
Moulding of a window frame to protect the casement
below (figure-7 page 612).
Hold fasts Hold fasts consisting of an iron patti quarter of

569
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

an inch thick, 1¼ inch wide and 13½ inches

long bitumen loads+3" on either side of the
bend. folded on both ends. They are fixed to
the frame by means of wooden screws and the
remaining portion is embedded or mortared in
the masonry to keep the door or window in
position. Generally four hold fast are required
for doors having a sill and five number for
doors without a sill.
Horn The projecting end of one of the members of a
right-angled framing joint (figure 5 page 611)
Inside Lining The inner member of a cased frame (figure 5 &
6 page 611).
Jamb A vertical outer member pf a window frame,
door frame or lining (figure-7 page 612)
Landing A platform at the termination of a flight
(figure-8 page 612)
Leaf One of a pair of doors or casements.
Light A single glazed unit of a window, fixed or
openable.
Lip A solid wood strip applied to the edge or edges
of a flush door.
Lock Block A piece of solid material in flush door
providing for installation of lock, latch set,
aldrop, etc.
Joiner’s work Joiner’s work includes furniture, doors and
windows, turned and carved, or moulded work
of all kinds.
Mitre An angle joint between two members in which
each is cut to a corresponding angle at their
intersection.
Mortise or Mortice A hole or slot to receive a tenon or dowel of
corresponding size (figure-2 page 610)
Mullion (1) A vertical member dividing the lights of a
window frame (figure-7 page 612).
(2) A vertical member between the door and
sidelight of a door frame.
Muntin The vertical member between the panels of a
door (figure-4 page 611).
Newel The post supporting the edges of a string and
handrail (figure-8 page 612)
Nosing The projecting edge of a tread or board, usually
rounded (figure-8 page 612)
Outside lining The outer member of a cased frame (figure-5 &
6 page 611)
Ovolo A convex moulding, usually with quirk (figure-
3 page 611)
Panel The infilling to framing.
Panelled door A door composed of a framed surround,
divided into rectangular or other shaped spaces

570
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

filled with panels usually of thinner material

(figure-4 page 611)
Panelled shutter A paneled shutter is one in which the shutter
frame is grooved or rebated to receive wood
panel in openings between framing members.
The frame may be constructed with mortice
and tenon joints.
Parting bead A narrow strip or moulding fixed to the pulley
stiles of cased frames to separate one sash from
another (figure-6 page 611)
Parting slip A narrow strip suspended inside a cased frame
to keep the weights apart (figure-6 page 611)
Picture rail A trim fixed to the walls of a room, from which
picture etc may be hung.
Pitch It is the ratio of the rise of the truss to its span.
Planted stop A moulding or strip applied to plain frame or
lining against which a door or casement is
stopped.
Plug Pieces of sound wood, suitably shaped, used to
plug the wood from which defective portion
has been removed (figure-6 page 611)
Principals The wooden roof truss when used in buildings
is sometimes termed as principals. Principals
are spaced 6 feet 12 feet depending upon their
type, distance between the walls and their
pitch.
Pulley head A horizontal member the head of cased frame
corresponding to a pulley stile (figure-5 & 6
page 611)
Quadrant A convex (quarter-round) moulding.
Quarter A platform of width equal to one flight (figure-
space/landing 8 page 612)
Quirk A narrow groove or sinking at the side of head
(figure 3 page 611).
Rafter The timber that supports the roofing materials.
Rail A horizontal member of a casement or sash,
such as top or bottom rail, or a door, including
top middle, lock, intermediate and bottom rails
(See figure 4, 5 & 7 page 611, 612)
Meeting Rail A horizontal member at the top of a lower or
the bottom or an upper sash (figure 5 page 611)
Rebate A step shaped reduction formed on the edge of
a member (figure 2 page 610).
Reveal The vertical side of a recess.
Reveal Lining The finishing of a reveal.
Ridge The highest point or line of a roof where the
two opposite slopes meet.
Ridge board Horizontal piece of timber forming the ridge.
Riser The vertical part of a step. (figure 8 page 612)
Sash Window A window in which the opening lights slide up

571
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

and down in a frame (figure 5 page 611).

Scotia A concave moulding (Cavetto). (see figure 3
page 611)
Scribe To shape the abutting end of a member to the
profile of another.
Sidelight A glazed light at the side of a door frame.
Sill The horizontal bottom member of a window or
door frame (figures 5 & 7 page 611 & 612).
Sill bead A deep bead fixed to the sill of a sash window
to permit ventilation at the meeting rails
(Draught Bead) see figure 5 page 611.
Sill drip moulding A small additional member fixed to the sill of a
window frame as an alternative to a sub-sill
(figure 7 page 612).
Sinking A recess on a surface
Skirting The trim fixed to the walls of a room at the
floor level.
Soffit The horizontal or sloping underside of any
recess or stair.
Soffit Lining The finishing of any soffit.
Solid Frame A frame rebated out of the solid.
Solid Stop A rebate in a frame or lining against which a
door or casement is stopped.
Spandrel or A triangular space formed by contiguous
Spandril members (figure 8 page 612)
Splay A chamfer fully extended across a surface.
Stairs A series of steps, with or without landings,
including necessary handrails and balustrades
and giving access from floor to floor (figure 8
page 612)
Step A portion of a stair consisting of a tread and a
riser. (figure 8 page 612)
Stile A vertical outer member of a paneled door,
casement and sash. (figures 4, 5 & 7 page 611
& 612)
Hanging stile The stile of a door or casement to which hinges
are fixed.
Meeting stile The abutting stiles of folding doors or
casement.
String An inclined board supporting the ends of steps
(figure 8 page 612)
Close string An outer string having its top and bottom edges
parallel (figure 8 page 612).
Out string An outer string with its upper edge out to the
profile of the treads and riser (Open string) see
figure 8 page 612.
Outer string The string on the side of a stair away from a
wall (figure 8 page 612)
Wall string The string on the side of a stair next to a wall
(figure 8 page 612)

572
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Shutter The moveable screen mounted on the frame

with hinge.
Sublight The lowest light of a window, usually below a
casement (figure 7 page 612)
Sub-sill A subsidiary sill member fitted to a window
frame after manufacture (figure 7 page 612)
Tenon The end of a member shaped to fit a mortise
(figure 2 page 610).
Tenon and Mortise A joint in which a rectangular projection,
machined on one piece, fits into a similarly
shaped recessed opening, machined in a second
piece, secured under pressure with an adhesive.
In a through mortise joint, the mortise and
tenon extend through the full width of the stile.
In the blind mortise joint, the mortise and tenon
do not extend through the full width of a stile.
Abutting Tenons Two tenons entering from opposite sides and
abutting in the center of a single mortise.
Haunched Tenon A tenon in which a portion of its width is
reduced to form a tongue (figure 2 page 610)
Lapped Tenon Two tenons entering from opposite sides and
lapping in a single mortise.
Sub-Tenon A short tenon not extending through the
thickness of a mortised piece.
Through Tenon A tenon extending through the thickness of a
mortised piece.
Threshold The horizontal sill-piece fixed to the floor in a
door opening.
Throat A groove formed to prevent capillary
attraction. (figure 5 page 611)
Tongue A reduction formed by rebate on one or both
faces at an edge or end of a timber to fit into
correspondingly shaped groove. (figure 2 page
610)
Cross Ton A strip of timber with the grain not running in
the direction of its length, or a strip of
plywood, fitted into corresponding grooves in
abutting members (loose tongue).
Transom (1) A horizontal member dividing the lights of
a window frame (figure 7 page 612)
(2) The horizontal member, between the door
and fanlight, of a door frame.
Tread The horizontal part of a step (figure 8 page
612)
Trench A groove or channel extending across a
member.
Trim A collective term for products of uniform
profile manufactured by liner machining only,
such as architraves, skirting, and picture rails.
Ventlight A small opening in the upper light of a

573
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

casement window, usually hinged at the top.

(Ven sash, night vent, ventilator) figure 5 page-
611.
Weathered The term denoting the sloping upper surface of
a member (figure 5 page 611)
Weather moulding A wood moulding fixed to the bottom rail of an
external door to divert water from the sill or
threshold (Weather board).
Wedge A tapered piece of wood.
Winder A tapering step in the turn of a stair (figure 8
page 612)
Window bead A small moulding planted round a cased frame
to retain the inner sash (figure 5 page 611)
Window board A horizontal board fixed internally at the foot
of window opening (figure 5 page 611)
Window frame The surrounding portion of a window
containing sashes, casements or deadlights and
in which the casements are hung or the sashes
slide.
Winglight See sidelight.
Wrot (Wrought) A piece of timber planed on one or more
Timber surfaces.
Types of doors The doors are generally of following types:
Framed and panelled doors
The panelled doors consist of stiles, rails,
muntins and panels as indicated in a typical
design shown in fig 4 page 611. The door has
framing which is grooved to receive panels of
timber material. The number of panels may
differ with the size of door and the taste of the
people. A few standard designs of interior as
well as exterior doors in common use are
shown in the fig 9 to 17 page 613 to 616.
Selection of any particular design is a matter of
personal choice to match the general
appearance of the building. The usual sizes of
this class of doors is 7 feet by 4 feet, 7 feet by 3
feet, 6 feet by 4 feet and so on. The thickness
varies from 1½ inches to 2½ inches depending
upon the strength and opening size
requirement.
Ledged doors
Ledged doors are the simplest form of doors.
They consist of a number of vertical battens,
planks fixed by nails, driven in from the face of
the battens and fixed to the horizontal nails.
The battens or planks are generally one inch
thick and six inches wide and tongued and
grooved with ‘V’ joint. The ledges are
generally 1½ inch thick and are fixed over the

574
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

batten which are cramped together to form the

desired width of the door as shown in the fig 18
page 617.
Ledged and braced doors
The ledged and braced doors are fundamentally
similar to the ledged doors described above but
have additional cross braces to make these stiff.
Diagrammatically this type of doors has been
shown in fig 19 page 618. Braces are nearly of
the same size as ledges and make them strong
enough not to drop down. Care should,
however, be exercised to see that the battens of
the brace lie on the hinged side, i.e. supported
side; otherwise they would be of little use. The
usual method of putting braces is to fix the
door with ledges, and then fit them along with
the nail to the battens.
Sash doors
In these types of doors the lower portion is
panelled while the upper portion is arranged for
glass panels for providing greater light, the
stiles are of smaller thickness and are
sometimes called diminished stiles.
Flush doors
These doors have flush outside surfaces and are
very popular as interior doors in all types of
buildings. In some cases the flush door may
have a glazed panel at the top to let more light
in the room as shown in fig 20 page 619.
Wire gauze doors
These doors are commonly used for
refreshment rooms, kitchens, and cupboards,
meat safes, etc., to keep out flies. The shutter
which are hung to the frame by hinges consist
of stiles and rails which are rebated on the
inside to receive the wire gauze. The gauze is
fixed in position by a bead bradded to the
frame of the shutter. Where wire gauze shutters
are used in combination with some other type
of shutters, automatic closing arrangement in
the form of a spring.
Types of windows Windows are generally of the following types:
Fast sheet window
Fast sheet or fixed sash window consists of two
stiles, top and bottom, with intermediate bars,
if the size of the glass sheet is small, or if a
special type of ornamentation is required. The
stiles head and stile are usually 3 inches by 2
inches as shown in fig 21 page 619. The joint is
generally tonon and mortise; the stile A is

575
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

mortised to receive tenons on the top and

bottom rails.
Pantry window
The pantry window is a modification of the fast
sheet window in as much as a pivoted sash is
added to give ventilation. The joint on the stile
is the same as described for the fast sheet
windows. The moulding is removed above the
transom to receive the pivoted sash, which is
rebated on the top and bottom rails only, as
shown in fig 22 page 619.
Sash and frame window
The sash and frame window has to sashes
sliding vertically in a cased frame. The sashes
are hung by means of cords, and are balanced
by weights. These cords support the sashes and
pass over pulleys. Fig 23 page 619 shows three
views of the sash and frame. In this case the
frame consists of 6 inches by 3 inches sill, 5¼
inches by 1" pulley stile.
Casement window
The sashes of casement window are hung. The
casement window consists of a frame having
two stiles, head, sill transom and mullion all of
5" by 3" timber. The casements are similar to
the ordinary sash, all members are of 2" by 2"
timber, except the bottom rail which are 2½" or
3" wide. The casements open outside, hence the
top lights are hung on the top as shown in fig
24 page 620. When the casements open
inwards, as shown in the vertical section of the
figure, it is difficult to make the window
watertight. This is avoided by providing weep
holes in the sill.
French window
This form of window has a combined door and
window in it and is extensively used in wooden
houses. If the doors open outwards, there is no
difficulty in making it watertight. If the doors
open inward, drainage water is always a source
of trouble. For this reason a projecting metal
bar is put in as a rebate, through which the
water is made to seep out as shown in fig 25
page 621.
Skylight window
A skylight in an opening in the roof itself for
the provision of light. This is done when there
is not other window or door for the lighting
arrangement. The light runs parallel to the roof
surface and is lifted above the slates by a cube

576
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

of 9 inches by 1½ inches. As shown in Fig 26

page 621.

37-1.3 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber shall conform to Section 12 of these
Specifications. The Engineer-in-charge shall at his option inspect all
logs or sleepers before they are used and may reject any he considers
defective. Timber so rejected shall be removed at once from the site of
work at the cost of contractor.

37-1.4 FINISH
All woodwork shall be neatly and truly finished to the exact
dimensions specified.

37-1.5 JOINTS
Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall be simple tenon and mortise
joints with the end of the tenon exposed to view. All mortise and tenon
joints or scarfs shall fit truly and fully, without filling. Where
specified, in the case of special high class joinery, the end of the tenon
shall not show. Joints shall be painted with specified lead paint before
the frames are put together. Glue shall not be sued in joints which are
exposed to weather, and in such exposed work any hard stopping shall
be done with tight driven plugs.

37-1.6 SCREWS AND NAILS

All nails and screws shall be of an approved type. Holes of correct size
shall be drilled before inserting screws. Hammer shall not be sued at
all for driving in or starting in the screws. All screws shall be dipped in
oil before they are inserted in the wood. The heads of nails or screws
shall be sunk and puttied or dealt with as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.

37-1.7 WOOD TO BE COVERED IN GROUND OR IN WALL

The contractor shall give at least 7 days notice to the Engineer-in-
charge in writing, when any timber is to be covered in the ground, or in
the walls of a building, or otherwise. Failing this the Engineer-in-
charge may order it to be uncovered at the contractor’s expense, or
measure and pay for only so much as is uncovered.

37-1.8 FIXING
All woodwork shall be fixed in accordance with the drawings or the
instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.

577
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-1.9 WORKMANSHIP
All workmanship shall be of the best type and all joints shall fit
accurately without wedging or filling. After the wood work has been
erected, the contractor shall, if any undue shrinkage or bad
workmanship is discovered, forthwith correct the defect without any
extra charge.

37-1.10 BEARING
All beams and girders shall be bedded on plates with not less than 9
inches bearing. All joists shall bear not less than 4½ inches on wall
plates, and every purling or batten supported on a wall shall have a
bearing in the direction of its length equal to its own depth subject to a
minimum of 4 inches.

37-1.11 AIR SPACE

An air space of quarter of an inch shall be left along sides of battens
and other-wood work buried in masonry or brickwork.

37-1.12 PRESERVATIVES
All portions of timber built into or against or close to masonry or
concrete, and all junctions or rafters, purlins, beams and wall plates
shall be given two coats of hot solignum, creosote or other wood
preservative approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

37-1.13 PLANKS
All scantling planks etc. shall be sawn straight and shall have uniform
thickness. They shall be sawn in the direction of the grain and shall
have full measurement from end to end. All planks and scantlings shall
be sawn 1/16 inch in excess of actual measurement to allow planing.
They shall be supplied with straight square edge, or rebated, ploughed,
tongued or dwelled, as may be directed.

37-1.14 CHIMNEY FLUE

As a precaution against fire no wood work shall be fixed within 2 feet
of the interior face of a chimney flue.

37-1.15 KINDS OF WOOD

Unless otherwise specified, the wood used in construction or joinery
work shall be deodar, kail, chir or teak.

578
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-1.16 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR AFTER

FIXING
The contractor shall be responsible for the easing or otherwise of all
doors etc. and the closing down of all open joints which may occur
within six months of the completion of the work and which in the
opinion of Engineer-in-charge required attention.

37-1.17 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of woodwork or planking shall be the net
measurement after fixing in position. No allowance is to be made for
waste, overlaps, rebates or the dimensions supplied beyond those
specified. The length of each piece, however, shall be taken overall so
as to include projections for tenons or scarfs. The unit of measurement
shall be square feet or square meter.

37-1.18 RATE
37-1.18.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for wood work shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out wood work according to above specifications, fixed in
position and with the exposed arrises finished with a bead or bead and
quirk as specified. The rate shall further include the cost of labour
employed for following operations:
(a) Fixing all spikes, mails, screws, glue.
(b) Bevelled heading joints to boarding.
(c) Boring for bolts as required.
(d) Cleaning of wrought face.
(e) Cramping and wedging.
(f) Fixing with hardwood or male bamboo pins, nails, spikes, hoop
iron and wire in any position.
(g) Halving, tabling, lapping, notching, framing, straight, splay,
circular or birds-mouth cutting, splayed and bevelled ends, and
mitres, fair or returned ends, as required.
(h) Punching and clenching nails.
(i) Treating plugs with wood preservative.
(j) All notchings, firrings, or squarings to ballies, necessary to
obtain level bedding, boarding or fixings.
(k) Rebates and chambers to door and window frames where
required.
The rebate shall further include the use of all tools, plant and
scaffolding, staging and ladders, etc., where necessary.
Note – Sometimes timber in the form of log or wrought (wholly or
partially) is supplied to the contractor from the Government stores or
from a dismantled building. In such cases the cost of timber so
supplied shall be deducted from the cost of the finished work. Where
the contractor’s schedule contains no rate for similar materials the cost

579
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

to be deducted shall be determined by a special agreement. A separate

rate shall be required when the material thus supplied has to be
reframed or refitted.
37-1.18.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied to the site
of work in addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-1.18.1.

580
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-2 DOORS AND WINDWS (GENERAL)

37-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making doors and windows from the
specified kind of timber in accordance with these specifications.

37-2.2 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified timber shall conform to section 12 of these
specification.

37-2.3 WORKMANSHIP
Unless otherwise specified the workmanship of doors and windows
shall conform to Section 37-1.8 of these specifications for Wood Work
(General) in all respects, except those specified hereunder.

37-2.4 SIZE OF DOORS AND WINDOWS

The size of doors and windows shall be as specified.

37-2.5 SECTIONS AND FITTINGS

Unless otherwise specified or directed, the particulars and dimensions
of chowkats for doors and windows together with their fittings and
furniture shall be as given in the Table 1 (page 605).

37-2.6 CHOWKAT, FRAMING AND CORNERS

Chowkats shall be properly framed and mortised together. Door and
window chowkats shall have 4½" wide horns left on the heads (also on
the sills where these are provided) or the corners of the chowkats
bound with 2½ inches by 1/10 inch iron straps bent into a right angle
having legs of a length equal to the depth of the chowkats, and fixed
with four 2 inch screws. The cost of horns or straps is included in the
rate. Unless otherwise specified, the latter method shall be adopted.

37-2.7 REBATES
Chowkats shall have a rebate cut to receive the leaves. The rebate shall
be ½ inch deep and its width shall be equal to the thickness of the leaf.
The other side shall be finished with a bead and quirk, or other simple
moulding, unless wire gauze is to be fitted. Where the plaster butts

581
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

against the chowkat ½ inch deep rebate with a slight cut back shall be
given to serve as key to the plaster.

37-2.8 POSITION OF CHOWKATS IN JAMBS

Unless otherwise specified, doors and windows opening to another
room, to a corridor or varandah, shall have the chowkats so fixed that
they project 3/8th of an inch from the plastered face of the wall. The
plaster shall stop against the chowkat which shall have the rebate
mentioned in Section 37-2.7 as key for the plaster. Other doors and
window shall be set back 4½ inches from the face of the wall.

37-2.9 CHOWKAT TO BE READY BEFORE STARTING

SUPERSTRUCTURE
No chowkat shall be painted or fixed before the Engineer-in-charge has
inspected and approved it. All chowkats shall be ready before the work
reaches the sill level so that they can be built in as brickwork or
masonry proceeds.

37-2.10 CHOWKAT PAINTING WITH PRESERVATIVE

Before fixing, chowkat shall have the side in contact with the
brickwork or masonry painted with two coats of hot solignum,
creosote, coal tar or other wood preservatives such as creosote-coal tar
solution, creasote-petroleum solution, pentachlorophenol, or
ammoniacal copper arsenate (ACA). If doors and windows are to be
subsequently painted, the priming coat shall be painted on the
chowkats before they are fized.

37-2.11 HOLD FASTS

Chowkats shall be secured to the brickwork or masonry by hold fasts
which shall be built into the wall with specified mortar. Hold fasts
shall be made 1½" x ¼" flat steel patti bent over at both ends leaving
13¾" clear length between bends; one bend shall have two screwed
holes to which the chowkat is secured by bolt ½ inch in diameter. The
head of the bolt shall be sunk into the chowkats dn the hole plugged
with wood. Where the chowkat is fixed at the extreme edges of the
jambs, the holdfasts shall be worked or bent as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. The number of hold fasts to each chowkat shall be
as indicated in table 1 (page 605), with the exception that, where no sill
has been provided, one additional hold fast shall be given on each side.
The feet of the chowkat shall, in this case, rest on the damp proof
course or floor, as the case may be.

582
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-2.12 SEASONING
All door and window leaves shall be cut out and framed together, as
soon as possible after the commencement of the work, and stacked in
the shade to season. They shall not be wedged and glued for four
months where possible and where the contract time permits. If it is not
possible, they shall be wedged and glued just prior to being hung.
Before final gluing, all portions in which defects appear shall be
replaced.

37-2.13 METHOD OF FRAMING LEAVES

All stiles and rails shall be properly and accurately mortised and
tenoned. The thickness of the tenon shall not exceed one fourth the
thickness of the plank and the width shall not exceed five times the
thickness. All rails over 7 inches in depth shall have double tenons. All
tenons shall pass completely rough stiles and shall be secured by 3/8
inch hard wood or bamboo pins. All rails shall be haunched to the
depth of groove for panels.

37-2.14 GLUING
All tenons at the final aassembly of the doors shall be glued and
wedged at top and bottom of the tenon with glued wedges.
Immediately after gluing, the frames shall be tightly clamped and so
left till the glue has set.

37-2.15 HINGES
Unless otherwise specified, leaves shall be hung on hinges of the size
and the number specified in table 1 (page 605). These hinges are to be
of an approved type and quality. They shall be counter sunk into the
chowkat as well as in the leaf; the recesses being cut to the exact size
and depth of the hinge, no subsequent packing shall be allowed. Two
inch screws shall be used with 5 inches to 6 inches hinges and 1 ½
inches for smaller sizes.

37-2.16 FITTINGS
The contractor shall deposit in the office of the Engineer-in-charge one
sample of each fitting to be used in the work. Unless otherwise
specified, fittings shall be of the number, size and type given in table 1
(page 605).

37-2.17 SPECIAL DOOR FURNITURE

The cost of fittings as indicated in the table is included in the rate.
Where special ironmongery or door furniture is required, it shall be

583
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

supplied by the department, or provided by the contractor at an extra

cost. The cost of fixing or mounting such special furniture shall,
however, be included in the rate. The cost of fittings mentioned in table
1 (page 605), but superseded by the special ones, and thus not actually
supplied, shall be deducted from the sum paid for wood work.

37-2.18 SCREWS
Screws of such diameter shall be used as fill completely the holes and
cups in the fittings which they secure, and shall be oiled before being
inserted. Unless the head can be counter-sunk flush with the fittings,
round headed screws shall be used. Brass fittings of specified type
shall be secured with brass screws.

37-2.19 CHOCKS
Hinged chocks shall invariably be fitted to all doors and windows to
keep them open. Chocks shall be of hardwood and swung on 3 inches
butt hinges and shall act on a sheet metal protector fixed to the door
stile.

37-2.20 STOPS
Wooden stops of a size suitable for the leaf concerned shall be fixed to
the door or window chowkats to prevent the leaf from damaging the
plaster of the jamb when fully opened.

37-2.21 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of doors and windows shall be done by the
superficial area of the clear opening in brickwork or masonry. In case
of circular or other similar joinery, measurement shall be taken of the
net area. In the absence of any special rate being paid, measurement
shall be taken of the least squares or rectangles to contain the opening
in question. In case of double doors the superficial area of chowkat
shall be included in one door only.

37-2.22 RATE
37-2.22.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.

584
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-2.22.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-2.22.1.

585
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-3 PANELLED AND GLAZED DOORS AND

WINDOWS

37-3.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making panelled doors and windows
conforming to figure 1 to 7 (page 610 to 612).

37-3.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-3.3 DIMENSIONS
Unless otherwise specified the dimensions of doors and windows shall
be as shown on the approved drawing.

37-3.4 DOOR FRAME

(a) The members shall be joined with close fitting mortise and
tenon joints which shall be further pinned with corrosion-
resisting metal pins of not less than 8 mm (5/16 inch) diameter
or with hard wood pins whose diameter shall not be less than
10 mm (3/8 inch). The framing shall be such as to ensure
complete rigidity throughout.
(b) The entire surface of frame coming in contact with masonry
shall be treated with a preservative of an approved type and
quality.
(c) The frame shall be fixed to the masonry with at least four hold
fasts. Two additional hold fasts shall be used if the chowkat is
without a sill.

37-3.5 SHUTTER FRAME

The stiles and rails of the frame shall be mortised and tenoned
together. The thickness of each tenon shall be approximately 1/3rd the
thickness of the rail, and the width of each tenon shall not exceed 5
times its own thickness.

37-3.6 PANELS
(a) Panels shall be made of solid wood or hard board or water-
resistant plywood having both sides properly finished. They
shall be truly cut and framed into rebates to a depth not less

586
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

than 3/8 inch. Their thickness shall not be less than 12 mm (½

inch); in case of plywood and hard board it shall not be less
than 7.5 mm (5/16 inch). Panels shall be in one piece up to 12
inches clear in case of deodar and 18 inches clear in case of
teak. In larger sizes they shall be jointed, but the joints shall be
glued and dowelled together to prevent all possibilities of its
opening out afterwards.
(b) Panels shall be absolutely smooth so that no marks are visible.
Unless otherwise specified, panels shall be splayed and fielded
on both sides and the arrises of the frame receiving the panels
finished with a simple mould.

37-3.7 SASH BARS

Sash bars shall be of the same thickness on the leaf and shall be 1 inch
to 1¼ inch wide, according to the size of the doors, and shall be twice
moulded and twice rebated and mitred on the outside. The size of the
rebate shall be 3/8 inch x ½ inch to receive the glass and its fixing.

37-3.8 GLAZING
All glazing shall be done in accordance with the Section 37-12 of these
specifications. If specified, the doors and windows of bedroom and
bathroom shall be glazed with blind glass up to full eye level. The
glass panels of appropriate sizes shall be fitted into (3/8 inch) rebates
and shall be retained in position with a thin layer of putty which shall
be covered with wood beading.

37-3.9 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area of the clear
opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other similar
joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the absence of
any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of the least
squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In case of
double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included in one
door only.

37-3.10 RATE
37-3.10.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.

587
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-3.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-3.10.1.

588
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-4 FRAMED AND BRACED DOORS AND

WINDOWS

37-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making doors and windows in accordance
with these specifications.

37-4.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-4.3 FRAME OF LEAF

Framed and braced doors shall consist of two stiles, three rails and two
braces forming the frame of each leaf to which the battens (planks)
shall be fixed. In case of windows there shall be two rails and one
brace. In the case of doors opening outside, where it is necessary to
admit light, the Engineer-in-charge may direct the addition of a frieze
rail. In this case the space between the frieze rail and the top rail shall
be glazed by the contractor without any extra charge.

37-4.4 FRAMING AND BRACING

The framing shall be made with mortise and tenon joints as per section
37-2.13 of these specifications. The top rail (or frieze rail when the
door has been glazed) and the bottom rail as well as stiles shall be
rebated to receive the battens. The exposed edges of stiles and rails
shall be chamfered or stop chamfered. Unless otherwise specified
framing and batten shall be of the sizes as contained in table 1 (page
605).

37-4.5 BATTENS
Battens shall butt into rebates in the top (or frieze) rail and the bottom
rail and shall pass over the braes and the lock rail. Battens shall not be
more than 5 inches wide and shall all be parallel and uniform in width.
The joints shall be ploughed and tongued and finished with a bead and
quirk on the outside. Battens shall be secured with two screws at each
end and with one screw over each brace and the lock rail.

589
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-4.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, a framed and braced door/window shall conform
to Section 37-2 of these specifications for Doors and Windows
(General).

37-4.7 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area of the clear
opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other similar
joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the absence of
any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of the least
squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In case of
double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included in one
door only.

37-4.8 RATE
37-4.8.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.
(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-4.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-4.8.1.

590
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-5 LEDGED AND BRACED DOORS AND

WINDOWS

37-5.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making wooden ledged & braced doors and
windows in accordance with these specifications.

37-5.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-5.3 FRAME OF LEAF

Ledged and braced door leaf shall be formed with battens secured to
three ledges, with two braces between the ledges. Windows shall have
only two ledges and one brace. The top edges and ends of ledges and
braces shall be chamfered. Battens (planks) shall have rebated joints
finished with a “V” on one side and shall be of a uniform width of not
more than 5 inches. The battens shall be screwed, with two screws at
each end and one over each brace and the middle ledge. Unless
otherwise specified the size of ledges, braces and battens shall be as
given in table 1 (page 605).

37-5.4 DOUBLE LEAVES

In the case of double doors a 3"x 1" cover bar shall be screwed on to
the edge of one leaf so as to make it a master leaf.

37-5.5 HANGING
The chowkat shall be rebated to a depth equal to the full thickness of
doors, i.e. the battens plus ledges. The doors shall be hung with the
battens inside and the ledges outside. Hinges shall be fixed to the
ledges.

37-5.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects it shall conform to Section 37-2 of these
specifications for Doors and Windows (General).

591
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-5.7 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area of the clear
opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other similar
joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the absence of
any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of the least
squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In case of
double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included in one
door only.

37-5.8 RATE
37-5.8.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.
(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-5.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-5.8.1.

592
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-6 LEDGED DOORS AND WINDOWS

37-6.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making ledged doors and windows in
accordance with these specifications.

37-6.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-6.3 FRAME OF LEAF

Ledged type also called country doors and windows, shall be formed
by fixing battens on to three ledges. The battens shall be of uniform
width, not more than 9 inches, and shall have rebated joints. Unless
otherwise specified, the thickness of battens and the size of ledges shall
be as specified in table 1 (page 605).

37-6.4 ERECTION
Country doors shall be hung on pivot with the battens outside and
ledges inside.

37-6.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the ledged doors and windows shall conform to
Section 37-5 of these specifications for Ledged and Braced and
Battened Doors and Windows.

37-6.6 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area of the clear
opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other similar
joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the absence of
any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of the least
squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In case of
double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included in one
door only.

593
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-6.7 RATE
37-6.7.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.
(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-6.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-6.7.1.

594
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-7 CLERESTORY WINDOWS

37-7.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making wooden clerestory windows in
accordance with these specifications.

37-7.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-7.3 CHOWKATS
Unless otherwise specified the chowkets of clerestory windows shall
be so fixed as to project 3/8 inch from the inner face of the wall.

37-7.4 CLEATS
Unless other wise specified brass cleats of the slanting single button
type approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be fixed by two brass
screws to the polished wooden teak blocks with chamfered edges. The
wooden blocks shall be 2"x3 ½"x1/4" and shall be firmly fixed to the
wall by means of plugs and screws of an approved type.

37-7.5 LEAVES
The leaves shall be hung 1 inch off center so as to take them self-
closing. In order to open them a cord (stout, non-twisting picture cord)
shall be provided with a hard wood weight at one end (to keep the cord
in position over the cleat).

37-7.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respect, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 37-3 of these specifications for Panelled and Glazed Doors &
Windows.

37-7.7 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement shall be done by the superficial area of the clear
opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other similar
joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the absence of
any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of the least
squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In case of

595
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included in one

door only.

37-7.8 RATE
37-7.8.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.
(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-7.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-7.8.1.

596
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-8 WIRE GAUZED DOORS

37-8.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of making wire gauzed doors in accordance
with these specifications.

37-8.2 TIMBER
Unless otherwise specified timber (wood) shall conform to Section 12
of these specifications.

37-8.3 MATERIAL
Unless otherwise specified leaves of wire gauze doors shall be made
from deodar, irrespective of the wood used in making the chowkats or
the other leaves hung from the same chowkat.
37-8.3.1 CHOWKAT
Wire gauzed doors shall normally be hung on the same chowkat as
other doors, and the rate shall include the provision of extra depth in
the chowkat to take the rebate for the wire gauze leaf. Where wire
gauze doors are hung on a separate chowkat a special rate shall be
settled.
37-8.3.2 WIRE GAUZE
Unless other wise specified wire gauze shall be of best quality and
uniformly woven wire webbing 12x12 meshes to squarer inch made
from 22 gauge galvanized iron wire. All wire gauze panels shall be in
one piece, no joints being allowed in the gauze.

37-8.4 FIXING
Wire gauze shall be fixed to the frame of the leaf after being stretched
from out to out o rebate and nailed down taut by nails spaced at not
more than 2 inches and then fixed by a fillet of ¾ inch x ¾ inch
screwed into a rebate of that size. The screws shall not be less then 1¼
inches in length, nor spaced farther than 9 inches. All exposed arrises
of the fillet shall be finished with a small neat mould.

37-8.5 SPRING HINGES

Unless otherwise specified all wire gauze doors shall be hung on self-
closing spring hinges which shall be of an approved quality.

597
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-8.6 DOUBLE DOORS TO PROJECT

All double leaf wire gauze doors shall close with the meeting stiles
butting against each other, a felt or niwar strip being fixed to one leaf
to close the joint. The leaves shall close to such an extant that the
junction projects from the face of the chowkat, the projection being
one inch for each foot width of leaf. The top of the chowkat (and sill
when it has been provided) shall be enlarged to a corresponding wedge
shape, the cost of this being included in the rate.

37-8.7 MATCHING INNER LEAVES

Unless otherwise specified the width and position of lock and bottom
rails on wire gauze door shall be the same type as those of the other
leaves hung on the same chowkat.

37-8.8 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respect, not specified here, it shall strictly conform to
Section 37-2 of these specifications for Doors and Windows (General).

37-8.9 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of doors shall be done by the superficial area of the
clear opening in brickwork or masonry. In case of circular or other
similar joinery, measurement shall be taken of the net area. In the
absence of any special rate being paid, measurement shall be taken of
the least squares or rectangles to contain the opening in question. In
case of double doors the superficial area of chowkat shall be included
in one door only.

37-8.10 RATE
37-8.10.1 LABOUR RATE
(a) The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in
making and erecting doors and windows of the specified sizes
complete in all respects, with fittings and furniture according to
above specifications in specified places.
(b) The rate shall also include the use of ladders, support, staging
and scaffolding for executing woodwork according to above
specifications.
(c) The rate shall further include the cost of labour involved in
applying two coats of wood preservatives on the chowkats.
37-8.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials supplied at site in
addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 37-8.10.1.

598
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-9 WIRE GAUZED WINDOWS

(a) Where moveable wire gauze flaps or leaves are provided to

windows, Section 37-8 of these specifications for Wire Gauzed
Doors shall be followed with the following modifications.

(b) Wire gauze windows shall not be provided with springs or

spring hinges.

(c) Double hung wire gauze windows shall close flush with the
chowkat without the meeting stiles projecting in any way.

(d) Unless otherwise specified wire gauze windows shall open

outwards and shall be provided with hinged chocks to keep
them in the open position and with stops to prevent damage to
plaster.

599
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-10 WIRE GAUZED CLERESTORY WINDOWS

(a) Unless otherwise specified, wire gauzed leaves for clerestory

windows shall be hung on a separate chowkat set back one inch
from the outer face of the wall (the glazed window being fixed
in a separate chowkat, flush with inner face). The leaf shall be
hung from the top, so as to close by its own weight and shall
swing outwards. In all other respects, these shall conform to
Section 37-9 of these specifications for Wire Gauzed Window.

(b) The cost of the chowkat shall be included in the rate, the
measurement being out to out of chowkat.

600
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-11 FIXED WIRE GAUZE

37-11.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of fixed wire gauze in accordance with these
specifications.

37-11.2 WIRE GAUZE

Unless otherwise specified, the wire gauze shall be of an approved
quality, uniformly woven, wire webbing of 12x12 meshes to a square
inch made from 22 gauge galvanized iron wire. All panels shall be in
one piece and no joints shall be allowed in the gauze.

37-11.3 METHOD OF FIXING

Wire gauze shall be fixed to the outside of the chowkat. This shall be
drawn taut to the full width of the chowkat and nailed down by nails
spaced not more than 2 inches and cover strip ¾ inch in thickness and
of the same width as the chowkat so as to seem a part of the chowkat,
fixed all round with 1¼ inch screw fixed not more than 9 inches apart.

37-11.4 ALTERNATIVE METHOD

If specially required by the Engineer-in-charge the wire gauze shall be
fixed to the chowkat by a fillet, ¾"x¾", screwed into a rebate of the
same size. The wire gauze shall be stretched taut nailed down by nails
spaced not more than 2 inches to the chowkat and then the fillet
screwed down with one-inch screws spaced not more than 9 inches
apart.

37-11.5 FINISHING RATE

Exposed arrises shall be finished with a small but neat mould in each
case. The rate shall be same for either method of fixing.

601
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-12 GLAZING

37-12.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of glazing in accordance with these
specifications.

37-12.2 GLASS: THICKNESS AND QUALITY

Unless otherwise specified, all glass shall be flat sheet of fine quality
known in the trade as “seconds”. Glass shall be of the following
weights per square foot for the various sizes mentioned below:
Not exceeding 12"x 14" – 16 oz (about 1/14" thick)
Exceeding 12"x14" but not exceeding 24"x24"—21 oz (1/10" or
2.5mm thick)
Exceeding 24"x24" but not exceeding 30"x30"—26 oz (1/9" or 3mm
thick)
Exceeding 30"x30" but not exceeding 36"x36"—32 oz (1/7" or 4mm
thick)
Exceeding 36"x36" plate glass — (¼" or 6mm thick)
Exceeding 48"x48" plate glass — (3/8" or 9mm thick)
Exceeding 72"x72" plate glass — (½" or 12mm thick)
Glass shall be free from specks, bubbles, distortion and flaws of every
kind, and shall be properly cut to fit the rebates, so as to leave a
uniform space of 1/16 inch all round the panes between the edge of the
glass and rebate.

37-12.3 PUTTY (METHOD OF PREPARING)

Putty shall be prepared from pure raw linseed oil and best whiting
specially dry and ground fine to pass a sieve of 45x45 meshes to a
square inch. The two shall be well mixed by hand and kneaded into a
stiff paste. It shall then be left for 12 hours and worked up in small
pieces till it becomes quite smooth. If the putty becomes dry it shall be
restored by heating and working it up again while hot. Where the
rebate is small a little white lead shall be added in making the putty.
Putty required for glazing large panes or for bedding plate glass shall
be made with a mixture of linseed oil and tallow with whiting so as to
make it pliable and capable of standing expansion of the panes. Where
required, putty shall be coloured to match the woodwork.

602
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-12.4 PAINTING OR PRIMING REBATES

If rebates have not been painted they shall be well primed with boiled
linseed oil to prevent the wood from drawing oil out of the putty. Putty
shall be painted at the same time and the same number of coats as
woodwork.

37-12.5 FIXING GLASS WITH PUTTY

Each pane of glass shall then be bedded on a thin layer of putty called
“back putty” and secured into position with proper glazing springs or
nails, “Front putty” shall then be applied chamfered and finished off
neatly so as to ensure that the depth of the putty is exactly equal to the
rebate.

37-12.6 FIXING GLASS WITH WOOD FILLETS

In the case of all panes exceeded 12 inches in width, front putty shall
not be used but the glass secured with fillets of wood with out extra
charge. The fillets shall be plain or moulded and of a size depending on
the type of door being glazed. The glass shall be protected from
contact with the wood by putty made with tallow to act as a cushsion.

37-12.7 BLIND GLASS

Where blind glass is fixed the frosted face shall be away from the
putty.

37-12.8 PUTTY (COMING OFF)

All glass that has been fixed by the contractor shall if it becomes loose
during the period specified in the contract, be refixed and puttied by
him at his own expense.

37-12.9 CLEANING AND FINISHING

No glazing shall be considered complete until all paint and other stains
have been removed form the surface of the glass. Glass shall be
cleaned and polished with pads of damp newspaper, and then with a
clean dry soft cloth (unsized). Cleaning shall be done by two men
working on opposite sides of the same pane at the same time. The
contractor shall make good all glass broken by his worker while
cleaning the glass. On completion of the work all doors and windows
shall be cleaned, damaged putty or glazing repaired and the whole
work left perfect with a workmanlike finish.

603
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

37-12.10 MEASUREMENTS
In measuring glazier’s work all fractional parts under half an inch shall
be omitted and all above that taken as one inch. Curved or irregularly
shaped pieces shall be measured as the least rectangle from which that
can be cut. Measurement shall be made net from inside to inside of
rebate. The unit of measurement shall be one square foot of one square
meter.

37-12.11 RATE
37-12.11.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of labour involved in carrying out
glazing in accordance with above specifications. It shall also include
provision of all tools and plant required for glazing. It shall further
include removal of all ladders, scaffoldings, staging and supports
required for glazing.
37-12.11.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include cost of all materials required for glazing
supplied at site of work in addition to the labour rate as detailed in
Section 37-12.11.1.

604
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006
TABLE NO. 1

Size of chowkat

Hinges No. and

No. of hold fast
Particular

Width of styles

master style or

Hinged chocks
Lock or freize
Top of master
rails ledges or

Top of under
Thickness of

Handles (u)
bottom rail

Door stops
braces (h)
s of type

Batten of

Line No.
leaves

style

style
Lin of doors

size

rail
(e)
Remarks.
No. and
windows
(a)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GLAZED OR
PARTLY
GLAZED
FRAMED
DOORS(Panelled
or battened).
1. Double 3"x4½" 4 1¾" 3½" 6-4" 1-9" 1-9" 1-9" 6"-p 3-6" 2-4" 2-6" 1 a. Dimensions given are
upto 4"x7" out toout of the chowkat
containing the leaves
except where marked (a)
2. Double 3½"x 6 2" 4" 6-5" 1-(0) 1-9" 1-(0) 8"-p 3-8" 2-6" 2-6" 2 Where the dimensions of
exceeding 4½ " each leaf is given
4"x7" up
5"x8"
3 Double 3½"x5" 6 2" 4½" 6-5" 1-(0) 1-12" 1-(0) 10"-p 3- 2-9" 2- 3 b.No.chowkat doors
exceeding 10" 12"
5"x8"
4. Single upto 3"x4½" 4 1¾" 4" 3-5" 1-9" 1-9" : 8"-q 2-6" 1-4" 1-6" 4 Will fit into rebate in the
3"x6 ½ " walls and lintel.
5. Single upto 3"x4½" 4 2" 4½" 3-5" 1-(0) 1-9" : 10"-q 2-6" 1-6" 1-8" 5 c.Dimension given is for
3”x6 ½ " a chowkat carrying two
sets of leaves.

605
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FRAMED DOORS
PANELLED OR
BATTENED
6. Double 3"x4½" 4 1¾" 4" 6-4" 2-9" 2-9" 2-9" : 3-5" 2-4" 2-6" 6. d. Chowkat to be the
upto 4"x7" same as for main door or
window.
7. Double 3½"x 6 2" 4½" 6-5" 2-(0) 2-9" 2-(0) : 3-8" 2-6" 2-8" 7. e. Number to be
exceeding 4½" increased by 2;
4"x7" upto
5"x8"
8. Double 3½"x5" 6 2" 5" 6-6" 2-(0) 2-12" 2-(0) : 3- 2-8" 2- 8 If there is no sill.
exceeding 10" 12"
5"x8"
9 Single upto 3"x4½" 4 1¾" 4" 3-5" 1-9" 1-9" : 1-9" 2-6" 1-4" 1-6" 9 f.1½" deodar ledges and
3"x6 ½" braces
10. Single 3"x4½" 4 2" 4½" 3-5" 1-(0) 1-9" : 1-9" 2-6" 1-6" 1-8" 10 And 1 inch battens.
exceeding
3"x6 ½ "
11 Garrage (b) - 2½" 6" 6- : : : 14"-p (t) (t) : 11 g.1 ½ " ledges and
doors : f 18"i braces, 1 inch battens.
LEDGED AND BRACED
DOORS.
12. Double 5"x4½" 4 2½" 4" 6- 1-9" 1-9" 1-9" 6"-p. 3-9" 2-4" 2-6" 12 h.(i) Meeting styles may
upto 4"x7" g. 8"(k) be 3 quarter of the
dimensions given
13 Double 3½"x 6 2½" : 6- 1-12" 1-9" 1- 8"-p 3-5" 2-4" 2-6" 13 ii) For doors upto
exceeding 4½" g. 10" 12" 7",8"and above 8" in
4"x7" (k) height the lockrails
should be 6",7"and wide,
respectively and the
bottom rails 8",9"and 10"
wide respectively.

606
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14 Single upto 3"x4½" 4 2¼" 4" 3- 1-9" 1-9" : 8"-q 2-6" 1-4" 1-6" 14
3"x6 ½ " 8"(k)
15. Single 3"x4½" 6 2¼" 4½" 3- 1-12" 1-9" : 8"-q. 2-6" 1-4" 1-6" 15
exceeding g. 10"
3"x6 ½ " (k)
LEDGED DOORS AND
COUNTRY DOORS.
16. Double all 3½"x 4 2¼" 4" 6-8" 1-® : : 1-(R) : : : 16 i. Strap hinges hung on 1
sizes: 4½" g. (k) inh diameter paintles
fixed to hold fasts which
are embeddedin cement
concrete blocks let in to
the wall.
17. Single all 3½"x 4 2¼" 4" 3- : : : 2-(R) : : : 17
sizeas 4½" 10"
(k)
WIRE GAUZED DOORS. k.Cross garnet or “T”
hinges-dimension given
is the length of the strap.
18 Double 3"x5" : 1 ½ 4" 4-5" 1-9" 1-9" : : 2-8" 2-4" : 18 l.Single acting spring
upto 4"x7" (c) " (l) hinges.
19 Double 3½"x : 1¾" 4½" 6-5" 1-(0) 1-(0) : : 2-8" 2-5" : 19 m.Two double action
exceeding 5½" (c) (l) spring hinges per leaf; no
4"x7" blanks.
20. Single upto 3"x5" : 1½" 4" 2-5" : : : 1-4" 1-8" 1-4" : 22 o.Length to be such that
3"x6 ½ " (c) (1) the bolt is 6 feet 3 inch
from the floor.
21 Single 3½"x : 1¾" 4½" 3-5" : : : 1-4" 1-8" 1-5" : 21 p.Black japanned
exceeding 5½ " (c) (l) wrought steel safety hasp
3"x6 ½ " (strap convering up
fixing screws).

607
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SWING DOORS ALL q. Galvanized iron safety
VARIETIES door bolt with staple for
padlock.
22 Size of leaf 3"x4½" 4 1½" 4" 2-4" : : : : : : : 22 r. Good quality
upto 3"x6 (m.) galvanized iron or
½ "(a) japanned chain and
staple.
23. Size of leaf 3"x4½" 4 1½" 4" 2-4" : : : : : : : 23 s. Non-twist coloured
exceeding (m.) cord with wooden
3"x6 ½ weight; also brass cleat
"(a) on wooden shield fixed
to the wall
WINDOWS : t. Two 24" tower bolts
fitted to the bottom of
styles and working in
eyes fixed to door stops,
fixed in the floor.
24 Glazed 3"x3½" 4 1½" 2¾" 4-4" 1-(0) 1-4" 1-(0) : 2-5" 2-4" 2-5" 24 u. Handles to be of best
double pressed steel, black
upto 3"x5" japlanned. Dimensions
given are overall
25 Glazed 3"x4" 4 1¾" 2¾" 4-4" 1-(0) 1-6" 1-(0) : 2-6" 2-4" 2-5" 25
double
exceeding
3"x5" upto
4"x5"
26 Glazed 3"x4½" 4 2" 3" 4-5" 1-(0) 1-9" 1-(0) : 2-8" 2-5" 2-6" 26
double
exceeding
4"x5"
27 Glazed 3"x3½" 4 1½" 3" 2-4" 1-(0) 1-4" : : 1-8" 1-4" 1-5" 27
single upto
2"x5"
608
 Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
28 Glazed 3"x4" 4 1¾" 3" 2-5" 1-(0) 1-6" : : 1-8" 1-4" 1-5" 28
single
exceeding
2"x5"
29 Fanlights (d) 2 1½" 2½"x 2-4" : 2-4" : : 1-8" : : 29
3"
30 Clerestory 3"x3" 2 1½" 3" Poin (s) : : : : : : 30
windows t
31 Battened 3"x4" 4 2¼" 3" 2-8" : : : 1-(R) : : : 31
double all g (k)
sizes
32 Battened 3"x4" 4 3¼" 3" 2-8" : : : 1-(R) : : : 32
single all g (k)
size
33 Wire 3"x4¾" : 1½" 3" 2-4" 1-(0) 1-4" : : L: : : 33
gauzed (c)
upto
2"x5"(a)
34 Wire 3"x5" : 1½" 3½" 2-4" 1-(0) 1-4" : : : : : 34
gauzed
exceeding
2"x5"(a)
35 Wire 2"x2½" : 1½" 2½" 2-4" : 2-3" : : 1-4" : : 35
gauzed
shutters to
C.S.
windows

609
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Dowel Joint
Fig:2, Tongued and Grooved Joint

610
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

611
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

612
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

613
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:12, Standard Wood Panelled Doors, Exterior Doors Glazed

614
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

615
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

616
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:18

617
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:19

618
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

619
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:24, Casement Window

620
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:25

Fig:26, Sky Light

621
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Fig:27, Wooden Staircases

622
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–38

PAINTING AND VARNISHING

38-1 GENERAL

38-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and application of paints, varnish
and other protection to the surface of wood and metal in accordance
with these specifications.

38-1.2 GLOSSARY
By painting is meant the application of paint, varnish, enamel and
other protective coating in a liquid form to the surface of wood, metal,
brick, or other materials to form a thin coating or film which solidifies
and sticks to the surface.
Preparation of Assuming the wood to be properly seasoned.
wooden surface The surface to be painted is prepared by
carrying out operations of rubbing with fine
grade sand paper, knotting, priming and
stopping.
Rubbing
Rubbing is continued till the surface becomes
perfectly smooth.
Knotting
Knotting is done before the application of a
priming coat to cover all knots in wood so as to
prevent any exudation of resin or any mark
from showing, through the three common
methods of knotting: (i) Lime knotting (ii)
Ordinary size knotting, and (iii) Patent
knotting. Knots in deodar or other resinous
woods are painted over with hot lime and
scraped off after 24 hours.
Priming
Priming coat is the first coat applied to fill the
pores of wood and prepare a smooth base for
the subsequent painting.
Stopping
This mean the filling up of nail holes, cracks
and other inequalities to level the surface.
French polish It is a spirit varnish applied to the prepared
wood surface with a polishing pad and soft
cloth and not with a brush, with quick and light

623
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

strokes along the grains. The wood to be

polished is first coated with a filler composed
of 5 lbs of whiting mixed with ½ gallon of
methylated spirit and then sand papered, when
dried.
Wax polish The prepared surface of woodwork is smeared
with wax polish and rubbed with a soft flannel
to a fine polish after 24 hours of its application.
Wax polishing is mostly used for polishing the
moosasac, marble and wooden floors.
Whitening Whiting is made by grinding pure white chalk
to a finve powder. Then whiting mixed with
zinc and water is used for whitening ceilings
and walls.
Preparation for It is essential to remove all rust, scale and dirt
painting iron work and have the surface absolutely cleaned before
painting. Special attention is paid to the
cleaning of corner and re-entrant angle.
Abrasion resistance The ability of a coating to resist being worn
away and to maintain its original appearance
and structure when subjected to wear.
Acid number The number of milligrams of potassium
hydroxide (KOH) required to neutralize the
free acids in 1g of an oil, resin, varnish, or
other substance; generally reported on the non-
volatile content.
Additive A substance added in small quantities to
another substance, usually to improve
properties; sometimes called a modifier (for
example, a drier, mildewcide, etc.).
Architectural Coating intended for on-site application to
coating interior or exterior surfaces of buildings.
Baking finish A paint or varnish that requires baking at
temperatures above 150oF (65oC) for the
development of desired properties.
Bleeding The diffusion of coloring matter through a
coating from the substrate; also, the
discoloration arising from such diffusion.
Blistering The ability of a coating to resist the formation
resistance in the film of dome-shaped, liquid- or gas-filled
projections resulting from local loss of
adhesion and lifting of the film from the
previously applied coating or the substrate.
Brush-drag Resistance encountered when applying a
coating by brush, directly related to the high-
shear viscosity of the coating.
Coating A liquid, liquefiable or mastic composition that
is converted to a solid protective, decorative, or
functional adherent film after application as a
thin layer.

624
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Coverage, coverage Terms that are used in some instances to refer

rate, covering to hiding power and in other to mean spreading
power rate.
Cracking resistance The ability of a coating to resist breaks of the
film where the breaks extend through to the
surface painted and the previously applied
coating or the substrate is visible.
Crawling Defect in which the wet film recedes from
localized areas of the substrate (usually caused
by insufficient wetting) leaving those areas
uncoated.
Dirt resistance The ability of a coating to resist soiling by
foreign material, other than microorganisms,
deposited on or embedded in the dried coating.
Drier A composition that accelerates the drying of
oil, paint, or varnish. Driers are usually metallic
compositions and are available in both solid
and liquid forms.
Drying oil An oil that possesses to a marked degree the
property of readily taking up oxygen from the
air and changing to a relatively hard, tough,
elastic substance when exposed in a thin film to
the air.
Durability A relative term indicating degree of
permanency. It may be applied to individual
protective, decorative, or functional properties,
for example, “the durability of gloss,” but if
used in a general way, for example, “the
excellent durability of a paint,” implies the
ability of the described coating to retain, to the
indicated degree, all the properties required for
the continued service of the coating.
Efflorescence A condition that occurs when soluble salts in a
dry coating or the substrate migrate to the
surface due to the movement of water through
the film; characterized by a (commonly) white,
nonuniform powder or crystalline incrustation,
not removable with neutral water but usually
removed with dilute mineral acid.
Enamel A paint that is characterized by an ability to
form an especially smooth film.
Erosion resistance The ability of a coating to withstand being
worn away by chalking or by the abrasive
action of water or windborne particles of grit.
The degree of resistance is measured by the
amount of the coating retained.
Extended pigments Organic pigments dilute with an extender (for
example, alumina trihydrate, blanc fixe, or
calcium carbonate).
Façade paint A decorative and protective coating for exterior

625
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

masonry surface – usually for buildings and

walls.
Filler A pigmented composition for filling the pores
or irregularities in a surface preparatory to
application of other finishes.
Fire-retardant A descriptive term which implies that the
described product, under accepted methods of
test, will significantly: (a) reduce the rate of
flame spread on the surface of a material to
which it has been applied, or (b) resist ignition
when exposed to high temperatures, or (c)
insulate a substrate to which it has been applied
and prolong the time required to reach its
ignition, melting, or structural-weakening
temperature.
Finish (1) final coat in a paint system; at the
termination of cure or drying (2) sometimes
refers to the entire coating system: the texture,
color, and smoothness of a surface, and other
properties affecting appearance.
Flaking resistance The ability of a coating to resist the actual
detachment of film fragments either from the
previously applied coating or the substrate.
Flaking is generally preceded by cracking,
checking, or blistering and is the result of loss
of adhesion. Also known as scaling resistance.
Flatting agent A material added to paints, varnishes, and other
coating materials to reduce the gloss of the
dried film.
Grit The coarse foreign particles in paint materials
and coatings, often of irregular shape, that are
hard, abrasive, and resistant to disintegration.
Hiding power The ability of a paint, or paint material as used,
to hide or obscure a surface to which it has
been uniformly applied. When expressed
numerically, it is generally in terms of the
number of square feet over which a gallon of
paint, or pound of pigment, as used, can be
uniformly spread to produce a specified
contrast ratio.
Hydroxyl number The number of milligrams of potassium
hydroxide (KOH) equivalent to the hydroxyl
content of 1g of sample.
Lacquer A coating composition that is based on
synthetic thermoplastic film-forming material
dissolved in organic solvent that dries primarily
by solvent evaporation. Typical lacquers
include those based on nitrocellulose, other
cellulose derivatives, vinyl resins, acrylic resin,
etc.

626
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Lap The region where one area of a coated surface

merges into an adjacent freshly-coated area
during application of a single coat to the entire
surface.
Levelling The process whereby a film of liquid coating
flows out after application so as to minimize
any surface irregularities such as brush marks,
orange peel, peaks, or craters, that have been
produced by the mechanical process of
application (2) a measure or rating of the
levelling ability of a coating.
Mottling The presence in the surface of a film, of
irregularly shaped, randomly distributed areas
that vary in color, gloss, or sheen, causing the
film to be non-uniform in appearance, also
known as blotching.
Mud-cracking An irregular broken network of cracks in the
film, which occurs due to volatile loss while
drying or curing.
Natural spreading The spreading rate that occurs when a coating
rate is applied in a manner natural to the operator’s
technique, perceptions, and expectations, as
they relate to coating tools, substrate, and
characteristics of the coating itself.
Paint A pigment coating.
Paint brush A paint application tool consisting of a flexible
brushing art composed of long filamentary
material (brushing material) bound to a handle.
Paint brush bristle Hair of the swine (for example: pig, hog, boar),
used in brushing material.
Paint brush ferrule Outer band that joins the brushing material to
the handle.
Paint brush A synthetic polymer extrusion used in brushing
filament material.
Paint brush head Brush without the handle.
Paint brush length Also called “length out”, the exposed length of
clear the brushing material from the ferrule to the tip
end.
Paint brush Measurement of the brush material across the
thickness narrow opening of the ferrule.
Paint roller A complete paint application tool consisting of
a roller frame and a roller cover designed to
apply paint by a rolling action.
Paint roller core A structural tube that forms the base of the
roller cover to which paint applicating material
is attached.
Paint roller cover A tubular sleeve consisting of a paint
applicating material secured to a core.
Paint roller frame A frame and handle assembly designed to hold
a roller cover.

627
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Pigment The fine solid particles used in the preparation

of paint and substantially insoluble in the
vehicle.
Pigment volume The percent by volume of pigment in the non-
volatile portion of a paint as calculated from
bulking value and composition data. The letters
PV are commonly used as an abbreviation.
Pinholes Small pore-like flaws in a coating that extend
entirely through the applied film and have the
general appearance of pin pricks when viewed
by reflected light.
Pinholing The present of a series of fine holes or voids in
a film.
Plasticizer A substance added to paint, varnish, or lacquer
to impart flexibility.
Putty A dough-like material consisting f pigment and
vehicle, used for sealing glass in frames, and
for filling imperfections in wood or metal
surfaces.
Resin, natural A solid organic substance, originating in the
secretion of certain plants or insects, which is
thermoplastic, flammable, nonconductive of
electricity; breaks with a conchoidal fracture
(when hard); and dissolves in certain specific
organic solvents but not water.
Resin, synthetic A synthetic substance physically similar to
natural resin.
Acrylic resin
A synthetic resin made from derivatives of
acrylic acid.
Alkyd resin
A synthetic resin made from polyhydric
alcohols and polybasic acids; generally
modified with resins, fatty oils or fatty acids.
Ester gum
A resin made from rosin or rosin acids and a
polyhydric alcohol, such as glycerine or
pentaerythritol.
Maleic resin
Aresin made from a natural resin & mobic
anhydride or malaicacide. Melamine resin a
synthetic resin made from melamine and
aldehyde.
Penta resin
Easter gum made from rosin and
pentaerythritol.
Phenolic resin
A synthetic resin made from phenols and
aldehydes.
Styrene resin

628
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

A synthetic resin made from vinyl benzene.

Urea resin
A synthetic resin made from urea and an
aldehyde.
Vinyl resin
A synthetic resin made from vinyl compounds.
Rust The reddish material, primarily hydrated iron
oxide, formed on iron or its alloys resulting
from exposure to humid atmosphere or
chemical attack.
Rust resistance The ability of a coating to protect the substrate
(coatings) of iron or its alloys from rusting.
Sag or sagging Nonuniform downward flow of a wet paint film
that occurs between the times of application
and setting, resulting in an uneven coating
having a thick lower edge.
Sealer A liquid composition to prevent excessive
absorption of finish coats into porous surfaces;
also a composition to prevent bleeding.
Shade A term descriptive of a lightness difference
between surface colors, the other attributes of
color being essentially constant. A lighter
shade of a color is one that has higher lightness
but approximately the same hue and saturation;
and a darker shade is one that has a lower
lightness. Primarily, the term “shade” is
derived from shadow and designates a change
in appearance analogous to that produced by a
local reduction in illumination. It should,
therefore, when strictly used, express only the
change toward a darker color. Shade of a color
has been defined by several authorities as the
mixture of black with that color, thus
establishing its opposite character to “tint”, but
by extension of its relative sense it has been
frequently and widely used to include lighter
shades by use of the adjective “lighter” or
“paler”. Although such expressions apparently
involve a contradiction, it is clear that while we
may have a shade of a color or darker color of
the same sort, it is easy to conceive of another
shade not quite so dark and therefore lighter.
Soil (of coating) Disfiguring foreign materials such as dirt, soot,
or stain, other than microogranisms, deposited
on or embedded in a dried film of applied
coating material; also called dirt.
Spreading rate The area covered by a unit volume of coating
material frequently expressed as square feet per
gallon.
Stain A discoloration, arising from foreign materials,

629
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

that penetrates into the coating.

Temporary coating A coating designed to protect or decorate a
substrate for a limited time that can be readily
removed either by mechanical or chemical
means.
Thinner The portion of a paint, varnish, lacquer or
related product that volatilises during the
drying process.
Varnish A liquid composition that is converted to a
transparent or translucent solid film after
application as a thin layer.
Bituminous varnish
A dark-colored varnish containing bituminous
ingredients. The varnish may be either of the
oil or spirit type.
Oil varnish
A varnish that contains resin and drying oil as
the basic film-forming ingredients and is
converted to a solid film primarily by chemical
reaction.
Spar varnish
A varnish for exterior surfaces. The name
originated from it use on spars of ships.
Spirit varnish
A varnish that is converted to a solid film
primarily by solvent evaporation.
Vehicle The liquid portion of a paint. Anything that is
dissolved in the liquid portion of a paint is a
part of the vehicle.
Waterborne coating A coating in which the principal volatile
constituent is water.

38-1.3 WEATHER
Unless otherwise specified, no painting shall be done during wet,
foggy or dusty weather or in the direct rays of the hot sun.

38-1.4 NUMBER OF COATS

Unless otherwise specified, all wood and iron surfaces shall be given
three coats, including the priming coat.

38-1.5 CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, rust, dirt, oil, grease,
etc., and rendered smooth and dried before preparing it for painting or
varnishing.

630
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-1.6 PRIMING, KNOTTING AND STOPPING

A priming coat without colouring matter shall first be applied, after
which all holes, cracks, knots, etc., shall be stopped with the specified
putty.

38-1.7 PAINT
Paint shall be of an approved make and quality.

38-1.8 PAINTING
(a) Paint shall be applied with proper brushes of approved quality
or spraying machine as specified.
(b) Paint shall be constantly stirred, while it is being applied. It
shall be stirred with a smooth stick and under no circumstances
with a brush.
(c) When more than one coat has to be given, every coat must be
completely dry, rubbed and all dust removed before the next is
applied.
(d) Each coat shall differ slightly in tint from the preceding one, to
distinguish quickly between each coat. The last coat shall be of
the tint required for the finished work.
(e) Each coat shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge before
the next is applied.
(f) All coats shall be applied evenly and properly, so that the work
does not show any hair or brush marks, or drops of paints. The
method of crossing and laying off shall be normally applied,
the latter in the direction of grains in the case of wood work.
(g) Paint, when not in use, shall be kept away from the air. The
surface of the kegs of ground and mixed paints which have
been partly used shall be covered with water.

38-1.9 MEASUREMENTS
Painting and varnishing shall be measured by superficial area. The unit
of measurement shall be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded
work of all kinds, unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by
running the tape over and into all elevations and depressions. In the
case of other classes of work painted on both sides the flat area of the
surface on one side, including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied
by the factors given below to arrive at the correct measurement of both
sides for the purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times

631
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time

(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-1.10 RATE
38-1.10.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of cleaning, preparing and painting
the surface according to the above specifications or any other
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffoldings, supports,
ladders, shot with gunny bags at both ends, brushes or spraying
machines of approved type and any other tool or plant required for
doing painting as per above specifications and removal with turpentine
or other approved methods of all defects from the painted surface to
leave it perfect in every respect. It shall further include the cost of all
allied operations like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and
droppings on the walls, floors, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-1.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying paints of approved
quality, paint remover in case of painting old work and all other
material required for doing painting as per above specifications at site
of work in addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 38-1.10.1.

632
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-2 PAINTING NEW WOOD WORK

38-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover painting the new woodwork in accordance with
these specifications.

38-2.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

38-2.2.1 PLANING AND RUBBING
Unless otherwise specified, wood work to be painted shall be finished
smooth with the plane, but free from plane marks of every kind and
rubbed smooth with sand paper, first with 2½ (medium) grade and then
with 1½ (fine) grade or pumice stone.
38-2.2.2 KNOTTING
After rubbing all knots in the wood it shall be killed or covered with:
a) Two coats of patent (approved) knotting (shellac dissolved in
naptha) or
b) Shellac varnish (5 oz shellac mixed with 1 pint of methylated
spirit of vine, thoroughly dissolved and stirred with ½ oz red
lead) or
c) A preparation of red lead and glue size in equal weight applied
hot. Knots in deodar or other resinous wood shall be painted
over with hot lime. This paint shall be scraped off after 24
hours, the knots primed with red lead and glue laid hot. Then
one coat of knotting varnish shall be applied.
38-2.2.3 RUBBING
After knotting, the surface shall be rubbed again with pumice stone, or
fine sand paper before the priming coat is applied.

38-2.3 PAINT
Paint shall be of an approved make and quality.
38-2.3.1 PRIMING OR FIRST COAT OF PAINT
Woodwork shall be properly primed before being fixed in position. In
the absence of approved ready made priming paint it shall be prepared
by mixing the following ingredients:
(a) For inside work (except in white and very pale shade):
(i) White lead 10 lbs
(ii) Red lead ¼ lbs
(iii) Boiled linseed oil 4 pints
(iv) Raw linseed oil 2 pints
(v) Turpentine 1 pint

633
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(b) For outside work:

(i) White lead 10 lbs
(ii) Red lead ¼ lbs
(iii) Boiled linseed oil 2 pints
(iv) Raw linseed oil 4 pints
(v) Turpentine 1 pint
(c) For white or light shade:
(i) White lead 16 lbs
(ii) Lamp black ½ lbs
(iii) Raw linseed oil 5 pints
(iv) Turpentine 1 pint
(d) Genuine white lead: 7 lbs
Genuine red lead 7 lbs
Boiled linseed oil 1gallon
or
White lead 15 lbs
Red lead 0.30 lbs
Litharge (drier) 0.30 lbs
Linseed oil 6.50 pints
The priming paints shall be applied either by brushes or by spraying
machines as specified.
38-2.3.2 STOPPING
After priming, all holes, cracks, gappings, joints and similar other
defects shall be stopped with putty manufactured by approved
manufacturer.

38-2.4 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-
1 of these specifications for Painting and Varnishing (General).

38-2.5 MEASUREMENTS
Painting shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded
work of all kinds, unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by
running the tape over and into all elevations and depressions. In the
case of other classes of work painted on both sides the flat area of the
surface on one side, including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied
by the factors given below to arrive at the correct measurement of both
sides for the purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time

634
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time

Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-2.6 RATE
38-2.6.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of cleaning, preparing and painting
the surface according to the above specifications or any other
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffoldings, supports,
ladders, shot with gunny bags at both ends, brushes or spraying
machines of approved type and any other tool or plant required for
doing painting as per above specifications and removal with turpentine
or other approved methods of all defects from the painted surface to
leave it perfect in every respect. It shall further include the cost of all
allied operations like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and
droppings on the walls, floors, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-2.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying paints of approved
quality, paint remover in case of painting old work and all other
material required for doing painting as per above specifications at site
of work in addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 38-2.6.1.

635
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-3 REPAINTING WOOD WORK

38-3.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover repainting of wooden surface in accordance with
these specifications.

38-3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

(a) If the old paint is firm and sound the surface shall be rubbed
with pumice stone and washed thoroughly with soap, washing
soda and water till all dirt, grease, projections and blisters, if
any, are removed and the surface is rendered smooth.
(b) Surfaces spoiled by smoke shall be cleaned by the application
of a coat of 3 lbs glue and 3 oz, unsalted lime boiled in one
gallon of water, unless otherwise specified.
(c) Greasy surfaces shall be cleaned by applying a coat of
turpentine over them and then washing them with soap and
water.
(d) When the old paint is in a blistered, cracked or perished
condition, it shall be completely removed by burning off with a
blow lamp or by means of a paint remover as specified or
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The blow lamp shall not be
used on curved surfaces or surfaces adjoining glass, such as
sashes, etc. Care shall be taken that the wood surfaces are not
charred.
(e) When a ready-made paint remover of an approved quality is not
available any one of the following recipes shall be used, unless
otherwise specified.
(i) Naptha shall be applied repeatedly till the paint has
softened. The surface shall then be rubbed and cleaned.
(ii) A coat of caustic soda (2 lbs of caustic soda to a gallon
of water) shall be applied very carefully by mean of a
piece of cloth securely tied on one end of a long
wooden stick. After a few hours of its application the
surface shall be thoroughly washed with clean water
and neutralized with a weak acid solution or vinegar.
This paint remover shall be applied only when
particularly specified and permitted by the Engineer-in-
charge and shall not be touched by hand or allowed to
come in direct contact with the wood.
(iii) One lb of country soda (sajji) shall be dissolved in hot
water and mixed with lime stone reducing the whole to
a creamy paste. The surface shall be coated with it and
kept moist for at least 3 hours. If the lime used is
unslaked and the mixture is applied hot, the action shall
be quickened.

636
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(iv) One part of soft soap shall be mixed to two parts of

potash and the mixture dissolved in boiling water. Four
parts of lime shall then be added to it and applied (while
it is hot) with a brush on the surface of the paint and left
on for 12 to 18 hours.
(v) Sodium carbonate or washing soda, diluted with water,
cleans grease and fat from the old painted surface. One
lb of washing soda shall be sufficient for one gallon of
water. Hot water quickens the action of washing soda.
(vi) Two parts of quick lime shall be mixed with one part of
washing soda and made to the consistency of a cream.
A coat of this cream shall soften the painted surface.
(vii) a) Palmatic acid (vegetable) 25 parts by weight
b) Benzine 35 parts by weight
c) Amyle acetate 40 parts by weight
This solution shall be applied by brush.
(viii) a) Caustic soda 14 lbs
b) Whiting 9 lbs
c) Flour 2½ lbs
d) Petroleum 2½ gallons
e) Water 7 gallons
The solution shall be applied by any approved method on the
surface.
(f) After the paint has been removed the surface shall be rubbed
smooth with sand paper, washed down and allowed to dry
completely. It shall be wiped clean before paint is applied.
(g) After rubbing all holes, cracks and other inequalities, the
surface shall be properly stopped in the manner specified under
“Painting New Wood Work”.

38-3.3 PAINT
Paint shall be of an approved make and quality.

38-3.4 PAINTING
(a) After preparing and treating the surface, it shall be painted
according to Section 38-2 of these specifications for “Painting
New Wood Work”.
(b) If old paint is completely removed the cost of removal is not to
be included in the rate for first coat, but shall be payable
separately.
(c) If old paint is firm and is not removed completely but the
surface is only rubbed and treated, the rate for the first coat of
paint shall include the cost of treatment also.

637
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-3.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-
1 Specifications for “Painting and Varnishing (General)”.

38-3.6 MEASUREMENTS
Painting shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded
work of all kinds, unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by
running the tape over and into all elevations and depressions. In the
case of other classes of work painted on both sides the flat area of the
surface on one side, including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied
by the factors given below to arrive at the correct measurement of both
sides for the purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-3.7 RATE
38-3.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of cleaning, preparing and painting
the surface according to the above specifications or any other
specifications specially included in the contract. It shall further include
the cost of providing, using and removing scaffoldings, supports,
ladders, shot with gunny bags at both ends, brushes or spraying
machines of approved type and any other tool or plant required for
doing painting as per above specifications and removal with turpentine
or other approved methods of all defects from the painted surface to
leave it perfect in every respect. It shall further include the cost of all
allied operations like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and
droppings on the walls, floors, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-3.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying paints of approved
quality, paint remover in case of painting old work and all other
material required for doing painting as per above specifications at site
of work in addition to the labour rate as detailed in Section 38-3.7.1.

638
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-4 VARNISHING

38-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover varnishing of wooden surface in accordance with
these specifications.

38-4.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

(a) New woodwork to be varnished shall be finished smooth with
the plane making sure that no marks are visible on the finished
surface. It shall be rubbed perfectly smooth with sand paper or
pumice stone.
(b) Knotting shall be done as specified in Section 38-2.2.2 of these
specifications for “Painting New Woodwork”.
(c) STOPPING – The surface of the wood shall be then stopped,
with hot weak glue size (l lb of glue making about 1 gallon of
size) so as to close up the holes. The surface when it dries up
shall be again thoroughly sand papered. After rubbing the
surfaces another coat of the same glue size shall be applied
cold.
(d) If the woodwork is to be stained, the staining colour shall be
mixed with second coat of size which shall be applied
regularly, evenly and quickly keeping the colour on the flow.
(e) If the woodwork is of an oily nature, a little ‘Multani Mitti’ and
ochre shall be added to the first coat of size (otherwise varnish
would not dry readily).
(f) The sized wood shall then be rubbed with sand paper leaving
the colour even and rubbing with the grain.

38-4.3 APPLICATION
Varnish shall then be applied in very thin coats with a special fine-
haired varnishing brush and not with an ordinary paintbrush. Unless
otherwise specified, the best copal varnish, as described under Section
38-4 of these specification for “Varnishes” shall be used. If more than
one coat have been specified the first coat shall be rubbed with the fine
sand paper. Other coats shall be applied as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.

38-4.4 MEASUREMENT
Varnishing shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of
measurement shall be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded
work of all kinds, unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by
running the tape over and into all elevations and depressions. In the

639
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

case of other classes of work painted on both sides the flat area of the
surface on one side, including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied
by the factors given below to arrive at the correct measurement of both
sides for the purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-4.5 RATE
38-4.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-4.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-4.5.1.

640
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-5 WAX POLISHING

38-5.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover wax polishing of wooden surface in accordance
with these specifications. Wax polishing shall be done where a dull
polish, which shall not destroy the natural colour and graining of teak
or shisham.

38-5.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

(a) New woodwork to be polished shall be finished smooth with
the plane making sure that no plane marks are left after
finishing.
(b) The surface shall be made perfectly smooth by rubbing it with
sand paper or pumice stone.
(c) It shall then be stopped and rubbed perfectly smooth first with
medium grained sand paper and then with fine sand paper. The
final rubbing shall be done with sand paper which has been
slightly moistened with linseed oil and rubbed for a few
seconds.

38-5.3 MATERIALS
(a) Bee’s wax
(b) Linseed oil
(c) Turpentine

38-5.4 PREPARATION FOR WAX POLISHING

The bee’s wax polish shall be prepared by mixing two parts of bee’s
wax with two parts of boiled linseed oil over a slow fire. When it is
dissolved, but is still warm, one part of turpentine shall be added.

38-5.5 APPLICATION
38-5.5.1 FIRST COAT
Bee’s wax polish as prepared above shall be applied with a clean cloth
pad and rubbed continuously for at least half an hour.
38-5.5.2 SECOND COAT
When the surface is quite dry the second coat shall be applied in the
same manner and rubbed continuously for an hour or till the surface
has dried.

641
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-5.5.3 FINAL COAT

The final coat shall then be applied and rubbed for two hours (more if
necessary) till the surface has assumed a uniform gloss and is quite
dry, showing on signs of stickiness when touched. The final polish
depends largely on the amount of rubbing which shall be done
continuously with uniform pressure and with frequent charge in
direction.

38-5.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-
4 of these specifications for “Varnishes”.

38-5.7 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of measurement shall
be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded work of all kinds,
unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by running the tape over
and into all elevations and depressions. In the case of other classes of
work painted on both sides the flat area of the surface on one side,
including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied by the factors given
below to arrive at the correct measurement of both sides for the
purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-5.8 RATE
38-5.8.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.

642
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-5.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-5.8.1.

643
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-6 FRENCH POLISHING

38-6.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover French polishing of wooden surface in
accordance with these specifications.

38-6.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

Unless other wise specified the wooden surface to be polished shall be
prepared according to Section 38-4 of these specifications for
Varnishing.

38-6.3 MATERIALS
(a) Pure chalk
(b) Powder linseed oil and bee wax 3:1 boiled
(c) Plaster of Paris paste in water or raw linseed oil.

38-6.4 APPLICATION/POLISHING
(a) After the surface has been prepared it shall be first coated with
a filler composed of 5 lbs of whiting mixed with 1/3rd of a
gallon of mentholated spirit and then rubbed with sand paper. A
thin coat of polish shall then be applied. The surface shall then
be rubbed with sand paper before the second and subsequent
coats are applied.
(b) Alternatively, plaster of Paris, red ochre (sufficient to tint it),
and linseed oil are mixed together to form a stiff paste which
shall be applied sparingly and rubbed hard on the surface to till
up the pores or the wood. Prior to this a piece of rag moistened
with linseed oil shall be rubbed on the surface.
(c) The surface shall be rubbed smooth with fine glass paper a few
hours later and then polished.
(d) Unless otherwise specified, two coats of French polish of an
approved type shall be applied.
(e) To finish off, the surface shall be rubbed lightly and quickly
with a circular motion by means of a piece of flannel rolled into
the from of a rubber, covered with a place of rag slightly
damped with methylated spirit. If the rag sticks, the surface
shall be touched with linseed oil.

38-6.5 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-
4 of these specifications for “Varnishes”.

644
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-6.6 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of measurement shall
be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded work of all kinds,
unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by running the tape over
and into all elevations and depressions. In the case of other classes of
work painted on both sides the flat area of the surface on one side,
including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied by the factors given
below to arrive at the correct measurement of both sides for the
purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-6.7 RATE
38-6.7.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-6.7.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-6.7.1.

645
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-7 PAINTING WOOD WORK WITH SOLIGNUM

OR CROSOTE OR COAL TAR

38-7.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover painting of woodwork with solignum, creosote
or coal tar for wood preservation in accordance with these
specifications. Solignum, creosote or coal tar which ever has been
specified shall be of an approved quality.

38-7.2 MATERIALS
38-7.2.1 QUALITY
Solignum, creosote or coal tar, whichever has been specified, shall be
obtained from approved manufacturers.
38-7.2.2 HEATING AND PREPARING PAINT
(a) Before applying solignum, creosote or coal tar shall be heated
to just short of boiling
(b) If tar is specified, it shall be thinned with kerosene oil or
common country spirit in the following proportions:
4 part tar to 1 part kerosene, or 1 gallon tar to ½ pint
country spirit;
2 lbs unslaked lime shall be mixed with 1 gallon of tar
to prevent its running.
The mixture shall then be heated to a near boiling point.

38-7.3 APPLICATION
(a) It shall be then applied with a stiff flat brush or a spraying
machine as specified.
(b) The paint shall be stirred occasionally while it is being applied.
(c) The ends of the timber pieces shall be liberally coated and,
where possible, dipped in the hot solignum or creosote.
(d) Where more than one coat has to be applied, subsequent coats
shall be applied when the previous one has dried.

38-7.4 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respect, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-1
of these specifications for “Painting and Varnishing (General)”.

38-7.5 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of measurement shall
be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded work of all kinds,

646
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by running the tape over

and into all elevations and depressions. In the case of other classes of
work painted on both sides the flat area of the surface on one side,
including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied by the factors given
below to arrive at the correct measurement of both sides for the
purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-7.6 RATE
38-7.6.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-7.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-7.6.1.

647
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-8 PAINTING IRON WORK ABOVE WATER

38-8.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover painting ironwork above water level in
accordance with these specifications.

38-8.2 MATERIALS
Paint shall be obtained from the approved manufacturers.

38-8.3 WEATHER
(a) Painting of iron work shall not be done in damp, wet, stormy or
extremely hot weather.
(b) Too quick drying in the baking heat of a summer sun shall also
be avoided.

38-8.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND APPLICATION

(a) If the iron has not been painted previously it shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all rust and scale by means of steel
scrapers, chisels, or steel wire brushes till the bright shining
surface of the iron appears.
(b) The surface shall then be cleaned with dry cotton waste and the
paint be applied immediately.
(c) Each small patch shall be painted as soon as cleaned if the
painting is being done in damp weather since iron begins to rust
within a few minutes after it has been cleaned.
(d) In repainting iron work whose old paint is sound, the surface
shall be rubbed with wire brushes and scrapers and all loose
paint that comes away shall be taken off. If the paint is in a bad
condition it shall be burnt off with a blow lamp or by other
means as specified.
(e) If it is necessary to paint galvanized iron, a coat composed of
eight ounces of copper acetate added to a gallon of water shall
be applied first, this being paid for separately. Unless otherwise
specified, the first coat of paint shall be composed of genuine
red lead mixed with raw linseed oil and turpentine in equal
proportion.
(f) Second and subsequent coats shall be applied more uniformly
with the paint brush in long strokes evenly drawn or with a
spraying machine as specified.
(g) Sufficient time shall be allowed between the coats to allow the
paint to dry up. Unless otherwise specified, an interval of 24
hours shall be sufficient.

38-8.5 NUMBER OF COATS

648
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

(a) On new work, three coats shall be applied but on old work it is
sufficient to have two coats only.
(b) Each coat shall preferably vary slightly form the preceding one
in shade, in order to ascertain that full number of coats have
actually been applied.

38-8.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respect, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-1
of these specifications for “Painting & Varnishing (General)”.

38-8.7 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of measurement shall
be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded work of all kinds,
unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by running the tape over
and into all elevations and depressions. In the case of other classes of
work painted on both sides the flat area of the surface on one side,
including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied by the factors given
below to arrive at the correct measurement of both sides for the
purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden door and the other
for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the chowkat shall be included in the
measurement of only one door.

38-8.8 RATE
38-8.8.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-8.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-8.8.1.

649
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

38-9 PAINTING IRON WORK WHICH REMAINS

UNDER WATER

38-9.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall cover painting ironwork which remains under water in
accordance with these specifications.

38-9.2 MATERIALS
Paint used shall be obtained from approved manufacturers.

38-9.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE AND APPLICATION

OF PAINT
Unless otherwise specified, the surface shall be prepared according to
Section 38-8 of these specifications for “Painting Ironwork Above
Water” with the following additions:
(a) The paint shall be applied hot as soon as the surface is cleaned.
(b) Subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous one
has dried.

38-9.4 NUMBER OF COATS

Two or three coats as actually specified shall be applied.

38-9.5 PROTECTION
Work thus painted shall not be immersed in water until it has been
dried up; one week shall be generally sufficient for this purpose
depending upon the weather.

38-9.6 OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects, not specified here, it shall conform to Section 38-
8 of these specifications for “Painting Iron Work Above Water”.

38-9.7 MEASUREMENT
It shall be measured by superficial area. The unit of measurement shall
be 100 square feet or one square meter. Moulded work of all kinds,
unless otherwise specified, shall be measured by running the tape over
and into all elevations and depressions. In the case of other classes of
work painted on both sides the flat area of the surface on one side,
including glazing and chowkat, shall be multiplied by the factors given

650
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

below to arrive at the correct measurement of both sides for the

purpose of making payment.
(a) Panelled or battened doors and windows 2 times
(b) Glazed or partly glazed doors or windows 2 times
(c) Plate glass windows (large glazed area) 1 time
(d) Wire guaze doors or windows 1 time
(e) Trellis work 2 times
(f) Grated doors and windows and other grating 1 time
(g) Palisade fencing 0.6 time
Note: In the case of chowkat having two rebates, one for wooden
door and the other for wire gauze shutter, the surface area of the
chowkat shall be included in the measurement of only one door.

38-9.8 RATE
38-9.8.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of preparing, cleaning, rubbing,
knotting, stopping the surface and applying varnish on it as per above
specifications. It shall also include the cost of providing, using and
removing scaffoldings, supports, ladders shot with gunny bags at both
ends, fine-haired special brushes for varnishing and any other tool or
plant required for doing varnishing as per above specifications and
removal of all defects from the varnished surface to leave it perfect in
every respect. It shall further include the cost of all allied operations
like the removal of stains, smears, splashes and droppings on the walls,
floor, glazing, furniture and other places.
38-9.8.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of supplying varnish of an approved
quality and all other materials required for doing varnishing as per
above specifications at site of works in addition to the labour rate as
detailed in Section 38-9.8.1.

651
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–39

CLADDING
39-1 BRICK CLADDING

39-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and laying brick cladding of
specified size in 1:3 Cement sand mortar using red posso mortar (1 part
cement and 3 parts surkhi) including filling the space between wall and
cladding using 1:5 cement sand mortar including cost of steel nails 6"
long @ 2'-0" c/c horizontally and vertically, cutting bricks as per
drawing and site requirements as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

39-1.2 MATERIALS
39-1.2.1 CLADDING UNIT
It shall conform to Section 6 & 7 of these specifications except size.

39-1.2.2 GUTKA SIZE

2¼" x 2¼" x 9"
2¼" x 3" x 9"
2¼" x 1½" x 9"

39-1.2.3 BRICK SIZE

1½" x 1½" x 9"
4½" x 3" x 9"

39-1.2.4 WATER
Water shall conform to the provision and requirement set forth in
Section 1 of these specifications.

39-1.2.5 MORTAR
It shall conform to Section 16-2 of these specifications.

39-1.3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In other respects it shall conform to Section 32-1 of the specifications.

39-1.4 MEASUREMENTS
The brick cladding will be measured in superficial area. The unit of
measurements shall be 1-sft.

652
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-1.5 RATE
39-1.6 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) for cladding shall include the cost
of carrying out cladding work, cutting gutka or bricks as the case may
be, wherever required, curing, using and removing scaffolding,
shuttering, centering, staging, ladders, supports and other tools and
plants required for carrying out the cladding work as per above
specifications.

39-1.7 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of cladding work, cement, sand,
surkhi, steel nails 6" long and any other material required in addition to
labour rate detailed above.

653
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-2 WASH TERRAZZO

Providing and Laying Terrazzo wall finish ½" thick using one part of
white cement and 2 parts of marble chips of specified gauge over ½"
thick roughened surface of cement sand plaster ratio 1:3 including
making panels as per site requirements by means of aluminum U-
Channel ½" x 3/8" size and G.I. screws, fixed in plumb, straight and
level and then washing with narrial (Coir) brush and water to required
extent complete in all respects.

39-2.1 DESCRIPTION
Unless otherwise specified wash terrazzo shall be laid in accordance
with the following specifications:

a- Marble chips shall be of approved grade, colour, size and

quality.
b- Cement shall conform to Section 4 of these specifications,
coloured cement wherever used shall be of approved quality.
c- Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 10-3 of these
specifications.
d- Water shall conform to Section-1 of these specification.

39-2.2 BASE
Unless otherwise specified plaster used for bottom layer shall be of the
ratio 1:3 cement sand mortar.

39-2.3 THICKNESS
Unless otherwise specified the terrazzo thickness shall not be less than
3/8" and shall be laid monolithic with bottom layer of cement sand
plaster of specified thickness.

39-2.4 FINISHING OF BOTTOM LAYER

The bottom layer of cement sand plaster shall be roughened.

39-2.5 DIVIDING INTO PANELS

For dividing wash terrazzo into panels Aluminum U-Channel ½"x3/8"
size shall be fixed by means of screws on roughened surface. The U-
Channel shall be fixed in such a manner that its top is in level with
required finishing surface of wash terrazzo.

654
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-2.6 LAYING
The bottom layer of cement sand plaster shall conform to Section 39-
2.2 of these specifications with its surface made rough for adequate
adhering of top terrazzo layer. After laying and curing of bottom layer
Aluminium U-Channel ½" x 3/8", unless otherwise specified, shall be
fixed by means of screws according to site requirements for making
panels. A terrazzo topping 3/8" to ¾" thick consisting of one part of
white cement or ordinary Portland cement as specified and 2 parts of
marble chips, well mixed, is laid with trowel and float. In order to
achieve good results water added to the mix shall be just sufficient to
produce a workable plastic mix. Whichever method is adopted for
terrazzo topping, not more than 70% of the surface should be covered
with marble chippings. After sustaining of the material it shall be
washed with coir brush and water to required extent.

655
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-3 PORCELAIN/CERAMIC TILE CLADDING

39-3.1 DESCRIPTION
Providing and laying local porcelain/ceramic tile cladding using
approved colour, design and pattern laid in white cement with pigment
to match the colour and shade of ceramic tiles over a bed of roughened
cement sand plaster in the ratio of 1:2, ¾" thick including labour for
cutting tiles according to site requirements, washing and cleaning top
surface of tiles with detergent complete in all respects. Unless
otherwise specified, porcelain/ceramic tile cladding work shall be
executed in accordance with the Section 39-3 of these specifications
true to dimensions and pattern as shown on the drawing.

39-3.2 MATERIALS
39-3.2.1 PORCELAIN/CERAMIC TILES
It shall conform to Section 8 of these specifications.

39-3.2.2 WATER
Water shall conform to the provision and requirement set forth in
Section-1 of these specifications.

39-3.2.3 MORTAR
Cement:Sand mortar shall conform to Section 16-2 of these
specifications.

39-3.3 BASE
Unless otherwise specified cement sand plaster (1:2) as base on walls
having thickness of ½" to ¾" as specified, shall be provided with
roughened surface. It shall conform to Section 36-2 of these
specifications.

39-3.4 LAYING
After laying of base and proper curing the ceramic tiles cladding shall
be laid using cement sand mortar (1:2), ¾" thick and joints will be
filled with white cement and pigment mortar.

39-3.5 MEASUREMENTS
The ceramic tile cladding shall be measured in superficial area. The
unit of measurement shall be 1-sft.

656
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-3.6 RATE
39-3.6.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) shall include the cost of laying of
porcelain/ceramic tiles, cutting tiles wherever required, curing, using
and removing scaffolding, shuttering, centering, staging, ladders,
supports and other tools and plants required for carrying out ceramic
tile work on walls.

39-3.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of porcelain/ceramic tiles, cement,
sand, white cement, pigment and any other material required in
addition to labour rate detailed above.

657
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

39-4 CAST STONE CLADDING

39-4.1 DESCRIPTION
Providing and laying cast stone cladding of specified size, thickness,
colour, texture and design over ¾" thick cement sand mortar ratio (1:3)
with pigment having joints ½" to 3/8" size filled with mortar of same
material according to drawing and site requirements.

39-4.2 MATERIALS
39-4.2.1 CAST STONE
It shall conform to Section 11-3 of these specifications.

39-4.2.2 WATER
Water shall conform to Section-1 of these specifications.

39-4.2.3 MORTAR
Cement:Sand mortar of 1:3 ratio shall conform to Section 16-2 of these
specifications.

39-4.3 MEASUREMENTS
The cast stone cladding work shall be measured in superficial area. The
unit of measurement shall be 1-sft.

39-4.4 RATE
39-4.4.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate (on labour rate basis) shall include the cost of laying of
cast stone cladding, cutting cast stone whenever required, curing, using
and removing scaffolding, shuttering, ladders, supports and other tools
and plants required for carrying out cast stone cladding work on walls.

39-4.4.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of cast stone cladding, cement,
sand, pigment and other materials required in addition to labour rate
detailed above.

658
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–40

FALSE CEILING
40-1 GENERAL

40-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and fixing false ceiling under the
roof. Unless otherwise specified false ceiling shall be carried out in
accordance with the specifications true to dimension and as shown on
the drawing.

40-1.2 MATERIAL
i) Aluminium Alloy Tees shall be of size 1-½" x 1".
ii) Aluminium Alloy Angles shall be of size 1"x1"
iii) Plastic plugs of approved quality & steel screws not less than
1½" size shall be used.
iv) Ceiling Boards as specified.

40-1.3 OPERATION
Before start the work height of false ceiling shall be marked on the
surrounding walls.
i) The ceiling area shall be dividend into 2 feet sq panel.
ii) Unless otherwise specified, the false ceiling shall be laid over
angle and tee runners.
iii) Unless otherwise specified angles and tee runners shall be of
aluminium & of specified shade or powder quoted in approved
colour.
iv) Angle runners shall be fastened with walls at the correct height
by means of plastic plug and screws driven into wall at
intervals not more then 2-ft.
v) Tee runners shall be suspended with G.I wire 14 SWG
anchored with plastic plug and screws driven in roof at
intervals not more then 2-ft accurately.
vi) Tee crosses shall be resting on tee angle runners and fastened
tightly.
vii) Board of specified material size and thickness shall be fixed in
the frame.

659
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-1.4 MEASUREMENT
The false ceiling shall be measured by area. The unit for measurement
shall be sq.ft/ sq. mtr.

40-1.5 RATE
40-1.6 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for false ceiling shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out false ceiling according to the specifications, fixed in
position, at specified height in true lines and level.
The rate shall further include the cost of labour employed for following
operations.
i) Drilling of holes in walls & ceiling.
ii) Fixing of plastic plug and screws.
iii) Fastening of tee runners with G.I wire 14 SWG gauge.
iv) Fastening of angle runners with walls.
v) Cutting of ceiling boards in specified size where required.
vi) Fixing of ceiling boards

40-1.7 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials required in addition
to the labour rate detail in para 40-1.6 above.

660
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-2 FALSE CEILING WITH THERMOPORE

SHEET

40-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and fixing false ceiling with
thermopore sheet under the roof. Unless otherwise specified false
ceiling shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications true to
dimension and as shown on the drawing.

40-2.2 MATERIALS
35-2.2.1 THERMOPORE SHEET
i) These shall conform to Section 20 of these specifications.
ii) These shall be of approved design.
iii) Size 2'x2'x¾".
iv) Density of Thermopore sheet shall be 20kg/m3.

35-2.2.2 OTHER MATERIALS

As mentioned in Section 40-1.2 of these specifications.

40-2.3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall conform to Section 40-1 of these
specifications.

40-2.4 MEASUREMENT
The false ceiling shall be measured by area. The unit for measurement
shall be sq.ft/ sq. meter.

40-2.5 RATE
40-2.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for false ceiling shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out false ceiling according to the specifications, fixed in
position, at specified height in true lines and level. The rate shall
further include the cost of labour employed for following operations.
(a) Drilling of holes in walls & ceiling.
(b) Fixing of plastic plug and screws.
(c) Fastening of tee runners with G.I wire 14 SWG gauge.
(d) Fastening of angle runners with walls.
(e) Cutting of ceiling boards in specified size where required.
(f) Fixing of ceiling boards

661
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-2.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials required in addition
to the labour rate detail in para 40-2.5.1 above.

662
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-3 FALSE CEILING WITH GYPSUM BOARD

40-3.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and fixing false ceiling with
Gypsum Board. Unless otherwise specified false ceiling shall be
carried out in accordance with the specifications true to dimension and
as shown on the drawing.

40-3.2 MATERIALS
40-3.2.1 GYPSUM BOARD
(a) It shall conform to the Section 13-3 of these specifications.
(b) It shall be of approved design and quality.
(c) Size 2'x2'x3/8".
40-3.2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
As mentioned in Section 40-1.2 of these specifications.

40-3.3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall conform to Section 40-1 of these
specifications.

40-3.4 MEASUREMENT
The false ceiling shall be measured by area. The unit for measurement
shall be sq.ft/ sq. meter.

40-3.5 RATE
40-3.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for false ceiling shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out false ceiling according to the specifications, fixed in
position, at specified height in true lines and level. The rate shall
further include the cost of labour employed for following operations.
(a) Drilling of holes in walls & ceiling.
(b) Fixing of plastic plug and screws.
(c) Fastening of tee runners with G.I wire 14 SWG gauge.
(d) Fastening of angle runners with walls.
(e) Cutting of ceiling boards in specified size where required.
(f) Fixing of ceiling boards

40-3.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials required in addition
to the labour rate detail in para 40-3.5.1 above.

663
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-4 FALSE CEILING WITH PLASTER OF PARIS

40-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and fixing false ceiling with Plaster
of Paris under the roof. Unless otherwise specified false ceiling shall
be carried out in accordance with the specifications true to dimension
and as shown on the drawing.

40-4.2 MATERIALS
40-4.2.1 PLASTER OF PARIS BOARD/SHEETS
(a) Plaster of Paris shall conform to Section 5 of these
specifications.
(b) Plaster of Paris sheet size 2'x2'x½" of approved design shall be
used manufactured at site of work.
40-4.2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
As mentioned in Section 40-1.2 of these specifications.

40-4.3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall conform to the Section 40-1 of
these specifications.

40-4.4 MEASUREMENT
The false ceiling shall be measured by area. The unit for measurement
shall be sq.ft/ sq. meter.

40-4.5 RATE
40-4.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for false ceiling shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out false ceiling according to the specifications, fixed in
position, at specified height in true lines and level. The rate shall
further include the cost of labour employed for following operations.
(a) Drilling of holes in walls & ceiling.
(b) Fixing of plastic plug and screws.
(c) Fastening of tee runners with G.I wire 14 SWG gauge.
(d) Fastening of angle runners with walls.
(e) Cutting of ceiling boards in specified size where required.
(f) Fixing of ceiling boards
40-4.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials required in addition
to the labour rate detail in para 40-4.5.1 above.

664
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

40-5 FALSE CEILING WITH MDF BOARD

40-5.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and fixing false ceiling with MDF
Board under the roof. Unless otherwise specified false ceiling shall be
carried out in accordance with the specifications true to dimension and
as shown on the drawing.

40-5.2 MATERIAL
40-5.2.1 MDF BOARD
(a) MDF board shall be of approved design, density, and of
specified manufacturer.
(b) Size 2"x2"x3/8" or as specified.

40-5.2.2 OTHER MATERIALS

As mentioned in Section 40-1.2 of these specifications.

40-5.3 ALL OTHER RESPECTS

In all other respects the work shall conform to Section 40-1 of these
specifications.

40-5.4 MEASUREMENT
The false ceiling shall be measured by area. The unit for measurement
shall be sq.ft/ sq. meter.

40-5.5 RATE
40-5.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate for false ceiling shall include the cost of labour involved
to carry out false ceiling according to the specifications, fixed in
position, at specified height in true lines and level. The rate shall
further include the cost of labour employed for following operations.
(a) Drilling of holes in walls & ceiling.
(b) Fixing of plastic plug and screws.
(c) Fastening of tee runners with G.I wire 14 SWG gauge.
(d) Fastening of angle runners with walls.
(e) Cutting of ceiling boards in specified size where required.
(f) Fixing of ceiling boards
40-5.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of all materials required in addition
to the labour rate detail in para 40-5.5.1 above.

665
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–41

DAMP PROOF COURSE

41-1 CEMENT CONCRETE D.P.C.

41-1.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and laying Damp Proof Course
horizontally or vertically of specified material in specified ratio. Unless
otherwise specified Damp Proof Course shall be laid in accordance
with the specifications.

41-1.2 MATERIALS
a) Cement shall confirm to the Section 4 of these specifications.
b) Fine aggregate shall confirm to the Section 10-3 of these
specifications.
c) Coarse aggregate shall confirm to the Section 10-4 of these
specifications.
d) Water shall confirm to the Section 1 of these specifications.
e) Bitumen shall confirm to the Section 23 of these specifications.

41-1.3 OPERATION
Unless otherwise specified, concrete DPC shall consist of laying of
cement concrete of specified thickness over the masonry wall covering
entire width of the wall.

41-1.4 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise specified , cement concrete in DPC shall be of ratio
1:2:4 by volume and shall conform to Section 30 of these specification
for cement concrete.

41-1.5 PREPARATION OF BASE

Before laying Damp Proof Coarse bottom surface of masonry shall be
cleaned, it shall be clear from plaster, dust and other foreign matters.

41-1.6 MIXING & PLACING

Mixing and placing of concrete shall be in accordance with the Section
30-5.4 of these specifications for cement concrete.

666
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-1.7 FINISHING
The surface shall be leveled with a wooden trowel. The fines in the
concrete which have come to the surface with the stroking quickly but
carefully smoothened with the steel trowel.

41-1.8 CURING
Unless otherwise specified, the DPC shall be cured by water curing for
a period of seven days and then surface shall be allowed to dry.

41-1.9 BITUMEN COATING

Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature specified by the manufacture
and specified number of coats shall be applied on the surface to be
treated. Minimum thickness of a coat shall be 1/16th of an inch.

41-1.10 POLYTHENE SHEET

Polythene sheet of specified gauge shall be laid over the bitumen to the
entire width of DPC.

41-1.11 MEASUREMENT
The cement concrete DPC shall be measured by superficial area. The
unit of measurement shall be 100-Sq ft/ Sq. Mtr.

41-1.12 RATE
41-1.12.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall included
a) Washing and cleaning of masonry base.
b) Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of toping concrete.
c) Laying coat of bitumen.
d) Laying a layer of ploythene sheet.

41-1.12.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall included the cost of material specified for carrying
out work in addition to the labour rate as detail in Section 41-1.12.1
above.

667
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-2 DPC OF CEMENT SAND PLASTER

41-2.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and laying Damp Proof Course of
cement sand plaster of specified ratio and thickness. Unless otherwise
specified cement sand plaster damp proof course shall be laid in
accordance with the specifications.

41-2.2 MATERIALS
41-2.2.1 Cement shall confirm to the Section 4 of these specifications.
41-2.2.2 Fine aggregate shall confirm to the Section 10-3 of these
specifications.
41-2.2.3 Water shall confirm to the Section 1 of these specifications.
41-2.2.4 Bitumen shall confirm to the Section 23 of these specifications.
41-2.2.5 Unless otherwise specified, cement sand mortar shall confirm to
Section 16-2 of these specifications for preparation of mortar.

41-2.3 OPERATION
Unless otherwise specified, DPC shall consist of applying cement sand
plaster of specified thickness and ratio over the masonry work
horizontally/vertically.

41-2.4 PREPARATION OF MORTARS

The following preparation (by volume) of dry material shall be used as
specified.
Cement : Sand:
1 2
1 3

41-2.5 PREPARATION OF BASE

Before laying Damp Proof Course bottom surface of masonry shall be
cleaned to remove all loose dust and other foreign matters and surface
then thoroughly washed with water.

41-2.6 PLASTERING
Plastering shall be done in accordance with Section 36-2 of these
specifications for cement plaster.

668
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-2.7 BITUMEN COATING

Bitumen shall be heated to a temperature specified by the manufacturer
and specified number of coats shall be applied on the surface to be
treated. Minimum thickness of a coat shall be 1/16th of an inch.

41-2.8 POLYTHENE SHEET

Polythene sheet, where required shall of specified gauge and shall be
laid on the entire surface of DPC.

41-2.9 MEASUREMENT
The cement sand plaster DPC shall be measured by superficial area.
The unit of measurement shall be 100-sq ft/ sq.m.

41-2.10 RATE
41-2.10.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall included:
a) Washing and cleaning of masonry base.
b) Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of cement sand plaster.
c) Laying coat of bitumen.
d) Laying a layer of ploythene sheet.

41-2.10.2 COMPOSITE RATE

The unit rate shall included the cost of material specified for carrying
out work in addition to the labour rate as detail in Section 41-2.10.1
above.

669
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-3 MARBLE DPC

41-3.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and laying Marble Damp Proof
Course of specified thickness. Unless otherwise specified marble damp
proof course shall be laid in accordance with the specifications.

41-3.2 MATERIAL
41-3.2.1 MARBLE SLAB
a) Marble Slab shall be conforming to the specifications contained
in Section 11-1 of these specifications.
b) Marble stone slab shall be of specified thickness, width in
accordinace to the wall to be covered and appropriate length.
c) All slabs shall have a true plain surface and shall be accurately
sawn, truly square at edges to full thickness. The slabs at
corners shall be cut at 450 angle.

41-3.2.2 MORTAR
Cement sand Mortar 1:2 conforming to the specification as contained
in Section 16-2.

41-3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

41-3.3.1 PREPARATION OF BASE
Before laying Marble Slabs, the surface of the base shall be washed &
Scrubbed with wire brush.

41-3.3.2 BEDDING MORTAR

Marble Slabs shall be laid over bedding Mortar not more than ¾”.

41-3.3.3 JOINTS
No joints shall be more then 1/16 of an inch in thickness.

41-3.3.4 LAYING
Slabs shall be laid in position on bedding mortar and shall cover full
width of masonry wall, the joints shall be filled with specified mortar.

41-3.3.5 LEVELS
The surface of the Marble DPC Slabs when laid shall be perfect and
true in levels.

670
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-3.3.6 CURING & PROTECTION

The Marble DPC shall be kept watered for seven day. Three clear days
shall be given for setting before any one is allowed to walk over.
Further work shall not be executed before seven days after laying of
DPC.

41-3.4 MEASUREMENT
The measurements of Marble DPC shall be done by the superficial
area. The unit of measurement shall be 100-Sq feet / Sq. meter.

41-3.5 RATE
41-3.5.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include.
i) Washing scrubbing & cleaning of masonry base.
ii) Laying of bedding Mortar.
iii) Laying of marble DPC slabs over bedding Mortar.
iv) Filling of joints with specified mortar.

41-3.5.2 COMPOSITE RATE

It includes the cost o all the material supplied at site of work as per
these specifications, in addition to the labour rate detailed in Section
41-3.5.1 above.

671
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

41-4 JUTOID (JUTE BASED) DPC

41-4.1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers providing and laying Damp Proof Course of
Jutoid of specified thickness. Unless otherwise specified cement sand
plaster damp proof course shall be laid in accordance with the
specifications.

41-4.2 MATERIALS
41-4.2.1 JUTOID
a) Normal weight of jutoid shall be 3.5-kg/sq.m.
b) Manufactured by an approved manufacturer through Punjab
Buildings Department.
41-4.2.2 MORTAR
Cement:Sand mortar of 1:2 ratio shall conform to Section 16-2 of these
specifications.

41-4.3 PREPARATION OF BASE

Jutoid DPC shall be laid on smooth surface free from sharp
protrusions. In case of rough surface a layer of 1:4 cement sand plaster
½” thick is done in accordance to the Section 36-2 of these
specifications for cement sand plaster.

41-4.4 LAYING
Jutoid D.P.C is laid over the walls & it shall cover full width of the
wall.

41-4.5 LAP
A minimum of 3” lap shall be provided.

41-4.6 RATE
41-4.6.1 LABOUR RATE
The unit rate shall include, cleaning surface & laying of Jutoid D.P.C.
41-4.6.2 COMPOSITE RATE
The unit rate shall include the cost of materials specified for carrying
out work in addition to the labour rate as detail in Section 41-4.6.1
above except the cost of cement sand plaster which will be paid
separately if required & executed.

672
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–42

ALLUMINIUM ALLOY WINDOWS

42-1 DESCRIPTION
The work covered under this section comprises of the following:
(a) Providing & fixing in position aluminium doors and windows
complete with handles, locks, nylon wheels, vinyl weather
strips etc. as shown on the drawings and specified hereunder.
(b) Providing & fixing glass of specified quality and thickness to
windows and door.

42-2 GENERAL COMPLIANCE

42-2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
All doors, windows, railings, Handrails, etc. to comply with B.S. 4873
or equivalent in respect of materials, work sizes and manufacture. All
sectional dimensions shown on drawings are only indicative. The
contractor shall be responsible to determine the adequacy of these with
repect to actual structural and performance requirements. All
extrusions shall be of adequate stregth, not only to meet the structural
performance, but also to minimize the risk of distortion in the finished
surfaces.

42-2.2 WORK SIZES

All dimensions given on drawing are between structural opening
and/or between finished surface and allowances shall be made ofr
variation due to constructional tolerances. The contractor shall be
responsible to measure actual final dimensions from the Site before
fabrication of doors, windows and other assemblies/units.

42-2.3 WEATHER TIGHTNESS

Weather tightness and operations shall suit the weather conditions
prevailing in the area of installation. All doors and windows will be
fabricated as completely air and water tight units including gaskets for
glazing, weather stripping, latches, locks, bolts for fixing etc.

42-2.4 AIR TIGHTNESS

The fixed glazed windows shall be as far as possible 100% air tight
under all weather conditions.
Air infiltration for opening windows and doors when fully closed shall
not exceed 3m/hr/meter length of opening joint at a test pressure of 498
N/M as tested in accordance with BS 4315 Part 1.

673
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

42-2.5 ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

Windows when installed shall provide an average sound reduction of
28 dB over a frequency range of 100-3150Hz.

42-3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

42-3.1 ALUMINIUM SECTIONS
All aluminium doors and windows as shown on the drawings shall be
fabricated with heavy duty high strength aluminium extruded sections
of aluminium alloy 6063-TS. Conforming to BS 1474-1972 and BS
1470-1972 aluminium extrucsions to be hard colour anodized in dark
bronze with an average anodic film thickness of 25 microns. The
anodic treatment should conform to BS 3987:1974. aluminium sections
of Alcop Thermec or approved equivalent shall be used.

42-3.2 HARDWARE
Iron mongery, fitting, handles and locks shall be of bronze, stainless
steel and aluminium as shown on the drawings or as stated in the Bill
of Quantities.

42-3.3 GLASS
The solar control float glass if specified shall conform to the latest
revised BS 952. “First grade imported tinted bronze float glass shall be
sued subject to approval. The quality, kind, thickness and size of the
glass shall be as shown on the drawings or called for in the Bill of
Quantities.

42-3.4 SEALANTS
The external joints between the building openings, window frames etc.
shall be formed to details shown on drawing and grooves shall be
caulked with mastic sealants. External jointing sealants are to be
suitable for the type and exposure of building. Material shall not be of
a standard lower than one part polysulphade rubber sealant conforming
to BS 5215 and shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacture’s instructions. The colour and quality of sealant shall be
subject to approval. Where joints to be sealed are deep the sealant must
be supported by suitable polythene backing.

42-3.5 WEATHER STRIPPING

All opening section must be weather stripped with Neoprene glazing
gaskets or similar approved and polypropylene pile weather stripping
around doors to ensure adequate weather proofing. Aluminium glazing
beads are to snap on type without visible fixing and must be adjustable
to allow for varying thickness of glass. No PVC weather stripping is
acceptable.

674
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

42-4 SAMPLES
42-4.1 The contractor shall submit, for approval, samples of each type of door
and window showing the quality of materials, workmanship and finish.
The samples of iron mongery, fittings and fixtures shall also be got
approved before purchases are made by the contractor.
42-4.2 The samples of glass for each type of glazing alongwith specifications
of the manufacturer of special quality shall be submitted for approval
before firm orders are placed for suppliers.

42-5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The aluminium doors and windows shall be manufactured by an
approved manufacturer in this trade. If required, the contractor shall
provide shop drawings based on Architectural drawings for the
approval before orders are placed with the manufacturers. The
manufacturer shall use the latest and approved method of jointing
employed in the manufacture of high class work viz. mechanical
jointing, reinforced with concealed welding shall be sued in the
manufacture of doors and windows. The workmanship of metal doors
and windows shall conform to applicable provision of BS 990:1970.

42-5.1 WIND PRESSURE

The Design wind speed to which the various elements of glazing and
framing will be subjected to shall be calculated in accordance with BS
CP-3 and the following wind loads/speeds are to be taken into account.
Wind Velocity at 85 MPH.
Height Less than 30'-16 lbs/sq.ft.
Height 30' to 50' 18.5 lbs/sq.ft.
Height 50' to 90' – 21 .18 lbs/sq.ft.
Height 90' to 120' – 25.00 lbs/sq.ft.
All assemblies must be of appropriate shape, thickness and sections, to
enable them to resist the loads produced by repeated imposed wind
pressures. The maximum deflection over clear span of any member
shall be such that it does not induce cracking in glass panels and render
the assembly unsafe. No member shall suffer any permanent
deformation. No part of the work shall rattle during use.

42-5.2 FIXING
The fixing of doors and windows to concrete openings shall be carried
out in an approved method as indicated in the drawings or as directed.
Provision of necessary groove or rebate and hold-fasts in the concrete
shall be made in the form work and no holing or drilling shall be
allowed in the exposed concrete finishes. These shall be erected in
position after the building structure is completed and by using proper
hold-fasts as shown on drawings or counter sunk bolts and screws as
directed in accordance with site requirements.

675
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

42-5.3 HANDLING
Care shall be taken in handling metal doors, windows, etc., during
transportation and at site. These shall be stored under cover and shall
be installed only by skilled mechanics, set plumb, level, in alignment
and properly braced to prevent distortion.

42-5.4 PROTECTION
42-5.4.1 The joint between window and doorframes and the building should be
caulked with approved building mastic for total weatherproofing.
42-5.4.2 After installation, doors, and windows shall be protected form
construction hazards that will interfere with their operation or damage
their appearance or finish. They shall be cleaned on inside and outside
of all mortar, plaster, paint of other foreign matter to present a neat
appearance. Hardware and moving parts shall be lubricated.

42-6 GLAZING
42-6.1 The work of fixing glazing to doors, windows shall be carried out with
the type and quality of glass specified for each door and window and
as indicated in the drawings or as directed.
42-6.2 The glazing of “Antisun” float glass should be in accordance with the
recommendations of BS C.P. 152: 1972 and subsequent amendment.
42-6.3 The sizes of glass indicated on the drawings are approximate only, and
the actual sizes required shall be determined by measuring the frames
to receive the glass. All glass shall be factory labelled on each pane
and the label shall not be removed until finally approved. Glass will be
fixed with best quality mastic compound of approved make suitable for
the type of glass or with special bead or moulding as shown on the
drawing or as directed. Special rubber lining and weather proof brush
joints for sliding surfaces shall be provided where indicated.
42-6.4 Antisun float glass shall be fixed using flexible compounds, sealants,
performed strips or gaskets as per recommendation of the door/window
manufacturer. The design shall allow for an edge clearance of at least
3mm (1/8") all around unless any dimension exceeds 1500mm (60")
when the clearance shall be at least 5mm (3/16") edge cover shall be
adequate to retain the glass in position under the design wind loading.
The rebate detph edge clearance plus edge cover shall not be less than
11mm (7/16") for 6mm glass. The width of the rebate platform must
accommodate the glass, the front and back compound, and glazing
bead. The bead depth should not be less than the rebate depth. Setting
block, distance pieces, and location blocks shall be used as appropriate.
Glass shall be protected against damage. After inspection, any labels,
and paint spots shall be removed and glass shall be washed clean.
Damages or broken glass shall be removed and glass shall be washed
clean. Damages or broken glass shall be removed and replaced before
acceptance at not extra expense. After the installation of ‘Anitsun’
float glass it shall be cleaned using a soft cloth with water and mild
soap or liquid detergent, followed by rinsing with clean water and
drying.

676
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

42-7 MEASUREMENT
Payment for doors and windows will be made by measuring clean
opening area in brickwork or concrete in square feet/meters.

42-8 RATE
Rates for all the items under this Section shall cover the cost of
furnishing all the materials labour, scaffoldings and appliances at site
and performing all operations in connection with their installation in
accordance with instructions. It is particularly mentioned that the rates
for fixing doors and windows etc. shall include fixing of all finished
hardware iron mongery fittings such as locks, peg stays, handles, push
plates, kicking plates, door-closers, glazing, flexible compounds,
rubber lining and appliances at site and performing all operations in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.

677
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

SECTION–43

WALLCOVERING/ARCHITECTURE COATING

43-1 DESCRIPTION
This specification covers the performance, quality, packaging, and
marking characteristics of flexible wall covering as a finished product.

43-2 TERMINOLOGY
43-1.1 DEFINITION
43-1.1.1 Wallcovering
A flexible product designed to cover walls and ceilings for decorative
or functional purpose, or both.

43-1.2 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS SPECIFIC TO THIS STANDARD

43-1.2.1 Backing (Substrate)
Material upon which facing (or an intermediate layer) is applied.
Backing is that material which is adhered to the wall.
43-1.2.2 Bias
Pattern running off true horizontal or vertical plane.
43-1.2.3 Bolt
A continuous amount of packaged material containing the amount
specified on the label
43-1.2.4 Facing
Decorative material which is applied to an intermediate layer or
backing.
43-1.2.5 Finished product
Wallcovering offered to a consumer for installation.
43-1.2.6 Intermediate layer
Material, if any, between the facing and the backing.
43-1.2.7 Lob (batch)
The product from a continuous manufacturing run having the same
appearance and characteristic from beginning to end.
43-1.2.8 Pattern match
The meeting of all parts and colours of a pattern at the seams of
adjacent strips.
43-1.2.9 Pattern Repeat
The vertical distance between adjacent match points of a pattern.
43-1.2.10 Protective layer
Any material applied to the facing to enhance performance.

678
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

43-1.2.11 Register
The designed meeting of all parts and colors of a pattern.
43-1.2.12 Run
A unit of production which may include more than one lot.
43-1.2.13 Seconds
Finished material not meeting the quality criteria in accordance with
Classification F 793 and this specification.
43-1.2.14 Selvage
An undecorated edge which must be trimmed away to allow for correct
pattern match or uniform continuity of color.
43-1.2.15 Waste edge
A decorated edge that must be trimmed away to allow for correct
pattern match or uniformity of color.
43-1.2.16 Shading
43-1.2.16.1 Color wariation – difference within the same lot of wallcovering.
43-1.2.16.2 Luster variation – difference in gloss level within the same lot of
wallcovering.
43-1.2.16.3 Texture variation – difference in embossing within the same lot of
wallcovering.
43-1.2.17 Split bolt
A bolt consisting of two or three separate lengths of material.

43-3 APPEARANCE
There shall be no appreciable difference in shading except on those
finished products in which natural decorative characteristics are being
simulated. These variances must be clearly stated in writing at the
point of purchase. To determine whether there is an appreciable
difference, suspend three sequential 8-ft (2.4-m) strips at eye level in a
vertical position, as on the wall, under illumination be between 100 to
150 fc (1000 to 1500 lx), and view the strips from a distance between 4
and 8 ft (1.2 and 2.4m). An appreciable difference is one which is
noticeable when one strip is compared with the others.

43-4 WALL PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION

43-4.1 Basic and correct wall preparation instructions, with particular
attention to wall covering which requires special wall preparation for
its proper installation, shall be included in sample books and
installation instructions.
43-4.2 Installation instructions shall be in or with each bolt and be readily
accessible to the installer. It shall be the manufacturer’s responsibility
to notify consumers of proper installation techniques when new
products are introduced.
43-4.3 The manufacturer shall recommend an adhesive, when necessary, and
the products to be used for wall preparation. Recommendation for

679
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

alternative adhesives and wall preparation products shall be included in

the installation instructions.

43-5 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS

43-5.1 Each finished product shall be uniform in physical properties, in
accordance with Classification ASTM F 793 and this specification.
43-5.2 All facing and protective layers shall be adhered properly to backings
and intermediate layers and the finished product shall be of such
quality that delamination does not occur during normal installation and
use.
43-5.3 Finished products shall not chip, peel, or flake during normal
installation and use. (For test methods to determine conformity with
this requirement refer to Classification ASTM F 793).
43-5.4 There shall be not more than a 1/8-in. (3.5-mm) variance in pattern
match between two 8-ft (2.4-m) strips at midpoint.
43-5.5 Wallcovering shall be free from all surface flaws, creases, splices,
scratches, tears and dirt throughout its entire length.
43-5.6 Wallcovering shall be free of wrinkles which cannot be removed in the
course of normal installation.
43-5.7 Finished product shall not shrink or expand after installation when
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
43-5.8 Pretrimmed material shall be trimmed so that no contracting backing
color will show at the seam when two sheets are properly installed.
43-5.9 Pretrimmed material shall show no frayed or wavy edges.
43-5.10 All elements of the pattern shall be in register.
43-5.11 The design shall be set at an angle of 90o to the trimmed edge.
43-5.12 Split bolts narrow goods shall have no piece shorter than 9 ft (2.7m)
and shall have an area at least 10% larger than specified on the label.
Three lengths are permitted in split bolts having an area exceeding 100
ft2 (9.3m2). wide commercial goods shall have no piece shorter than 3
yd (2.7m) and one-half linear yard larger than specified on the label.
43-5.13 The finished product shall have the necessary characteristics to adhere
the product to the wall when it is installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. (For test methods to determine conformity
with this requirement refer to Classification ASTM F 793).

680
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

Table 1
Property Section Category I Category II Category III Category IV Category V Category VI
Reference Decorative Decorative Decorative Type I Type II Type III
only with medium with high Commercial Commercial Commercial
Serviceability Serviceability Serviceability Serviceability Serviceability
Minimum 7.3 23 h 46 h 200 h 200 h 200 h
colorfastness
Minimum 7.4 100 cycles 100 cycles 100 cycles 100 cycles 100 cycles
washability
Minimum 7.7 50 cycles 200 cycles 300 cycles 500 cycles
scrubbability
Minimum 7.8 200 cycles 300 cycles 1000 cycles
abrasion (220 girt) (220 girt) (220 girt)
resistance
Minimum 7.9 40 lb 50 lb 100 lb
breaking
strength
MD 30 lb 55 lb 95 lb
(machine
direction)
CMD
(cross
machine
direction)
Minimum 7.6 Good Good Good Good
crocking
resistance
Minimum 7.5 Reagents Reagents Reagents Reagents
stain 1 to 9 1 to 9 1 to 12 1 to 12
resistance
Minimum 7.10 12 25 50
tear
resistance
Minimum 7.11 2 2 2
block
resistance
Minimum 7.12 2 lb/in 3 lb/in 3 lb/in
coating
adhesion
Minimum 7.13 No change No change No change
cold
cracking
resistance
Minimum 7.14 Pass Pass Pass
heat aging
resistance
Maximum 7.15 25 25 25
flame spread
Maximum 7.15 50 50 50
smoke
development
Maximum 7.19
shrinkage
MD 2 2 2
(machine
direction)
CMD 1 1 1.5
(cross
machine
direction)

681
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

43-6 INSPECTION AND TESTING

43-6.1 Manufacturers shall be responsible for testing and inspection in
accordance with this specification and Classification F 793.
43-6.2 The introduction of new products on the market shall be preceding by
thorough testing by the manufacturer under representative field
conditions. Manufacturers shall validate laboratory quality control tests
against actual field conditions.

43-7 REJECTION AND REVIEW

43-7.1 Wallcovering that fails to conform to the requirements of this
specification may be rejected by the installer or purchaser. Rejections
shall be reported to the supplier promptly in person, by phone, or in
writing, or any combination thereof. In the event the supplier is
unwilling or unable to satisfy the complainant, the matter should be
referred to the manufacturer. The inspection and test procedures
contained in this specification shall be used to determine the
conformance of the product to the requirements of this specification.
Each manufacturer who represents a product as conforming to this
specification may use statistically based sampling plans that are
appropriate for each particular manufacturing process, but shall keep
such essential records as are necessary to documents the claim that the
requirements of this specification have been met.
43-7.2 Any portion of the item not conforming to this specification shall be
clearly marked as seconds if packaged for resale at retail.

43-8 CERTIFICATION
When specified in the purchase order or contract, a manufacturer’s or
supplier’s certification shall be furnished to the purchaser stating that
sample representing each lot of the material have been manufactured,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and the
requirements have been met.

43-9 PRODUCT MARKING

43-9.1 Finished products up to 42" (107cm) in width shall be labelled with the
following information: pattern number, lot (batch) urn number, length,
width, total area of material (excluding border), supplier name and
address and type of material when appropriate.
43-9.2 Finished products exceeding 42" (107cm) in width shall be labelled
with the following information: lot (batch), run, length, width,
suppliers name and address and type of material when appropriate.
43-9.3 On a wallcovering where direction of hanging is ambiguous, the
manufacturer shall indicate the proper direction on each separate
length.
43-9.4 Bolts classified as seconds shall be prominently labelled as such.

682
Punjab Buildings Department Standard Specifications for Execution of
Building Works Draft 2006

43-9.5 Murals shall be properly numbered for sequence of sheets. If a

numbering sequence is not used, a precise layout diagram shall be
provided.
43-9.6 A split bolt shall be identified as such.

43-10 PRODUCT PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT

43-10.1 The finished products shall be packaged to prevent damage in
shipment.
43-10.2 Shrink wrapping shall not be so tight that it creates product damage.
43-10.3 Each case shall not contain more than one split bolt.

43-11 CATALOG INFORMATION

43-11.1 Sample books shall include length, width and square footage of each
packaged bolt.
43-11.2 Each pattern shall be identified as to proper match and repeat if any.
43-11.3 Sample book shall state that the product conforms to this specification.

43-12 MEASUREMENT
Wallcovering/Architecture Coating shall be measured by superficial
area. The unit of measurement shall be 100 square feet.

43-13 RATE
The unit rate shall be full compensation for all costs or complying with
the provision of this section and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

683
 REFERENCES

Sr.
Title of Books
No.
1 P.W.D. Buildings and Roads specifications Volume I 1936
2 Standard specification for Road and Bridge construction 1971, Punjab Highway Department.
3 M.E.S. specifications.
4 BRE Digests.
5 Time Saver Standards for Architecture Design Data.
6 General specifications, National Highway Authority December 1998.
7 Building Code of Pakistan, Ministry of Housing and Works Environment & Urban Affairs Division.
8 Schedule of Rates Volume I, Part I specifications for Materials of construction 1964.
9 Schedule of Rates Volume I, Part II, specification for Execution of Works 1967.
10 AASHTO (Part 1-A) specifications 2002.
11 AASHTO (Part 1-B) specifications 2002.
12 AASHTO (Part 2-A) Tests 2002.
13 AASHTO (Part 2-B) Tests 2002.
14 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 2000 Part-1.
15 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 2000 Part-2.
16 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 2000 Part-3.
17 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 2000 Part-4.
18 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice 2000 Part-5.
19 Pakistan Standard specifications.
20 Architectural Graphic Standards to 10th Edition by Thon Ray Hoke, JR, FAIA.
21 Paint Pigment Varnish Lac Quer Manufacturing by EIRI consultants & Engineers.
22 Papers on Building Construction No. 282.
23 Soil Mechanics by Tshelotarioff.
24 The Indus Civilization by Wheeler.
25 Simple Examples of Concrete Design by Faber
26 Foundations Design simply Explained by Faber
27 The Condensed Chemical Dictionary by Rose.
28 Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures by Lin T.Y.
29 Foundation Engineering (Leonards).
30 Foundation Engineering (Hanson)
31 Principle of Soil Mechanics by Scott.
32 Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics by Taylor.
33 Description Geometry by Steve M.
34 Plane Geometry Problem with Salutions by Marcus.
35 Plane & Spherical Trigonometry by Kaj L.
36 Decay of Timber and Its Prevention by Findlay.
37 Dictionary of Building Materials by Kinniburgh W.
38 ACI Specification for Structural Concrete for Building.
39 Foundation Design and Construction by Tomilson M.J.
40 The Chemistry of Cement and Concrete by Lea F.M.
41 ASTM American Society for Testing Material Part-4 Steel, Concrete.
42 ASTM American Society for Testing Material Part-13 Cement, Lime, Gypsum.
43 ASTM American Society for Testing Material Part-14, Concrete, Mineral, Aggregates.
44 Mc Graw Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms.
45 “The Properties of Ground Water” by Georg Mathess.
46 “Water Quality and its Control” by James C.Lamb.
47 Properties of Concrete by A.M Neville.
48 Civil Engineering Hand Book by Khanna.
49 Pakistan Standard specifications.
50 ASTM Journal of the American Ceramics Society
51 ASTM Journal of the American Ceramics Society
52 ASTM Publication on Lime
53 ASTM Specification for Steel Bars and Concrete Reinforcement
54 ASTM Papers on Building Construction No.282
55 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-1) Ferrous Metals Specifications
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
56 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-2) Non-Ferrous Metals Spcifications
57 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-4) Cement, Lime, Gypsum, Mortar, Concrete, Mineral
Aggregates, Bituminous Materials Soils
58 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-5) Asbestos, Cement Products
59 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-6) Paper, Packaging, Wood, Adhesive, Cellulose, Leather
60 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-7) Petroleum Products and Lubricants
61 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-8) Paint, Coal, Coke, Fuels, Chemical
62 ASTM Standards Including Testing (Part-10) Textiles, Soap, Minrals Materials, Wax Polishes
63 ASTM American Society for Testing Material Part-4 Steel, Concrete
64 ASTM American Society for Testing Material Part-14 Concrete, Mineral, Aggregates
65 ASTM Publication News Material Testing and Design
66 ASTM Annual Book of ASTM Standard Cement, Lime, Gypsum
67 Annual Book of Standard Sec-4 Concrete
68 Annual Book of ASTM Standard Sec:4 Vol-04.08 Soil and Rock
69 Annual Book of ASTM Standard Sec:4 Vol-04.09 Soil and Rock
70 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2003 Vol-04.03 Construction Road & Paving Materials Vehicle-
Pavement System
71 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2003 Vol-04.04 Roofing, Water, Water Proofing and Bituminous
Material
72 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2003 Vol-06.01 Paints Related Coating & Aromatics Test Chemical

73 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2003 Vol-04.07 Thermal Insulations, Environment Acustics
Construction, Fire
74 Masonry Test Methods and Specifications for the Building Industry 4th ed
75 Annual Book of ASTM Standard 2004 Section One Iron and Steel Products Vol- 01.04 Steel, Structural,
Reinforcing, Pressure Vessel, Railway
76 Building Codes (41st ed Vol-1) 2004
77 Building Codes (41st ed Vol-2) 2004
78 Building Codes (41st ed Vol-3) 2004
79 Building Codes (41st ed Vol-4) 2004
80 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2005 (Section Eleven Vol-11.01 Water-l) Water and Environmental
Technology
81 Annual Book of ASTM Standards 2005 (Section Eleven Vol-11.02 Water-ll) Water and Environmental
Technology
82 Chemical Process Industries by Nonis R Share
83 The Science of Daylight by Wash, John W. E
84 Appropriate Building Materials by Roland Stulz.
85 Princples of Structural Stability Theory by Alexander Chajes.
86 Structural Brick Work by Handry Arnold.
87 Concrete Construction Handbook Joseph J.
88 Materials for Civil and Highway Engineers Kenneth N.
89 Design of Concrete Structures (8th Ed.) by Winter Nilson.
90 Rocks and Minerals by Milan S.P.A.
91 The Properties of Ground Water by Mathess
92 The Stability of Slopes by Bramhead E.N.
93 Modern Prestressed Concrete Design by Ramah Swamy
94 Design of Precast Concrete by Robert A. Hartland.
95 Concrete Manual, A Water Resources Technical Publication by Tohn Wiley & sons.
96 Composition & Properties of Concrete by Troxell Davis Kelly.
97 Brick and Tile Making by Willi Bender
98 Composite Schedule of Rates 1979 by Govt. of Punjab.
99 The Art and Science of Brick Making by Ashfaq Hasan.
100 The Art and Science of Brick Making by Ashfaq Hasan.
101 Dictionary of Civil Engineering by Johns Scott.
102 Innovative Application of Shells and Spatial Forms Vol.I by Ramaswamy G. S.
103 Innovative Application of Shells and Spatial Forms Vol.II Ramaswamy G.S.
104 Encyclopaedia of Scientific & Technical Terms (Physics) by Chhatwal G.R.
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
105 Encyclopaedia of Scientific & Technical Terms (Scientific & Technical Terms) Chhatwal G.R.
106 Water Proofing of Masonry Construction/Concrete by Thema.
107 Pile Foundations by Dinesh Mohan.
108 A Text book of Soil Mechanics by Sehgal.
109 Engineering Materials for Highways & Buildings by Khalid Hassan Siddique.
110 Civil Engineering Hand Book Vol.I by Vazirani V.N.
111 Civil Engineering Hand Book Vol.II by Vazirani V.N.
112 Civil Engineering Hand Book Vol.III by Vazirani V.N.
113 Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice (2nd Ed.) by Terzaghi Karl
114 Brick Work Vol.III by Bailey H.
115 Dictionary fo Chemistry by Sherp D.W.A.
116 Dictionary of Science by Uvarove B.
117 Engineering Properties of Soil and Their Measurement by Joseph E.Bowles.
118 Dictionary of Engineering by Sybil Mark.
119 Materials of Construction (4th Ed.) by Smith R.C.
120 Termite Control Measures in Buildings by Singh Y.
121 Brick Making in Developing Countries by John Pezzey.
122 Appropriate Building Materials for Low Cost Housing Vol.II by C.I.B.
123 Fiber Reinforced Cement Composite by Balaqurets P.N.
124 Properties of Concrete (3rd Ed.) by Neville A.M.
125 Earth Manual by Usinterior Power.
126 Indian Architecture by Percy Brown.
127 Dictionary of Geology by Whitten D.G.A.
128 Ground Water Resources Pakistan by Nazir Ahmad.
129 Water Resources of Pakistan by Nazir Ahmad.
130 Concrete Admixtures Hand Book Ramchandra.
131 Concrete Repair Vol.II by Alberdean.
132 Concrete Repair by Alberdean.
133 Concrete Repair Vol.III by Aberdeen.
134 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-1)1997 Materials and General Properties Concrete
135 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-2)1997 Construction Practices and Inspection Pavements
136 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-3)1997 use of Concrete in Buildings, Design, Specification, and
Related Topics
137 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-4)1997 Bridges, Substructures, Sanitary, and Other Special
Structures, Structural Properties
138 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-5)1997 Masonry Precast Concrete, Special Processes
139 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-5) 1998 Masonry Precast Concrete, Special Processes
140 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-4) 1998 Bridges, Substructures, Sanitary, and Other Special
Structures, Structural Properties
141 Geotechnical Engineering Foundation Design by John N. Cernia.
142 Foundation Engineering Hand Book by Hbai Yand.
143 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice ((Part-1) 1998 Materials and General Properties of Concrete
144 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-2) 1998 Construction Practices and Inspection Pavements
145 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-5) 1999 Masonry Precast Concrete, Special Processes
146 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-3) 1999 use of Concrete in Buildings, Design, Specification, and
Related Topics
147 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-1) 1999 Materials and General Properties Concrete
148 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-2) 1999 Construction Practices and Inspection Pavements
149 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-4) 1999 Bridges, Substructures, Sanitary, and Other Special
Structures, Structural Properties
150 Building Materials by Duggal S.K.
151 ACI Manual of Concrete Practice (Part-1) 2000 Materials and General Properties Concrete
152 Condensed Chemical Dictionary (Ed. 13th) by Hawley's Richard.
153 Prestressed Concrete Structures (5th Ed) by Dayaratnam P.
154 Design of Concrete Mixes (Ed. 3rd) by Krishna Raju N.
155 Portland Cement (Ed. 2nd) by Thomas Telfora.
156 Reinforced Concrete Design, Part I,II by Solomon S.K.
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
157 Mathematics for the Fundamentals of Engineering by Max Kurtz.
158 Soil Property (Ed. 4th) Cheng Liu.
159 Statistical Analysis for Engineering by Wesley Barnes J.
160 Analysis of Plate and Shells by Philip L. Gould
161 Shreves Chemical Process Industry by George T. Austin.
162 Concrete Bridges H.B. by Raina V.K.
163 Chemistry and Physics Handbook by David R. Lide.
164 Road Building in the Tropics by Millard R.S.
165 The Shell Bitumen Hand Book by Stephen Brown.
166 Waste Materals used in Concrete Manufacturing by Chandra.
167 Dictionary of Scientific & Technical Terms by McGraw Hill
168 Design of Concrete Structures by Nilson
169 Cobuild Learner's Dictionary by Collins
170 Concise Thesaurus by Collins
171 Dictionary of Mechanical Engineering Terms by Horner's
172 Gem Measurements & Conversions by Collins
173 Expansive Clay Soil and Vegetative Influence on Shallow Foundations by Vipulananda.
174 Slope Stability 2000 by Griffiths
175 Portland Cements Production, Properties and Applications by Abdul Majid.
176 Lightweight Aggregate Concrete (science,technology and applications) by Satish Chandra.
177 Design of Plate and Shell Structures by Maan H. Jawad
178 Handbook of Fillers by Geoge Wypych.
179 Stone Sampler by Marmo
180 Clays by Meunier.
BRITISH STANDARDS
181 Methods for Tensile Testing of Metals BS 18:Part 2. 1971.
182 Specifications for Asbestos-Cement Slates and Sheets BS 690 : Part 2: 1971.
183 Specifications for Wrought Steels BS 970: Part 1&3 : 1971.
184 Wood Windows BS 644: Part 1: 1989.
185 Finishes ofr Wooden Furniture BS 3962: Part 2,3,4,5 & 6 : 1980.
186 Finishes ofr Wooden Furniture BS 3962: Part 2 & 3 : 1983.
187 Clear finishes for wooden furniture BS 3962 : Part 6: 1975.
188 Assessment and labelling of textile floor coverings tested BS 5287: 1988.
189 Assessment and labelling of textile floor coverings tested BS 5287: 1976.
190 Backed flexible PVC flooring BS 5085 : Part 1&2 : 1976.
191 Asbestos-cement slates BS 690: Part 5: 1975.
192 Bonding agents for USE with gypsum plasters and Cement BS 5270: Part 1: 1989.
193 Polyvinyle acetate (PVAC) emulsion bonding agents for internal use with gypsum building plaster BS
5270: 1976.
194 Asbestos-cement slates BS 690: Part 5: 1976.
195 Powder organic coatings for application and stoving to aluminium alloy extrusion, sheet and preformed
sections for external architectural purpose, and for the finish on aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and
preformed sections coating with powder organic coating BS 6496: 1984.
196 Anodic oxide coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural applications BS 3987:1974.
197 Low heat Portland cement BS 1970: Part 2: 1974.
198 Asbestos-cement slates and sheets BS 690: Part 4: 1974.
199 Design and installation of natural stone cladding and lining BS 8298: 1989.
200 Stoving Organic Finishes on Aluminium Extrusions and Preformed Sections for External Architecturla
Application.
201 Plywood BS 6566: Part 1,2,3,4,5,6,7&8: 1985.
202 Unbacked flexible PVC flooring BS 3261: Part 1: 1973.
203 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.19.1: 1985
204 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.22.1: 1985
205 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.26.5: 1985
206 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.28.1: 1985
207 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.33.3: 1985
208 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.26.3: 1985
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
209 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.18.3: 1985
210 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.20.3: 1985
211 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.24.1: 1985
212 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.32.4: 1985
213 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.24.2: 1985
214 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.12.3: 1986
215 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.12.1: 1986
216 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.22.3: 1986
217 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.12.4: 1986
218 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.29.1: 1986
219 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.16.1: 1986
220 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.12.5: 1986
221 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.22.1: 1986
222 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Part 4:1989
223 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.34.2: 1989
224 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.20.1: 1989
225 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.21.1: 1986
226 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.20.4: 1986
227 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.16.2: 1986
228 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.37.1: 1986
229 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.1.5: 1985
230 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.1.4: 1985
231 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.10.1: 1985
232 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.7.1: 1987
233 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.12.5: 1986
234 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.34.1: 1987
235 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.10.2: 1989
236 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.26.4: 1989
237 Testing concrete BS 1881: Part 120: 1983.
238 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.8.1: 1985
239 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.10.4: 1985
240 Sampling and analysis of iron, steel and other ferrous metals BS 6200: Subsection 3.18.2: 1985
241 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products BS 7079: Part
C1,C3&C4: 1989.
242 Methods for Tensile Testing of Metals BS 18:Part 2. 1970.
243 Paint colours for building purposes BS 4800: 1989.
244 Paint colours for building purposes BS 4800: 1981.
245 Paints BS 3900: Part A8,A13&A14: 1986.
246 Flashpoint of Petroleum and related products BS 6664: Part 1,3&4: 1986.
247 Assessment of resistance to fungal growth BS 3900: Part G6: 1989.
248 Examination and preparation of samples for testing BS 3900: Part A2: 1983.
249 Standard panels for paints testing BS 3900: Part A3: 1986.
250 Determination of flow time by use of flow cups BS 3900: Part A6: 1983.
251 Determination of flow time by use of flow cups BS 3900: Part A6: 1986.
252 Determination of volume of dry coating (non-volatile matter) obtained from a given volume of liquid
coating BS 3900: Part A10: 1985.
253 Rapid test for determination of danger classification by flashpoint BS 3900: Part A13&A14: 1978.
254 Determination of natural spreading rate by brush application BS 3900: Part A16: 1986.
255 Coating of test panels at a specified spreading rate BS 3900: Part A17: 1986.
256 Determination of 'soluble' lead in the solid matter in liquid paints: method for use in conjunction with The
257 Determination of total lead in paints and similar materilas BS 3900: Part B4: 1986.
258 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints & related products BS3900:PartB5:1986
259 Determination of 'soluble' lead content BS 3900: Part B6: 1989.
260 Determination of 'soluble' antimony content BS 3900: Part B7: 1986.
261 Determination of 'soluble' barium content BS 3900: Part B8: 1986.
262 Determination of 'soluble' cadmium content BS 3900: Part B9: 1986.
263 Determination of hexavalent chroimium content of solid matter BS 3900: Part B10:1986.
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
264 Determination of 'soluble' mercury content BS 3900: Part B 12: 1986.
265 Rapid method for estimation of lead in liquid paints BS 3900: Part B15: 1987.
266 Determination of colour and colour difference measurement BS 3900: Part D9: 1986.
267 Determination of colour and colour difference principles BS 3900: Part D8: 1986.
268 Measurement of specular gloss of non-metallic paint films at 20 o, 60o and 85o BS: Part D5: 1980
269 Determination of fineness of grind BS 3900: Part C6: 1983.
270 Pressure test for stackability BS 3900: Part C7: 1982.
271 Methods for evaluation of the compatibility of a product with a surface to be painted BS 3900: Part C9:
1982.
272 Determination of contrast ratio (opacity) of light-coloured paints at a fixed spreading rate, using
polyester film BS 3900: Part D6: 1982.
273 Determination of hiding power of white and light-coloured paints by the Kubelka-Munk method BS 3900:
Part D7: 1983.
274 Particleboard BS 5669: Part 2&5: 1989.
275 Steel Windows Generally for Domestic and Similar Buildings BS 990: Part 2: 1972.
276 Plywood BS 1455: August 1972
277 Determining thermal insulating properties BS 874: Part 2 Section 2.2: 1988.
278 Determining thermal insulating properties BS 874: Part 1: 1986.
279 Determining thermal insulating properties BS 874: Part 2 section 2.1: 1986.
280 Determining thermal insulating properites BS 874: Part 3 section 3.1: 1987.
281 Thermal insulation materials BS 3958: Part 5: 1986.
282 Thermal insulation materials BS 3958: Part 2&4: 1982.
283 Thermal insulation materials BS 3958: Part 3: 1985.
284 Inorganic thermal insulating materials BS 2972: 1989.
285 Methods of Test for Paints BS 3900.
286 Pigments for Paints BS 3483: Introduction: march 1974.
287 Particleboard BS 5669: Part 1: 1989.
288 Graduated dial scales for ophthalmic instrucment BS 6903-1987.
289 Clay and calcium silicate pavers for flexible pavements BS 6677: Part 1,2&3: 1986
290 Straightedges BS 5204: Part 2: 1977.
291 Corrosion resisting high silicon iron castings BS 1591: 1975.
292 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion BS 5493: 1977.
293 Slating and tiling BS 5534: Part 1&2: 1990
294 Ready-mixed building mortars BS 4721: 1981.
295 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete BS 4449: 1988.
296 Fibre building boards BS 1142: 1989.
297 Agricultural food products BS 6215: Part 2: 1981.
298 Cast stone BS 1217: 1975.
299 Supersulphated cement BS 4248: 1974.
300 Low heat Portland cement BS 1370: 1979.
301 Mosaic Parquet panels BS 4050: Part 1: 1977.
302 Suspended safety chairs and cradles for use in the construction industry BS 2830:1973.
303 Clay Bricks and Blocks BS 3921: May: 1974.
304 Wall and floor tiling BS 5385: Part 3&4: 1986.
305 Determination of colour and colour difference calculation BS 3900: Part D10: 1986.
306 Bend test (Conical mandrel) BS 3900: Part E11: 1985.
307 Indentation Test (spherical or pyramidal) BS 3900: Part E12: 1986.
308 Notes for guidance on the operation of artificail weathering apparatus to BS 3900: Part F3 1971
309 Determination of resistance to humidity (continuous condensation) BS 3900: Part F9: 1982.
310 Determination of resistance to cathodic disbonding of coatings for use in marine environments BS
3900: Part F10: 1985.
311 Determination of resistance to cathodic disbonding of coatings for use on land-based buried structures
BS 3900: Part F11: 1985.
312 Determination of resistance to neutral salt spray BS 3900: Part F12: 1985.
313 Filiform corrosion test on steel BS 3900: Part F13: 1986.
314 Designation of quantity and size of common types of defect: general principles and pictorial scales for
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
315 Designation of intensity, quantity and size of common types of defect: general principles and rating
schemes BS 3900: Part H1: 1983.
316 Designation of degree of blistering BS 3900: Part H2: 1983.
317 Designation of degree of rusting BS 3900: Part H3: 1983.
318 Designation of degree of cracking BS 3900: Part H4: 1983.
319 Designation of degree of flaking BS 3900: Part H5: 1983.
320 Sampling of coating powders BS 3900: Part J1: 1987.
321 Determinationn of particle size distribution of coating powders by sieving BS 3900: Part J2: 1987.
322 Determination of the gelation time of coating powders BS 3900: Part J3: 1987.
323 Determination of the storage stability of coating powders BS 3900: Part J4: 1987.
324 Preparationn of steel substrates before application of paints and related products BS 7079: Part C2:
1989.
325 Determination of loss of mass on heating coating powders BS 3900: Part J5: 1988.
326 Determination of the preventive action of wood preservatives against Reticulitermes santonensis de
Feytaud (Laboratory method) BS 6240: 1982.
327 Determination of the toxic values of wood preservatives against Reticulitermes santonensis de Feytaud
(Laboratory method) BS 6239: 1982.
328 One-part gun grade polysulphide-based sealants BS 5215: 1986.
329 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes: bars, extruded round tubes
and sections BS 1474:1987.
330 Glass for glazing BS 952: Part 1&2: 1978.
331 Aluminium alloy windows BS 4873: 1986.
332 Serverity levels for discontinuities in steel castings BS 4080: Part 1&2: 1989.
333 Cold-reduced tinplate and cold-reduced blackplate BS 2920:1973.
334 Cold-rolled steel sections BS 2994: 1976.
335 Rigid urethane foam for building applications BS 4841: Part 1: 1975.
336 Expanded polystyrene boards BS 3837: Part 1: 1986.
337 Rigid urethane foam in slab form for transport containers, refrigerator cabinets and cold stores BS
4840:1973.
338 Toughened polystyrene (SB) moulding and extrusion materials BS 3126:1987.
339 Expanded polystyrene boards BS 3837: 1977.
340 Thermal insulation of roofs exxternally by means of sprayed rigid polyurethane (PUR) or
polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam BS 7021:1989.
341 Elastomeric threads BS 5421: Part 1&2: 1978.
342 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for building applications BS 4841: Part
3:1987.
343 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) foam in slab form BS 4840:Part 1:1985.
344 Rigid urethane foam for building applications BS 4841: Part 2: 1975.
345 Rigid urethane foam when dispensed or sprayed on a construciton site BS 5241:1975.
346 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam when dispensed or sprayed on a
construction site BS 5241: Part 1: 1989.
347 Steel wire for hose reinforcement BS 3592: Part 1: 1986.
348 Stainless and heat-resisting steel round wire BS 1554:1981.
349 Structural steel sectionns BS 4:Part 1: 1980
350 Corrosion testing of metallic coatings BS 5466: Part 1&2: 1977.
351 Bending dimensions and scheduling of reinforcement for concrete BS 4466:1981.
352 Steel wire for hose reinforcement BS 3592: Part 1&2: 1986.
353 Corrosion testing of metallic coatings BS 5466: Part 7: 1982.
354 Windows, doors and rooflights BS 8213:Part 4: 1990.
355 Corrosion testing of metallic coatings BS 5466: part 4&5: 1979.
356 Corrosion testing of metallic coatings BS 5466: Part 8&9: 1986.
357 Approval testing of velding procedures BS 4870: Part 4 : 1988.
358 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes BS 1052:1980.
359 Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete BS 4466:1989.
360 Approval testing of welding procedures BS 4870: Part 3: 1985.
361 Clindical maximum thermometers (meercury-in-glass) BS 691:1979.
Sr.
Title of Books
No.
362 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: carbon and carbonn manganese steel with specified
elevated temperature properties BS 3602: Part 1: 1978.
363 Approval testing of welding procedures BS 4870: Part 1: 1974.
364 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes: carbon and carbonn manganese steel with specified
365 Wrought steels for mechanical and allied engineering purposes BS 970: Part 1&2: 1983.
366 Determination and verification of the effective depth of carburized and hardened cases in steels bS
6479: 1984.
367 Wrought steels BS 970: Part 6: 1973.
368 Steel pipes and tubes for pressure purposes carbon and carbon manganese steel with specified
elevated temperature properties BS 3602: Part 2: 1978.
369 Matchboarded wooden door leaves for external use BS 459: 1988.
370 Asbestos-cement slates and sheets BS 690: Part 2: 1981.
371 Asbestos-cement slates and sheets BS 690: Part 3: 1973.
372 Approval testing of welding procedures BS 4870: Part 2: 1982.
373 Approval tseting of welding procedures BS 4870: Part 1: 1981.
374 Fusion welding of steel castings BS 4570:1985.
375 Corrosion testing of metallic coatings BS 5466: Part 6: 1982.
376 Fusion welding of steel castings BS 4570: Part 2: August 1972.
377 Portland Cement BS 12: 1958.
378 Wall tiling BS 5385: Part 1&2: 1978.
379 Expanded polystyrene boards BS 3837: Part 2 : 1990.
380 Adhesives for use with ceramic tiles and mosaics BS 5980: 1980.
381 Slating and tiling BS 5534: Part 1: 1978
382 Glazed ceramic tiles and tile fittings for internal walls BS 1281: July 1974.
383 Glazed ceramic tiles and tile fittings for internal walls BS 1281: 1974.
384 Wall and floor tiling BS 5385: Part 1: 1990
385 Thermal insulating materials BS 3858: Part 6: 1972.
386 Precast concrete paving blocks BS 6717: Part 1: 1986.
387 Solid rubber flooring BS 1711: 1975.
388 Concrete flooring tiles and fittings BS 1197: Part 2: 1973.
389 Precast concrete paving blocks BS 6717: Part 3: 1989
390 Rubber mats for electrical purposes BS 921:1976.
391 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes BS 697: 1986.
392 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes BS 697: 1977.
393 Determining thermal insulating properties with definitions of thermal insulating terms BS 874: 1973.
394 Particleboard BS 5669: Part 4: 1989.
395 Ceramic floor and wall tiles BS 6431: Part 1: 1983
396 Ceramic floor and wall tiles BS 6431: Part 2: 1984
397 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 3,4&5: 1986.
398 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 6: 1984
399 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 7: 1986.
400 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 8: 1986.
401 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 9: 1984.
402 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 9: 1984.
403 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 10: 1984.
404 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 11: 1983.
405 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 12: 1983.
406 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 13: 1986.
407 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 14: 1983.
408 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 15: 1986.
409 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 17: 1986.
410 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 19: 1984.
411 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 20: 1984.
412 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 21: 1984.
413 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 22: 1986.
414 Ceramic floor and wall tiels BS 6431: Part 26: 1986.